School Design Guide March 2012

School Design Guide
Los Angeles Unified School District
March 2012
Los Angeles Unified School District Page | ii Design Standards Department
PREFACE
This School Design Guide has been prepared to establish and sustain consistent representation of requirements and
standards to all members of the Design Team. It presents design guidelines and criteria for the planning, design and
technical development of new schools and modernization, and includes by reference the Facilities Space Program, the
Educational Specifications, the Guide Specifications, and the Standard Technical Drawings of the District.
This new edition of the Guide has been updated and edited with the input from various Departments, to present the
District’s current insights and objectives. Lessons learned from post occupancy reviews of recently built and modernized
schools have also been included in this Guide.
The School Design Guide is a living document which is updated yearly with a new version and periodically by the release
of bulletins. Designers shall visit the Design Standards Department website to assure that the most current guidelines
are followed for the benefit of our students and staff.
Los Angeles Unified School District Page | iii Design Standards Department
Los Angeles Unified School District Page | iv Design Standards Department
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Book One Purpose and General Requirements
1.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 PURPOSE AND PRINCIPLES
1.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
Book Two General Criteria

2.1 SCHOOL BUILDING DESIGN
2.2 SITE DESIGN
2.3 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
2.4 ENVIRONMENT AND SUSTAINABILITY
Book Three Technical Criteria

3.1 ARCHITECTURAL
3.2 CIVIL ENGINEERING
3.3 STRUCTURAL
3.4 PLUMBING
3.5 FIRE PROTECTION
3.6 HVAC SYSTEMS
3.7 ELECTRICAL POWER & LIGHTING
3.8 ELECTRICAL COMMUNICATIONS & AV SYSTEMS
3.9 PLANTING AND IRRIGATION
3.10 BUILDING ACOUSTICAL REQUIREMENTS
Book Four Submittal Checklists

4.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS – SCHEMATIC DESIGN PHASE
4.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS – DESIGN DEVELOPMENT PHASE
4.3 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS – 50% CD CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS.
4.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS – 100% CD CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS.
4.5 CHECKLIST OF OFFSITE WORK, UTILITIES AND EASEMENTS
4.6 CIVIL DESIGN CHECKLIST
4.7 PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL DESIGN CHECKLIST
4.8 ELECTRICAL DESIGN CHECKLIST
Los Angeles Unified School District Page | v Design Standards Department

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | vi Design Standards Department
Book One
Purpose and General Requirements
Book 1: Purpose and General Requirements
Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 2 Design Standards Department

1.0 PURPOSE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS


A. PURPOSE
B. ORGANIZATION OF DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
C. DESIGN PRINCIPLES
Book 1: Purpose and General Requirements 1.1 Purpose and Principles

A. PURPOSE
The Los Angeles Unified School District is committed to creating high-quality educational environments – places that
provide well-planned, high-performing, healthy school environments that foster student achievement and well-being, as
well as being centers of community.
The “School Design Guide” has been prepared to establish and sustain consistent representation of requirements and
quality standards for those environments to all members of the Design Teams for LAUSD school facilities. It is based
on the current curricula, teaching methodologies, student groupings, and site constraints of the District. It reflects the
District’s experience in building and operating schools to balance the needs for instructional functionality with
aesthetics, practical comforts, sustainability, accessibility, ease of maintenance and operation, and assurance of safety so
that all students, staff and community members feel welcome, safe, and proud of their schools – all while reflecting the
wise and efficient use of limited land and public resources.
Architects and engineers shall follow the requirements and standards presented here for the planning and design of new
school construction or reconstruction. These are not intended, to stifle creativity or innovation. If a design professional
feels that varying from specific requirements, while still meeting their intent, is desirable for a specific project, the
variations may be incorporated into the design with written approval of the District’s authorized representative.
The “School Design Guide” incorporates and complements the requirements and standards of other LAUSD
documents that direct the design of school facilities (see below), and which are also part of the District’s requirements
and standards. The requirements and standards are updated on an annual basis. Interim changes will be published
periodically. Visit the Design Standards Department webpage for the most current versions of these standards, as well
as the update bulletins.
http://www.laschools.org/new-site/asset-management/design-standards
B. ORGANIZATION OF DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The content of the “School Design Guide” is divided into four sections: Book One deals with general items, purpose
and principles; Book Two deals with functional and relational planning and design criteria, including general
environmental and sustainability issues; and Book Three presents more detailed information on material choices and
system design criteria and requirements, by chapters on each major technical discipline. Book Four, includes submittal
checklists for the various project phases.
The other requirements and standards that are incorporated by reference as part of the “School Design Guide” are:
1. “Facilities Space Program (Program):” Governs the capacity, size, and number of functional spaces of each
school project.
2. “Estimating Guide:” Quantifies the quality levels of space, materials and systems for each school project:
http://www.laschools.org/employee/design/fs-studies-and-reports/file?file_id=17807262
3. “Educational Specifications” (Ed Specs): Detailed descriptions of the functional and facilities support
requirements for each space defined in the Facilities Space Program, including prototype drawings and
equipment lists. Available for High, Middle, Elementary Schools and Early Education Centers.

http://www.laschools.org/new-site/asset-management/design-standards
4. “Guide Specifications:” These are construction specifications in CSI format that define the materials and
systems acceptable to the District, including considerations of economy, performance, and maintenance and
operations. The Guide Specifications often include alternative choices. These Guide Specifications must be
edited by the Architect to suit the needs of each specific project.
http://www.laschools.org/new-site/asset-management/guide-specifications
5. “Standard Technical Drawings” (Std. Dwgs.): Construction details that provide District-wide consistent
operational and safety standards.
The District also has Procedural Requirements that govern the work of the commissioned architects and
engineers. Information on these is available from the District’s authorized representative.
C. DESIGN PRINCIPLES
1. Learning Environment: Schools should provide instructional spaces that facilitate student-teacher interaction
in the educational process, with collaborative learning and working, flexibility to accommodate different
teaching styles, and a health-enhancing environmental ambience.
2. Architectural Quality: The appearance and overall character of each school should be both pleasing and
stimulating to students, teachers, parents and the surrounding community, providing a welcoming and
attractive place to visit or to spend the day. When working at existing sites it is important that any new
structures are architecturally compatible with the existing buildings and site. Placement of new structures must
take into account potential future development at the site for the Facilities Master Plan. The District has a
number of historically significant sites and buildings; special attention is required when working at these sites.
3. Pride in Ownership: Each school’s design should foster a sense of belonging and pride among the students,
staff and community.
4. Flexibility: School planning should anticipate future growth on the site as well as provisions for equipment
replacement and advances in technology.
5. Small Learning Communities: In planning larger schools, smaller schools must be created within the larger
context, to reduce the perceived scale of the school for students and to provide integrated small learning
communities with common affinities, such as common curricula, themed educational programs, or age and
grade.
6. Accessibility: Schools must accommodate all students, staff and community members including the physically
disabled and wheelchair-bound, deaf, visually or emotionally impaired. Design shall allow for construction and
material tolerances to accommodate dimensional requirements set by ADA and other codes. Do not design to
minimum or maximum requirements, thus risking potential non-compliant designs.
7. Safety and Security: Schools must be safe and secure without appearing prison-like. Structures, fences and site
amenities shall be designed to maintain safety, prevent unauthorized access and deter vandalism. Opportunities
to climb to gain access to other floors, roofs, etc. shall be eliminated.
8. Community Focus: The school, as the center of the neighborhood, must be accessible on evenings and
weekends for joint use of facilities by the community and provision for securing the rest of the site shall be
implemented.

9. Land Use and Site Planning: Scarcity of land demands innovative settings of buildings, playgrounds and
parking to achieve educational goals on crowded urban sites.
10. Sustainability: Schools must assertively address long-term concerns for environmental impacts and water and
energy conservation.
11. Maintainability: Architects and engineers must make a concerted effort to design schools that would minimize
maintenance requirements. These efforts shall involve not only planning considerations, but also design of the
systems, selection of materials and products. Schools with less maintenance requirements are more sustainable.


A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B. SCHEMATIC DESIGN PHASE SUBMITTAL
C. DESIGN DEVELOPMENT SUBMITTAL
D. CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS: 50% SUBMITTAL
E. CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS: 100% SUBMITTAL
F. DISTRICT REVIEW AND PLAN CHECK
G. FINAL BID DOCUMENTS
H. ADDENDA
I. “AS-BUILT” RECORD DRAWINGS
J. GENERAL DRAWING & SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

Book 2: General Criteria

1. Coordination and Review of the Design
Coordination of all architectural, engineering and other associated design disciplines working on the project – including
those provided by District staff or under separate contract to the District – shall take place throughout each design
phase and shall be the responsibility of the commissioned Project Architect. Such coordination shall include processing
and review of all drawings, specifications, cost estimates and other documentation necessary for the integration of all
building trades and systems, equipment and furnishings, and resolution of constructability issues. With each design
submittal, the Architect shall certify in writing that all required coordination has occurred and shall accept
responsibility for all changes in the design and construction work which result from failure to properly
coordinate the efforts of the design entities.
2. Other Contractual Terms
In some cases, the District’s A/E Contract may define different design phases and submittal terms. Adjust the
requirements described below for submittals to the specific contract and as directed by the District’s authorized
representative.
3. Jurisdictional Agency Regulatory Code Compliance
Architect shall be responsible for verifying that all design and construction documents submitted comply with all
applicable jurisdictional agency codes and operating requirements.
4. Energy Review
In order for the District to apply for State Allocation Board’s energy grants, all new facilities projects and identified new
buildings at existing facilities, shall apply for DSA “energy review”. Also see section 2.4 “Environment and
Sustainability”.
B. SCHEMATIC DESIGN PHASE SUBMITTAL
1. Project Start Meeting:
a. The District’s authorized representative will establish a project start meeting date with the Architect. At this
meeting the Architect will receive the Facilities Space Program, Design Guidelines, available site and other
relevant information, and directives to allow the Architect to begin work on the assigned project.
b. Starting Date: The District’s authorized representative will issue a notice-to-proceed letter to the Architect
indicating the start and completion dates of the Schematic Design Phase.

2. Information Gathering:
a. It is important that the public and utility agencies serving the school be involved in the design process from the
beginning. During the Schematic Design Phase the Architect shall initiate contact with representatives of the
following agencies, to inform them of the school’s needs and to establish relationships that will assure
coordination of their requirements with the school’s design.
1) Division of the State Architect: Structural Safety, Fire Marshal, Access Compliance and High
Performance Sections for Title 24 regulations.
2) Local jurisdiction (City of Los Angeles, County, or other city) for off-site street profiles, curbs and walks,
storm drains and utility services.
3) Local jurisdiction Traffic Department for driveway locations and passengers loading area.
4) Local Fire Department (City or County) for site access, dispersal areas, and fire hydrants.
5) Utility agencies or companies for location of existing and proposed domestic water, reclaimed water,
sewer, electric, gas, telephone and television cable services.
6) Utilities companies (Southern California Edison or Southern California Gas Company) for incentive
program applications.
7) County of Los Angeles Department of Health for kitchens and swimming pools only.
8) Other agencies for specific project conditions – for example, the use of reclaimed water, or the California
Department of Social Services for Early Education Centers.
b. A “Checklist of Offsite Work, Utilities & Easements” is available and shall be completed and submitted to the
District’s authorized representative during various phases throughout the project. See Book 4, Submittal
Checklists.
c. A “CHPS Scorecard” is available and shall be completed and submitted to the District’s authorized
representative at various phases throughout the project. See Section 2.4 for additional information.
3. Conceptual / Preliminary Schematic Design
a. The first submittal for the Schematic Design Phase shall present the District with three or more alternative
conceptual design solutions to the District’s program and community requirements. One scheme will then be
further developed and presented for schematic planning approval.
b. Documents submitted by the Architect for each alternative design approval shall include, but not be limited to:
1) Site analysis diagrams showing key influences, such as topographical characteristics, solar orientation,
winds, views, traffic, and neighborhood context;
2) Proposed utilization study of each particular project site;
3) Schematic plans of each floor;
4) Simplified elevations indicating the fundamentals of the architectural concept;
5) Comparative cost estimates for each of the three designs.

6) At existing school sites, include site analysis showing established circulation paths, access compliance,
existing site conditions including plan layouts for existing buildings, demographic information, utility
location and identification of historical buildings.
c. The purpose of the conceptual / preliminary schematic-design review is to evaluate, first, the functional qualities
of the proposed design to successfully fulfill the educational program of the school. Additional qualities to be
considered include community impacts, energy and environmental issues, physical security, and general aesthetic
factors.
d. Include the drawings and information indicated on the form “Submittal Requirements for Preliminary Schematic
Design”. See Book 4, Submittal Checklists.
4. Final Schematic Design Submittal
a. Documents submitted for the final schematic design phase shall include more detailed and refined drawings and
a written report (Basis of Design) that includes such discussion of design factors, if any, as are pertinent in the
opinion of the Architect and outline descriptions of proposed engineered systems, construction types, materials
and work to be included in the construction contracts.
b. A Cost Estimate showing compliance with budget requirements and area calculations indicating compliance with
the Facilities Space Program shall be included. Cost estimate and area calculations (SP-1A Diagrams) shall
comply with the Estimating Guide.
c. Include the drawings and information indicated on the “Submittal Requirements for Schematic Design”, See
Book 4, Submittal Checklists. In addition to the boards, provide one set of printable transparencies (right
reading) and three sets of prints.
C. DESIGN DEVELOPMENT SUBMITTAL
1. Procedure
a. After selection of the preferred design scheme and approval of the final Schematic Design, the Architect shall
prepare and submit Design Development (DD) Documents.
b. Design Development Documents shall include drawings and a written report (Basis of Design) in more detail
than the schematic documents and shall incorporate the Owner’s comments from the previous submittal.
2. Submittal
a. Include all items previously required in the schematic design, as well as dimensioned site development plan,
floor plans, exterior elevations and typical sections indicating proposed construction as may be necessary, as well
as all major finishes. Drawings shall also illustrate fundamentals of major engineering systems including civil,
landscaping, structural, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, electrical systems and kitchen/food service.
b. On existing school sites provide phasing drawings, and illustrate barriers, partitions as needed for the school to
remain in operation during construction. Where needed, provide interim housing, and indicate impacts on
physical education and parking areas.
c. Include the drawings and information indicated on the form, “Submittal Requirements for Design

Development”. See Book 4, Submittal Checklists. (Complete the form’s checklist to indicate completion of
each item and submit with the other documents.)
d. The DD update of the narrative “Basis of Design” is particularly important at this stage, both to be sure that
systems requirements and parameters are consistent with LAUSD goals, and to serve as the statement of design
intent for the end-of-job commissioning and performance testing.
3. Architectural Presentation Drawings and Renderings
a. Drawings shall be in color, mounted on 30” x 40” boards, with Project and Architect's name. (Renderings are
not required on modernization projects unless extensive changes are made to the exterior).
b. Rendering: Perspective view and technique, 20” x 30” minimum size, that adequately and accurately indicates
scope of the project, mounted and matted on board with identification.
c. Site plan, floor plans, building elevations and sections, on boards.
d. Vicinity Plan and Photographs: As described above under "Schematic Design Phase Submittal".
D. CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS -- 50 % SUBMITTAL
1. Procedure and Submittals
a. After written approval of the Design Development Phase, the Architect shall further develop and submit
Construction Documents to a stage of at least 50% completion.
b. Include the drawings and information indicated on the form “Submittal Requirements for Construction
Documents – 50%”. See Book 4, Submittal Checklists. (Complete the form’s checklist to indicate completion
of each item and submit with the other documents.) See Section 1.2.”General Requirements” for deliverables.
E. CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS -- 100 % SUBMITTAL
1. Procedure and Submittals
a. The Architect shall continue development of the Construction Documents, incorporating the comments
received on the 50% C.D. submittal to a stage of 100% completion.
b. Include the drawings and information indicated on the form, “Submittal Requirements for Construction
Documents – 100% -- DSA Submittal”, See Book 4, Submittal Checklists, ready for submittal to the Division of
the State Architect. The following are required:
1) Checklist of Offsite Work, Utilities & Easements (1 copy).
2) Final CHPS Scorecard signed by the design principal.
3) Specifications with General Conditions (6 bound sets or 7 sets if project has a kitchen). District
furnished "boiler plate" material to complete the project manual need not be included.
4) Structural Calculations, signed by the Structural Engineer (2 sets).
5) Energy Calculations (2 sets).

6) Construction Cost Estimate on State forms 506B or 706B (3 sets).
7) Form SP3A, Area Diagrams and Tabulations (3 sets).
2. Coordination Check
a. The Architect shall have completed an "in-house" interdisciplinary coordination check, dimension check,
terminology and spelling check, and detailed technical check of the Construction Documents.
b. Submit the marked up set of prints used in preparing the interdisciplinary coordination* check.
F. DISTRICT REVIEW AND PLAN CHECK
1. DSA Plan Check
a. The District will file Drawings with appropriate State agencies and will inform the Architect when State plan
check comments have been received.
b. The Architect shall pick up Drawings and comments from the District and meet with the District’s authorized
representative to review plan check comments as well as the District review comments, and to establish a written
schedule for correcting the documents and meeting with appropriate governmental agencies to obtain their
approvals.
2. District Review
a. The District review is not a "plan check", but a general review of the 100% Construction Documents. The
Architect is responsible for accuracy and coordination of the work, including work of the Consultants, to avoid
conflicts and change orders.
b. Review of 100% C.D.’s by District staff will include:
1) Architectural.
2) Civil.
3) Structural.
4) Electrical.
5) Mechanical.
6) Landscape.
7) Specifications.
8) Food Services.
9) Other applicable disciplines (Acoustics, Theatre, etc.).

3. Corrections and Back-Check
The Architect shall complete corrections indicated by the District and DSA (SSS, FLS and ACS) as required to receive
clearance and signed approvals from each agency. This includes compliance with Division of Industrial Safety,
(Cal/OSHA) Title 8, and Energy Conservation Standards and Regulations.
G. FINAL BID DOCUMENTS
1. Completion Procedures
a. After completing the revisions required by the review comments, the Architect shall return one copy of the
review materials with the Architect’s acknowledgement on how each District comment was resolved, with a
letter of transmittal to the District’s authorized representative.
b. The Architect shall deliver the approved 100%-complete Construction Documents to the District’s authorized
representative with the completed form “Submittal Requirements for Final Construction Documents.”
c. Submit one set of revised Structural Calculations, if revisions or additions have been made after the 100% DSA
submission, for the District records.
2. Submittal
a. Submit 3 copies of Final Construction Cost Estimate. If this final estimate differs from the agreed (or revised
agreed) preliminary estimate, itemize and explain reasons and amounts. Submit SP 3A diagram ONLY if
changes made after 100% submittal are great enough to require revision. Provide a brief written explanation
describing each change and why it is required.
b. Submit a letter of Acknowledgement of the District Corrections. Return one set each of the District review
marked up drawings and project manuals indicating resolution of comments.
c. Submit completed DSA Structural Tests and Inspection form.
d. Submit the following:
1) Complete and sign S.A.B. Form 390. Copies available from OAR.
2) Draft of deductive or additive alternates.
3. Printing
The District will be responsible for printing Drawings and Specifications for bidding, unless otherwise stated in the
Contract.
H. ADDENDA
When an addendum is required, submit original copies of addendum material. Addenda cannot be issued later than 14
days prior to bid date.

I. “AS-BUILT” RECORD DRAWINGS
1. Drawings:
a. Submit one full set of the DSA approved plans updated to reflect the field marked Contractor’s set of prints
depicting the project as constructed. Unless otherwise indicated in the Architectural and Engineering Services
Agreement, drawings shall be reduced to 50% and printed on vellum.
b. Submit an electronic file copy of the “As-built” Record Drawings in AutoCAD, current version, *.dwg format.
c. Submit updated SP Diagrams in AutoCAD .dwg format, revised to reflect “As-Built” conditions. Perimeter
lines of buildings and rooms shall be edited as P-lines (polygon lines).
J. GENERAL DRAWING AND SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

(FOR DESIGN DEVELOPMENT AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS)
1. Drawings:
a. For all Design Development and Construction Documents include the project name, LAUSD ID number and
logo, and 1/8” minimum lettering height, and meet the following additional requirements.
b. All plan drawings shall include scale, graphic scale, north arrow, and key plan when plans are split.
c. Site and floor plan drawings of the same areas by different disciplines shall be the same scale and have the same
orientation.
d. Orientation shall be the same for all similar plans.
e. All plans shall be done on or be compatible with the most recent AutoCAD version.
f. Drawings shall be formatted to AIA CADD Layer Guidelines.
2. Specifications:
a. The District maintains “Guide Specifications” in order to define the materials and systems acceptable to the
District, and to establish a consistent level of quality for its schools.
b. The commissioned architect is to edit the “Guide Specifications” to reflect specific and appropriate scope and
shall provide additional sections as may be necessary to cover the entire scope of work for the project.
1) Every specification submittal to the District shall be edited in MS Word with the “Track Change” feature
on, so the proposed revisions can be clearly identified.
2) Specify at least three manufacturers. Where the “Guide Specifications” identify less than three
manufacturers, identify additional manufacturers’ products to provide a minimum of three manufacturers
for each item. Inform the District’s authorized representative of any such additions and of any
difficulties in identifying equivalent products.

3) Any deviation from the “Guide Specifications” shall be high-lighted and brought to the attention of the
Design Standards Department via the District Representative responsible for the project. Any proposed
materials not listed in the “Guide Specifications” and substitutions shall be submitted via the Design
Manager for Design Standards review and approval early in the design phase. If approval is granted, list
not less than 3 equal manufacturers in the specifications.
4) Where optional material or equipment choices are presented in the “Guide Specifications,” select the
items to be used in the project and edit the specification sections appropriately. Delete the edit notes.
5) If requirements in this “School Design Guide” do not match those in the “Guide Specifications,” the
most stringent shall apply.
6) If a new section is added for products not included in the “Guide Specifications,” follow the CSI
MasterFormat and the District’s page format; do not include manufacturer’s standard specifications
without a thorough review, editing and formatting, and listing not less than 3 equal manufacturers /
products.
7) Avoid generalities or ambiguous descriptions, directions or dimensions, e.g., “as required”, “install to
meet all codes” and “squish to fit”, are not acceptable.
c. Review Divisions 01 through 33 and download the applicable sections for the project.
1) Add the school and project name to each section footer; but do not change the section footer date; this is
the District’s specification issue date and is used to determine the version of the specification used.
2) Edit the Project Title Page including the school and project names, design phase and submittal date.
3) The OAR or District Representative will provide the Division 00 sections and edit the Division 01 as
needed prior to bidding.
4) Prior to releasing the final specifications set, verify if there are any updates that should be incorporated by
browsing the “Revision Log” and verifying that the sections used are the most current. Track versions of
the revised specification sections are posted on the website so the changes to each section can be clearly
identified.
d. Use of these specifications does not relieve the Architect from responsibility to verify the information contained
is, applicable, accurate, and up to date.
3. Design Deliverables – Submittal Requirements
a. Design Development Submittal.
1) For Existing Facilities Projects:
a) Three sets of prints, and a CD with electronic CAD files (*.dwg, bind all drawings) and PDF files
of all drawings.
2) For New School Construction Projects:

Provide prints of each drawing bundled and labeled in accordance with Table A, and a
CD containing specifications and electronic CAD files.
b. Construction Documents – 50% Submittal

a) Three sets of prints and a CD with electronic CAD files (*.dwg, bind all drawings)
and PDF files of all drawings.

a) Provide prints of each drawing bundled and labeled in accordance with Table A,
and a CD containing specifications and electronic CAD files.
c. Construction Documents – 100% Submittal

a) Three sets of prints and a CD with electronic CAD files (*.dwg, bind all drawings)
and PDF files of all drawings.
b) One CD per Bundle # 11 of Table A (only for projects where rooms are added or
layouts changed or grounds elements modified).
a) Provide prints of each drawing bundled and labeled in accordance with Table A, and a CD
containing specifications and electronic CAD files.
Table A:
Submittal Requirements for New Construction Projects
Each bundle shall be bound separately and clearly labeled on the outside with the project name, bundle number and
discipline. Drawings shall be printed full-size, unless noted otherwise. Submit full specification package according to
submittal requirements.
Bundle #1 – Design Manager (all submittals)

1 Full set of Drawing (½-size)
1 Full set of Specifications
Bundle #2 – OAR Review (all submittals)

1 Full set of Drawing
Bundle #3 – Civil-Landscape Review (all submittals)

Architectural Site Drawings Only
1 set of Civil Drawings
1 set of Landscape Drawings
1 set of Division 31, 32 and 33 Specifications
Bundle #4 – Low Voltage Review (all submittals)

1 set of Division 27 Specifications
Bundle #5 – M & O Review (all submittals)

Cut Sheets
Bundle #6 – Design Standards (all submittals)

1 Full set of Drawing (½-size)


Lighting Calculations
Lighting Cut Sheets
Title 24 Report
CHPS Scorecard
Basis of Design
Bundle #7 – Estimating Review (all submittals)

1 Full set of drawing (½-size)
Bundle #8 – CDE Review (DD and 100% CD only)

1 full-size & 2 ½-size drawing sets including:
General Drawings
Architectural Drawings
Civil Drawings
Landscape Drawings
Bundle #9 – AE Tech Review (all submittals)

Geotechnical Report
Geohazards Report
Post Construction BMP Calculations
Hydrology Report
Hydraulic Calculations
Structural Calculations
Title 24 Report
Bundle #10 – Commissioning Agent (all submittals)

Basis of Design
Commissioning Plan
Title 24 Report
Bundle #11 – Facilities Records Management (100% CD submittals and “As-Built” Record
Drawings)
1 CD containing:
SP-Diagrams in AutoCAD .dwg format, showing all levels, rooms, and, in addition roof levels; fully
dimensioned according to LAUSD standards (exterior facing wall to centerline of interior wall). Indicate
room name and number of each space – room identifiers should match those provided on any schedules
e.g. equipment, finishes. Perimeter lines of building levels, rooms and roofs shall be edited as closed P-
lines (polygon lines). For existing facilities projects with partial floor reconfigurations, drawings should
show new configurations accurately placed within floor and building boundaries
Site plan in AutoCAD .dwg format, showing all utility lines, meters, emergency shut-off valves, property
lines, building perimeters, athletic fields, playgrounds, parking and paving edges. Freeze layers containing
information not applicable to this submittal. Perimeters from which areas can be defined shall be edited
as closed P-lines without overlaps. Utility lines shall be edited as P-lines.

Book Two
General Criteria


2.0 GENERAL CRITERIA
2.2 SITE DESIGN
2.5 LAUSD RECOMMENDED CHPS POINTS


A. INTRODUCTION
B. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
C. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – ADMINISTRATION
D. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – CLASSROOM AREAS
E. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – SCIENCE LABORATORIES
F. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – LIBRARY MEDIA CENTER
G. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – PHYSICAL EDUCATION
H. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – MULTIPURPOSE AND FOOD SERVICE
I. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – RESTROOMS
J. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – LOCKERS
K. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – CORRIDORS AND STAIRWAYS
L. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – SUPPORT
M. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS - BUILDING SECURITY

Book 2: General Criteria 2.1 School Building Design

A. INTRODUCTION
The following standards complement the Facilities Space Program and the Educational Specifications, and deal
with general planning and design issues.
B. GENERAL
1. District Criteria
The guidelines and criteria of this chapter must be closely coordinated with those of the “Educational
Specifications.”
2. Referenced Codes and Standards
a. Legislative and regulatory requirements affecting schools in California include:
1) Title 5 of the California Code of Regulations (especially Sections 14001 and 14030).
2) Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations (State Building Code).
3) Title 22 of the California Code of Regulations for Children’s Centers.
4) American With Disabilities Act (Public Law 101-336, Title II).
5) Education Code Section 39113.5 for “before and after-school Child Care Programs”.
3. General Planning Requirements
a. High Schools and Middle Schools shall be planned and designed in accordance with the “Planning &
Design Guidelines for Small Learning Communities” for Los Angeles Unified School District Secondary
Schools (Available on LAUSD Website:
http://www.laschools.org/employee/design/plan-des-guidelines
b. Pest Management.
1) Review the District’s “Integrated Pest Management Practices” manual and refer to Section 2.2,
“Site Design,” for more specific criteria.
2) Birds (pigeons, gulls, others) are a persistent and provoking maintenance problem for the
District, as well as a health and sanitary hazard. Exercise care in the design of all exterior facades
and structures to eliminate roosting or nesting of birds. Any protrusions architectural, structural

or otherwise that are greater than 1 ½” shall be protected with bird deterrent devices or be
designed to be bird unfriendly.
a) Do not use exposed truss members, flanged beams, cantilevered beams or other elements
that provide such roosting. Important everywhere, it is especially so in Lunch Shelters.
b) Where essential building elements may provide such roosts, such as solar shades or light
shelves, open ladders where necessary, entry covers, security devices, and similar
structures, minimize the risks by sloping the element, providing, open uninviting surfaces,
installing edge barriers, and similar measures.
c) This is an important District concern, and must be addressed at both the Schematic
Design and Design Development stages, together with the elements of concern described
above.
c. Room Access
1) Do not provide entry to any room through another room – for example, a low-voltage electrical
room through a power electrical room.
2) Exceptions are teachers’ workrooms from classrooms, administrators’ private offices from an
open work room, or smaller rooms serving a general kitchen area.
d. Building Access
1) At all building entrances, provide shelter from stormy weather (rain, hail, ice, etc.) by providing
overhead cover with appropriate roof drainage.
2) At all such access, provide non-slip floor (walking) surfaces to improve safety when wet or icy.
CHPS requires a walk-off mat at building entrances.
3) The entrance to the school needs to be expressed architecturally to clearly define a point of entry.
Entrance shall be adjacent to the administrative offices for entry control. Signage and electronic
display marquee may complement entrance design.
4) Visitors shall enter the school site through the administration area, after registering with the
school staff. The Educational Specifications provides layouts to meet this critical security
concern.
e. Energy and Sustainability
1) The principles of sustainable design and energy conservation, as embodied in these requirements
and in the CHPS criteria, represent important District goals, and shall be applied in all aspects of
school planning and design, including building orientation and configuration, envelope and
fenestration selection, and selection of building systems and equipment. (See section 2.4
“Environment and Sustainability”).
f. Educational Specifications
1) Refer to the Educational Specifications for additional criteria and suggested space layouts and to
other sections of this Guide for items such as lighting, acoustics, finishes, air quality,
communications, etc.
C. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – ADMINISTRATION

1. Administration Unit
a. The Administration Unit provides core-area space for staff functions; provides spaces for interaction
between staff, parents and students; and serves as the main public entry to the school.
b. Spaces and functional needs include:
1) Private offices for principal, assistant principals, and other appropriate staff.
2) Open office for clerical assistants, volunteer workers, computer operators.
3) Public lobby with a waiting/seating area and a counter control which separates the lobby from
the back-of-house clerical operations. This is the control point for visitor access to the site.
4) Counter heights appropriate to the population age at both standing and wheelchair levels.
5) Seating and writing surfaces for staff or students to fill out forms.
6) Conference space for staff meetings, staff-teacher conferences or visitors.
7) Staff/faculty work room(s) for copying, assembling and binding, and for ample storage of
supplies, sized and equipped appropriately for the school size.
8) Spaces for office supplies, reprographics equipment, staff and teachers’ mail boxes, LAN central
location, radio receiver/transmitter equipment, and additional spaces as programmed, such as
police offices, athletic director’s office, etc.
9) Public payphones in compliance with accessibility requirements. These phones shall be located in
an accessible route, mounted at 48” maximum above finished floor to the highest operable part
to accommodate forward reach.
10) Adult toilet rooms for principal, staff and visitors.
11) Mail boxes shall be provided at the rate of 1.5 times the number of classrooms. Size shall be 4”h
x 12”w x 15”d each, with an area for larger boxes at each location. In small learning communities
provide mail boxes in satellite administration office at the same rate. Total number of mail boxes
required may be divided between the satellite administration office(s) and the main administration
office, proportional to the number of classrooms each serve (or number of staff for Main
Administration).
c. Location:
1) As the main entrance to the school campus, the Administration Unit must be prominently
located and directly accessible to the public. This unit, together with Counseling and Health, may
need after-hour or weekend accessibility, and should be secured against access to other school
areas.
2. Counseling and Attendance Unit
a. The Unit functions as an integral part of counseling and guidance programs, and as a service center for
families dealing with enrollment, transfers, transportation and work permits. Counselors confer with
students and parents, administer psychological examinations, and maintain files and records for each
student. The Attendance Office maintains attendance records and students’ files. (The unit functions
partly as an accounting department.)

b. Spaces and functional needs for this unit typically include:
1) Counselors’ offices with work area, guest seating, computer workstation and window.
2) Student Waiting Area with controlled supervision, shared with Attendance Unit.
3) Work room and guest waiting area for the Psychologist’s Office.
4) Interview and Testing Stations.
5) Other workstations as programmed.
6) Enclosed bulletin board outside the unit in a highly visible location.
c. Location: Counseling and Attendance activities are integrated into the Administration Unit adjacent to
the Health Unit (Secondary Schools). These functions are reduced and combined in the Administration
Unit at elementary schools.
3. Health Unit
a. A centrally located Health Unit provides health services to students, storage for students’ health records,
and information for use by teachers, counselors, school administrators and aides. Student privacy and
confidentiality are important when accessing health services.
1) Nurse’s desk within the health office.
2) Cot Room. At elementary schools provide a viewing window from the Administration’s clerical
area to the Cot Room.
3) Accessible restroom within the health office, provide a space for a changing table (3’X7’) for high
school and middle school.
4) Student waiting area.
5) Private storage within the health office for medical supplies and students’ special medical devices
and medications.
6) Exam space for visiting healthcare professionals.
7) Ten-foot long eye exam lane.
8) First aid area with lockable cabinets and space for a refrigerator.
c. Location: Adjacent to the main Administration Unit, with accessibility for the public.
4. Faculty and Staff Lounge
a. The Faculty and Staff Lounge provide space for relaxation, private work, meetings, and dining when a
separate faculty dining room is not available or convenient.

1) Ample seating and table space, sized appropriately for the school.
2) Sink, tack board, and space/utilities for a refrigerator, coffee station, microwave, and vending
machine.
c. Location: Centrally and conveniently located, often near food service in elementary schools, and near
the Administration Unit in middle and high schools.
D. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – CLASSROOMS
1. General Education Classrooms
a. Classrooms are the most important single element in the school. They must be designed to flexibly
accommodate varied activities and future technologies. Designs should reflect concern for the way
children work and learn in the room. Adaptability of the room to various grade levels is provided
through selection and arrangement of furnishings.
b. Size: The standard classroom size is 960 square feet unless the Facilities Program provides an alternative
size.
c. Flexibility: Consider measures to allow some classrooms to be easily altered in size or shape at
reasonable cost (for example, to accommodate changes in class-size policy).
d. Outdoor study areas: Consider for Elementary School Classroom clusters.
e. Storage units: Provide as shown in Educational Specifications. The top shelf of units shall not exceed
72” in height.
f. All elementary school classrooms must have sinks, soap dispensers and paper towel dispensers.
g. Location: Classrooms are laid out in groups, in linear form or clusters, accessed either by external walks
and balconies or by internal corridors. They need convenient access to the library/ media center
especially, as well as to administration, multipurpose/ food service, and physical education or
playground areas.
2. Small-Group Instruction Areas
a. Small group instruction areas are sometimes provided in the vicinity of the classrooms – typically one
for each four to six general classrooms, as programmed -- to allow for various collaborative learning
opportunities as appropriate within the regular education program.
b. Space and functional needs: Minimum size of 480 sf. Provide tables and chairs for small group
activities, tack- and white-boards, computer stations, and extra storage space for special materials.
c. Location: Close to groups of classrooms, with windows into classrooms for supervision.
d. Small group instruction areas are not included in the computation of classroom size unless as integral
parts of the classroom, visually supervised by a teacher from the classroom.

3. Year-Round Education Needs:
a. Define specific space for off-track teachers’ storage cabinets.
b. Provide additional storage for supplies and projects for off-track students.
c. Provide adequate work surfaces in the space, including a counter.
4. Kindergarten Classrooms
a. The Kindergarten unit is specialized and self-contained so that children may participate in active and
varied learning experiences. Space and furnishings should provide flexibility for a variety of indoor and
outdoor activities. Special attention should be paid to visual lines of supervision of the classroom and
play yards, and provision of a safe, interactive environment.
b. Spaces and functional needs: Minimum Kindergarten Classroom size is 1,350 square feet, including
storage, wet and dry areas, and restrooms self-contained within the kindergarten complex.
c. Location: Close to parent drop-off and bus loading areas.
d. Safety: Ensure that electrical outlets are “child-proof” with safety features integral to the receptacles.
Receptacles shall be UL or NRTL listed.
5. Kindergarten Outdoor Play Space
a. The Kindergarten Play Space is an extension of the classroom, directly accessible and fenced for
exclusive use by Kindergarten students. It accommodates a variety of outdoor activities for the
development of large motor skills, including running, climbing, sliding, cycling, and dancing. Innovative
design solutions are encouraged, but with maximum safety in mind.
b. Size: Refer to space program requirements.
c. Provide playground safety tile under play equipment as required by play structure design.
d. Provide age appropriate play equipment as programmed and as specified in District Guide
Specifications.
e. Provide shade for active and passive recreation areas by means of building overhangs, shade structures,
landscaping, etc.
f. Incorporate garden as play and learning space.
6. Special Education Classrooms and Areas
a. Refer to the Facilities Space Program and the California Education Code, Section 17047(a), for space
allowances for classrooms and other spaces to support special education programs. Spaces for the
special education program include Special Education Classrooms, Resource Specialist room, specially
equipped classrooms where applicable, as well as those in other units such as the speech therapist,
psychologist, counseling offices and conference area.

b. Properly equip the classrooms for the students who will occupy them, their age and their disabling
conditions, as defined in the Facilities Space Program and code.
c. Provide 240 square feet minimum for the Resource Specialist, or as programmed.
d. Provide 200 square feet for individualized instruction in the speech and language program.
e. Distribute Special Education classrooms, when programmed, throughout the campus with age-
appropriate regular education programs.
f. Provide access to a conference area to conduct individualized education program meetings for each
special education student.
g. Locate medical therapy units, if planned for the site, close to visitor parking areas and with after-school-
hour accessibility.
7. Early Education Center
a. Operation and licensing of Early Education Centers (EEC), is subject to design to the requirements and
approval of the California Department of Social Services.
b. Provide a minimum of 24 parking spaces on site for the staff and administrators.
c. Provide provisions for drop-off by the parents by means of additional parking, internal drop-off or curb
cut. Parents need to park and walk their children to the center.
d. Design, layout and material selection shall be appropriate for EEC age group kids. The center shall be
inviting, fun and kids friendly.
e. Provide appropriate size and design for trash bin area at EEC site.
f. Signage shall be age group appropriate.
g. The EEC classroom shall provide opportunity for different activities, interaction and resting. This
should be located directly adjacent to the outdoor play area, toilet and storage. Provide space for storage
of clothing, bedding and personal belongings.
h. Size: There shall be at least 35 square feet of indoor activity space per child. Floor space occupied by
shelves, built-in cabinets and office/teacher equipment shall not be included in the calculation of indoor
space.
i. Children lavatories shall deliver hot water with controls to automatically regulate hot water temperature
to not less than 105° degrees Fahrenheit and not more than 107° degrees Fahrenheit.
j. One flushometer style toilet and one hand washing lavatory shall be provided for every 15 children or
fraction there of. Toilets shall be flush valve type. Toilet partitions or screens shall be 3’-0” high.
k. A fixed window shall be provided between classroom and toilet for observation.
l. Provide welcome banner(s) to fit the design.
m. Color scheme shall be per standard palette approved by EEC program.
n. Provide stand alone fire alarm system even if EEC is co-located on an elementary school campus.

o. Entry fences and gates shall be designed in such a way so there is no access to elementary school yard if
EEC is planned on elementary campus. Entire EEC site shall be fenced off and visually protected from
outside.
p. Classroom interior spaces shall be designed with clear line of sight. Avoid exposed braced frames and
other projections creating hazards.
q. Provide tackable surfaces in the corridors leading to classrooms or tackable boards on the exterior walls
of classrooms if the classrooms are accessible from outside only.
r. Provide public address intercom, intrusion detection, computer network and clock system.
s. Electrical outlets shall be “child proof” with safety features integral to the receptacles; Receptacles shall
be UL or NRTL listed.
8. Early Education – Outdoor Play Space
a. The outdoor activity space shall be situated to provide a shaded rest area for the children. Equipment
and activity areas shall be arranged so that there are no hazards from conflicting activities. Activity area
shall include all components of outdoor classroom required by Nature Explore Classroom program.
This program shall be designed with input from EEC program.
b. Size: There shall be at least 75 square feet per child for outdoor activity. Areas around and under play
equipment shall have safety materials suitable to design and as directed by EEC program.
c. The playground shall be fenced to protect the children and to keep them in the outdoor play area.
d. All play equipment and materials used by the children shall be age-appropriate.
e. Include landscaping to enhance the outdoor activity areas and provide shade.
f. Provide an exterior outlet outside of each classroom that is childproof and waterproof with lockable
cover. These outlets shall be located in such a way so they don’t interfere with foot traffic.
g. Provide one deep sink in the playground area for teachers to wash paint brushes and other materials.
This sink shall be centrally located among the classrooms with easy access.
E. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – SCIENCE CLASSROOMS
1. General
a. Space and functional needs: Science laboratories typically are 1300 sf or more, with room for students
around fixed learning stations and with adequate space for lectures at or adjacent to the lab benches.
b. Location: Cluster science classrooms together and locate away from other rooms. In multi-story
buildings, locate on top floors to minimize vent and exhaust plumbing and ducts.
c. Preparation Rooms: Provide separate rooms directly accessible from classrooms, usually one for every
two laboratories, for teacher preparation and for storage of supplies and equipment.

d. Hazardous Materials:
1) Provide science laboratory design that is consistent with the requirements for proper hazardous
materials management specified in California Department of Education publications:
a) 1993 “Science Facilities Design for California Public Schools”.
b) Latest edition of “Science Safety Handbook for California High Schools”.
2) Provide secure storage areas for volatile, flammable and corrosive chemicals and cleaning agents.
3) Provide work surfaces/countertops with splash guards composed of epoxy resin wherever
volatile, flammable or corrosive chemicals or cleaning agents may be utilized.
4) Accommodate necessary safety equipment and supplies, including emergency combination deluge
shower/eyewash with direct connection to waste line, and a floor drain centered under shower
head , master disconnect valve for gas, fire extinguishers, and first aid kit and eye goggle cabinet.
In the Teachers’ Preparation Rooms immediately accessible to a science classroom that contains
an emergency deluge shower/eyewash, provide a supplemental flip- down eyewash at sink.
Emergency deluge shower/eyewash shall be accessible and located on an accessible route.
5) Provide appropriate ventilation for hazardous materials, including exhaust fume hoods, and a
high volume purge system in the event of accidental release of toxic substances that may become
airborne.
6) Provide special plumbing, including isolated waste lines, for hazardous liquids.
7) Provide floor and ceiling ventilation in secure areas where chemicals are stored.
F. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS --LIBRARY MEDIA CENTER
1. General
a. The Library Media Center is an information laboratory serving the instructional needs of the entire
school. It should be an aesthetically pleasing environment inviting purposeful activity for the
development of positive attitudes toward reading and learning.
b. Space and functional needs: Library space is planned in proportion to the maximum planned
enrollment, as programmed, but not less than 960 square feet. Needs include:
1) Space and technology for computer terminals for student use, research and report writing,
including electrical outlets and data network connections for each computer terminal.
2) Security for technology and media equipment.
3) In Middle Schools and High Schools, provide book-theft detection system at entrances. If the
space between the detection upright and the walls is too wide, it should be closed by means of a
decorative or architectural feature to prevent library users from circumventing the detection
system.
4) Visual supervision from the circulation desk to study areas; stack space and student reading areas.
Computer screens shall be visible from the circulation desk.

5) Open and closed-circuit television, dedicated phone lines and electrical/data outlets for stand-
alone as well as networked computers.
6) Area for multi-media presentations.
7) At Middle Schools and High Schools provide a private office space for the librarian adjacent to
circulation desk and staff work area.
8) Staff workroom with counter desk, counter sink, shelving, copy machine, and space for library
book carts.
9) Secure storage for special collections, technology and media equipment.
10) Freestanding display case near entry.
11) Assure adequate floor strength and thickness for book-shelving support and overturning
anchorage.
c. Location:
1) Central to the academic areas of the school, easily accessible from classrooms.
2) Directly accessible to the public for community use and extended hours of operation. Secure the
Library / Media Center from other parts of the campus to allow evening and weekend events
without intruding on other school spaces
3) Locate on the first floor unless exceptions for specific reasons are given. Library shall not be
designed on two floors as it creates a supervision problem.
d. Collection storage appropriate to the school, and as shown in Educational Specifications.

Considerations include:
1) Bookshelves: appropriate in height for the age of the children served.
2) Kindergarten picture book shelves: 14” high by 12” deep, sectioned with vertical dividers. Angle
top shelves as display.
3) End panels for exposed ends of bookshelves may be tackable surface.
G. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS –PHYSICAL EDUCATION
1. Gymnasium
a. Physical education provides directed training toward the development of physical and social skills.
Activities include individual and team sports, rhythmic instruction, body mechanics, health, first aid, and
safety.
b. Space and functional needs include:
1) Spaces in accordance with the Facilities Space Program, including sports areas, lockers, showers,
team rooms, and such spaces as lobby or foyer, ticket booth, sound equipment room, press box,
kitchenette, snack bar and laundry spaces.

2) In High Schools and Middle Schools, male and female faculty offices with line of sight to
respective locker rooms.
3) Toilets for public use other than in the shower/locker areas.
4) Gyms, aerobics rooms, fitness centers, locker rooms and other activity areas must have durable,
abuse resistant walls. Do not use gypsum board unless it is abuse-resistant.
5) For lockers, see Section 2.1 - J. “Functional Requirements -Lockers”.
6) Gang showers (showers with no partitions) or prefabricated shower stalls are not acceptable.
Showers shall be divided into individual stalls by solid phenolic partitions per Guide Specification
Section 10 2116.
c. Location:
1) Adjacent to play fields.
2) Directly accessible to the public for community use and extended hours of operation, with clearly
defined entrance and access control for events. Secure the gymnasium and outdoor sports areas
from other parts of the campus to allow evening and weekend events without intruding on other
school spaces.
3) Avoid locating the gymnasium and other facilities with wood floors at:
a) Low elevation area of the site, where water level may rise after storms and penetrate the
building either through doors or as moisture through slabs and walls.
b) At locations with high water tables. Consider elevating the slab to prevent water intrusion.
c) Over cambered decks or long span structures, since adequate floor flatness and levelness
may not be achieved. Cambered deck flatness will change when it settles and flattens.
2. Physical Fitness Center
a. Particularly on small urban sites, specialized P.E. Teaching Stations may be programmed. These may
include a specially equipped fitness center or cyberobics lab with integrated computer technologies and
physical fitness equipment, together with the necessary multiple electrical and data drops.
H. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – MULTIPURPOSE ROOM, AUDITORIA AND FOOD

SERVICES
1. Multipurpose Room
a. The Multipurpose Room functions as a combination assembly hall, lecture hall, testing room, indoor
dining area, performing arts classroom, physical education classroom, and a general activity room. It
may also serve community youth groups, civic organizations or professional events. (In some schools,
especially high schools with auditoria, there may be a separate indoor dining area in the cafeteria. See
the “Facilities Space Program” and “Educational Specifications” for specific requirements.)
b. Space and functional needs include:

1) Accessible Platform or stage serving as performance space or podium, complete with rigging and
lighting.
2) Assembly area with acoustical treatment and lighting- and sound-system controls for assemblies
and performances.
3) Movable chairs for assemblies or dining, with storage space for carts.
4) Folding tables for dining, with storage space.
5) In-wall tables and benches may be provided in Elementary Schools.
6) Lobby or foyer.
7) Public restrooms.
c. Location:
1) Directly accessible to the public for community use and extended hours of operation. Adjacent
to Kitchen/Serving Area if used for indoor food service. Secure the areas from other parts of
the campus to allow evening and weekend events without intruding on other school spaces.
Ground level locations are preferred.
2. Kitchen
a. Spaces and functional needs for this unit include:
1) Food preparation area.
2) Space for a cafeteria/serving line to accommodate the flow of traffic for each lunch period.
3) Office, changing and restroom areas for food preparation staff, in compliance with local Health
Department requirements.
4) Door widths to accommodate large equipment, including a service door of minimum 3’-6” by 7’-
0”.
5) Insect screens for operable windows.
6) Coiling counter doors (shutters) at serving windows, both interior and exterior.
7) Stainless steel sinks and work surfaces, with adequate pitch to ensure drainage.
8) Stainless steel counter tops for all serving stations.
9) In secondary schools with dishwashers, provide a dish shelf on dining room side aligned with
soiled dish counter in kitchen.
10) Range hood with filters for combination supply and exhaust air system.
11) Wet chemical fire extinguishing system.
12) Floors in all the following rooms should be 6 x 6 quarry title (no grit) with coved quarry tile base.
(Restrooms can be ceramic tile):

a) Serving/Scramble/Window Service.
b) Kitchen/Prep.
c) Walk-in Refrigeration/Freezer.
d) All storage rooms (If the office is in the storage room, it is a storage room and not an
office by law).
e) Corridors, hallways, etc. in the food service area.
f) Locker Room(s) (for the Food Service area).
g) Janitor/Custodian (for specific use of Food Service area only).
13) Walls in Kitchen and Food Preparation Area shall be FRP (Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic) sanitary
wall panels or stainless steel. All other walls in above rooms and restrooms are to be smooth (no
texture) washable semi or gloss white 70% LRV (Light Reflectance Value) min.
14) Ceilings in above rooms and restrooms shall have smooth and washable finish. Hard lid (Gypsum
Board) ceilings shall be painted semi-gloss or gloss. If ceiling tiles are specified they shall be of
the appropriate type for this area and meet all code requirements (See Guide Specifications).
b. Plan the kitchen areas not only for functional efficiency, but also for economical sharing of services such
as power, water supply, and floor sinks and drains.
c. Provide convenient access for service and delivery vehicles, separated from student areas.
d. Provide door bell and a view port at service entry door to the kitchen. Buzzer shall sound in the
kitchen’s office and kitchen’s work area.
e. BOS Permit – All school sites must receive, in writing, Bureau of Sanitation’s (BOS) approval on
necessity and sizing for a Grease Interceptor tank. Architect to initiate and fulfill this requirement early
during the design process and forward a copy of BOS approval letter to the OAR. Tank Design shall be
based on Drainage Fixture Units (DFU) sizing criteria, with minimum tank size of 750 GPM (when a
tank is required).
3. Cafeteria
1) Ample area for the cafeteria waiting line, oriented to provide a smooth traffic flow.
2) Covered rain and sun protection at waiting line and food serving area. Covered access to Lunch
Shelter.
3) Serving windows at the appropriate height for grade levels served.
4) Space for trash and recycling receptacles in designated areas throughout the dining areas.
5) Adjacent storage for cleaning supplies.
b. Location: Adjacent to playground with student restrooms easily accessible.

4. Lunch Shelter:
1) Concrete slab sloped to adequate floor drains so that all food products drain to sanitary sewer
system. Verify that slopes and cross slopes do not exceed maximum allowed by code.
2) Roof structure providing shelter from rain and sun, designed to prevent birds from perching on
rooftop areas in and around the lunch shelter. Shelter’s height shall be proportional to its size.
Design shall consider side exposure to elements and provide for maximum protection while
maintaining an open and airy atmosphere. Overhangs shall be extended far enough beyond
tables and benches to provide protection from rain and sun. High lunch shelters shall provide
vertical screening fascias for sun and rain protection.
3) Conveniently located drinking fountains with multiple bubblers and hose bibb.
4) Provide lighting and P/A speaker system (connected to school’s P/A system).
b. Location: Immediately adjacent to cafeteria, playground, and outdoor eating areas.
5. Outdoor Eating Areas:
a. Outdoor eating areas are intended to supplement cafeterias and lunch shelters.
b. Provide space for tables and chairs, low wall seating or benches.
c. Consider ways to reduce heat reflection and glare, such as shading.
d. Consider details that provide protection against birds.
e. Drains shall be provided based on requirements of this Design Guide, see section 3.2 – “Civil
Engineering”.
6. Outdoor Assembly Area
a. The Outdoor Assembly Area accommodates the student body for informal and instructional
presentations and graduation exercises, as well as outdoor dining. (See section 2.2 - “Site Design”)
b. Location: Central to campus. Preferably near cafeteria and lunch shelter.
I. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – RESTROOMS & DRINKING FOUNTAINS
1. Fixture and General Requirements
a. Restroom stalls shall be sufficient in number to accommodate the maximum planned enrollment, staff
and visitors, and located on campus for both convenience and supervision. Follow the requirements of
the California Plumbing Code, except where modified below.

b. Restrooms must be designed and equipped to comply with Title 24 Accessibility Requirements,
including access and usability for fixtures, mirrors, and accessories.
c. CBC and ADA accessibility regulations specify mounting heights for adults (including middle schools),
and alternate mounting heights for elementary and kindergarten students. Comply with the age-
appropriate CBC mounting height for the project type. Architectural drawing shall clearly identify the
specific age group applicable to each restroom, and at each classroom with accessible sink(s).
d. Refer to Guide Specifications for “Toilet Accessories” for additional requirements.
e. In student restrooms (except kindergarten and early education centers), provide electric hand dryers in
lieu of paper-towel dispensers and waste receptacles. Locate semi-recessed hand dryers along exit path
from restroom that do not protrude more than 4” from the wall. See also Section 3.4 “Plumbing” for
specific requirements for student restrooms.
f. For other restrooms, surface-mounted paper towel dispensers are standardized throughout the District
(see Guide Specifications). Surface mounted paper towel dispensers, if they project more than 4” from
the wall, should be located so they do not obstruct the accessible route and clear floor spaces at fixtures.
Provide space for free-standing trash containers so they do not obstruct the accessible route and clear
floor space at doors.
g. Plans shall include a tabulated Fixture to Occupant load calculation for all fixtures, including Drinking
Fountains, Water Closets, Urinals and Lavatories.
h. Mirrors – In lieu of individual mirrors above the lavatories, provide a larger mirror in an adjacent area
for use by all. Mirror shall be installed with the bottom of reflective surface in accordance with CBC and
ADA height standards for access compliance. Be mindful of “Line of Sight” and privacy issues when
locating the mirror.
FIXTURE REQUIREMENTS:
Type of Occupancy Water Closets Urinals Lavatories
(Fixtures per Person)
Male Female Male or Female
Kindergarten 1 : 1-20 1 : 1-20 1 : 1-25
2 : 21-50 2 : 21-50 2 : 26-50
Over 50, Over 50, add 1 Over 50, add 1 fixture
add 1 fixture for each for each add’l 50
fixture for add’l 50 persons.
each add’l persons.
50 persons.
Elementary Schools 1 : 30 1 : 25 1 : 75 1 : 35
Secondary Schools 1 : 40 1 : 30 1 : 35 1 : 40
Staff and Visitor Use – All 1 : 1-15 1 : 1-15 1 : 50 1 : 40
Schools 2 : 16-35 2 : 16-35
3 : 36-55 3 : 36-55
Over 55, Over 55, add 1
add 1 fixture for each
fixture for add’l 40
each add’l persons.
40 persons.

• The total number of water closets for females shall be at least equal to the total number of water
closets and urinals required for males in each location. Where the above ratios do not match this
requirement, increase the number of fixtures for females to achieve equity.
• Provide one drinking fountain per each 150 occupants, with a minimum of one per floor.
• The total number of fixtures required for students shall not include dressing room toilets, health unit
toilet and public restrooms to be located in gymnasium’s lobby and multi-purpose room lobby.
Provide restrooms in these areas as indicated in the Facilities Space Program.
• For student restrooms provide a minimum of 3 fixtures
Boys – Two (2) toilets and one urinal.
Girls – Three (3) toilets.
• Toilets in the elementary school multi-purpose room shall be designed for adults.
• Toilet room for the health unit shall be designed for elementary school age group.
OCCUPANT LOAD FOR FIXTURE COUNT:

Type of Occupancy Type of Space Person/ Space
Students, Elementary Classrooms, including Kindergarten, 25
Schools Special Day Classrooms, Set-Aside
Rooms (for total school fixture count)
Students, Secondary Classrooms, including Special Day 30
Schools Classrooms, Set-Aside Rooms (for total
school fixture count)
Staff (and Visitors) Classrooms, including Kindergarten, 2
Special Day Classrooms, Set-Aside
Rooms (for total school fixture count)
2. Location Criteria
a. Provide separate restrooms for students and faculty. Student restrooms may be used by the public for
public events.
b. On classroom buildings, locate students and faculty restrooms and at least one drinking fountain on
each floor as a minimum.. Number of fixtures per floor shall be per code and recommendation in this
Design Guide. Restroom facilities shall be within 200 feet of all classrooms.
c. Provide a custodial room adjacent to each student restroom.
d. Distribute staff restrooms to locations proximate to their work stations, with maximum walking distance
for any employee of 200 feet.
e. Locate restrooms and drinking fountains appropriately to serve such areas as multi-purpose and dining
areas, media center, auditoria, lunch shelters, and athletic facilities and playfields. Make provisions for
them to be fully accessible to students and staff during the day, and to the public after school and for
special events without violating school security. Size restrooms to handle the anticipated capacity of
each facility area.
f. Restrooms should not be visible through openings or materials selected for walls. Selected materials in
the restrooms should be extremely vandal resistant, since they are high vandalism areas. Selected
materials should also be repairable.
g. Provide drinking fountains in the following locations:

1) Adjacent to all interior and exterior student restroom entries.
2) At the interior, as well as exterior, of each Gymnasium.
3) Exterior play areas, including courts, play yards, and athletic fields.
4) Lunch shelters and outdoor eating areas where students have their lunch or breaks.
5) Other public areas where students will congregate.
h. Drinking fountains subject to direct sunlight exposure shall not be Stainless Steel due to heat build-up
on the unit.
i. Entries to restrooms shall be only from public spaces, corridors, lobbies, or vestibules, and not through
other rooms or functional spaces. All restroom entries shall have doors and screen walls or vestibules to
prevent visibility of interior areas from the exterior when doors are open.
j. Restroom entrances shall be visibly prominent for ease of supervision.
k. Restrooms having direct access from the exterior shall have entries that are visible from the playground
and easily supervised.
l. All drinking fountains adjacent to an accessible route, especially in corridors or along busy sidewalks
shall be located in alcoves at least 18 inches deep, 32 inches minimum width; if alcove is deeper than 24
inches, then the alcove width must be 36 inches minimum. Alcove walls shall be surfaced with water-
resistant material such as Ceramic Tile. Dimensions on drawings shall account for thickness of finish
material and construction tolerances to assure compliant construction of clean inside accessible alcove
dimensions. Provide water-resistant and slip-resistant flooring in alcove that extends minimum of 3 feet
into the passageway.’
J. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – LOCKERS
1. Book Lockers
a. In secondary schools provide one book locker for each student enrolled, with enrollment based on 32
students per classroom
b. Locate lockers in locker recesses in corridors, covered walks, or in special covered kiosks within secured
areas and in highly visible and supervisable places.
c. Lockers shall be 18” high by 12” wide by 15” deep, four units high with a sloped top, mounted on a 4”
minimum concrete base.
d. Construction shall be sheet steel, without vent openings, factory-applied enamel or powder-coat finish.
e. Locks shall have built-in combination locks with options for multiple combinations and openable with a
master-key.
2. Physical Education Lockers

a. In secondary schools provide student lockers for the percent of enrolled students listed below, with
enrollment based on 32 students per classroom – 50% in boys’ locker room and 50% in girls’ locker
room.
1) Middle Schools: 100% of enrollment.
2) Senior High Schools 60% of enrollment.
b. In Senior High Schools provide two team locker areas with additional team lockers in each of the boys’
and girls’ locker rooms.
1) Team Room: 100 team lockers.
2) Team Secure Caged Area: 60 team lockers.
c. Provide faculty lockers for PE instructors and coaches.
d. Locker sizes: See Guide Specification “Metal Lockers” for sizes.
e. Verify the PE and athletic program planned for each project to confirm these allotments.
f. Construction shall be sheet steel, with vent openings, factory-applied enamel or powder-coat finish.
g. Lockers shall have built-in combination locks with options for multiple combinations and openable with
a master-key.
h. Lockers shall be installed on a 4” high concrete base. Base shall be flush with the face of the lockers.
K. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – CORRIDORS, STAIRWAYS AND EXTERIOR WALKWAYS
1. General
a. Width: Corridors and stairways shall be designed to accommodate peak student traffic flows between
classes, but with a minimum width face-to-face of wall finishes or closed locker doors of 12 feet in
secondary schools and 9 feet in elementary schools.
b. Finishes: Corridor and stairway walls shall have durable finishes – minimum finish construction of
“abuse and impact resistant” gypsum wall board. (Not required behind or above lockers.)
c. Provide full height stainless steel corner guards to protect corner edges of interior corridors, stairways
and high abuse areas.
d. Exterior walkways shall be designed to be hosed down. On upper floor exterior walkways provide
recessed hose bibs and floor/area drains. Upper floor exterior walkways shall have a concrete walking
surface with waterproofing system underlayment. Elastomeric walking surface coating systems shall only
be used with Districts approval, due to high maintenance issues.
L. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS – SUPPORT UNIT
1. General

a. The Support Unit serves the operational and maintenance needs of the school and it includes the Plant
Manager’s office, central custodial receiving room, and central custodial supplies storage room,
Gardening and Exterior Maintenance Equipment Room, Trash Enclosed Area, and the Custodial
Closets.
b. See “Educational Specifications” for space criteria for each school level.
2. Central Support Unit
a. Plant Manager’s Office
1) Elementary Schools: Must accommodate one desk with computer, three chairs, file cabinet, wall
and base storage cabinets and a hopper (laundry tub) sink with drench hose/emergency eye wash.
2) Secondary Schools: Must accommodate two desks with computer, six chairs, three file cabinets,
wall and base storage cabinets.
3) Locate adjacent to storage rooms and to provide visual oversight of the receiving area.
b. Central Custodial Receiving and Storage
1) In Elementary Schools and Early Education Center’s (EEC’s), custodial receiving and storage
may be combined as one space.
2) In secondary schools, provide separate receiving and storage rooms. Receiving must have space
for receiving, inspecting and breaking down shipments, adjacent to the loading dock or exterior
receiving area. Cleaning chemicals may be mixed or repackaged in this room, so it must have
non-recirculated ventilation. Provide a hopper sink in this room, and a deluge shower/eyewash
combination unit. Provide an area for washer and dryer and their electrical requirements.
3) Storage Room must have adjustable metal shelving and a lockable metal cabinet for custodial
supplies.
4) Provide six-foot wide door openings into both rooms, with pairs of three-foot doors.
5) Provide secure facilities for flammable liquid storage. In secondary schools where gasoline drums
are stored (quantities greater than 55 gallons), this must be a separate building area with required
fire-resistive separation and with direct truck access for refilling drums. This structure shall be
completely separated from buildings used by students. For small quantities see OEHS
recommendations.
6) Fueled Equipment Storage – Storage for Gardner’s fueled equipment and other fueled equipment
shall be in a structure completely separated from buildings used by students. This storage could
be part of gardener’s equipment building if it is an independent building or it could be a separate
structure. Truck access must be provided. Storage shall be located away from transformer, trash
area, and a minimum of 25 feet from any spark generating source. Provide grounding as required
by code.
7) For additional On-Site storage requirements see sections 2.2 - B and C.
c. Locate the Central Support Unit away from the general classroom and food-service areas, to avoid
material and staff congestion, reduce misdirected deliveries, and keep custodial chemicals and odors well
separated from students and food preparation.

d. Provide access from a street entrance, separate from student areas, with adequate yard space for
deliveries and truck turnaround. Consider maneuvering space outside school property when selecting
one of the District’s service yard layouts.
e. At secondary schools, provide toilet facilities and lockers.
f. Provide an outside area adjacent to Receiving for the future placement of 8’ x 40’ containers for future
storage: one for elementary schools (about 500 sf) and two for secondary schools (about 800 sf).
3. Gardening and Exterior Maintenance Equipment Room
a. Gardener’s Storage shall include workspace, equipment storage area, and equipment (shelving, cabinets,
and racks).
b. Exterior Equipment Storage space shall be adequate for equipment (mowers, sweepers, vacuums, etc.)
with an overhead rolling door
c. Locate adjacent to or near the Central Support Unit where feasible, but it must be easily accessible to
areas to be maintained.
d. Provide a hopper sink when gardening unit is separate from Central Support Unit.
4. Trash and Recycling Enclosure
a. Provide trash enclosures that are secured by walls that screen the area from public view.
b. Provide:
1) Hose bibb and dual-mode drainage (see Section 3.4 “Plumbing”).
2) Electrical outlet and exterior lighting.
3) Trash compactor with container, concrete slab floor, and electrical power (all to be included in
the Construction Documents).
4) Direct truck access to all trash and recycling containers.
5) Enclosures shall be freestanding, with minimum 5’-0” distance from any occupied structure.
c. Location:
1) Remote from student activities and food service areas.
2) Accessible to street for truck pick up with truck entirely on District’s property.
3) Convenient to trash-generating activities, such as food services areas.
4) Adjacent to freight elevator in a multi-story facility.
5) Avoid placing the dumpster storage area immediately adjacent to kitchen, cafeteria, and/or lunch
area for more effective pest management.

6) Trash enclosure area shall be located with direct access from outside the campus/parking area for
easy pick-up and without interfering with school activities. Direct access from the campus shall
be provided and shall not require passing through any building space. Trash pick-up area shall be
level to prevent bins from rolling.
d. Details:
1) For additional information for trash area with trash compactor see “Standard Technical
Drawings”.
e. Trash Area Calculation: Trash area shall be designed to accommodate the number of bins required, as
follows:
1) Sites without trash compactor:
a) Elementary Schools: One 2 CY bin for each 140 students
b) Middle and High Schools: One 2 CY bin for each 125 students
2) Sites with trash compactors:
a) Elementary Schools: Four 2 CY bins
b) Middle Schools: Six 2 CY bins
c) High Schools: Eight 2 CY bins
f. Recycle Program:
1) Schools located within the geographic limit of city of Los Angeles, a city of Los Angeles “blue”
90 gallon recycle bin will be provided. For schools that are outside the city of Los Angeles limit
may participate in the county “white bin” recycle program provided by the District’s rubbish
service contractor.
2) Recycling trash bins –. Provide bins specifically for recycling; however, where trash compactors
are to be provided, there is no need for 2 cubic yard front loading recycling bin painted white.
5. Custodial Closet/ Hopper Room
a. Custodial Closets are not to be used for supplemental uses (water heaters, access ladders, other building
services) without enlarging the space and assuring the full function of the custodial activity.
b. Provide:
1) Floor sink with hot and cold water and custodial faucet with standard garden-hose threads on the
spigot.
2) Electrical GFCI receptacle.
3) Light fixture with guard to prevent lamp from breakage.
4) Motion Detector pre-programmed to turn off light no more than five minutes after room has
been vacated.

5) Outswinging door.
6) Exhaust air to outside (non-recirculated).
7) Tool / mop rack and metal storage with adjustable shelves and space for custodial carts.
c. Provide custodial closets in the following locations:
1) Adjacent to all Student Restrooms; one per floor minimum.
2) One per each 15 classrooms.
3) One in each Boys and Girls Locker Rooms at Gyms.
4) Multi-Purpose Room/Auditorium.
5) Kitchen food preparation area only.
6) Other locations when necessary to assure adequate custodial coverage of building areas
(Administration, Library, Cafeteria, etc.).
M. BUILDING SECURITY
1. Windows
a. The following security measures must be addressed in the initial design concepts, and shall be integrated
with the overall building design.
b. All windows accessible from the exterior shall have security measures as described in Section 3.1,
“Architectural”, to prevent breaking, entering and vandalism. Accessible windows include any windows
with:
1) Bottom sills less than ten feet above grade.
2) Bottom sills less than ten feet above balconies, stairs, or other circulation means.
3) Bottom sills less than ten feet above roofs that have any portion less than ten feet above grade,
adjacent walls, or other access points.
c. Do not locate windows within 48 inches of exterior doors unless protective security screens have been
utilized to prevent an intruder from gaining access to door hardware.
2. Doors
a. Do not locate exterior doors in recesses or alcoves that would provide cover for an intruder attempting
to enter the door.
b. Provide exterior security lighting that illuminates all exterior doors.
c. Provide overhead rain protection overhangs for all unprotected exterior doors.

d. Glass on exterior doors shall be protected against vandalism and to deter breaking and entering by use
of security grilles. Laminated glass is not sufficient.


2.2 SITE DESIGN
A. INTRODUCTION
B. BUILDING PLACEMENT AND CIRCULATION
C. OUTDOOR SPACE AND FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
D. LANDSCAPING
E. SECURITY
F. SIGNAGE
Book 2: General Criteria 2.2 Site Design

2.2 SITE DESIGN
A. INTRODUCTION
1. General Requirements
a. The site design process must balance many diverse requirements including convenient
circulation, accessibility, security, ease of supervision, and community image. Context,
adjacencies, aesthetics as well as the physical and geotechnical characteristics of the site must
be considered.
b. Sites are to be designed to conform to the requirements of the “Guide to School Site Analysis and
Development,” to the “Small School Site Policy”, both published by the California Department of
Education, and to the Rodriguez Consent Decree.
c. Playgrounds, playfields, and outdoor instructional spaces are essential to the instructional program, and
must be carefully integrated into the site plan.
d. The circulation system, both on- and off-site, must safely separate pedestrians, bicycles, cars, buses and
delivery vehicles while providing immediate access for emergency vehicles.
e. Plan pedestrian circulation carefully to reduce opportunities for short cuts over planting areas, which
greatly increase maintenance.
f. Skating or skateboarding is not allowed on school property. Paving and other site structures such as
raised planters, benches, and low walls shall be designed, or have skate deterrent devices installed to
discourage such use.
g. Careful consideration should be given to consolidating building program elements into a compact,
space-conserving floor plate in order to maximize open space and enable a more energy-efficient
building shell.
h. LAUSD has a “Greening Program” that recommends lawn and other planting on at least 30% of the
outdoor space on each school site. On tight urban sites, this is not always achievable, but space for
planting must nevertheless be given high priority in site planning. Opportunities exist at school entries
and perimeters, kindergarten play spaces, instructional gardens, and other strategic planting areas.
i. See Section 2.4, “Environment and Sustainability,” for additional site design criteria. The reduction of
storm-water runoff is an important component of sustainable design, and is greatly improved by more
planting, water absorption areas and permeable paving surfaces.
j. Site Signage: See section 2.2, F “Signage” for the requirements for site perimeter and other building
signs and integrate them into the site design. Signs must be reviewed, through the District’s authorized
representative, with the school principal or other local district staff to assure the correct content.
2. Future Expansion
a. Site layouts shall have the capacity for future expansion without substantial alterations to existing
structures or playgrounds. Indicate future building locations on site plans.

b. Make provisions in utilities systems to accommodate future growth without rework of installed
components.
c. Exits, walkways, stairs, and elevators must be sized and located to accommodate capacity of future
growth, particularly in multipurpose, cafeteria, gymnasium and auditorium facilities.
3. Site Plan Information
a. Plans shall clearly identify and reference the limits of all project related contract work including site
lighting, landscaping, paving, utility system connections and improvements, etc., to specific benchmarks,
property lines and/or existing significant site improvements (buildings, street center-lines, etc.) with
easily understood and straightforward dimensioning.
b. Locations of buildings, site improvements (including shoring needed to develop structures or features),
underground/sub-surface structures, etc., shall be referenced to specific benchmarks, property lines
and/or existing significant site improvements (buildings, street center-lines, etc.) with easily understood
and straightforward dimensioning.
c. All grades, slopes, required cuts/fills shall be appropriately depicted dimensioned, and quantified. Over-
excavation requirements shall be defined with both horizontal and vertical dimensions sufficient for
accurately calculating cut and fill quantities.
d. Plans shall clearly identify locations for staging of construction materials, site access for the contractor’s
workforce and delivery of materials, and temporary fencing and barricades for site security and safety.
On sites with existing school functions/facilities, construction staging and work areas shall be separated
from the school functions/facilities by temporary fencing and/or barricades. The location of this area
shall be coordinated with District staff.
e. When planning walkways consider shortest routes and consider design elements, so students avoid
trampling landscaped areas. Widen or feather out the walkways at junctions to accommodate natural
foot traffic movements and student gathering areas.
B. BUILDING PLACEMENT AND CIRCULATION
1. Building Location
a. Site layout of buildings, parking, driveways and physical education areas shall be planned to meet the
instructional, security and service needs of the Facilities Space Program prepared by the District.
b. Place buildings to be compatible with adjacent functions. (For example, do not place the band room
adjacent to the library.)
c. Physical relationships of classrooms, auxiliary and support areas must allow unobstructed movement of
staff and students around the campus, and provide optimum patterns for pedestrian traffic flow around
and within buildings. (For example, students should not have to pass through one building to get to
another.)
d. Place buildings to have favorable relationships to wind, sun, and natural light and to optimize the effects
of sun light and solar loads. Provide an analysis of sun effects on energy consumption and on interior
day lighting.

e. Provide a system of covered walkways between all buildings.
f. Consider location of buildings relative to parking areas and other paving to minimize solar reflectance
and dust impacts on the buildings.
g. Locate restrooms to provide easy access from playgrounds and classrooms with a minimum of
supervision.
h. Locate buildings in ways that improve campus security.
i. Exit doors and stairways from buildings shall be located so there is no direct exit from the building to
the street. Students must be able to circulate to an emergency assembly area without exiting the school
grounds.
C. Outdoor Space and Functional Requirements
1. Playground and Field Areas
The Space Facilities Program governs the number, types and sizes of outdoor Physical Education spaces, which
includes a variety of physical education teaching stations, including hard courts, fields and apparatus areas.
a. Plan outdoor play areas and fields to accommodate public access and joint use with other public
agencies.
b. Locate buildings (including relocatable buildings) so they do not impair observation or obstruct play
field supervision.
c. Minimize potential for distraction or harm to occupants of lunch shelters, outdoor classrooms and
assembly areas, by Physical Education spaces and related activities, including balls, noise, incidents, etc.
d. Provide playground safety tile surfacing at playground structures as shown in District Standard Details.
e. Athletic competitive facilities are regulated by the National Federation of High Schools (NFHS). These
facilities should also comply with CDE and California Interscholastic Federation (CIF) standards.
Support facilities such as spectators seating, lighting, etc. shall be provided per program.
f. Turf areas should be located and graded to accommodate drainage of on-site surface runoff.
g. Athletic Equipment Storage – At High School fields provide space for a 40’ container for storage of
athletic equipments.
2. Outdoor Assembly Area:
a. The Outdoor Assembly Area is the heart of the campus. It may serve as a theatre area for outdoor
programs, assembly for graduation ceremonies, an informal gathering space, and outdoor dining.
b. Locate it near the cafeteria and lunch shelter, preferably.
c. Provide a central lawn area large enough to accommodate the enrollment wherever site size permits.
Create compact alternatives for smaller urban sites.

d. Minimize walks crossing grass area.
e. Plan a raised stage considering solar orientation, preferably facing away from morning sun. Accessible
route of the travel to the stage shall be provided.
f. Slope ground toward stage for amphitheater-style seating. Identify and disperse accessible seating
positions.
3. Outdoor Classroom:
Outdoor Classroom shall be provided if it is required as part of the Facilities Space Program and desired by the
school. The Outdoor Classroom shall be age appropriate and shall not impact the physical education area,
parking or any other essential element of the school facility.
a. The Outdoor Classroom is an intimate cost effective space for outdoor teaching, as well as a good
meeting place for parent-teacher meetings and student groups. It serves multiple occupants and is
intended to grow into a place of outdoor beauty that offers an enhanced environment for instructional
activities.
b. As space permits provide paving, grass and seating (benches or low walls).
c. Locate near classroom clusters.
d. The Outdoor Classroom area shall not be paved with asphalt, and must utilize permeable surfaces and
natural materials wherever possible. Utilize materials including, but not limited to, trees, rocks,
boulders, and natural pavers, in addition to planting and shrubbery, to create a natural space that reflects
a native California landscape. The space should also include items such as wood decking, benches, and
arbors. Reclaimed materials should be utilized wherever possible.
e. Each outdoor classroom must contain the following basic elements:
1) Gathering or meeting area.
2) Planting beds.
3) Work table or other work surfaces.
4) Lockable storage unit.
5) Decorative Instructional Signage.
6) Permanent hose bibb and/or irrigation system.
7) Seating for a full class (may be informal and/or dispersed).
8) “Messy” space for interactive play with natural materials, if appropriate for age group.
f. Provide space for:
1) Student planting beds.
2) Compost bin.
3) Rain barrel.

4) Solar feature.
5) Student art display – provide an opportunity for students to add to the space artistically, such as a
blank mural wall.
6) Green waste storage.
g. Provide a landmark indicating a clear transition from the schoolyard or other play space. It should be
prominent and should provide a sense of moving into a special space.
h. Seating should take into consideration the age of the school population. Disperse a variety of seating
and various seating heights throughout the area. Utilize natural materials, and consider reuse of
materials found on site. Choose materials for durability and sustainability. Consider the educational and
experiential value of seating materials and their construction. Seating should be provided as follows:
1) Provide seating for full class meeting up to 25 students in one area. For short term use, this area
may be densely packed.
2) Provide seating for small groups.
3) Provide seating for single students for quiet observation or data collection.
i. Circulation:
1) Separate foot traffic from planted areas.
2) Provide main pathway from entrance to main gathering, planting and work areas. Main pathways
from entrance to gathering, planting and work areas should be a minimum of 48” and accessible.
3) Provide secondary pathways clearly distinguished from primary circulation, utilizing a contrast in
materials and/or scale.
4) When adding an outdoor classroom or garden to an existing campus, be aware of existing

walking path of travel.
5) Utilize a range of permeable and non-permeable surfaces such as:
a) Permeable and non-permeable concrete.
b) Permeable pavers.
6) Design for sustainability, locally sourced and recycled materials, etc.
j. Planting beds – a dedicated place for hands-on gardening, either in-ground or raised. Raised beds
should be no more than 3’ wide for primary and elementary schools to allow access to younger students,
and should be between 18” and 24” high. Raised beds should have a wide edge for sitting. Site water
source proximate to planting beds.
k. Topography:
1) Mound and shape landscape to 18” to 24”.
2) Incorporate gardens and landscape areas into storm water runoff BMPs through rain gardens,
permeable pavers, infiltration swales, and other topographical features.
l. Outdoor classrooms should contain one or more of the following elements:

1) Orchard – a space for growing fruit trees.
2) Edible Garden – a space for growing vegetables and herbs from seed to harvest. Beds may be in
ground or raised, depending on site features and soil condition, but must be suitable for food
production. Edible gardens should contain an area that can accommodate a whole class.
Orchards and edible gardens must contain a potable water source, and where feasible, a safe
space for food preparation.
m. Instructional and/or Experiential Space – Instructional gardens may be formal or informal. Consider
elements such as informational signage, root view windows in planting beds, thermometers, sundials,
writing surfaces, structural elements such as mounting location for teaching materials.
n. Where feasible, provide signage indicating:
1) Plant/tree species.
2) Special care for plants that have dormant periods, require little to no water, or have other special
needs.
3) Composting areas.
4) Garden Type.
4. Outdoor Eating Spaces:
a. Outdoor eating spaces supplement cafeterias and lunch shelters. See section 2.1 “School Building
Design” – Multipurpose and Food Service.
b. Integrate with lunch shelter and outdoor assembly area.
5. Emergency Assembly Area:
a. Designate an “Emergency Assembly Area” (EAA) on the site with a net area of six square feet for each
programmed student (6 sf/occ.) or 3 SF per calculated exiting load, which ever is greater.
b. Edge of EAA shall not be less than 50 feet from the face of the nearest structure.
c. EAA shall have a gate that discharges directly to the sidewalk. Use a single 4'-0" gate to swing in the
direction of egress. Gate shall not project into sidewalk.
d. Gates shall not be closer than 15'-0" from the edge of a vehicular drive gate unless separated by a
perpendicular fence or wall.
e. Grades to, and within the EAA shall conform to accessibility requirements.
f. Provide additional space for emergency supply containers (standard 20-ft. or 40-ft. shipping containers.).
The primary unit stored is emergency water supply for three days for the entire site population (students,
teachers and staff). The requirement is one barrel of water for each 35 people. A 20-ft. container will
hold 30 water barrels. A 40-ft. container will hold 60 barrels. Calculate the size and number of
containers and provide a flat, smooth-graded area for the containers, containers will be provided by the
District. This area shall be accessible and comply with ADA path of travel requirements.

g. Access to EAA shall be designed in such a way that would not require students to go off campus, or
into the public right of way to get to EAA.
6. Bicycle and Skateboard Storage Areas:
a. Identify a designated area for bicycle and skate board storage. Location and number of bike racks and
skate board storage for employees and students are at the discretion of the local districts. Coordinate
requirements with Design Manager.
b. Bike racks and skate board storage shall be installed on hard-surfaces.
c. Location shall be visible for security and designed for minimized vehicular and pedestrian traffic
conflicts.
d. Provide adequate clearance where bicycle racks and skate board racks are located adjacent to buildings,
structures or pathways, so they don’t restrict the path of travel.
D. LANDSCAPING
1. Planning
a. Because schools represent important visual elements in the community, a well-conceived landscape
design is essential – one that provides a naturally beautiful campus that enhances its neighborhood yet
still is physically secure and economically maintainable.
b. Landscape and planting standards must be adapted to the specific site, with designs scaled to fit the
ecological, cultural and economic requirements of the project.
c. In addition to the aesthetic considerations, an important role of trees and large shrubs is providing shade
– for buildings, for play areas, and for paved heat islands. Use trees to provide:
1) Year-round shading of outdoor teaching, dining, gathering and play areas.
2) Seasonal shading of buildings to reduce cooling energy requirements, while allowing winter
warming of buildings in the cooler climatic areas.
d. Use trees and shrubs to provide wind-breaks on those sites exposed to strong winds, but without
disrupting favorable summer wind patterns.
e. Identify existing trees and plant structures that should be saved, and, so far as possible, incorporate
them in site planning.
2. Planting
a. Based on long experience with landscaping maintenance, the District has prepared a list of plants that
are appropriate to the region, are not hazardous to students or staff, and require relatively little
maintenance. Select plants appropriate to the site from the LAUSD Approved Plant List. Refer to
Section 3.9 for additional information.

b. The District is committed to a long-term program to conserve water. Therefore, select drought-tolerant
planting, with durable, long-lived plants requiring the least amount of maintenance and water.
c. The District’s “Integrated Pest Management Program” has requirements for plant locations to be not
closer to buildings than:
1) Mature canopy of trees: 5 feet.
2) Mature canopy of shrubs: 3 feet.
3) Ground cover or jute matting: 3 feet.
d. Use low spreading shrubs and vine-type plants on slopes.
e. Avoid all poisonous plants and shrubs with dangerous thorns.
f. Allow space for normal growth of plants.
g. Do not locate large shrubs in front of windows or school sign.
h. In front of graffiti-prone walls, provide trees, shrubs and ground treatments that will deter taggers and
reduce visibility of applied graffiti.
3. Trees
a. Provide for fast-growing shade trees on perimeter of Elementary School Playgrounds, surrounding
Outdoor Assembly Areas, in Outdoor Eating Areas, in Kindergarten Play Areas, and in selected areas
for outdoor instruction and small group gatherings.
b. Provide trees to shade buildings, where other conditions permit, as follows:
1) On south exposure, tall deciduous trees to provide shade for high summer sun and warming
from low winter sun.
2) On east exposure, deciduous trees for morning shading in summer and warming in winter.
3) On west exposure, evergreen trees for year-round shading.
c. Provide at least one mulberry tree on each Primary Center or Elementary School Campus, in the
Kindergarten or Primary Grade Play Areas.
d. Provide trees to shade parking and other large paved areas to reduce the heat-island effect.
e. Keep trees out of drainage flow lines and 20'-0" feet away from vitrified clay sewers.
f. Avoid trees that drop excessive fruit, leaves, or pods.
g. Space trees to have a maximum of 5-feet overlap of full canopies.
h. Location of trees shall be designed to avoid providing access to upper floors, roof and impacting
building foundation and sidewalks.
i. No tree box smaller than 24 inches is to be specified.

j. Trees provided by the Los Angeles Department of Water and Power (15 gallon) shall be located in areas
away from student activities and access to maximize their survival.
k. Trees and tree wells shall be located in such a way so they do not interfere with children’s natural
instinct to take the most direct path from one area to another.
l. Avoid the use of chips or gravel in tree wells as they become throwing material for students.
4. Mowing Strips and Paving:
a. Separate lawn and planting areas with concrete mow strips per LAUSD standard technical drawings.
b. Provide a continuous concrete mowing strip, 12" wide, on each side of a fence which separates two
adjacent lawn areas, and for lawns next to raised planters, buildings, fences, walls or curbs.
c. Provide a continuous mow strip, 8”wide, for lawn or turf areas next to fences by extending concrete or
asphaltic paving outside fence into lawn or turf areas.
d. Pave corners of planting areas at walk intersections to reduce pedestrian traffic thru planting areas.
e. Adjacent to buildings, provide a separating strip from plant areas that is 6”-thick concrete and not less
than 24” wide.
f. All covered and main circulation walks shall be of concrete or similar durable surface. Decomposed
granite shall only be used in garden pathways that are not adjacent to buildings, assembly areas, or
walkways.
5. Middle and High School Physical Education Fields and Exterior Courts:
a. Provide turf fields for Middle and High School Physical Education Areas that may include space for
football, soccer, baseball and track and field. Where programmed, these facilities may be used for
interscholastic athletics as well as physical education.
b. Coordinate location of backstops, pitching mounds and skinned areas with sprinkler layouts.
c. Design grading so that surface drainage from sprinklers will not channel across skinned infield area of
baseball and softball diamonds.
d. Pave small areas behind back stops where large mowers cannot operate efficiently. Provide mow strips
if planted with turf.
e. When possible, turf area shall be located and graded to accommodate drainage of on-site surface runoff.
f. Provide a scoreboard outside of the playing field and track.
g. Provide an area to place a storage bin for athletic equipment.
h. Exterior volleyball courts and basketball courts should be separate when ever possible. If volleyball
courts are being combined with basketball courts due to site constraints, provide ground sleeves and
removable volleyball posts and nets.

6. Synthetic Turf Field
a. As programmed and directed by the District, design and specify a complete synthetic turf field to meet
the District’s minimum requirements.
b. Synthetic turf is recommended for high use/Multi-Purpose fields and joint use.
c. If shot put is part of the program, it shall be located in such a way to avoid damaging the field.
d. Drainage System:
1) The drainage system should provide sufficient drainage of the entire playing surface to meet local
conditions.
2) Design shall comply with the District’s requirements and state storm water arrangement.
3) The drainage systems may include the synthetic turf, pad, base materials and collector pipes that
collect and remove storm water from the playing field.
4) Design shall consider existing surrounding conditions, location and soil type.
e. Based on the location of the school and it’s annual average temperature, design a cooling system per turf
manufacturer’s recommendations and District’s standards.
7. High School Running Track:
a. Track Length: The running track shall be not less than 400 meters (1,312.34 feet) in length.
b. Track Width: A track width of 28 feet (8.53 meters) / 8 lanes is required for Synthetic and D.G.
(decomposed granite) track surfaces unless approval is obtained by the District’s Athletic Department.
1) Overall Track Width: Outside dimensions of track shall not be less than 262.86 feet (80.12m): 2 x
104.43’ (track radius) + 2 x [28’ (track width) – 1’ (distance to measurement line)] = 262.86’.
2) There shall be a 4’-0” high fence between the track and the bleacher areas. This fence should not
encroach into the track and shall be located a minimum of 18” from the outer lane of the track.
The public viewing area shall not be blocked by the fence.
3) Distance to Bleachers and Fences: A minimum clear distance of 18 inches (45.7cm), fall zone,
shall be provided from the outer track edge to any obstacle, such as fences or light standards.
Ground level bleachers shall be provided a minimum 5 foot distance from the front row of the
bleacher to the fence.
c. Lane Width: Lanes shall have the same width including the white line to the right. A minimum lane
width of 42 inches (1.07 m) is required unless approval is obtained by the District’s Athletic
Department.
1) Track Lane Measurement: Distance which are run in lanes and which involve a curve shall be
separately measured for each lane. The measurement shall be based upon a line 8 inches (20cm)
from the nearer edge of the lane line which is on the runner’s left, except the lane next to the
inside raised curb shall be measured 12 inches (30cm) into the lane from the raised curb.
2) Inside Curb: The track may be bordered on the inside by a concrete curb. If exposed the edges of
the curb shall be rounded.

3) Lane Edge Lines: Lanes shall be marked on both sides by white lines 2 inches (5.08cm) wide. The
lanes shall be numbered with lane one on the left when facing the finish line.
d. In Field Surface: The playing field area and radius ends within the track should be natural grass or
synthetic turf. A synthetic track surface is recommended when synthetic turf is used. The minimum
distance from the curb to the active soccer / football playfield is 10ft. Runways for long jump and pole-
vaults should be placed in the radius ends of the field and have synthetic surface when synthetic turf is
used. For natural grass fields, runways may be either decomposed granite or synthetic surface.
e. A separate decomposed granite or natural grass fenced area should be provided for shot put.
f. Wind: Prevailing wind conditions should be considered when planning running tracks.
g. Minimum Considerations: On very small sites and with District approval practice and local competition
meets may be run on 6 lanes of 42”.
8. Outdoor Assembly Area:
a. Provide lawn at the Outdoor Assembly Area amphitheatre area.
b. Plant perimeter trees for shade while maintaining interior line of sight toward stage.
c. Plant screening foliage behind stage as a visual backdrop.
d. Plant shade trees on either side of stage to cast protective shadows.
E. SECURITY
1. Gates and Fencing
a. Design special gates and fencing for main entry to school. Entry Gates and Security Fences shall be
designed to maximize security while at the same time enhancing the appearance of the school.
1) Design special gates for main entry to school with direct line of site from main office.
2) If concrete planters or other climbable elements are adjacent to an entry fence or gate, the fence
and/or gate height must be adjusted accordingly.
3) The design of the entry gates and security fences should minimize horizontal bars and low curbs
so that they do not provide a “ladder” that allow the gate or fence to be easily scaled.
4) Clearances for all gates and doors shall be according to good industry practice and in no case
large enough to permit entry or bypassing security measures.
5) When gates are required to have emergency push bars for exiting, the gates and adjacent fencing
must be designed to prevent activation of the push bar from the outside.
6) If ornamental fencing (wrought iron) is proposed, the design shall be approved by LAUSD’S
metal shop, during the design phase.

b. Provide full perimeter fence or wall enclosure for school campus. Buildings may be used in lieu of a
fence when located within 5’-0” of the sidewalk or entry plaza if classroom windows are not positioned
so that pedestrians are a distraction to classroom students.
c. All accessible gates on an accessible route shall have required level landings on each side of the gate with
2% maximum slope in any direction. Gates shall conform to CBC accessibility regulations.
d. Fence, wall and gate dimensions:
1) Perimeter and parking area walls and fences: 8’-0” height.
2) Interior security fences: 8’-0” height.
3) Interior playground fences: 4’-0” height.
4) Pedestrian gates: 4’-0” width in 6-foot or higher fences.
5) Driveway gates: 20’-0” wide.
6) Tennis court fence 12’-0”. Gates: 6'-0" wide (to accommodate sweepers). If this is the only
access, it shall meet CBC accessibility requirements.
7) Gates that provide access to maintenance equipment shall be 6’-0” wide.
e. At adjoining residential areas, provide CMU walls.
f. Provide full perimeter fence enclosure for all parking areas.
g. In general, provide swinging gates rather than sliding. Emergency gates shall be swing gates; for new
sites provide emergency gates on more than one street. Use sliding gates for large openings where
normally open swinging gates would cause obstructions. Ensure that sliding gates are designed to open
with minimal effort and that the track will not deteriorate under normal use and traffic. Rolling gates
must be designed with gate stops to prevent gates from rolling past the mid-closure point and clear of
vertical supports. Provide one stop on the track and another welded to the top rail. Rolling metal gates
shall be engineered to account for its weight, in order to provide safe and smooth operation.
h. Enclose the Trash Yard with solid walls on three sides. Locate it for easy access and trash pick-up, away
from student areas, and out of direct view of neighboring property owners. Trash yard gate shall be
located to accommodate trash pick-up. See District’s Standard Technical Drawings for additional details.
i. All perimeter gates exiting campus are typically locked during school hours. These gates and their
location should be designed in such a way so they are not considered legal exits; thus not requiring panic
hardware that compromises security to school site. In the event a gate requires panic hardware, it shall
be at least 7’-)’ high and shall have coverings to prevent operation of the panic device from the locked
side of the gate.
j. Avoid placement of activities where the ball can easily go over the fencing and out of the campus,
causing hazards. Where this is unavoidable, increase the height of the fencing to prevent balls going
outside playgrounds.
k. Pool Area: The fence shall be designed and constructed so that it cannot be readily climbed by small
children. Horizontal and diagonal member designs, which might serve as a ladder for small children, are
prohibited. Horizontal members shall be spaced at least 48 inches apart. Planters or other structures
shall not be permitted to encroach upon the clear span area. Chain link may be used provided that
openings are not greater than 1 ¾ inches measured horizontally. The fence minimum effective
perpendicular height shall be 8’-0” measured from each side.

l. Provide sliding gates to control pedestrian traffic into field bleacher areas.
m. At tops of banks, near play areas set fence line back 18" minimum if bank is paved, and 24" minimum if
bank is not paved.
n. Fence service yards. Provide sliding drive gate where possible.
o. Because of safety and maintenance concerns, motorized gates at perimeter fences are not allowed
without prior written approval from the District. Sides of ramps leading to subterranean garages shall be
fenced off to prevent access to the rest of campus when the perimeter gate is open.
2. Utilities Protection
a. Wherever pipe-and-valve assemblies are exposed above grade, provide a secure locked enclosure to
protect them from unauthorized use or vandalism. These may be walls, fences, or manufactured
enclosures that are made for this purpose.
3. Site Lighting
a. Provide exterior lighting to enhance site security, including area lighting, walkway lights, and building
perimeter illumination. See section 3.7 “Electrical Power and Lighting” for illumination levels.
b. Eliminate direct-beam projection off-site or glare off buildings into adjoining residential areas or other
occupancies.
F. SIGNAGE
1. Identity
a. Provide metal letter signs at the main entry of school to identify the name of the school and street
address. Signs shall be visible by both pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
b. Identify an area on site plan for locating a future electronic marquee near the main entry. Marquee to be
visible by pedestrian and vehicular traffic. Contract documents shall include a stub out at this location
and installation of conduit only for future power requirements. Another conduit shall be provided for
data from this location to MDF room and shall be identified accordingly. If marquee is wireless, conduit
to MDF room shall not be provided. Make provisions for marquee according to the following criteria:
1) Location Considerations:
a) Available space for support.
b) Maximum exposure for message display and school name.
c) Proximity to power and location of computer for wireless system to work.
2) Design:

a) Local ordinance restriction for square feet area, setback and minimum distance from
roadway or sidewalk, internal/external illumination limitations, and moving message
restrictions.
d) Speed of traffic on the street that the sign will be located.
e) Minimum 8’-0” clear to the bottom of the sign.
f) Verify logo and exact name of school with school administrator.
g) Coordinate cabinet color(s) with the school.
h) Coordinate location of computer and other equipment with the school.
3) Hours of Operation:
a) New schools shall comply with CEQA study. If any was done it was addressed in the
study.
i) Existing schools shall comply with local ordinances and the location of school.
(residential/commercial street)
j) Address message deactivation time.
2. Vehicular Directional
a. Provide signage and striping as necessary to provide rational and safe vehicle flow in parking and
vehicular traffic area.
3. Pedestrian Directional
a. Provide sufficient directional signs to accommodate way finding of joint-use facilities. Special signage
may be required.
4. Regulatory
a. Provide signage identifying ADA accessible routes, exits, stairwells, room occupancy, evacuation plan,
Assistive Listening Device availability, and other code-required signage.
5. Perimeter
a. Identify location of “WELCOME TO OUR SCHOOL SIGNS” on plans at the main entry and all
vehicular and pedestrian entry points to the school. Signs are approximately 2’-0” by 3’-0” and are
owner furnished/contractor installed.
6. Room Numbering

a. Architect shall follow LAUSD room numbering guidelines to identify each room on the construction
documents. A copy of the guidelines can be found on the web at the following link:
http://www.laschools.org/employee/design/fs-studies-and-reports/?folder_id=4301053
b. Provide room number and room identification signs per LAUSD Guide Specifications.
7. Roof Address
a. Provide school’s street address numbers in contrasting color roofing material on the roof of main
administration building per LAUSD Guide Specifications, roofing sections.


A. PARKING SPACE REQUIREMENTS
B. GENERAL PARKING GUIDELINES
C. VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
D. PARKING STRUCTURE SECURITY

Book 2: General Criteria 2.3 Vehicular Access and Parking

A. PARKING SPACE REQUIREMENTS
1. School sites vary greatly in terms of size and configuration. In order to accommodate staff and student parking
the District uses a variety of site-specific parking solutions, including:
a. Surface Parking.
b. Free Standing Structures.
c. Underground Structures.
d. Rooftop Parking.
e. Leased Parking on Adjacent Sites.
2. Because of limited site space for recreational use, high-intensity parking solutions are encouraged.
3. Provide parking spaces based on the following ratios to programmed classrooms.
a. Elementary School 2.25 per Classroom
b. Middle School 2.25 per Classroom
c. High School 2.50 per Classroom
4. Provide Accessible Parking per CBC ratios.
5. Visitor parking: Allocate surface parking spaces for visitors adjacent to the Administration Unit.
6. Provide secure Bicycle and skateboard racks. Also see section 2.2.”Site Design”.
B. GENERAL PARKING GUIDELINES
1. On small urban sites, seek creative parking solutions to maximize usable land for educational and recreational
functions.
2. Parking layouts shall conform to good design practices. Los Angeles City requirements shall be used as
minimum criteria. See Parking Standards drawings in the District’s “Typical Standard Drawings.”
3. Avoid placing student parking in remote areas where there is little supervision. In general, locate student
parking near the classrooms.
4. Parent’s student drop-off and pick-up, bus loading areas, and parking areas shall be separated to allow students
to enter and exit the school grounds safely.
5. Driveways shall not be located in a bus-loading area, student drop-off or pick-up area.

6. Parking stalls shall not be located, or parking patterns so designed, so that a vehicle must back into a public
street, bus-loading area, or student drop-off or pick-up area.
7. Avoid herringbone-pattern parking layouts and tandem parking. (Tandem parking may be used in special
circumstances with District permission.)
8. Requirements for accessible parking shall conform to Title 24.
a. When one stall for accessible parking is provided the space shall be 17'-0" wide and striped to provide
9'-0" wide van accessible parking space and 8'-0" wide access aisle on the passenger side. Accessible
parking stalls and access aisles shall have a maximum slope of 2% in any direction.
b. When more than one stall for accessible parking is provided, 2 parking spaces can be provided within a
24'-0" (26’-0” at van spaces) wide area striped to provide a 9'-0" wide accessible parking space on each
side and a 6'-0" wide access aisle (8’-0” at van spaces) in between. Accessible parking stalls and access
aisles shall have a maximum slope of 2% in any direction.
c. Minimum length of each parking stall shall be 18'-0".
d. A CBC compliant Tow-Away sign with contact information.
e. Slope for parking stalls, aisles, and path of travel shall be designed for less than maximum slope allowed
by code.
f. Coordinate location of ducts, piping and equipment to avoid overhead obstructions into the minimum
vertical clearance (8’-0”) along the vehicular route connecting the parking garage entrance to the
accessible spaces, and at the accessible spaces themselves. Coordinate location of ducts, piping and
equipment to avoid obstructing the accessible route, and to avoid protrusions >4” into the protected
zone that are not cane detectable by visually impaired persons.
9. Percentage of Compact Cars shall conform to Los Angeles City, Department of Building and Safety
Requirements in parking areas or garages containing 10 or more spaces, up to 40% of the total required parking
spaces and 100% of the non-required parking spaces may be compact. Compact-car stalls shall be clearly
marked and appropriate signs installed at all entrances to parking areas.
10. Provide a wheel stop for each parking stall wherever stalls are head-on to fencing, wall, building, and planting
area or other obstructions.
a. Wheel stops shall be reinforced precast concrete, 6'-0" long.
b. Locate wheel stops with a minimum setback of 3'-0" from fences, walls, and buildings.
c. Straight-line arrangement of wheel stops is preferred.
11. Placement of speed bumps in parking areas is allowed only in long driveways where it is necessary to protect
pedestrians crossing the aisles.
12. Secure surface parking areas with an 8’-0” high fence or wall.
13. Provide aesthetically pleasing perimeter walls, fencing and planting.
14. Provide lighting levels for surface parking areas that will create a secure environment for nighttime users of
school facilities.
C. VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PEDESTRIAN SAFETY

1. Ensure adequate and safe access for students, staff and visitors, walking, entering and circulating on the
campus. Vehicle traffic patterns shall not interfere with major pedestrian traffic patterns. Foot traffic shall not
pass through entrance driveways. Crosswalks must be clearly marked. Refer to the OEHS Traffic and
Pedestrian Safety Requirements for New Schools at the following link:
2. In general, orient the primary site and building entrance toward the street with the least traffic volume and
activity.
3. To optimize the traffic flow to and from the school site and to minimize traffic hazards to pedestrians, meet
with representatives of the Los Angeles Department of Transportation (or other local traffic authority) early in
the design process to review the schematic site design.
4. Provide safe and clearly indicated student drop-off and pick-up provisions by car or bus.
a. For new schools, provide on-site drive lanes or curb inset lanes for parent and bus drop-off and pick-up
wherever space permits. Comply with ADA requirements for curb drop-off and site access as well as
LAUSD’s Office of Environmental Health and Safety’s (OEHS) “Traffic and Pedestrian Safety
Requirements for New School” requirements.
b. Provide the parent’s student drop-off area adjacent to the main entry gate.
c. Locate the main gate in the farthest forward position along the curb to maximize curb space for stacking
vehicles and to allow visual supervision of the greatest number of vehicles.
d. Provide adequate curb length for expected drop-off and pick-up traffic, with a minimum of 160 feet for
Elementary Schools and 200 feet for Secondary Schools. Use curb cuts and inset drop-off lanes when
site space permits.
e. Separate parent’s student drop-off and bus loading areas to minimize traffic conflicts and to allow more
effective supervision of waiting areas.
f. Locate bus drop-off space at a separate secondary entry or from a perpendicular street wherever
possible. Provide adequate safe waiting space for students.
g. Provide adequate curb length for expected bus parking for drop-off and pick-up, with a minimum of
100 feet for Elementary Schools and 200 feet for Secondary Schools.
h. Locate bus drop-off areas for special education students in the same area as regular education students
to provide equal access and the least restrictive environment.
i. Provide curb cuts for accessibility at both bus and automobile loading zones.
j. Provide appropriate “Passenger Loading” signs at all passenger loading zones.
5. Delivery and Utility Areas.
a. Provide vehicular access that does not jeopardize staff and student safety. Separate access from bus and
parent loading areas and parking areas.
b. Delivery and utility vehicles shall have direct access from the street without crossing playgrounds or
fields.
c. Isolate trash pick-up from student activities.

d. Design the trash pick-up area for maneuverability to accommodate 35 foot trash trucks. See Standard
Technical Drawings for minimum requirements.
e. Delivery trucks are approximately 50 feet and need approximately 60 feet of turn radius. Design the
Service Area to accommodate turn around, backing and forward movement of truck.
D. PARKING STRUCTURE SECURITY
1. Provide automatic Overhead Coiling Shutters for all parking structure entrances to prevent any unauthorized
access once gates have been closed. Provide Separate Entrance and Exit Shutters with minimum 3’-0” space in
between. Minimum width for each gate shall be 11’-0”. The location of card readers in relation to shutters shall
be designed to provide maximum security and proper gate operations. Adequate room for vehicles should be
allowed for off street access to card reader.
2. Provide gates that shut immediately following the entrance of each car or pedestrian.
3. Entrance gate into parking structures shall be activated by Proxy Card Reader pads. Connect entry to
Administration Clerical Offices, Adult School Office, and/or security personnel by 2-way speaking/listening
device (see Section 3.8 “Electrical Communications and AV Systems”).
4. Locate gate enclosure, motor, safety edge cords, and electrical power supply lines inside the secure garage
structure and so that they are protected from access or vandalism.
5. Provide bollards to protect garage ventilation ducts, as well as other features, such as doors, gates, card readers,
elevator lobby, etc.
6. Protect garage electrical, mechanical rooms and elevator lobby by raising 6 inches above garage floor (See
Section 3.7.C.1.c for additional requirements).
7. Parking structures, whenever possible shall be designed to allow maximum degree of visual surveillance from
outside the structure.
8. Parking structure design shall avoid creating dark corners or other spaces where assailants may conceal their
presence.
9. Provide closed circuit television cameras encased for protection against vandalism, to link parking areas to a
monitor in the Administration Clerical Office and in Adult School Office (see Section 3.8 “Electrical
Communications and AV Systems”).
10. Provide microphones throughout the structure linked to the Administration Clerical Office to monitor noises
in the parking areas.
11. Provide lighting levels to create a safe environment for users at all times. Photoelectric devices in conjunction
with the lighting control system controller shall control outdoor lighting. Subterranean and covered parking
lighting shall be controlled via the lighting control system.
12. Provide adequate night lighting throughout the site, especially to and from parking areas.
13. Columns adjacent to parking spaces in parking garages shall be painted yellow or other bright contrasting color
to increase visibility and avoid accidents.

14. Where subterranean parking is provided, the elevator should ideally come up into the administration area, or
close to it.


A. GENERAL
B. NEW CONSTRUCTION (NEW SCHOOLS AND NEW BUILDINGS ON EXISTING

CAMPUSES)
C. EXISTING FACILITIES (MODERNIZATION PROJECTS)
D. LAUSD RECOMMENDED CHPS POINTS

Book 2: General Criteria 2.4 Environment and Sustainability

A. GENERAL
1. LAUSD is committed to sustainable or “high performance” design in all of its schools. A well-designed high
performance school enhances student and teacher performance, reduces operating costs, and protects the
environment. The LAUSD Board of Education recognized these advantages in its October 2003 High
Performance Schools Resolution. The Resolution directs staff to “continue its effort to ensure that every
District new school and modernization project, from the beginning of the design process, incorporate
high performance school criteria to the extent feasible.”
2. The District endorses the high performance school strategies defined in the Collaborative for High
Performance School (CHPS) Best Practices Manuals, in particular “Volume II, Design,” and “Volume III,
Criteria” (available at www.chps.net).
3. High performance schools have the following characteristics:
a. Optimal Lighting & Daylighting: Research has repeatedly shown that students learn 20 to 30% faster
in classrooms that take full advantage of daylight and optimum electric lighting. Daylight and electric
light should be integrated and glare eliminated. Lighting should be "designed," not simply specified.
b. Healthy Indoor Environment: A healthy indoor environment is essential. According to the

Environmental Protection Agency, indoor air is frequently up to five times more polluted than outside
air. Children are particularly susceptible to indoor pollutants. The key factors are proper ventilation
using outside and filtered air and low-emitting materials such as flooring, ceiling tiles and paint.
c. Comfort: Classroom comfort includes thermal, visual, and acoustic comfort. Thermal comfort ensures
that students and staff are neither hot nor cold. Visual comfort means lighting that makes visual tasks
easier and visual stimulation and a connection to the out-of-doors through the use of eye level windows.
Acoustic comfort means teachers and students can hear one another because ventilation system and
outdoor and indoor noise are minimized.
d. Energy Efficiency: Energy efficiency saves money while conserving nonrenewable resources and
reducing pollution. Space conditioning systems should use high efficiency equipment, be "right sized"
for the estimated demand, and include controls that boost system performance. Lighting systems
should use high efficiency lamps and ballasts, optimize the number of light fixtures, incorporate controls
that ensure peak system performance, and successfully integrate electric lighting and daylighting.
Building shells must integrate and optimize insulation, glazing, shading, thermal mass, air leakage, and
light-colored exterior surfaces.
e. Water Efficiency: Reducing indoor and landscaping water use minimizes the use of this scarce resource
and saves money. Indoor strategies include water efficient toilets, non-water urinals, faucets,
showerheads and appliances. Landscaping strategies include drought tolerant plants and water efficient
irrigation systems.
f. Storm Water Management: Minimizing and cleaning stormwater runoff can further reduce water
demand and help clean the Pacific Ocean.
g. Outdoor Surfaces and Spaces: Where practical schools should incorporate cool roofs, landscaping,
teaching gardens, and high albedo paving materials in order to minimize heat island effects.
1) Care must be exercised to minimize glare.

h. Environmental Materials: Schools should incorporate materials and products that are durable,
nontoxic, grown sustainably, have a high-recycled content, and can easily be recycled. Properly specified
materials that can meet these goals include flooring (linoleum, carpet), ceiling tiles, insulation and
concrete containing fly ash.
i. Waste Management: Schools should be designed with appropriate spaces for the storage and
collection of recyclables. Construction and demolition waste should be recycled to the maximum extent
feasible.
j. Easy to Maintain & Operate: Schools should be easy to use and maintain. Surfaces and equipment
should be durable. Teachers should have control over classroom temperature and lighting, and, along
with Maintenance and Operations staff, be trained in their effective use.
k. Commissioned: Commissioning helps ensure that schools operate as designed. Commissioning tests,
verifies, and fine-tunes key building system performance so that it reaches the highest levels of
efficiency.
l. Schools That Teach: Permanent educational displays that describe the school’s high performance
features further enhance learning. Schools can be tools that illustrate a wide spectrum of scientific,
mathematic, and social issues. For example, mechanical and lighting systems can illustrate energy use
and conservation, and daylighting systems can help students understand the sun’s daily and yearly
movements.
m. Community Resource: The most successful schools have a high level of parent and community
involvement. Involvement can be enhanced by designs that facilitate the school’s use for neighborhood
meetings and other community needs.
B. NEW CONSTRUCTION (NEW SCHOOLS AND NEW BUILDINGS ON EXISTING CAMPUSES)
1. High Performance School (CHPS) Requirement
a. All new schools and new occupiable and conditioned buildings on existing campuses shall, at a
minimum qualify as a CHPS project as defined in the version of CHPS “Best Practices Manual Volume
III, Criteria”, applicable at the time the project is submitted to the Division of State Architect (DSA).
(CHPS Volume III is available at www.chps.net) All projects submitted to DSA after January 1, 2010
shall be either self certified or CHPS verified. Coordinate with Design Manager.
b. The District seeks to meet as many CHPS criteria as economically feasible. Defining characteristics are
listed in Section A.3, above. Some are referenced in this “School Design Guide” as specific LAUSD
requirements for new schools. Others are included in the CHPS Best Practices Manual, “Volume II,
Design” and “Volume III, Criteria.”
c. The District advocates an integrated "whole building" design approach to maximize the interactive
effects of good practice and the District’s criteria and requirements. Key systems and technologies must
be considered together from the beginning of the design process, at preliminary schematic design and
optimized for long-term performance.
d. Architect shall coordinate with District to maximize the high performance points from school’s
operation policy, and facilities standards. Architects shall submit a CHPS Scorecard at the following
milestones:

1) Schematic Design: Forecast of CHPS points anticipated to be achievable supported by project

Basis of Design and preliminary plans.
2) Design Development: Detailed account of CHPS points achieved in the school design with
supporting references to specific narratives, plans, specifications and cut sheets in the submittal.
3) Construction Drawings (50%): Detailed account of CHPS points to be achieved in the school
design with supporting references to specific narratives, plans, specifications and cut sheets in the
submittal.
4) Final Design (100% Construction Drawings): Final accounting of CHPS points achieved
with the signature of the registered project architect.
e. During the Construction Phase, the Architect shall have at least two meetings with the District’s
Representative, Contractor and Inspector to review, confirm and document, that the claimed points are
being achieved, as designed: Final accounting of CHPS points achieved with the signature of the
registered project architect shall be submitted at construction completion.
2. CHPS Specifics
CHPS Best Practices Manual “Volume III, Criteria” defines many prerequisites and optional credits that
address a wide range of high performance design opportunities. The following topics address key areas of
priority to the District.
a. Lighting and Daylighting
1) Electric lighting standards and control requirements are described in the Electrical Power and
Lighting section of this “School Design Guide.”
2) Adequate daylighting, integrated with electric lighting and controls, is required in all classrooms.
3) Lighting and daylighting shall be designed and calculated in accordance with the criteria and
examples included in the Southern California Edison “Classroom Lighting Guidelines.” For
daylighting, this approach requires computer analysis – utilizing a CHPS-approved methodology
(see CHPS “Volume III, Criteria, IEQ Credit Daylighting”)
b. Energy Performance
1) By integrating the design of all building components to increase energy efficiency, the source
energy requirement of each proposed new school shall be a minimum of 15% better than
required by the California Energy Efficiency Standards (Title 24) in force at the time the project
is submitted to DSA, unless compelling justification is provided to the District for a lower
efficiency. Under no circumstances shall any new school perform less than 10% better than
Title 24.
2) The Design Team shall study the use of renewable energy sources for all new schools and
new buildings on existing campuses. The goal is for 50% - 100% of each new school’s electricity
or new building on existing campus to be provided by on site renewable energy. A feasibility
study shall be submitted by the end of schematic design and shall determine the most cost
effective renewable energy technology or combination of technologies, such as solar
(photovoltaic), wind and solar hot water systems. A percentage weighted value of the school
annual electrical energy consumption calculated for the Title-24 performance compliance

approach may be used as the basis of this study. The percentage value will vary for each building
type and will be provided by the District. The study shall include the following as a minimum:
a) The description of technologies considered.
b) A discussion on the feasibility of each technology.
c) Supporting facts and figures.
d) Impact on the architecture, structure of the building(s), and site.
3) The renewable energy system shall be OFOI (Owner Furnished Owner Installed). However,
A&E shall design the infrastructure required to support the selected system.
a) Photovoltaic: Grid interactive only (no battery backup) system with the following
considerations.
(1) Building Considerations: It is recommended that mechanical PV panels be located

on taller buildings with less equipment such as Multi Purpose, Gym, Lunch Shelter
and Classroom Buildings, (if the equipment allows enough space), other structures
such as stair case shelter or covered walkways shall be considered as well. Another
consideration may be displacement of some of the conventional roofing product
with building integrated PV modules, such as roof slates and standing seam metal
roofing products.
(a) Building orientation to maximize system efficiency.
(b) Ensure the roof area or other installation site is capable of handling the
desired system size.
(c) Locate the array to minimize shading from foliage, vent pipes, and adjacent
structures.
(d) If roof mounted, verify that the roof is capable of handling additional weight
of PV system. Augment roof structure as necessary.
(e) Roof mounted system shall include considerations for roof maintenance and
access.
(f) System to be installed on taller buildings or areas where it is not accessible to

students to prevent vandalism.
(2) System Design Consideration:
(a) Specify sunlight and weather resistant materials for all outdoor equipment.
(b) Design the system in compliance with all applicable building and electrical
codes.
(c) Design the system with a minimum of electrical losses due to wiring, fuses,
switches and inverters.
(d) Ensure the design meets local utility interconnection requirements.
(e) Properly ground the system parts to reduce the threat of shock hazards and
induced surges.

(f) PV system equipment such as inverters shall be located in appropriate

spaces. Take into consideration the necessity for air conditioning.
i. Avoid roof installation of inverters.
(g) Demand, KWh, KW, VAR, VARS meters shall utilize BACNET
communication protocols. Provide connections between this the PV system
and the Energy Management System.
(h) Specify equipment that has been approved by the California Energy
Commission and listed in LAUSD standard specifications.
(i) Refer to 3.7.E for additional requirements.
(j) The renewable energy system shall be design to meet all state requirements,
codes, utility company incentive programs requirements, and industry
standards.
b) Wind Technology.
(1) Small Building mounted wind turbines may be a viable option depending on site
location.
c) Solar Hot Water Systems. (not OFOI, Preferably as part of construction stage)
(1) Solar Hot Water Systems should be considered for pool heating as supplement to
natural gas or Heat Pump Heating Systems.
c. Acoustics
1) Analyze the acoustical environment of the site (such as traffic) and the characteristics of planned
building components (such as HVAC), and design to minimally achieve a classroom acoustical
performance of 45 dBA background noise level (unoccupied with HVAC system on) or better
(see CHPS “Volume III, Criteria,” IEQ Prerequisite Minimal Acoustical Performance and Credit
Improved Acoustical Performance).
2) While the desired performance target of 35 dBA may not be practicably achievable, the Architect
shall explore innovative design options for obtaining its speech cognition goal with wall and
ceiling reflective surfaces, strategically placed absorptive surfaces, and voice reinforcement
systems.
3) For additional criteria, refer to the District’s “Building Acoustical Requirements”, Section 3.10.
d. Indoor Air Quality
1) Appropriate design strategies shall be utilized to ensure healthy indoor air quality (see CHPS
“volume III, Criteria,” IEQ Prerequisite Indoor Air Quality Minimum Requirements).The issues
that shall be addressed include minimum outside air ventilation, HVAC design and air filtration,
and moisture control.
2) During construction, steps must be taken to provide CHPS-mandated temporary construction

ventilation; dust protection; product preconditioning; sequencing; vacuuming and duct cleaning;
building flush-out; and post-occupancy ventilation (see CHPS “Volume III, Criteria,” IEQ
Prerequisite Indoor Air Quality Minimum Requirements).

e. Commissioning
1) The District will provide CHPS-compliant commissioning services for all new school building
construction (see CHPS “Volume III, Criteria, Energy Prerequisite Fundamental Building
Systems Testing and Training and Credit Enhanced Commissioning). The Architect shall assist
the District-appointed Commissioning Agent as required, and incorporate in the Contract
Documents the necessary provisions specifying the General Contractor commissioning-related
tasks, including Division 1 to 33 Specification Section(s), Commissioning Plans, and other
documents. Contact the District representative for further information.
2) The required “Basis for Design” must be complete with all design parameters, assumptions and
criteria (not simply a reference to LAUSD design guidelines).
3) The following systems and assemblies will be commissioned:
a) Roof Top Units.
b) All equipment and controls of Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Systems.
c) Lighting Controls, including all equipment, light sensors, motion detectors, etc.
d) Dimming controls and interaction to lighting systems.
e) Domestic and process water piping and mixing systems.
f) Energy Management Systems.
g) Photo-Voltaic Systems.
h) Irrigation Systems.
i) Acoustical Performance.
f. Water Efficiency
1) To the maximum extent feasible, incorporate landscaping and interior water efficiency strategies
as listed in Section A3e, above. Develop a water use budget for exterior and ornamental water
use as specified in design Guide Section 3.9.D.1 Planting and Irrigation, Irrigation Design
Requirements (see CHPS “Volume III, Criteria,” Water Prerequisite Create Water Use Budget).
g. Storm Water Management
1) Utilize the LAUSD “Post-Construction Storm Water Management Plan” (“BMP Selection White
Paper”) and accompanying Check List for site planning for enhanced water quality and for the
selection of appropriate Best Management Practices. (See also CHPS “Volume III, Criteria,”
Credits Limit Stormwater Runoff and Treat Stormwater Runoff.
h. Construction Waste Management
1) Establish a minimum non-hazardous construction and demolition debris recycling requirement

of 75% by weight as defined in Specification 01 7419, Construction & Demolition Waste

Management (see also CHPS “Volume III, Criteria,” Materials Prerequisite Construction Site
Waste Management).
i. Materials
1) To the maximum extent feasible, specify CHPS-compliant low emitting materials (see CHPS Best
Practices Manual “Volume III, Criteria,” IEQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials). On its website,
CHPS maintains a list of low emitting materials.
j. Educational Displays
1) Provide at least one permanent education display on the school site that describes the high
performance features that are part of the school’s design (see CHPS “Volume III, Criteria,
Prerequisite Educational Display).
k. Showcase Schools
1) For specific schools or buildings, the District may elect to increase the utilization of CHPS “Best
Practices” – especially those in “Volume III, Criteria” – to improve “green” performance and
obtain incentive funding.
l. Incentive Programs
1) The Architect shall submit each project to the applicable high performance related incentive
programs.
C. EXISTING FACILITIES (MODERNIZATION PROJECTS)
1. Overview
a. High performance strategies shall be integrated into all appropriate school modernization and addition
projects. Defining characteristics are listed in Section A.3, above. The strategies detailed in CHPS “Best
Practices Manual Volume II Design” shall be followed. Where appropriate, the CHPS “Best Practices
Manual Volume III Criteria” prerequisites and credits shall be followed. Major modernization projects
as defined in CHPS “Best Practices Manual Volume III Criteria,” shall qualify as CHPS projects under
the CHPS Volume III minimum standards and as defined in section B.
2. Specifics
a. Lighting and Daylighting

1) When designing classroom lighting and daylighting systems, seek opportunities to incorporate the
criteria and examples included in the Southern California Edison “Classroom Lighting
Guidelines.”
b. Energy Performance
1) To the maximum extent feasible, all relevant projects shall incorporate energy efficiency
measures. Whenever the building envelope (roofs, walls), electrical system, space conditioning or
water heating system is upgraded, opportunities for improving energy efficiency shall be
identified and implemented.
2) As required by the District, the Design Team shall study the use of renewable energy sources, ad
feasibility of application to the project(s). Unless required otherwise by the District, the goal is for
50%-100% electricity on existing campus to be provided by renewable energy. A feasibility study
shall be submitted by the end of schematic design and shall determine the most cost effective
renewable energy technology or combination of technologies, such as solar (photovoltaic), wind
and solar hot water systems. A percentage weighted value of the school annual electrical energy
consumption calculated for the Title-24 performance compliance approach may be used as the
basis of this study. The percentage value will vary for each building type and will be provided by
the District. The study shall include the following as a minimum:
a) The description of technologies considered.
b) A discussion on the feasibility of each technology.
c) Supporting facts and figures.
d) Impact on the architecture, structure of the building(s), roofs, and site.
3) The renewable energy system shall be design to meet all state requirements, codes, utility
company incentive programs requirements, and industry standards.
a) Photovoltaic (PV): Grid interactive only (no battery backup) system with the following
considerations.
(1) Building Considerations: It is recommended that mechanical PV panels be located

on buildings with less equipment such as Multi-Purpose, Gym, Lunch Shelter and
Classroom Buildings, (if the equipment allows enough space), other structures such
as stair case shelter or covered walkways shall be considered as well. Another
consideration may be displacement of some of the conventional roofing product
with building integrated PV modules, such as roof slates and standing seam metal
roofing products.
(a) Building orientation to maximize system efficiency.
(b) Ensure the roof area or other installation site is capable of handling the
desired system size.
(c) Locate the array to minimize shading from foliage, vent pipes, and adjacent
structures.
(d) If roof mounted, verify that the roof is capable of handling additional weight
of PV system. Augment roof structure as necessary. Address any necessary
modifications and alterations to the roof.

i. Roof mounted systems shall include considerations for roof

maintenance and access.
(2) System Design Consideration:
(a) Specify sunlight and weather resistant materials for all outdoor equipment.
(b) Design the system in compliance with all applicable building and electrical
codes, and industry standards.
(c) Investigate the existing structural conditions to determine feasibility of

structure to receive the PV panels; reinforce structure as needed. Provide
structural analysis, calculations and construction details for DSA submittal
and approval.
(d) Locate Inverters and other equipment in appropriate locations. Take into
consideration the room’s conditions, including necessity for air conditioning.
i. Avoid roof installation of inverters as much as possible.
(e) Design the system with a minimum of electrical losses due to wiring, fuses,
switches and inverters.
(f) Ensure the design meets local utility interconnection requirements.
(g) Properly ground the system parts to reduce the threat of shock hazards and
induced surges.
(h) Demand, KWh, KW, VAR, VARS meters shall utilize BACNET
communication protocols. Provide connections between this the PV system
and the Energy Management System.
(i) Specify equipment that has been approved by the California Energy
Commission and listed in LAUSD standard specifications.
(j) Refer to 3.7.E for additional requirements.
c. Acoustics
1) Incorporate strategies to maximize classroom acoustics in all projects that impact classroom
acoustics, such as space conditioning systems, exterior and interior walls, and floor, ceiling and
wall finishes.
d. Water Efficiency
1) To the maximum extent feasible, incorporate interior and landscaping water efficiency strategies
as identified in Section A3e, above.
e. Storm Water Management

1) Utilize the LAUSD “Post-Construction Storm Water Management Plan” (“BMP Selection White
Paper”) and accompanying Check List for site planning for enhanced water quality and for the
selection of appropriate Best Management Practices.
f. Construction Waste Management
1) Establish a minimum non-hazardous construction and demolition debris recycling requirements

of 75% by weight as defined in Specification 01340, Construction & Demolition Waste
Management (see also CHPS “Volume III, Criteria, Materials Prerequisite.
g. Materials
1) To the maximum extent feasible, specify CHPS-compliant low emitting materials (see CHPS Best
Practices Manual “Volume III, Criteria,” IEQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials). On its website,
CHPS maintains a Low Emitting Materials Table listing compliant materials.
h. Commissioning
1) The District will determine which modernization and expansion projects will provide CHPS-
compliant commissioning services (see CHPS “Volume III, Criteria, Energy Prerequisite
Fundamental Building Systems Testing and Training and Credit Enhanced Commissioning). The
Architect shall assist the District-appointed Commissioning Agent as required, and incorporate in
the Contract Documents the necessary provisions specifying the General Contractor
commissioning-related tasks, including Division 1 to 33 Specification Section(s), Commissioning
Plans, and other documents. Contact the District representative for further information.
2) The required “Basis for Design” must be complete with all design parameters, assumptions and
criteria (not simply a reference to LAUSD design guidelines).
3) The following systems and assemblies will be commissioned:
a) Roof Top Units.
b) All equipment and controls of Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
Systems.
c) Lighting Controls, including all equipment, light sensors, motion detectors, etc.
d) Dimming controls and interaction to lighting systems.
e) Domestic and process water piping and mixing systems.
f) Energy Management Systems.
g) Photo-Voltaic Systems.
h) Irrigation Systems.
i) Acoustical Performance.

i. Incentive Programs
1) The Architect shall submit each project to the applicable high performance related incentive
programs.
D. LAUSD RECOMMENDED CHPS POINTS
LAUSD has determined the following categories and points to be readily achievable in new construction and
major modernization projects. The following table provides a summary of recommended points. Refer to
LAUSD CHPS Score Card for additional information and requirements. The score card can be accessed via the
following link:
CLASS (CHPS CREDIT CREDIT TITLE LAUSD

PTS.) NUMBER (POTENTIAL RECOMMENDED
POINTS) POINTS
LEADERSHIP, EDUCATION AND INNOVATION
(1 prerequisite; 13 possible points)
Leadership LEI 1.1 District Level 1

(4 pts.) Commitment
Integrated Design
LEI 1.2 2
Educational Display
Schools as Learning LEI 2.0 Mandatory
(Prerequisite)
Tools
(1pts.) Demonstration Areas
LEI 2.1 1
Innovation (8 LEI 3.1 Innovation
0
pts.)
LEI 3.2 Design for Adaptability, 0
Durability and
Disassembly
SUSTAINABLE SITES
(2 prerequisites; 14 possible points)
Site Selection
SS1.0 Code Compliance Mandatory
(5 pts.)
(Prerequisite)
SS1.1 Environmentally Sensitive 1

Land
SS1.2 Central Location 1
SS1.3 Joint Use of Facilities 1
SS1.4 Joint Use of Parks 0
SS1.5 Reduced Footprint 1

Transportation (3 SS2.1 Public Transportation 1

pts.)
SS2.2 Human Powered 1
Transportation
SS2.3 Parking Minimization 1
Stormwater SS3.0 Construction Site Runoff Mandatory

Management Control (Prerequisite)
(2 pts.)
SS3.1 Limit Stormwater Runoff 1
SS3.2 Treat Stormwater Runoff 1
Outdoor Surfaces & SS4.1 Reduce Heat Islands – 1

Spaces Landscaping Issues
(3 pts.)
SS4.2 Reduce Heat Islands – 1
Cool Roofs
. SS4.3 School Garden 1
Outdoor Lighting (1 SS5.1 Light Pollution Reduction 0

pt.)
WATER
(1 prerequisite; 9 possible points)
Outdoor Systems WE1.0 Create Water Use Budget Mandatory

(4 pts.) (Prerequisite)
WE1.1 Reduce Potable Water 1

Use for Non-Recreational
Landscaping Areas
WE1.2 Reduce Potable Water 1

Use for Recreational
Area Landscaping
WE1.3 Irrigation Systems Testing 1

and Training
Indoor Systems WE2.1 Reduce Sewage 1

(4 pts.) Conveyance from Toilets
and Urinals
WE2.2 Reduce Indoor Potable 2

Water Use
Water Efficiency WE3.1 Water Management 1

(1 pt.) System
ENERGY
(2 prerequisites; 29 possible points; At least 2 points required)

Energy Efficiency EE1.0 Minimum Energy Mandatory

(22 pts.) Performance
(Prerequisite)
EE1.1 Superior Energy 5

Performance
EE1.2 Energy Conservation 0

Interlocks
EE1.3 Natural Ventilation 0
EE1.4 Energy Management 0

Systems
Alternate Energy EE2.1 On Site Renewable 0

Sources Energy
(5 pts.)
Commissioning & EE3.0 Fundamental Mandatory

Training Commissioning
EE3.1 Enhanced 2
Commissioning
CLIMATE
(8 possible points)
Greenhouse Gas CL1.1 Climate Change Action 0

Emission Reduction
(3 pts.)
Greenhouse Gas CL2.1 Grid Neutral 0

Emission Reduction
(5 pts.) CL2.2 Zero Net Energy 0
MATERIALS AND WASTE MANAGEMENT

(2 prerequisites; 18 possible points)
Recycling (P) ME1.0 Storage and Collection of Mandatory

Recyclables (Prerequisite)
Construction Waste ME2.0 Minimum Construction Mandatory

Management Site Waste Management
ME2.1 Construction Site Waste 1

Management
Building Reuse ME3.1 Building Reuse -Structure 0

(3 pts.) and Shell
ME3.2 Building Reuse - Interior 0

Non- structural Elements
Sustainable Materials - ME4.1 Recycled Content 1

Single Attribute
(7 pts.) ME4.2 Rapidly Renewable and 0
Organically Grown
Materials
ME4.3 Certified Wood 0
ME4.4 Salvaged Materials 0
INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY

(4 prerequisites, 25 possible points)
Lighting and EQ1.1 Daylighting 2

Daylighting (6
pts.) EQ1.2 View Windows 1
EQ1.3 Electric Lighting 1
Indoor Air Quality and EQ2.0A Minimum HVAC and Mandatory

Thermal Comfort Construction IEQ
(16 pts.) Requirements
(Prerequisite)
EQ2.0B ASHRAE 55 Thermal Mandatory

Comfort Code
Compliance and Moisture
Control (Prerequisite)
EQ2.0C Minimum Filtration Mandatory

(Prerequisite)
EQ2.1 Enhanced Filtration 0
EQ2.2 Low-Emitting Materials 3
EQ2.3 Ducted Returns 0
EQ2.4 Thermal Displacement 1

Ventilation
EQ2.5 Controllability of Systems 2
EQ2.6 Chemical and Pollutant 1

Source Control
EQ2.7 Mercury Reduction 0
Acoustics EQ3.0 Minimum Acoustical Mandatory

(3 pts.) Performance
(Prerequisite)

EQ3.1 Improved Acoustical 0

Performance
TOTAL RECOMMENDED POINTS 43


Book Three
Technical Criteria
Book 3: Technical Criteria

3.0 TECHNICAL CRITERIA
3.1 ARCHITECTURAL
3.3 STRUCTURAL
3.4 PLUMBING
3.5 FIRE PROTECTION
3.6 HVAC SYSTEMS
3.7 ELECTRICAL POWER AND LIGHTING
3.8 ELECTRICAL COMMUNICATIONS AND AV SYSTEMS

Book 3: Technical Criteria
3.1 ARCHITECTURAL
B. MATERIALS AND FINISHES
C. MODERNIZATION AND ALTERATIONS
D. HISTORIC PRESERVATION
Book 3: Technical Criteria 3.1 Architectural
3.1 ARCHITECTURAL
1. Architectural Discipline
a. The architectural personnel must review all sections of the School Design Guide and coordinate the
requirements of the different disciplines. If discrepancies are found, bring them to the attention of the
District’s authorized representative for resolution.
b. Refer to the District “Guide Specifications” for materials and installations approved by the District.
Unless approved in writing by the District, project specifications shall utilize the District “Guide
Specifications” provided and approved by the District to specify materials, equipment and installations.
The District “Guide Specifications” shall be edited to reflect the conditions and requirements of each
specific project. Refer to section 1.2, Submittal Requirements, J, General Drawings and Specifications
Requirements.
2. Other Design Disciplines
a. There are requirements in this section that affect the requirements for the other design disciplines. The
architectural discipline is responsible for the compliance and coordination of all work, the architectural
personnel must assure the full communication of design conditions and requirements to the other
disciplines and be certain the other disciplines are in compliance. (Examples include requirements for
insulation, monolithic single glazing, and room-surface reflectances.) In return, the architectural
personnel must be familiar with the requirements for the other disciplines to be certain their needs are
incorporated into the design. (Examples include amply sized relief air openings at each classroom, fire-
protection measures where ducts or raceways penetrate fire-resistive walls, protective enclosures for
exposed valve assemblies or control devices, and location of large noise-generating equipment remotely
from classrooms.)
3. Seismic Bracing and Anchorage
a. Assure provision of seismic restraints, anchorage or bracing, for all casework, display cases, equipment,
signage, or special finish materials (e.g., suspended ceilings), including Owner Furnished items, in
accordance with requirements of the California Building Code.
B. MATERIALS AND FINISHES
1. General
a. Materials shall be sustainable, affordable, durable, aesthetically pleasing, and require minimal cleaning
and maintenance.
b. Avoid complicated special details.
c. Use standard systems and materials in standard sizes produced and readily available from manufacturers
based in the United States.
d. Use vandal-resistant and graffiti-resistant materials and finishes.
e. Provide non-slip surfaces for all exterior paths of travel and for interior floor areas specifically subject to
wetting.
f. Building features (such as grilles, pipes, ducts, or similar elements) that are accessible to vandalism shall
be finished to blend with the building exterior to avoid creating attractive targets.
g. When more than one item of material or equipment are specified (as in “three or more manufacturers”),
provide adequate facilities and coordination to assure that all spaces are sized to accommodate any item
specified and that structural, mechanical and electrical elements will provide adequate support to any of
the items.
h. Avoid materials and details with sharp, jagged edges and rough textures, especially near entrances and
circulation pathways. Finishes of surfaces within vandalism reach shall be paintable.
i. Intumescent paint may not be used unless approved by the District. Do not use Intumescent paint
where it is accessible or susceptible to vandalism. Vandalism such as scraping, graffiti, etc. can
compromise integrity of Intumescent paint and become a maintenance problem.
j. EIFS (Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems) may not be used unless approved by the District. If
approved, high impact products must be used where accessible or susceptible to vandalism.
2. Site Elements
a. Provide one 35’-0” high flagpole at each school, with one-story buildings or 50’-0” high flagpole at each
school with two-story buildings or higher.
b. Show location and provide details for school signage and electronic display marquee. Keep signs above
Students’ reach.
c. If flag pole is located in the landscaped area, a concrete pad around the pole and access to it shall be
provided.
3. Concrete
a. Provide vapor barriers for slabs on grade throughout building. Refer to Guide Specification section
Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete slabs shall be poured directly over vapor barriers, set over sand, as
recommended by ACI 302.1R-04. Concrete slabs shall not be poured directly over the sand fill, since
wet or saturated fill above the vapor retarder can significantly increase the time required for a slab to dry
to levels required by the manufacturers of floor coverings and adhesives.
b. Provide adequate control and expansion joints for walkways, curbs, retaining walls, etc.
4. Metals
a. Typical handrails are constructed of 1-1/2 inch diameter metal pipe. Exterior handrails are to be
unpainted galvanized steel pipe. Handrails may be powder coated provided they are designed in a
manner that will not require field welding installation. Interior handrails may be powder coated steel.
Handrails shall be designed in such a way or have skate deterrent devices installed to deter skateboarders
or students from sliding down them while maintaining ADA handrail requirements.
b. Use 12- to 14- gage galvanized steel or extruded aluminum for exterior louvers, 16-gage for interior.
c. Use galvanized chain link fencing and gates for all fencing except for main entries, or special public
exposures where more decorative fencing would be appropriate (with District approval).
d. Do not use metal siding in areas less than ten feet above grade where it might be vandalized by graffiti,
damaged by impact, or subject to heat gain that could cause injury to students or staff.
e. Guardrails:
1) The California Building Code requires guardrails at unenclosed floor and roof openings, open
and glazed sides of stairways and ramps, balconies or porches, which are more than 30 inches
above grade or floor below. Roofs used for other than service of the building shall be protected
by guardrails.
2) The Code states that the top of the guardrails shall not be less than 42 inches in height. However,
the architect should determine the appropriate height necessary to provide security for the
students particularly in high traffic areas such as stair landings that serve a large volume of
students or where a turn in direction is required.
3) Roof areas, service areas or other buildings areas that would be accessible to students by climbing
over a guard, must be protected by an appropriate barrier that will prevent students from
accessing these areas.
4) Typical guardrails are constructed of 1-1/2 inch diameter galvanized metal pipe (as describe in
the CBC). Flat top rails wider than 2 inches that might encourage sitting or placement of books
or other objects should not be used. Guardrails that are placed on curbs must be designed so that
the curb cannot be used as a step by students.
5) Guardrails must be designed to resist kicking and other abuse. Open guardrails shall have
intermediate rails or an ornamental pattern such that a sphere 4 inches in diameter cannot pass
through. Intermediate rails and ornamental patterns should be designed so that they do not
provide a “ladder” for students to climb on. Vertical pickets spaced 4 inches on center, a metal
mesh material that complies with the CBC, or a low wall should be installed.
f. All exterior exposed steel, including structural members, shall be galvanized.
g. Refer to 3.3, Structural Engineering, for finishes of structural steel.
5. Wood
a. Do not use wood trims, fascias, moldings, etc. except for Existing Facilities projects where it is
necessary to match existing.
b. Specify grade and finish for all exposed wood to minimize maintenance where wood is being specified.
c. For additional information on finish carpentry and architectural woodwork, see, Guide Specifications.
6. Thermal & Moisture Protection
a. Slope roofs at a minimum of 1/2" per foot to roof drains. Clearly show drainage patterns and
elevations on roof and discharge areas.
b. Use roofing material meeting UL requirements for Class "A" fire rating.
c. The roof system shall meet the FM 1-90 wind uplifting rating.
d. Roof system shall meet the “Cool Roof” criteria, as outlined in the California Energy Code Section 118.
e. Avoid the use of pitch pans for roof penetration flashing. All roof types have specific details for all types
of roof penetrations. Consult with manufacturer for specific details.
f. All roof penetrations including, but not limited to; equipment platforms plumbing vents and base
flashings are to be a minimum of 8” above the finished roof level.
g. At concrete floor slabs on grade provide, as a minimum quality standard, a vapor barrier of Polyolefin
based 15 mils minimum thickness, meeting or exceeding ASTM E1745, 10 feet minimum width with
taped or sealed joints, 2 inches of sand below, over 4” of select gravel drainage fill.
h. Do not use interior downspouts and gutters without District authorization.
i. Do not project downspouts into pedestrian areas.
j. Direct downspouts into planting areas or other site elements that will reduce or slow storm-water runoff
from the site. Special attention shall be given to planter details to divert the water away from the
building and the building’s foundation.
k. On structures with sloped roofs, provide gutters, downspouts and other associated accessories as
required to facilitate efficient water runoff and ensure adequate drainage.
l. Avoid running conduit and piping on the roof. Where it is unavoidable, the length shall be minimized
and shall be detailed appropriately to accommodate roof replacement. All conduits on roof should be
braced on lightweight blocks. Do not use wood blocks since they hold moisture, which will seep to roof
membrane.
7. Doors and Entryways
a. Door swings shall not overlap, conflict or otherwise interfere with use of adjacent doors or other areas
requiring access.
b. Door stops shall be provided for all doors. Doors and stops (within 4” of wall face) shall be located at
least half of the door width away from the hinges in order to prevent racking of the door frame.
c. Locate doors to accommodate swing, however, if the door swing is less than 180°, a wing wall or other
architectural element shall be designed to eliminate trip hazards created by the door stop.
d. Exterior doors shall be out-swinging and protected by a covered walk or canopy with appropriate roof
drainage.
e. All exterior entrances shall be designed to allow safe access during stormy weather (rain, hail, ice, etc.) by
providing a non-slip, code-compliant, sloped-for-drainage walking surface.
f. Exterior balcony entryways:
1) Provide security at entries to balconies to prevent unauthorized access when school is closed.
2) Provide slopes and drainage means for washing down of balconies.
g. At all major or frequently used entries, including doorways directly from the outdoors to any habitable
school room, provide walk-off mats to reduce the amount of dirt, dust, pollen and other particles
entering the building. Walk-off mats shall be securely adhered to the floor.
h. Configure major entry approaches to channel foot traffic away from dirt and grass areas for at least the
last fifteen to twenty feet prior to entering the building.
i. Do not provide glazed openings in exterior doors, unless glass light is adequately protected with a
security screen.
j. Provide concrete slab or equivalent surfacing outside of all exterior doors, of width sufficient to take
doorstop when door is opened 180 degrees against building wall.
k. Door frames and cased openings shall be hollow metal.
l. Use solid-core wood doors at interior and overhead-protected exterior openings, except where fire-
ratings require hollow-metal doors. Do not use hollow-metal doors for classroom doors in one-hour
fire-rated walls.
m. Use insulated hollow-metal steel doors at unprotected or minimally protected exterior openings, and
where fire-protection rating requires them.
n. Use paint-grade doors, except in areas of low abuse with special design conditions (administration areas,
for example) where stain-grade may be used.
o. Double doors at building exteriors shall have a removable center jamb for more secure engagement of
the locking mechanism.
p. Interior double doors should not have a removable center jamb.
q. Panic hardware on wood doors shall be surface mounted with no bottom rod.
r. Plan doors to avoid interference with drinking fountains, downspouts, light fixtures, walk ramps, and
other components or equipment.
s. Do not locate exterior doors adjacent to windows or window areas that can be broken to provide access
to door hardware.
t. Provide bug sweeps on doors to food preparation areas.
u. Do not use electric door openers for ADA accessibility without prior District approval in writing.
v. The District “Guide Specification” for finish hardware is extremely comprehensive and must be edited
carefully by an experienced hardware specifier for each project. Contact the District authorized
representative to obtain the manufacturer of the lockset cylinder that will be furnished by the District
for each project.
w. For parking structure doors see Section 2.3 - D “Parking Structure Security”.
8. Windows and Openings
a. Windows shall be aluminum or steel.
b. Use of Hollow-Metal (HM) windows is not acceptable for exterior use due to districts experience with
HM window leaks. HM windows are acceptable in interior applications only.
c. Windows preferably shall be double-hung, single-hung, or projection type.
d. Projection and casement windows shall not intrude into circulation areas to cause a hazard.
e. Provide a minimum of one operable 30"-wide window in each classroom that can be used both for
emergency ventilation and for emergency egress. This window shall have a minimum clearance opening
of 6 square feet. Maximum sill height for egress window shall be 44 inches above interior finish floor.
Emergency exit windows shall not be projecting type. Where security grille is not required, emergency
windows could be a breakable or removable tempered glass identified as emergency egress window,
provided the ventilation requirements are met. Refer to Guide Specification section 10 1400, for signage
requirements.
f. Provide roof-top anchors to support window-washing equipment for washing of windows above the
second floor, unless it can be demonstrated that windows can be safely washed from inside or via an
extension ladder. They must be provided for buildings higher than four stories or 48 feet above exterior
grade (Title 8, General Industrial Safety Order).
g. In all schools, the minimum window sill height shall be 3’-0” above floor for classrooms located above
first floor.
h. Do not use large glazed openings. Whenever glazed openings are used the maximum thickness shall be
¼” insulation glass and shall not exceed 48”x72”, and 150 pounds for a single piece of glass.
i. Security: All windows accessible from the exterior shall have special security measures to prevent
building access by breaking glass and entering through the window or by reaching door or window
hardware. Accessible windows include any windows with bottom sills less than ten feet above grade,
balconies, roofs with any portion lower than ten feet, or other access points.
1) All panels of security screen shall be operable to allow window cleaning. One of the security
screen panels should coincide with the window emergency egress.
2) Operable windows with latching mechanism shall be protected to prevent vandalism and
entering.
j. Do not locate windows or sidelights within reach of door hardware.
k. Glazing: To optimize both daylighting and energy conservation, use monolithic ¼ -inch glass with a
Visible Light Transmittance (VLT) of approximately 65% and a Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) of
approximately 0.50. (These glasses typically have a blue-green tint.) Other glazing combinations may be
considered by the District if they can be justified with life-cycle cost and energy savings. Glass color is
limited to: arctic blue, solex, light gray 14, light gray 31, solar cool bronze, and standard gray.
l. Storefronts: Avoid the use of storefront type window systems where they are susceptible to vandalism.
Consider in the design locations for required signage.
m. Do not use insulating glass (dual- or triple-glazed) without life-cycle-cost and energy-saving justification
and District approval. The maintenance cost for replacement is excessive.
n. If justified by acoustic considerations, laminated glass may be used. Do not use thermal insulating dual
glazing for noise abatement – it doesn’t work. Special acoustical glazing may be used where needed and
must be designed by an Acoustical Consultant.
o. For daylight factor required in classrooms see Section 2.4, “Environment and Sustainability” of this
guide. To achieve specified daylight factor, it may require both high windows and interior and/or
exterior light shelves (to reflect daylight onto the ceiling and to block direct sunlight on desktops).
Exterior light shelves must be designed to prevent bird roosting.
p. Stops shall be removable only from interior using vandal proof screws. Exterior stops shall be integral
with frame.
q. Insect screens must be installed on all operable windows in food preparation areas.
r. For light control, provide room-darkening venetian blinds on all classroom windows, multi-purpose,
library and other spaces with windows to be used for video presentations Provide motor operated blinds
or shades for high windows and clerestory windows.
s. For most classroom HVAC systems, a large, louvered air-relief opening must be provided in the exterior
wall of each classroom (and sometimes a smaller outside air intake opening). These openings must be
recognized, and incorporated into the design of the façade. (Ducting classroom air relief to exhaust fans
is not acceptable, both for energy efficiency and acoustical reasons.)
9. Acoustical Ceilings
a. Sound absorption provided by ceilings is the major provider of reverberation control in classrooms and
other spaces. In addition, ceilings provide a major part of the illumination in classrooms and other
spaces with indirect lighting. These factors influenced the selection of the following criteria, and must
be recognized in the design of instructional spaces.
b. In most classrooms, 90% to 100% of the area has a suspended acoustical ceiling. The ceiling tiles in
classroom ceilings shall have the following characteristics:
1) Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.70.
2) Light Reflectance: 0.83.
c. In classrooms that do not have suspended acoustical ceilings, provide equivalent sound absorption by
other means.
d. Suspended Ceiling Construction:
1) Provide seismic bracing for all suspended ceiling grid components and lighting fixtures.
2) Provide adequate clearance for all beams, piping, cable trays, ducts, and fixtures located above
suspended ceilings.
3) Provide adequate clearance for maintenance and repair of utility system components and support
elements located above suspended ceilings.
4) Ceiling tiles that provide access to serviceable equipment shall be appropriately marked with a tab
or other indicator.
5) All wiring above ceilings must be in raceways, except that low-voltage wiring may be supported
by hangers in an organized manner – not on the ceiling grid.
10. Finishes
a. Exterior stucco, concrete block, or similar finishes that are accessible from grade or are otherwise
graffiti-susceptible shall be painted to match integrally colored stucco and separated by control joints so
that each area does not exceed 144 s.f., per the Plastering Institute’s, Technical Services Information
Bureau recommendation. Also, so that each area can be easily repainted to cover graffiti and that slight
differences in paint color will not look patched. Plaster finish shall not be heavily textured. Light to
medium dash or fine sand float are preferred. Very smooth, steel trowelled finish is not permitted. CBC
accessibility regulations require that wall surface adjacent to handrails be free of sharp or abrasive
elements.
b. Integral color and split face block shall not be located in vandalism prone areas.
c. Exposed, painted or stained concrete is not allowed as floor finish in classrooms or kitchen areas.
d. Provide carpet appropriately only at administration and library areas.
e. Provide ceramic tile floors and wainscots at student’s restrooms. Ceramic tiles shall be extended up to
the ceiling in Middle School and High School boys and girls restrooms. In Elementary Schools the
wainscot shall be extended to the top of partitions. Staff restrooms shall have a 6” tile base.
f. Provide quarry tile floors set on mortar bed and base throughout food service areas. Thin set quarry tile
is acceptable for kitchen modernizations.
g. In corridors finished with drywall, provide abuse and impact resistant gypsum board.
h. For ceilings over 10'-0" in height, lay-in acoustical panel tiles shall be limited in size to 4 square feet (2’ x
2’).
i. Provide clips for acoustical ceiling panels. Do not use acoustical tile in restrooms, locker rooms and
stairways.
j. For flooring in instructional areas and corridors, use medium color and tone (light colors are difficult to
maintain).
k. To comply with the District’s lighting standards, provide reflectance values of 83% for ceilings, 60% for
walls, and 20% for floors.
l. Provide gypsum panel sheathing substrate for installation of exterior Portland Cement Plaster, except
where plywood sheathing is being used for structural reasons.
m. Provide 4’-0” high ceramic tile wainscot on walls adjacent to the sink in the hopper room.
n. Ceramic floor tiles shall be set on mortar bed. Thin set ceramic floor tile is acceptable for
modernization of restrooms at existing buildings. Ceramic tiles in restroom walls may be installed on
cementitious backer board, however, in wet areas (such as showers) the ceramic tile walls shall be
installed on mortar bed.
o. Shower Rooms – Walls shall be ceramic tile over full grout bed. Ceiling shall be ceramic tile or cement
plaster with smooth finish.
p. Locker Rooms – Walls shall be CMU, cement plaster, ceramic tile or high impact / abuse resistant
gypsum board. High impact / abuse resistant gypsum board only needs to be in exposed areas and not
behind lockers.
q. Locker Rooms - Floor shall be concrete with non-slip, non abrasive finish with hardening, sealing and
dustproofing compound.
11. Colors
a. Color selection needs to take into consideration community sensitivities, gang presence, etc.
b. Because the classroom becomes a background for the display of students' work, color schemes should
be simple and minimal.
c. In general, limit the number of interior paint colors to six for smaller schools. In individual classrooms,
limit the number of different paint colors to two, and the number of different classroom color schemes
to two or three.
d. When using bold colors, limit them to trim or accent features.
e. In selecting colors of factory-finished items, such as folding partitions, folding tables, benches, lockers,
etc., use reasonably neutral colors to allow flexibility for future color-scheme changes.
f. Ceilings, in general, shall be white, and especially in classrooms, restrooms, and similar rooms.
g. Paint color changes should utilize natural breaks such as reveals.
h. Use gloss paint for bathrooms and kitchen areas, and semi-gloss for classrooms and corridors.
12. Specialties
a. Casework shall conform to the Architectural Woodwork Standards adopted by Woodwork Institute
(WI).
b. In display cases, avoid large glass sizes at hazardous locations, or glass below 3'-0". Display case doors
shall be laminated glass without frames and provided with locks. Provide illumination of display cases.
c. Ensure that mirror heights are proper height for various areas and grade levels.
d. Provide a large directory board with map at or near main entry. Show layout of buildings, offices and
special facilities in order to orient school visitors.
e. At all building entries provide walk-off mats as Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) measure to reduce source
pollution. Walk-off mats shall be securely adhered to the floor.
f. Provide full height stainless steel corner guards to protect corner edges of interior corridors, stairways
and high abuse areas.
g. Dimensions for knee clearance in counter-mounted sinks with cabinet doors concealing the accessible
knee space must account for protrusions of surface mounted hinges and cabinet latches, where they
occur.
h. Provide locks on all cabinet doors and drawers.
13. Roof Access
a. Unless accessible by stair, provide ladder to roof from interior spaces such as mechanical, custodial or
other spaces not accessible to students. Ladder shall not interfere with operation of space or reduce its
required square footage. Exterior ladders are not acceptable.
14. Conveying Systems
a. Elevators shall comply with Access Compliance requirements and be located centrally and adjacent to
main building entry, as practical, to minimize the travel distance to disabled persons.
b. Except as required for the elevator itself, no electrical, plumbing, or mechanical items shall be housed in
elevator shaft, pit, or machine room or pass through these spaces to serve any other part of the
building.. No hatches or access panels to reach or serve other areas of the building shall be located in
the elevator shaft, pit or machine room.
c. Design pit to prevent water from entering through walls or floor.
d. In pits over 36" in depth, a permanently installed galvanized steel ladder is required per ASME A17-1.
e. Machine room-less elevators should not be used since they can only be serviced by the installing
company.
f. Holeless elevators should not be used. If water table is high use traction elevators. At locations where
an in-ground ram cannot be installed use a rope-hydraulic or traction elevators for 4 stops or less.
g. Provide an access card reader at each hoistway opening per Guide Specification section 28 1343, Access
Control Identification Management System. Hoistway access switches are not acceptable.
15. Fall Protection
a. Design fall protection systems as required by code and CAL OSHA to eliminate fall hazard.
b. Protection system shall include but not limited to stair floor openings, ladder floor opening, roof hatch,
skylights, etc.
c. Consider solutions for normal maintenance tasks on canopies, lunch shelters, covered walks, and the
like.
C. MODERNIZATIONS AND ALTERATIONS
1. General
a. In all work at existing facilities, it is critical to visit the Site and to assess existing conditions. Field verify
accuracy of any Record Documents or As-Built Documents, to the extent possible, prior to
commencing the work.
b. Refer to the asbestos and/or lead reports. When planning work at existing sites the architect shall be
aware of the potential presence of asbestos and lead. Work in such areas require coordination with the
District’s authorized representative.
2. One Hour Corridor Requirements
a. In major alteration projects to existing schools, exit corridors must be brought into compliance with
current code requirements for one-hour construction.
b. Existing wood door frames may remain in corridors with automatic fire sprinkler systems. If fire
sprinklers are not used, replace wood frames with hollow metal frames designed so that rough opening
does not have to be reframed. Door opening may have to be widened to meet ADA requirements.
3. Exit Stairs
a. Interior stairways serving three or more floors shall be enclosed in one-hour fire rated construction.
b. Existing open exterior stairs shall be reviewed with DSA to develop acceptable methods of compliance.
c. Fire sprinkler systems for the entire building may be an acceptable substitute for stair enclosure.
4. New Suspended Ceilings
a. Where new suspended ceilings are provided in existing corridors or classrooms, the method of
installation must be clearly detailed and acceptable to DSA.
b. If the existing ceiling is part of one-hour fire resistive construction, penetrations or partial removal must
maintain one-hour construction.
c. Verify that existing construction will support new ceiling and lighting fixtures.
d. Provide structural support for all new ducts, piping and air conditioning equipment.
5. Coring or Saw-Cutting Existing Concrete and Masonry
a. Responsible structural engineer shall approve locations of core holes or saw-cut openings in walls or
floors of existing concrete or masonry structures for alteration work, air conditioning ducts, fire
sprinkler piping, or other work.
6. Air Conditioning Units Above New Ceilings
a. Where air conditioning units are concealed above new ceilings, provide service access.
b. Coordinate size, location and type of access panel with location and requirements of air conditioning
unit specified.
c. Access for filter replacement or other frequent service, should be hinged panels or lay-in material less
subject to damage than acoustical ceiling panels, such as perforated metal panels. (Occasional access
may be through acoustical lay-in panels in a suspended T-bar grid ceiling.)
D. HISTORIC PRESERVATION
1. General
a. Retain and preserve the historic character of a building, structure or site.
b. b. Distinctive architectural features or examples of skilled craftsmanship that characterize a building shall
be treated with sensitivity.
c. c. Reinforcement required for structural stability or the installation of life safety or mechanical systems
shall be concealed.
d. Surface cleaning of historic structures shall be undertaken with the gentlest means possible. Avoid
sandblasting and chemical treatments.
e. Copy of the report identifying historical sites can be found at:

B. DEMOLITION
C. GRADING
D. PAVING
E. STORM AND SANITARY DRAINAGE
F. WATER DISTRIBUTION
G. OFF-SITE CHECKLIST
Book 3: Technical Criteria 3.2 Civil Engineering
1. The civil-engineering site design and documents must realistically implement the provisions of the overall site
design, integrating the requirements of buildings, walls and fences; grading and paving; storm-water
management; utilities (including gas, electrical and communication network distribution locations); earth and
soil requirements (including compaction, modification, topsoil, and mitigation of hazardous ground
conditions); as well as all offsite work related to the project, including streets, driveways, walks, utilities
connections, and other off-site development.
2. All such work shall be clearly delineated, located and dimensioned (horizontally and vertically) to the
appropriate site reference, as part of the work of this discipline, and all utilities points-of-connection (POC)
clearly shown and located..
3. Work shall be performed and systems installed in accordance with the current California Building Code (CBC –
part of California Code of Regulations, Title 24), California Plumbing Code, District “Guide Specifications,”
other chapters of this “School Design Guide,” and District Standard Technical Drawings. Coordinate
especially with utilities criteria of chapter “3.4 Plumbing.”
4. The District will provide the Architect-Engineer with a current site boundary and topographic survey, with
encroachments, and including adjoining streets and properties and on-site and public utilities line locations,
sizes and elevations. Other site plans or site information that may exist is available in the District office for
consultants’ research. The Architect must visit the site to verify the indicated information and to obtain
information not indicated on the drawings.
5. Off-site work or work within easements shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of the agency
having jurisdiction. The work shall be shown as part of the construction documentation and shall include all
project-related off-site improvements, such as curb cuts, turnout lanes, signage, utilities connections, and all
other such work.
6. Refer also to sections of this “School Design Guide” on Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Planting and Irrigation.
7. Do not locate any abrupt grade changes, manholes, meters, yard boxes, etc. on or near playfields and
playgrounds to avoid any potential hazard to students.
8. For fencing and gates refer to section 2.2, Site Design.
B. DEMOLITION
1. Demolition work for new sites must be documented as a separate contract item, with a separate and complete
package of bidding and contract documents.
2. Coordinate any demolition or relocation of existing improvements, such as fences, walls, structures, etc., that
are encroaching into the District property, with the District representative who will request the Real Estate
Section to obtain necessary permits from adjacent property owners.
3. Provide temporary fencing to secure property boundaries wherever work might breach closure of adjacent
property.
4. Investigate existing conditions to assure that full extent of demolition work is included, especially with
regard to sub-surface conditions such as concrete paving overlain with asphalt, building basements,
foundations of demolished buildings, and utilities lines. If existing data is insufficient, request pot-holing,
underground utility survey, or other investigation from the District.
5. Clearly identify and define in the demolition documents all existing site features (structures, walls, fencing,
walks, pavements, site utilities, plants, terrain, etc.) that are (1) to remain, with defined protection measures, and
(2) to be removed, with the required disposition and responsibilities for removal and/or relocation.
C. GRADING
1. For ease in staking and construction, grade with uniform planes (not warped surfaces) and minimize grade
changes.
2. Slope all areas for drainage. Slope walks, stairways, ramps, and other surfaces away from buildings.
3. Slope planes for drainage typically between 1% and 2% with 1.5% considered optimum.
4. Other slope standards are:
a. Between building areas, 1.5% - 2.0%.
b. Within play areas, 2% maximum, with 1% considered optimum.
c. Entrance walks and ramps (along accessible route): Do not design to maximum allowable slope
requirements, thus risking potential non-compliant as built conditions. However, if the space allows,
reduce slope as much as possible, or design grading and slope to avoid the need for ramp.
1) Handrails with landing extensions are required at ramps.
d. Driveways: 15%, with vertical curves of 10 feet at top and 5 feet at bottom of ramp.
e. Slope along sliding gate: 2% maximum, for chain link gates. Steel and wrought iron gates shall be set no
more than 1/2% slope.
f. Walks, porches, study terraces, etc.: Cross fall of 1% to 2% maximum.
g. Door landings, paved lunch areas, and similar areas: ½% to 2% maximum. Shape planes to
accommodate tables and benches.
h. Agricultural Areas: 1/2 % minimum.
i. Asphalt paving flow lines: 0.75%. If less, use concrete gutter flow line with minimum slope of 0.4%
(do not use in striped play areas).
5. Slope play fields and play areas as follows (see also District standards for playfields):
a. Turf or lawn areas: 1/2% minimum, 2% maximum, 3/4% optimum.
b. Concrete tennis courts: 0.83% to 1% maximum, in one plane only, preferably from side to side.
c. Handball courts: 0.5% to 1% maximum, in one plane only (when necessary).
d. Infield of High School baseball and softball diamonds: 1/2% maximum. Baseball pitcher's mound:
10" above home plate.
e. Track and Field Areas: Maximum inclination for tracks, runways, circles, and landing areas for throwing
events: not over 1:100 in a lateral direction and 1:1000 in the running or throwing direction. For high
jump: not over 1:250 in the direction of the center of the crossbar. See IAAF Rules for other track
dimensions and information.
6. Slope banks as follows:
a. Planted banks 2H to 1V (50%) maximum.
b. Paved and gunite banks 2 to 1 (50%) maximum with special exceptions permitted.
c. Lawn areas 15% maximum.
7. At playground areas provide protective fencing and an 18-inch minimum shoulder at tops of banks sloping
steeper than 10%.
D. PAVING
1. Provide paving, base and sub-base preparation as recommended by the Geotechnical Engineer. Refer to
District “Technical Standard Drawings.”
2. Paving minimum standards include:
a. Playgrounds (new construction): 2 inches asphaltic concrete over 4 inches select base course.
b. Playgrounds (resurfacing): 2 inches asphaltic concrete over 3 inches select base.
c. Service Roads: 4 inches asphaltic concrete over 4 inches select base.
d. Parking Area: 3 inches asphaltic concrete over 4 inches select base.
e. Trash Pick-up Area: 6 inches reinforced concrete over 4 inches select base.
f. Sidewalks: 4 inches unreinforced concrete.
g. Banks: 2 inches asphaltic concrete over compacted sub-grade.
3. Provide for the special paving requirements of bus-loading zones, truck loading and dock areas, trash pick-up
areas, and fire lanes.
4. Pave parkways and narrow strips adjacent to sidewalks at property lines as concrete sidewalks.
5. Separate asphalt paving from planting or turf areas with a reinforced concrete mowing strip minimum 6” by 8.”
6. Provide driveway approaches in accordance with commercial driveway requirements of the local governing
jurisdiction, with minimum width of 20 feet.
7. Provide integral curb and 2'-0" gutter on service roads within bus unloading area.
8. Provide paving of full width and turning area needed for all delivery trucks and trash pick-up
vehicles. Also, check width of drive aprons providing access to these areas. Provide turn around
area for vehicles, if required.
9. Provide 4-inch wide striping for parking stalls and other roadway markings. Mark fire lanes in accordance with
the local Fire Marshal’s requirements. See District’s “Standard Technical Drawings” for parking layouts.
10. Provide ramps for sweepers and mowers to reach raised areas.
11. Lunch shelter area and arcade shall be concrete.
12. Walkways shall be concrete, interlocking concrete pavers or interlocking permeable concrete pavers (where
soils are suitable to percolation per Geotechnical Report).
13. Pervious concrete paving is acceptable at parking stalls areas only, not driveways, and provided soils are suitable
to percolation and parking is not adjacent to dirt areas that can cause plugging of surface.
E. STORM AND SANITARY DRAINAGE
1. Design
a. Design site for maximum retention of storm water run-off, within the general limits of other design
guidelines, code requirements and Technical Manual (http://www.laschools.org/employee/design/fs-
studies-and-reports/?folder_id=2452126). Use surface drainage to the maximum extent reasonable. See
District’s Post Construction Storm Water Management Plan (BMP Selection White Paper) and
accompanying Check List for guidance. See “Section 3.4, Plumbing” of this School Design Guide for
additional criteria.
2. Standard Urban Storm Water Mitigation Plan (SUSMP)
a. Areas with disturbed soil over 1 acre, parking lots of 5,000 square feet or more, or with 25 or more
parking spaces, and exposed to storm water runoff, shall be designed to meet the intent of the Standard
Urban Storm Water Mitigation Plan (SUSMP) for Los Angeles County. SUSMP mitigation measures
include infiltration of runoff before it reaches the storm drain system, treatment of runoff to remove oil
and petroleum hydrocarbons before it enters the storm drain system, and control of peak flow discharge
to provide stream channel protection. For provision of these measures plans, calculations, maintenance
requirements must be included in the Design Development phase, and details of the mitigation facilities
included in the Construction Documents including the documents needed for SWPPP sections (e.g.
section 500.6)..
3. Sanitary Sewers
a. For sanitary sewers show fixture units at building and street points of connection. Size sewer lines per
code prescriptions, or provide hydraulic calculations.
4. Surface Drainage:
a. Direct sheet flow from paved areas onto planted areas.
b. Direct roof downspouts into planting areas (via splash blocks) where feasible, onto paved surfaces only
when the flow does not adversely affect pedestrian traffic.
c. Locate flow lines to avoid concentrations on pedestrian walks.
d. Locate flow lines to avoid sand boxes, tree wells, playground equipment and other objects that might
obstruct drainage flow and cause ponding.
e. Do not drain from planting areas across paved areas.
f. Do not drain over public sidewalks. Avoid concentrated flow over driveways and pedestrian walkways.
g. Do not drain over planted or unpaved banks.
h. Do not drain through or over roofed areas, electric or communication vaults, walk-off mats, or other
similar functional areas.
i. Intercept off-site drainage to prevent it from flowing across site.
j. At interior courts or sump areas near buildings, provide for surface overflow from the court that is 3
inches or more below finished floor elevations to avoid flooding if catch basins are blocked.
5. Catch Basins, Floor Drains and Culverts:
a. Select catch basin grate to withstand the load to which it will be subjected; otherwise use lightweight
grates and frames. Grate openings: Minimum opening ¼” to ½ inch maximum.
b. Offset a catch basin from main storm drain line to minimize its size and depth, and to minimize
blockage of system (i.e., no in-line “flow-thru” type catch basins).
c. Use cast-in-place or precast concrete catch basins.
d. Maximum depth of catch basin: 30 inches, unless specific project approval given in writing by the
District.
e. Use rectangular cast-iron or fiber-cement pipe culverts under walks in place of formed concrete
structures. Provide minimum 4-inch thick concrete encasement, but with 2 ½ inch cover under walks.
Calculate size for flow.
f. Do not locate catch basins in the middle of play yards, pedestrian pathways, close to playground
equipment or large trees.
g. Use trench drains only when required; for example, at parking structure entrances.
h. In trash-disposal areas and open lunch areas, provide floor drain and sediment buckets to collect storm
and wash-down water. Locate drain next to hose bibb and provide dual drainage, with a diverter valve to
flush wash-down water to sanitary drain and storm water to storm drain. (See District “Standard
Technical Drawing.”)
i. In covered lunch shelters, provide floor drains with no trap primers.
j. Avoid locating drains and swales in the accessible parking areas and path of travel. If this is unavoidable,
the grates shall be oriented 90 degrees to the direction of travel, or should be multi-directional if there is
no predominant direction of travel.
6. Underground Drainage:
a. Storm drain pipe shall be concrete (CP), reinforced concrete (RCP), ductile iron (DIP), cast iron (CIP),
or high-density polyethylene (HDPEP).
b. Design drainage structures and piping systems based on hydrologic and hydraulic calculations, with
minimum flow velocity of 3 feet per second.
c. Provide capped stub-outs for drains in new construction to accommodate future construction based on
the Master Plan.
d. With less than 1'-0" of cover over top of pipe encase pipe in concrete or use iron pipe.
e. With less than 1'-0" of cover over top of pipe in vehicular traffic areas and in asphalt paved areas encase
pipe in concrete, reinforced as necessary to support imposed loads.
f. Food waste drainage from wash-down in lunch shelters must flow into sanitary sewer. Rainwater from
roof covering lunch shelter must flow into storm drain system. Site drainage shall be designed such that,
the flowing site drainage water does not run through the lunch shelter and the outdoor eating areas.
g. Drain trash enclosure through pipe to storm drain system and to sanitary sewer (using dual drainage
valve system described above).
h. Install cleanouts at maximum spacing of 100 feet in straight runs and at each aggregate change of
direction exceeding 135 degrees. A catch basin may substitute. Install cleanouts in yard boxes.
i. Where transition is made from round pipe to rectangular pipe, provide cleanout hand hole or manhole
for maintenance purposes.
j. Depths of sanitary sewer lines below finished grade shall be not less than 12 inches and not less than 6
feet at property lines, or as required by agency having jurisdiction. (Use greater depth if service to future
buildings should require it.)
F. WATER DISTRIBUTION
1. Meter Protection
a. An approved reduced pressure principal backflow assembly shall be installed at service connection to
any domestic, fire, or irrigation services.
b. All schools located in Los Angeles Water & Power service area shall comply with the requirements of
water service rule 16-D.
2. Water Service:
a. At new facilities, provide one meter each for domestic water, fire-protection water, and irrigation water
service. (See “Plumbing” and “Planting and Irrigation” sections of this guide book for gas piping and
other related criteria.)
b. Contact water supplier for main, pressure and flow information.
c. Meter locations must be approved by the District and the water supplier. Indicate meter locations at
curb.
d. For domestic water services that require any of the following component devices: Service Control (shut
off) valve, strainers, pressure reducing valves, backflow prevention assemblies, etc., said devices shall be
installed as follows: Group component devices into a dual (parallel) configuration to avoid service
interruptions during testing and servicing of devices. Devices shall be designed and installed in an above
ground, compact, low profile and serviceable valve station.
e. Meter assembly and details must conform to District “Standard Technical Drawings.”
3. Piping and Design
a. Provide a water-load schedule for each meter including existing, new and future load in fixture units and
gpm. Coordinate with the plumbing engineer.
b. Provide hydraulic calculations for water distribution system. Show water demand and residual pressure
at building and street point of connection.
c. Where pressure-reducing valves are required, coordinate location with plumbing engineer and with the
District.
d. On domestic water service provide tandem installations of pressure regulators, backflow preventers and
strainers, to avoid shut-down during testing and servicing of equipment. See Standard Technical
Drawings.
e. Provide thrust blocks and ties for bell-and-spigot piping.
f. Before specifying piping, review corrosivity of soil with the District’s soils report to verify appropriate
pipe material selection.
g. Wherever pipe-and-valve assemblies are exposed above grade, provide a secure locked enclosure to
protect them from unauthorized use or vandalism. These may be walls, fences, or manufactured
enclosures that are made for this purpose.
h. Reclaimed water system shall be designed per Purple Pipe Manual and comply with the local
jurisdictional requirements. Approval shall be acquired from the same agency prior to installation. Refer
to the following link for the Purple Pipe Manual: http://www.laschools.org/employee/design/fs-
studies-and-reports/?folder_id=226546964
G. OFF-SITE CHECKLIST
1. “Checklist of Off-Site Work, Utilities & Easements” – See Section 4.5 for the list. This list is comprehensive;
however, there might be other site specific issues that have to be addressed, such as “specific community plan”,
landscaping, etc.
3.3 STRUCTURAL
A. General Requirements
B. Design Criteria
C. Building Systems
D. Concrete and Masonry Structures
E. Foundations and Concrete or Masonry on Earth
F. Steel Structures
G. Wood Framed Structures

Book 3: Technical Criteria 3.3 Structural Engineering
3.3 STRUCTURAL
1. The design for structural safety of school buildings in California is governed by the requirements of the Field
Act beginning in Section 17280 of the Education Code and the California Building Code, Title 24.
2. The structural engineer shall be responsible for the design, or review of designs, of connections to the basic
structure of such building elements as veneer materials, window walls and steel-stud assemblies, decorative
block screens, mechanical and electrical equipment and components, library shelving, and similar items.
3. Testing and Inspection (T&I) shall meet the requirements of Title 24. After plans are approved by DSA,
submit one copy of the DSA Tests and Inspection List to the District’s authorized representative.
4. Assure that provisions are made for seismic anchorage or bracing of all building elements and equipment,
including Owner Furnished equipment.
B. DESIGN CRITERIA
1. Codes:
a. The governing building code for structural design is the current edition of the California Building Code
(CBC -- part of the CCR, Title 24, California Building Standards Code), with modifications by the
Division of the State Architect/ Structural Safety Section (DSA/SS) for school design and construction.
2. Design Criteria:
a. The requirements of the California Building Code and DSA shall govern except where specifically
defined below.
b. Deflection: Maximum allowable deflection for structural members shall be that defined in the CBC,
except as follows:
1) To reduce long-term deflection and cracking of finished surfaces, where floor members of
engineered-wood support floor finishes of ceramic tile, terrazzo, or similar materials, maximum
deflection shall be limited to l/540.
c. Roof design loads shall provide for the weight of one re-roofing if the roofing designed can be re-roofed
without removing the original roofing.
d. Indicate on plans key design criteria used, including Code edition, seismic design factors, and soil profile
type.
C. BUILDING SYSTEMS
1. The following criteria and suggestions reflect policies and preferences of the District derived from experience
with economy and durability. Exceptions may be made with justification and specific authorization of the
District’s Project Manager.
2. The structures of all buildings, including non-bearing partitions, shall be of incombustible materials. Wood
structures may be acceptable for one-and two-story primary and elementary schools and additions, but with
special permission in writing from the District.
3. Three-story and higher school buildings, and all middle and high school buildings, shall be steel framed with
floors of concrete on metal deck supported by composite beams, or of reinforced concrete. The lateral force
resisting system should be the most effective structural systems allowed by code.
4. Gyms and auditoriums preferably should have masonry or concrete walls and steel-framed roofs with steel
decking without concrete fill.
D. CONCRETE AND MASONRY STRUCTURES
1. Use a minimum concrete ultimate compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days.
2. Concrete mix design must comply with CBC and ACI 318.
3. Specify size of aggregate and slump. Use 1-inch or ¾-inch minimum aggregate size, with smaller sizes only in
very special cases.
4. Control cracks in concrete by joints, construction joint separations, and other means.
5. Avoid thin sections or projections that may crack off when forms are removed. Chamfer column corners,
exposed corners and edges.
6. Provide typical construction joint locations for concrete beams, joists, and slabs.
7. Provide expansion joints, control joints and seismic-movement joints as required by the design, indicate their
locations and details on drawings, and coordinate with architectural enclosures and finishes.
8. Joints must be weather tight and provide lateral stability across the joint.
9. Where a concrete beam is monolithic with a concrete wall and negative beam reinforcing steel is embedded in
the wall, include a detail that shows the preferred pour line and alerts the contractor not to pour wall without
negative reinforcing in place.
10. Indicate openings, depressions and curbs on structural floor and roof plans. Curbs must be a minimum of 5″
wide if located under walls. Coordinate depressions in slab for wheelchair lifts, if in the scope of project.
11. Maintain a full depth of slab under depressions for ceramic tile, electric ducts, or other construction.
12. Provide a typical column drawing indicating bar maximum slopes, locations of splices, and reglets for shear-
wall reinforcing.
13. When setting a rail post use non-shrink grout or equivalent (“Por-Rok” but not sulfur). Provide a #4 bar on
each side of post in concrete.
14. If wood or steel studs are used in concrete buildings, indicate clear relationship between “face of concrete” and
“face of studs”.
15. In masonry walls, base dimensions on modular size of the unit.
16. In concrete masonry walls, fill all cells except on free-standing site walls retaining no earth. Avoid bars larger
than #8.
17. Clearly show the minimum concrete cover required for the intended fire protection rating.
E. FOUNDATIONS AND CONCRETE OR MASONRY ON EARTH
1. The structural engineer shall visit the site and visually confirm the existing conditions as represented on the
survey and geotechnical report. (Include the geotechnical engineer’s name and report date on drawings.).
2. Provide special recommendations for dealing with expansive soils beneath the structure.
3. Foundations of buildings must not be partly on fill and partly on natural grade. Make clear on drawings all
areas of fill.
4. Show bottom of footing elevations on foundation plan, including building walls, columns, flagpoles, lighting
structures, retaining walls, etc.
5. Provide structural elevations and details of all retaining walls and site walls over 3′-6″ high showing bottoms of
footings, steps, joints, sleeves and drainage. Footings may be sloped 5% maximum to avoid steps.
6. For building walls that retain earth, use a minimum thickness of 10 inches and provide waterproofing and
drainage outside the walls. Coordinate structural design with waterproofing and sub-drain design to assure
water resistance.
7. Retaining walls higher than 12 feet as measured from the top of the foundation shall be designed to resist the
additional earth pressure caused by seismic ground shaking.
8. Floor slabs on grade shall be 5-inch thick minimum reinforced with #4 bars @ 24″ o.c. each way.
9. For floor slabs on grade provide a vapor barrier. See “Architectural” section for requirements.
10. Utilities trenches that impact foundations shall be recognized in design and shown on structural drawings.
Backfill trenches below footings with controlled compacted fill or, if not more than three-feet deep, with lean
concrete.
11. Requirements of the paragraphs on “Concrete and Masonry Structures” also apply.
F. STEEL STRUCTURES
1. Provide top-of-steel elevations at each column and change of level on structural drawings for ease of reference
by steel detailers and erectors.
2. For exterior steel work specify sections with a thickness of ¼” or greater.
3. Indicate required camber on all tapered steel girders and steel trusses.
4. Keep steel floor beams to L/d equal to or less than 24.
5. Provide erection bracing for tapered girders. Web thickness for all built-up sections shall be at least 3/16".
Provide flange to web welds to comply with AISC Specification. Use stiffener plate welded to top flange and
to web where ridge occurs.
6. Comply with maximum width-to-thickness ratio requirements of AISC for projecting elements under
compression. Apply requirements to railing parts.
7. Field weld or use cadmium plated counter-sunk flat head machine screws, to prevent warping in galvanizing
bath.
8. Specify cost effective size, length and type of welds. Use standard weld symbols and consider fillet welds where
adequate.
9. Make groove welds "full penetration" on structural welds such as tapered girder flanges.
10. On welded assemblies to be hot-dip galvanized, avoid shop welding large areas, such as stair platforms, to
prevent warping in galvanizing bath. Field weld and retouch galvanizing, or use cadmium plated counter-sunk
flat head machine screws for field assembly.
11. Do not support steel members with wood columns.
12. Provide means of leveling for base plates, such as double nuts on anchor bolts.
13. Avoid steel joists. (Because of DSA’s special testing and inspection requirements, most steel joist fabricators
will not bid DSA jobs.)
14. If Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS) is used, clearly identify the AESS members on the structural
drawings.
15. Structural steel members shall be primed, except for:
a. Exterior exposed surfaces, which shall be galvanized.
b. Steel members to be fireproofed.
c. Surfaces that will be field welded.
d. Surfaces that will be in contact with concrete.
e. Surfaces to be fastened with high strength bolts.
G. WOOD-FRAMED STRUCTURES
1. Provide camber in structural members in accordance with DSA requirements. Use a stiffer member in
preference to using excessive camber.
2. No horizontal member depth to thickness ratio shall exceed 7.
3. Bottoms of sills on exterior foundation walls shall be not less than 12" above finished grade.
4. Standardize hold down bolt sizes.
5. Structural I plywood is preferred. Use at least CD Grade with exterior-type glue.
6. Provide drawings of wall elevations to indicate typical framing. Provide special framing elevations where large
openings occur, where columns pass through wall plates, or where framing is otherwise complex.
7. Provide complete roof framing plans showing walls. Clearly indicate corner framing and slope of roof.
8. Stud walls or partitions around shower or toilet rooms with more than two fixtures, and stud walls adjacent to
exterior ground or paved areas, shall bear on concrete curbs extending at least 6" above finished floor or
paving level. (Curbs and sills must meet DSA’s special curb requirements.)
9. On wood-joist floors, provide 2"-thick concrete fill, 6” curbs, and a floor drain on the floor of heater rooms
using gas-fired boilers.
10. Use nominal 6" wide studs for walls with the exception of non-bearing walls with no piping.
11. Clearly indicate connection of vertical shear elements to diaphragms. Be sure these shear elements do not
produce a high concentration of stress over a small length.
12. Where pipes pass through top plates, provide a detail on both structural and plumbing drawings.
13. Use minimum 1/2" thick plywood for roof sheathing. Indicate stagger of panels required for horizontal
diaphragms.
14. Standardize on one or a few bolt sizes. Do not permit a mixture of several tie-down bolts because they can be
too easily mixed on the job.
3.4 PLUMBING
B. Sewer Systems
C. Water Systems
D. Hot Water Systems
E. Water Valves and Other Devices
F. Gas Distribution Systems
G. Seismic Restraints
Book 3: Technical Criteria 3.4 Plumbing
3.4 PLUMBING
1. Plumbing systems shall be installed in accordance with the current California Building Code and Plumbing
Code (CBC – part of California Code of Regulations Title 24), and California Green Building Code as well as
CCR Titles 19 and 8, District Guide Specifications; other chapters of this School Design Guide, and District
Standard Technical Drawings.
2. Design systems to be simple, durable, easy to operate and maintain, with ready accessibility for servicing,
maintenance and replacement, all in a manner that will avoid interruption of educational schedules during
working hours.
3. Contact each utility supplier to determine the requirements for the most cost effective service connection.
Provide separate meters for domestic, fire and irrigation water supplies. See Section 3.2 - “Civil Engineering”
of this Design Guide for additional information relevant to the work of this section.
4. Fixtures must comply with State water conservation guidelines and standards, including maximum flow as
follows:
a. Water Closets: 1.28 gpf.
b. Urinals: 1/8 gpf or Non-water type.
c. Lavatory Faucets: 0.5 gpm.
d. Showers: 2.0 gpm.
e. Kitchen Sink Faucets: 2.0 gpm.
5. Student Restrooms:
a. Provide in all student restrooms the following features to reduce maintenance, conserve water and
minimize student tampering:
1) Shut-off valve for all fixtures in each restroom, located above the upper terminal water closet and
behind a locked access panel.
2) Water-saving battery-operated infrared-sensored flush valves, with manual override on all water
closets (absolutely no hardwire applications permitted). Infrared sensors must be mounted and
adjusted at heights and distances appropriate to the grade level and student height to insure
automatic actuation.
3) Push-button, ADA-metered, self-closing faucets on lavatories.
4) Hose-bibb with vacuum breaker in recessed box with locking cover.
5) Floor drains with trap primers with floors sloped to drain.
6) Clean-outs above all urinals, lavatories, and water closets (above upper terminal water closet
when there is more than one).
b. Verify that the following are provided and coordinated with plumbing work.
1) Electric hand dryers in lieu of paper-towel dispensers (except in kindergartens and early
education centers).
2) A dual GFCI outlet behind a locked access panel.
c. Architectural drawings shall clearly identify the specific age group applicable to each restroom, and at
each classroom with accessible sink(s).
1) Accessible features shown on plumbing drawings shall be coordinated with age appropriate areas
shown on the architectural drawings.
6. Faculty and Visitor Restrooms:
a. Provide in all faculty / adult restrooms the following features to reduce maintenance and conserve
water:
1) Shut-off valve for all fixtures in each restroom, located above the upper terminal water closet and
behind a locked (but not keyed) access panel.
2) Floor drains with trap primers with floors sloped to drain.
3) Clean-outs above all urinals, lavatories, and water closets (above upper terminal water closet
when there is more than one).
7. Conceal and properly secure all piping behind building finishes. Exception may be made in equipment and
custodial rooms and CMU or concrete construction. Where necessarily exposed in renovation projects, paint
all piping and insulate hot water and condensate piping.
8. All lavatories shall be Cast Iron with acid resistant backed on enamel finish. Vitreous China units are
prohibited.
9. All lavatories shall have three (3) holes 4 inches center set faucets. Single-hole configuration is not allowed.
10. Access Panel – Plumbing access panels shall have the same fire rating as the wall, ceiling, or surface they are
installed upon. Identify and call out rated panels as such on construction documents.
11. Underground Cleanouts – Underground waste piping in every 100’ or within a 90 degree or greater change in
direction, shall provide a cleanout to grade (Within practical reason).
12. Hopper Sinks – All service and custodial sinks shall be Cast Iron with baked on enamel finish. No other type
will be accepted. Faucet to be provided with an atmospheric vacuum breaker.
13. Urinals:
a. Urinals shall be non-water type and be equipped with a water supply roughed-in to the urinal location
that would allow a subsequent replacement of the non-water urinal with a water supplied type Urinal.
Make provisions for water distribution and fixture supply piping sized to accommodate the water
supplied urinal(s). The supply shall be stubbed out of wall with a chrome plated brass flange and chrome
plated brass I.P.S. cap.
b. Low flush urinals, 1/8 gallon, shall be used for urinal replacement at existing schools only.
B. SEWER SYSTEMS
1. Industrial Wastewater Permits
a. Industrial Wastewater Permits must be obtained from the City of Los Angeles Department of Public
Works, Bureau of Sanitation, Industrial Waste Management Division, in accordance with the Los
Angeles Industrial Waste Control Ordinance for all schools. A permit is required for each point of
discharge to the City’s sewer system. (For other jurisdictions the local ordinances must be addressed,
but the standards required by Los Angeles shall be the minimum standard for all LAUSD schools.
2. Sewer Lines
a. Specify cast iron soil pipe at all following locations:
1) Within the building and 5'-0" outside the building line.
2) Running parallel to and within 2'-0" of any building or structure.
3) Within 20'-0" of any tree centerline.
4) Not less than 1'-0" below finished grade.
b. Provide clean-outs above all urinals, lavatories, upper terminal water closets, and sinks.
c. Provide cleanouts to grade in yard box at:
1) Upper terminal cleanout within 5 feet of building line connection.
2) Every 100 feet or change of direction over 90 degrees.
3) At property line connection.
4) Do not provide cleanouts overhead in subterranean parking lots. They are neither manageable
nor accessible for use.
d. Provide uniform slope of 1/4" fall per foot whenever possible, but never less than 1/8" per foot.
e. Indicate invert elevations of new sewer lines at buildings, changes in direction, locations where sewer
lines join and at property lines. Indicate sizes of existing utility lines on the plans.
3. Private Disposal Systems
a. When private disposal systems are required and programmed, verify requirements with the local health
authorities and obtain written approval.
b. Clearly define the extent and locations of system elements.
4. Science Classrooms, Flexible Classrooms and Prep Room/Work Room Wastes:
a. All science, chemistry, flexible science classrooms and science prep/workrooms shall have chemical
waste piping.
b. These are defined as chemical or industrial liquid wastes that are likely to damage the public sanitary
sewer system or increase its maintenance cost, or detrimentally affect sewage treatment, or contaminate
surface or subsurface waters. They shall be pre-treated to render them innocuous prior to discharge to
the sewer system unless an approved Best Management Practices program is in effect at the school.
c. Provide an independent waste drainage system to an approved Sampling box at the exterior of the
building for plumbing fixtures in laboratories and associated workrooms which could receive corrosive
chemical waste.
d. Piping for this system shall be of corrosion-resistant material as specified in the Guide Specifications –
either Type 316L stainless steel (Above ground Only) or Los Angeles City Test Laboratory-approved
CPVC that does not require wrapping pipe in plenums or Polypropylene.
e. Based on the Guide Specifications and an approved Best Management Practice (BMP). Do not provide
a pretreatment neutralizing tank for Science Laboratory waste. However, provide an easily accessible
exterior sampling box, together with accommodations for future addition of a neutralization system,
before connection to the public sewer.
f. No chemical vent shall interconnect with vents of other Plumbing Systems.
g. Details shall meet the requirements of the Los Angeles City Bureau of Sanitation (see “Industrial Waste
Permits” above).
5. Food Service Establishments (FSE’s) Waste:
a. Cafeterias shall comply with the City of Los Angeles’ Fats, Oil and Grease (FOG) Control Program.
Consult and obtain approval of Bureau of Sanitation’s (BOS) approval.
b. Grease interceptors shall comply with the City of Los Angeles’ Plumbing Code, and must be provided
for all grease-producing equipment. (Three (3) compartment sinks, all hand sinks, floor drains, floor
sinks, prep sinks and mop sinks within the kitchen preparation area are to be tied to the grease
interceptor.)
c. Do not provide garbage disposals in any School cafeterias which are classified as FSE’s (The exception
would be kitchens within the learning environment).
6. Other Special Wastewater Provisions:
a. Other areas requiring special pretreatment of wastewater before discharge into the City sewer system
include:
1) Auto Shop floor drains, sinks and cleaning tanks: Oil Interceptor and Clarifier.
2) Auto Wash Rack: Grease Interceptor.
3) Ceramics Room sinks: Solids Interceptor.
4) Film Processing: Neutralization, Silver Electrolytic Recovery Unit, Sample Box.
5) Potting Room sinks: Solids Interceptor.
6) Agricultural Classroom demo table drains: Solids Interceptor.
7) Subterranean Parking Garage Drains to sump pumps: Provide oil and solids interceptors, when
required by Los Angeles Sanitation Bureau. Interceptors are not required in garages where hose
bibs are not installed. Roof drain lines and downspouts shall not be connected to drains in
subterranean structures and sump pump system.
b. Interceptors and separators must be located and installed so they are easily accessible for inspection,
cleaning, and removal of intercepted material.
7. Floor Drains, Area Drains and Floor Sinks:
a. Where drains or sinks are required, slope floor to drain at 1/8” per foot.
b. Floor drains with trap primers are required at:
1) Student and Staff Restrooms. One floor drain shall be provided front and center for two or
more urinals. One floor drain is required for water closets in all restrooms with an additional
floor drain when a total of four or more water closets are provided.
2) Shower and locker rooms and adjacent drying rooms.
3) Custodian closet – locate floor drain near hopper sink.
4) Mechanical Room.
5) Electrical Room.
6) Lunch Shelters. Cast iron with removable basket and hinged self-closing grate. Trap primer is
not required since area is washed down daily.
7) Uncovered Trash Areas. These areas are required to be provided with a special area drain system
that normally drains the storm water to the storm system, but diverts the drainage to the sewer
system when the trash containers are being washed, using a special valve system. See Storm and
Sanitary Drainage in the Civil Engineering section.
8) Where deluge showers are installed.
c. Floor sinks with trap primers are required at the following areas for indirect waste:
1) Boiler Rooms.
2) Kitchens, at cooking areas and where preparation sinks have an indirect waste drain where a
direct connection is not required by code.
3) Coffee urns.
4) Food preparation sinks (minimum 3").
5) Milk-shake machines.
6) Refrigerators of 30-cubic-foot capacity or over.
7) Walk-in cooler and freezer-box drains.
8) Water heater relief valves and hot water storage tank drains. (All water heaters shall be installed
with drip pans.).
9) Wherever required by the California Plumbing Code or the Los Angeles City Plumbing Code.
d. Elevator pit drains are not required.
e. Primary condensate drains from HVAC units shall be discharged into a receptor that is approved by
code and the local jurisdiction in a manner that is in compliance with the code requirements. The
preferred receptors by LAUSD are floor sinks, custodial sinks and lavatory tail pieces. Drywells may be
used when the above receptors do not exist in the vicinity. Draining directly into the sewer with air gap
fittings is prohibited. Secondary drain pans are required under all indoor HVAC units that are installed
above finished ceilings or suspended exposed above occupied spaces. These drains are required to
discharge at locations where the discharge will be noticed so that service personnel could be notified to
fix the clogged primary drains. The point of discharge should be above a sink if available and if not,
direct the discharge away from locations where it may cause harm to students and damage to electronic
equipment, and books. Also, provide high condensate level unit shut-off switches to prevent or
minimize drainage from secondary pans. In addition provide freeze stats for DX equipment.
f. Provide brass union with 6” brass nipple at condensate drain pipe connection, if steel meets copper.
g. In the subterranean parking garage, provide an adequately sized emergency drain for every 4000 square
feet. Within ten feet around each floor drain provide 1/8”/ foot slope of drain.
8. Combination Waste and Vent Systems
a. Combination waste and vent systems shall be used only where structural conditions preclude installation
of conventional systems and when permitted by the District.
b. Use only with clear liquids and “Not on kitchen sinks, lunch shelter floor drains, or for any other
contaminated wastes”.
c. Provided adequate vents to ensure free circulation of air. Any branch more than 15'-0" in length shall
be separately vented.
d. Waste and vent pipes shall be oversized to assure full venting.
e. Vent connection shall be downstream of last fixture.
f. No water closet or urinal shall be installed on any combination waste and vent system.
9. Waste Piping Traps
a. All parts of traps shall be Cast Brass with polished Chromium plated finish. Tubular traps are not
allowed.
b. Exception: Concealed traps and 17 gauge tailpieces may have rough brass finish, unless noted otherwise.
C. WATER SYSTEMS
1. Water Service:
a. Coordinate with civil engineer to define and request water service from the utility supplier. See Section
3.2, Civil Engineering of this Design Guide.
2. Design Criteria:
a. Provide water service to all fixtures and outlets, designed in accordance with National Bureau of
Standards Reports 66 and 79 with not less than 25 psi at farthest and highest fixture or the pressure
required for the highest and farthest flushometer-operated water closet to operate properly.
b. Allowable water velocity shall be 5 feet per second for hot water and 5 feet per second for cold water in
copper and non-metallic piping.
c. Size pipe based on the number of fixture units and demand load curves in the California Plumbing
Code.
d. Outside Stem and Yoke (OS & Y) are only to be used for Fire Protection Systems. Exception: OS & Y
valves may be used in equipment rooms, at seven (7) feet or higher for visual identification of Open or
Closed conditions. In such cases provide a chain operator to allow for operating the valve with out a
ladder.
3. Use Type L hard copper pipe inside buildings.
4. Do not run water lines under slab if at all possible.
5. Provide a shut-off valve to isolate all fixtures in each restroom, laboratory, cafeteria and any other room with
multiple fixtures. Valves shall be in recessed boxes with locking covers, located above the upper terminal water
closet for restrooms and above fixtures in other areas.
6. Run water lines to outside drinking fountains underground and to interior drinking fountains isolated from hot-
water lines to provide cool water at the fountains. Provide separate isolation valves at each fountain.
7. Provide thrust blocks and ties for bell-and-spigot water pipe at fittings for sizes 2 ½” and larger.
8. Slope pipes up in direction of water flow to air-elimination devices, or up to a nearby expansion tank, to
provide for air elimination from water lines.
9. Water hammer arrestors are required for lavatories, sinks, fountains, water closets, urinal headers, and other
fixtures or devices with quick-closing valves, such as clothes washers.
10. Fixture Supply Lines – Water supplies and all potable water faucets shall be in compliance with NF61 Annex G
via Iron Pipe Size (IPS) with Lead free Brass nipples and angle stops. Brass escutcheons with polished
chromium finish for all fixtures. No braided stainless steel or flexible supply lines shall be used to connect
water supplies to faucets.
11. All Faucets used where Human consumption is assumed should be Stainless Steel and Brass free.
12. Each faucet shall have its own angle stop. No angle stop should serve more than one faucet at a time.
13. Victaulic type mechanical butterfly valves for copper are considered a reliable method for shut off above
ground and inside buildings.
D. HOT WATER SYSTEMS
1. Hot water or tempered water is required (as indicated, in addition to cold water) for the following areas, but not
limited to these areas:
a. Administration and Health Offices -- Hot.
b. Cafeteria, Kitchen, Lunch Units, and other food service facilities – Hot (No tempered water)
c. Collaboration Faculty Workrooms – Hot.
d. Science Prep Room – Hot.
e. Art Instruction Rooms, Consumer Home Economics, and Automotive Labs – Hot.
f. Custodial Room Service Sink – Hot.
g. Shower Rooms for Students – Tempered for students, hot and cold for faculty, plus one therapeutic
station with hot and cold.
h. Shower Rooms for Faculty plus Therapeutic Station – Hot
i. Handicapped-Accessible Showers – Tempered.
j. Restrooms adjacent to eating facilities – Tempered.
k. Faculty Restrooms – Hot
l. Early Education Centers (EEC) - Tempered
2. Provide cold water only at:
a. Student Restrooms.
b. General Classrooms.
c. Kindergarten Rooms.
3. Hot water temperature regulation:
a. To reduce the potential for bacterial contamination (see ASHRAE Standard 12-2000 – Minimizing the
Risk of Legionellosis Associated with Building Water Systems) provide the following temperatures and
control devices:
1) General Hot Water Outlets: 120°F at the heater and 115°F at the furthest outlet from water
heater.
2) Tempered Water Outlets: 95° to 100°F mixed from 115°F to 120°F hot water from the storage
tank and cold water through a tempered regulator valve. Locate the regulating valves as close to
the outlet as possible. This is especially important for Special Education, Elementary Schools
and Early Education Center’s. Locate the valves in Custodians Rooms or similar rooms, not
readily exposed in restrooms or shower rooms.
3) Cafeteria Sink Outlets: 120°F.
b. Hot Water Circulating Pumps:
1) Provide a circulating pump and insulated hot-water circulation loop (supply and return) to the
furthest fixture on the following:
a) Provide circulating pump for faculty restrooms with metered faucets and nurse offices,
when they are farther than 15 feet from water heater.
b) Provide pumps for runs longer than 50 feet for food service areas, Custodial sinks and
other areas with high flow faucets.
c) Indicate aquastat to control pumps and to make at 100 º F and break at 108 º F.
2) Circulating hot water pumps shall be time controlled so they will operate only when building is
occupied.
3) Hot water circulating pumps over 1.5 hp shall have cast iron bodies. Pumps 1.5 hp and less shall
have hard bronze water chambers and impellers.
4) Size hot-water circulating pump and piping for water velocity not to exceed 5 feet per second for
hot and 8 feet per second for cold.
4. Hot Water Heaters And Tanks:
a. Water heaters shall be certified by the California Energy Commission and meet Title24, AQMD Ultra
Low NOx Rule 1146.2 and. 1121, Water heating boilers 1,000,000 BTU and larger shall be registered
with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) per rule 222 to meet 1146.2
requirements.
b. Do not use multi-flue water heaters, nor booster or instantaneous type water heaters.
c. Water heaters shall heat with gas. Electric water heaters may be used as a last resort for isolated
locations and in small sizes. All gas fired water heaters shall meet the flammable vapors ignition
resistance requirements (FVIR).
d. Use ONLY 100-gallon, or smaller, high-recovery gas-fired domestic-type water heaters. Use in series
with manifold to avoid the use of separate storage tanks.
e. Use hot water storage tank with external heater only where storage requirements exceed 200 gallons and
where central-plant capacity or other conditions indicate.
f. Provide ball valve with plug at water heater drain outlet.
g. Provide seismic anchorage for all equipment. Do not bolt down the water heater legs.
h. Provide drip pans at all water heaters and drain the pan to an approved receptor.
i. Instantaneous tank-less water heaters of any kind or size are prohibited.
5. Hot-Water Piping And Utilization:
a. Provide tempered water to student showers piped in series and connected with an insulated circulating
supply manifold.
1) Provide isolation valves for each battery of showers.
2) Provide push-button metered-type shower valves.
3) Specify showerheads with a maximum discharge rate of 2.0 gpm.
b. Reduction in lines connected to pumps shall be made as close as possible to the pumps.
c. Install straight length of pipe without bends or restrictions at least 10 diameters long on the suction side
of all pumps unless inlet diffusers are used.
d. Insulated Return lines are required for domestic hot water systems when the length of run is over 15
feet to the furthest fixture.
e. Provide a check valve after the pump, for the hot water return line.
f. Avoid running dead-leg piping.
E. WATER VALVES AND OTHER DEVICES
1. Uninterrupted Service:
a. All domestic water supply mains shall be designed in an above-ground valve station with a minimum of
two parallel branch lines – a primary and secondary – to provide for uninterrupted service to the site
during maintenance of a Reduced pressure principal backflow preventor or a pressure regulating valve.
Each branch shall include a Reduced pressure principal backflow preventor with strainer and when the
street pressure exceeds 80 psig, a pressure regulator with strainer.
b. Separate services shall be provided for fire protection and landscape irrigation, with an above-ground
valve station that includes a Reduced pressure principal backflow preventor and a pressure regulator
with strainer when the street pressure exceeds manufacturer’s or design suggested range but never
exceed 80 psi. Two parallel branch lines are not required, but may be used to incorporate the use of two
backflow assemblies and pressure reducing valves in parallel for more cost effective design. Comply
with requirements of water service rule 16-D for schools located in Los Angeles Water & Power
District.
c. Coordinate this design with the Civil Engineering, Fire Protection, and Planting and Irrigation sections
of this “School Design Guide.”
2. Pressure Regulating Valves:
a. Install pressure-regulating valves with strainers when street line pressure is over 80 psig to reduce
pressure to approximately 80 psig.
b. Pressure regulating valve (PRV) stations shall include a minimum of two District-approved
pilot/diaphragm actuated control valves with strainers (in lieu of a series of 2” direct acting regulators).
Valves shall be flanged and sized to provide uninterrupted service to school site when valves are being
serviced. Wafer-lug type butterfly valves and pre-assembled valve stations may be used to minimize
space needs. (Services over 6 inches may require a third, smaller PRV for constant low-flow demands.)
c. Provide removable gages with ball valves for isolation stops on both inlet and outlet of valve stations
(for inlet pressure and reduced pressure).
d. Provide an epoxy-coated wye strainer ahead of regulators.
e. Locate pressure regulating assemblies and strainer assemblies above grade in a shielded enclosure and in
a service area. Where exposed to students, enclosure shall be a secure structure or cage.
3. Backflow Preventors and Vacuum Breakers:
a. Use backflow prevention valves having the lowest possible friction loss.
b. Use reduced-pressure principle backflow assemblies for domestic, irrigation, and fire services for meter
service protection.
c. Provide an epoxy-coated wye strainer ahead of regulators.
d. Vacuum breakers or other required backflow prevention assemblies which are required, but not limited
to, the following locations:
1) All flush valves and urinals.
2) Direct connections to boilers and tanks.
3) Water-cooled refrigerator condensers.
4) Soft drink dispensers.
5) Hose bibbs and sill cocks.
6) Demonstration tables.
7) All laboratory equipment.
8) Dark room equipment.
9) Hose bibbs for uncovered combination storm-and-sewer area drain diverter valves require a
Reduced Pressure back-flow assembly.
10) Blueprint equipment.
11) Silver soak sinks.
12) Garbage can washers.
13) Most types of animal drinking water devices.
14) Various types of processing equipment (check with City).
15) Cooling towers and evaporative coolers (or provide air gap).
16) Sewage pumps.
17) Fire sprinkler systems.
18) Irrigation systems.
4. Hose Bibbs and Sill Cocks (Loose key):
a. Provide loose key sill cocks under exterior drinking fountains with isolation valves. (Sill cocks are faucets
with a hose connection installed approximately at the sill line of buildings.)
b. Provide loose key hose bibbs or sill cocks at approximately 75'-0" spacing around buildings, and within
25 feet of entrances with walk-off mats. Install in recessed boxes without covers. (Coordinate desired
locations with Landscape Architect.)
c. Provide sill cocks (with isolation valves) in Shower and Locker Rooms so that a 50'-0" long hose can be
used to wash down entire area.
d. Hose bibbs are not recommended in kitchens or other interior areas except as noted above.
e. Provide loose key hose bibbs or sill cocks, with isolation valves, at outside eating areas, all student
restrooms, in boiler rooms, on rooftops with skylights or air-cooling equipment for washdown of
equipment and pads, and on rooftops for washdown of bird droppings and debris on ladders and façade
projections.
5. Isolation and Shut-Off Valves:
a. All shut-off valves shall be accessible from the room in which fixtures are installed, and shall be located
at approximately 3’-0”, but not more than 7’0”, from the floor. These valves shall control only fixtures
in the room in which they are installed.
b. Provide shut-off valves for:
1) Each group of fixtures.
2) Each science laboratory or preparation room.
3) Each restroom.
4) Each floor of each building.
5) Each building, located at the entering point of building with yard box.
c. Provide a remote-control solenoid shutoff valve for Showers tempered-water; located downstream of
manual shutoff valve. Locate remote control at coach’s office
d. Use gate or ball valves for plumbing isolation shut-off.
6. Emergency Shower and Eye Wash:
a. Emergency shower and eye wash equipment shall be installed in the following areas where eye or skin
irritants exist and must comply with California Code of Regulations (CCR),Title 8, Section 5162.
1) Science and teacher’s chemistry/laboratory workrooms.
2) Pool mechanical equipment rooms.
3) Central Custodial supplies storage area. In middle and high schools install in receiving area.
b. A flip-down eye wash at sink shall be installed in the Teachers’ Science Rooms Preparation Area
Workroom, but only as a supplement to an approved Emergency Shower and Eyewash in the
classroom, as stated in Title 8 Section 5162.
7. Drinking Fountains:
a. Drinking fountains are required by the California Plumbing Code on every floor, as well as in other
specific locations.
b. Install fountains in locations, and above floor surfaces, where water falling from the fountain on to the
floor does not cause a slipping hazard. (See Section 2.1 School Building Design for specific location and
design requirements.)
c. Provide shut-off valve, cleanout and hammer arrestor for drinking fountains per District’s standard
details. If drinking fountains are located on the outside of the building. They should be Vandal
resistant and have a hose bibb shall be installed underneath the fountain.
F. GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
1. Gas Service:
a. In general, Elementary School systems are low pressure, (8" of water column), and Secondary School
systems are medium pressure (3 psi at the meter and 1 psi maximum drop to most remote outlet) but
medium pressure systems are allowable for site gas distribution for elementary schools with multiple
buildings when the gas company permits A properly vented pressure regulator with approved accessible
gas shut-off valve must be provided.
b. Locate gas meters:
1) Where a straight service run from the street can be made by the gas company.
2) Where it is accessible by truck for service and replacement.
3) As central as possible to the major gas loads (main boiler rooms, relocatable classrooms groups,
etc.) to minimize size and length of main pipe runs.
c. Meter locations must be approved by the District and the gas company.
d. Meter enclosure and assembly must conform to District Standard Drawing and should have asphalt or
gravel flooring (not concrete) with meter, valves and PRV above grade.
e. Use of medium-pressure gas requires design with “Polyflo Calculator” for gas-company approval.
f. Provide on plans a gas-load schedule for each meter including existing, new and future load in cfh.
2. Gas Piping:
a. Gas pipe:
1) In buildings or above ground at least 6 inches: Steel
2) Underground (30” minimum cover): Polyethylene, fusion welded, embedded in 6 inches of sand
all around (per District Standard Drawings). Include tracer wire (yellow insulated No. 18 AWG).
Connect to steel pipe with Central Plastics Company prefabricated transition fitting or equivalent.
b. Gas line locations:
1) Above grade within the building and underground to each building whenever possible.
2) Through attic spaces, within covered walkways, and in ventilated crawl spaces.
3) Avoid lengthy horizontal rooftop mounted piping wherever possible.
4) Avoid running gas lines through one building to serve another.
5) In isolated cases such as Kitchens and Science Rooms where gas branch lines must penetrate a
concrete slab, run pipes in a concrete trench with steel checkered plate cover and frame.
c. Gas Service Stop
1) Provide a gas service stop in an accessible location outside each building at the point where a gas
line enters the building.
2) For permanent buildings, locate on the riser with swing joint at point of entry.
3) For portable buildings, locate in yard boxes.
4) Provide only one entry per building unless unusual circumstances exist.
d. Gas Valves:
1) Provide an accessible shut-off valve for each gas outlet or group of outlets within a room.
a) Use an approved gas cock when valve is readily accessible.
b) An approved ball valve may be used when it is not accessible to students.
2) Provide individual check valves for gas outlets or turrets adjacent to air or water outlets, such as
for laboratory stations.
3) Provide a master shut-off valve for science labs in a secure area not accessible by students.
4) All laboratory gas valves shall be protected by an “accessible”/Serviceable electrically operated,

normally closed gas solenoid valve and remotely operated by emergency push button controller.
Locate as close as possible to the teachers work station, at 48” height (ADA reach height).
5) Provide an isolation valve for each floor in each building.
6) Provide isolation valves at each regulator.
7) Provide DSA-approved seismic gas shut-off valves properly strapped to avoid student tampering.
8) Provide a shutoff valve on each gas line entering a building immediately outside point it enters
the building. Do not install gas valves below grade.
9) All shut-off valves must be secured from student or public tampering.
e. Provide DSA approved Earthquake Shut-Off valve for each gas meter.
G. SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
1. Provide seismic restraints for mechanical equipment and piping systems in accordance with applicable codes
and guidelines.
2. For liquid filled steel pipe, use the following guidelines:
a. SMACNA "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping" latest
edition.
b. Hanger spacing as specified in “Guide Specifications”.
3.5 FIRE PROTECTION
B. Local Fire Authority review
C. Fire Sprinkler Systems
D. Standpipes
E. Fire Extinguishers
F. Key Safes or Knox Boxes

Book 3: Technical Criteria 3.5 Fire Protection
3.5 FIRE PROTECTION
1. Guidelines
a. This section contains criteria and information for local fire authorities’ review procedures, fire-sprinkler
systems, fire extinguishers, and related fire- and life-safety requirements. Other criteria and guidelines
include applicable portions of the California Fire Code, NFPA Standards, and the District Guide
Specifications and Standard Details.
b. A separate service shall be provided for fire protection; refer to 3.4 Plumbing, E, Water Valves and
Other Devices.
c. Fire protection for range hoods is provided by an approved UL 300 fire suppression system that is
integral with the hoods.
d. All Fire Department connections shall face the street and be free of any obstructions.
e. Hydraulic calculations for fire flow by a California Licensed Professional Fire Protection Engineer shall
be provided as part of the 50% CD Submittal. If a fire sprinkler pump is required, provisions for pump
housing, tank and electrical requirements shall be provided.
B. LOCAL FIRE AUTHORITY REVIEW
1. Local Approvals Requirements
a. Access from the public street to each new building within the site (CCR Title 19, Section 3.05, “Access
Roads”).
b. Perimeter fencing and gated entrances (CCR Title 19, Section 3.16, “Gate Entrances to School
Grounds”).
c. Fire hydrants, if required.
d. Standpipe locations.
e. Emergency Assembly Area (EAA) and Evacuation Plan.
f. Fire Department connections to automatic fire sprinkler systems.
g. For local review, provide a full site plan indicating all buildings, both existing and proposed, fences,
drive gates, retaining walls, EAA, and other construction affecting Fire Department access. Indicate
approved unobstructed fire lanes for access to buildings on the site plan.
h. The local Fire Department must signify approval on drawings and sign a standard approval form
furnished by DSA.
i. Principal agencies for Los Angeles schools are:
1) Los Angeles City Fire Department

Fire Prevention Bureau, Access & Hydrants Unit
213-485-5964
2) Los Angeles County Fire Department

Fire Prevention Engineering
213-720-5141
C. FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
1. Requirements
a. An automatic system shall be installed in every new school building in accordance with the current
California Building Code (CBC – part of California Code of Regulations, Title 24), NFPA 72, NFPA 13,
LAUSD’s Guide Specifications Section 15300, and requirements of the Division of the State Architect
(DSA).
b. The fire sprinkler system must be interconnected with the school fire alarm system.
c. On fire mains, provide a reduced pressure principle backflow assembly upstream of the fire-department
connection.
d. All valves controlling the water supply to automatic sprinkler systems and water flow switches for
automatic sprinkler systems shall be electrically supervised.
e. Fire sprinkler systems shall be designed and installed so that they are readily serviceable. Every building
shall have a fire sprinkler control valve located
5’-0” above the floor. Every riser assembly shall have a check valve. In multi-story buildings, every floor
shall have a separate shut-off valve, check valve, tamper switch, and flow switch at an accessible
location, with an Inspector’s Test Valve at the opposite end of the building.
Exception: If each floor has an independent shut-off valve located at the riser assembly, then a main
building shut-off valve will not be required.
f. Fire sprinkler main drain valve discharge line shall be piped into a sump pit or to a storm drain. Main
drain lines shall never discharge into a sanitary plumbing fixture, not even into a floor sink or floor
drain.
g. The Fire Department Connection (FDC) shall be located upstream of the fire sprinkler riser assembly,
not downstream of the riser assembly. A secondary FDC may be located on the address side of the
building, down stream of the riser assembly provided it is only a secondary FDC provision, with a sign
above it clearly stating what FDC serves.
h. A shut-off valve on a fire main backflow prevention assembly shall not be considered the building’s
main shut-off valve. Each building shall have its own separate shut-off valve as part of the riser
assembly.
i. Post indicator valves are not required to be provided along with backflow prevention assemblies on fire
mains. Fire mains are required to have sectional controlling valves at appropriate points per latest
edition of NFPA 13, 8.16.1.5. The shut-off valve on the backflow preventor provides a reliable method
of system shut-off. The Outside Stem and Yoke (OS & Y) valves provide a visual indication of those
valves being in the open or closed position.
j. Post indicator valves (PIV) are required, outside the building, where a fire sprinkler main passes through
the building foundation.
k. If a fire pump is required. Provide calculations on drawings and specifications.
l. Stages: All stages greater than 1,000 square feet in area shall be equipped with 1 ½ -inch hose
connections located in recessed valve cabinets on each side of the stage per latest edition of CFC
905.3.4. Hose connections shall be installed in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 13 and shall
not require hose.
m. Provide a separate fire sprinkler meter for new schools and when adding a new system for existing
schools.
D. STANDPIPES
1. Type of Systems
a. Standpipe systems shall be provided in buildings and areas per latest edition CFC Section 905 and
installed in accordance with latest edition of NFPA 14, summarized as follows:
1) Class I Wet Manual Standpipes without hoses and without hose cabinets shall be installed in
buildings where the floor level of the highest story is located more than 30 feet above the lowest
level of fire department vehicle access.
2) Class I Wet Automatic Standpipes without hose and without hose cabinets shall be installed in
buildings where the floor of an occupiable story is greater than 75 feet above the lowest level of
fire department vehicle access.
b. Standpipe hose connections shall be unobstructed and readily accessible to the Fire Department, and all
connections shall conform to Code and fire authority’s requirements. All hose valve connections shall
be in recessed cabinets wherever possible.
E. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1. Criteria
a. All areas of all buildings must have portable fire extinguishers within 75 feet of any point. Provide fire
extinguishers in accordance with CCR Title 19 and the District Guide Specifications.
b. Extinguishers shall not be located on the exterior of buildings. Extinguishers in corridors, stairs or other
unsupervised areas shall be avoided. All extinguishers shall be secured in a recessed, locked, UL listed
fire extinguisher cabinet. Locate fire extinguishers in classrooms within 75 feet of each other. Make
provisions for indicating decals to be installed on each side of doors of classrooms where extinguishers
are to be installed.
c. Portable fire extinguishers and notification signs shall be supplied as part of the contract for
construction. They shall meet minimum requirements for acceptance by the State Fire Marshal and local
fire authority.
F. KEY SAFES OR KNOX BOXES
1. General Criteria
a. For installation of all key safe (Knox Boxes), follow City of Los Angeles Fire Department Requirement
75. To standardize District’s procedures, Requirement 75 shall be followed for Los Angeles County
Fire Department sites with the exception that the box must be ordered for the Authority Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ), so that the factory installed lock matches the Master Key of the appropriate
jurisdiction. Typical mounting height shall be 8’-0” min. to 10’-0” above ground.
b. A key safe Knox Box is only to be provided and installed for Central Station Monitored site.
c. Architect/Engineer shall confirm the need for Knox Box, its location and mounting height with the
local Fire Authority. Mounting height could be min. 8’-0” above finished floor (AF F), preferred
mounting height shall be 10’-0” AFF.
3.6 HVAC SYSTEMS
B. SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA
C. HVAC SYSTEM SELECTION
D. CONTROLS AND ZONING
E. AIR DISTRIBUTION
F. COILS AND PIPING
G. COOLING SOURCES
H. HEATING SOURCES
I. SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
J. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
Book 3: Technical Criteria 3.6 Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning
3.6 HVAC SYSTEMS
A. INTRODUCTION
1. General Requirements
a. The HVAC system shall comply with the current California Code of Regulations, Title 24, the standards
of ASHRAE, SMACNA, and NFPA, as well as the requirements of the local authorities having
jurisdiction and LAUSD’s Design Guide.
b. All interior spaces shall be air conditioned unless specifically excluded in this Guide or in writing by the
District.
c. HVAC design shall comply with Title-24 energy efficiency requirements for all construction and exceed
Title-24 energy efficiency requirements by a minimum of 15% or more, in conjunction with envelope
and lighting design for new construction. Consult with utility suppliers to take full advantage of
incentives for higher energy efficiency such as the Savings by Design Program of Southern California
Edison and The Gas Company. Indicate the required equipment energy efficiencies clearly in the
equipment schedules in a separate column.
d. Refer to The Collaborative for High Performance Schools “Best Practices Manual” (available at
http://www.chps.net) for additional criteria that may be appropriate to the project. Appropriateness of
the criteria will be as determined by the District.
e. Refer to chapter 2.4, “Environment and Sustainability,” for additional requirements and specific
requirements for commissioning.
f. Systems and equipment shall conform to District’s Guide Specifications, Division 23
g. Assure maintenance and accessibility provisions for servicing and replacement.
1) Where practical, all equipment shall be housed on the roof or in Mechanical Rooms within the
building.
2) Provide adequate working area around equipment for service.
h. Where HVAC units are roof mounted or require roof openings, verify that all structural provisions are
made to assure adequate capacity for load bearing and diaphragm capacity.
B. SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA
1. Calculations and Load Criteria
a. Provide design criteria and calculations as follows:
1) Heating and cooling load calculations shall be performed on an industrially recognized computer
program such as Trace 700, HAP or Energy Pro that will demonstrate compliance with Title 24.
The calculations shall be done for each room and each system.
2) Indoor and outdoor design conditions and other relevant data shall be in accordance with current
ASHRAE publications.
3) Provisions for internal heat gain from occupants and equipment within a space shall be as
determined by LAUSD.
4) A field survey of actual field conditions and assessment of current demand is required for existing
facility projects such as modernization and equipment replacement. Submittal of an existing
condition assessment report is required.
b. When requested by the District, also submit calculations for equipment and system selection criteria
such as life-cycle cost and energy analysis, duct friction and pipe friction loss calculations, fan and pump
selection curves, heating and cooling coil selection data, chiller and cooling tower selection data, etc...
c. The California Energy Commission’s (CEC) Certificate of Compliance for Non-Residential Buildings
with the necessary backup forms shall be completed for submittal to the Division of the State Architect
(DSA) and for review by the District. The Title-24 Compliance calculations shall be performed on the
performance basis using the whole building approach, and integrating the building envelope, mechanical
and electrical systems as designed, on a CEC approved program such as Energy Pro or Perform.
2. Ventilation and Outside Air Control
a. Provide outside air to each room through the HVAC system in compliance with current CEC Standards
and ASHRAE recommendations.
b. Clearly indicate how outside-air is provided and how much for each HVAC unit. Also indicate with
calculations how air is relieved from the building, on regular cycle and economizer cycle, to balance the
fresh outside air make-up and maintain building pressures to assure compliance with CBC door closer
settings for accessibility.
c. Provide ventilation for electrical rooms with transformers.
3. Air filtration
a. Provide air filters with a minimum efficiency of Merv 8. HVAC systems for new and existing schools
constructed in areas with low outdoor air quality such as near freeways shall be provided with enhanced
air filtration systems.
b. Refer to the District’s Office of Environmental Health and Safety to obtain a “priority list of schools
most at risk from air pollution”. The design of HVAC systems at schools on this list must provide
enhanced filtration.
c. For new school facilities, requirements outlined in the project’s CEQA documents must be followed.
C. HVAC SYSTEM SELECTION
1. Criteria
a. HVAC systems shall be selected based on the following considerations:
1) Project Characteristics that includes but not limited to the following:
a) New building vs. modernization project.
b) Construction Materials: Wood frame, concrete, steel or masonry construction.
c) Single story vs. multi-story.
d) Roof type: Flat vs. pitched.
e) Building size and configuration.
f) Building a new plant vs. building on an existing school site.
g) Single building projects vs. multiple building projects.
h) Operating Schedules.
i) Location on site with regard to adjacent buildings and uses.
2) Easy to install.
3) Easy to operate and maintain.
4) Most efficient.
5) Proven reliability.
6) Designed upon well established principles, explicit approval shall be obtained from the district
for experimental designs before commencement.
7) Constructed of standard, use-proven materials.
8) Acceptable procurement lead time.
9) As low an initial cost as practical.
10) Low Operating cost.
11) Low Maintenance cost.
12) Lowest life cycle cost for highly energy efficient installations that incur a higher initial cost. The
life cycle cost calculations shall be performed on an industrial standard program such as Trace
700 or DOE-2. The calculations complete with all input and supporting data shall be submitted
to the district for review. The life cycle cost shall consider the incremental cost of building
enclosure, structure, electrical service and other utilities as well as the HVAC systems. Cost
estimates shall be made in an industry-recognized format and using manufacturer’s cost data or
data from a nationally recognized source such as Means. Utility costs shall be as obtained from
the utility providers and shall include historical cost escalation trends. Maintenance cost shall
include a breakdown of labor and materials for each piece of equipment or system component
based on nationally recognized references.
13) Environmentally friendly.
14) Acoustically compatible with occupied spaces.
15) Susceptibility to vandalism.
16) Degree of disruption of occupants during modernization.
b. Submit a system selection report (Design Intent Narrative) that addresses all the considerations above,
based on the guidelines of Chapter 1, HVAC System Analysis and Selection, of the 2004 ASHRAE
(American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers) Handbook.
2. Overview of HVAC Systems
a. Decentralized Systems: Decentralized systems are systems where the primary source of cooling, heating
or supply air is provided from independent sources scattered throughout a building or a campus.
Decentralized systems may consist of the following:
1) Small Single Zone Type Unitary Systems:
a) Packaged Rooftop Heat Pumps, Packaged Rooftop Air conditioning Units with gas
heating, split system heat pumps, split system air conditioning units and wall mounted heat
pumps or air conditioning units of less than 25 Tons capacity normally fall under the
category of Small Single Zone Type unitary systems. Small Single Zone Type Unitary
systems are usually controlled by a dedicated thermostat, but means of providing multiple
zone controls for unitary systems, such as Carrier’s VVT controls systems, are available.
Such systems are categorized under Small Single Zone Type Unitary Systems because they
cannot heat and cool simultaneously.
b) When single zone type unitary systems are provided for classrooms, one dedicated unit
shall be provided for each classroom.
c) Positive means for fresh air make-up and sufficient means of relief to maintain door
opening and closing pressures that comply with CBC accessibility requirements must be
provided for classroom units.
d) VVT type controls may be used for administrative and support areas. With VVT type
controls, rooms of dissimilar thermal profiles such as interior and exterior zones, north
and south exposures, etc. shall not be served by a common unit.
e) Window- or wall-mounted units shall not be used for classrooms.
f) Rooftop packaged units are preferred over split systems, except for small unoccupied
spaces like electrical, data, or phone rooms.
g) Gas heating is preferred over air-cooled heat pumps.
h) Do not use heat pumps where 24 hours operation is required or where the ASHRAE Bin
weather data indicates heating design temperatures below 40 degrees for more than an
hour at a time during the normal hours of school operation.
2) Multi-Zone Type Unitary Systems:
a) Roof-mounted, self-contained triple-deck multi-zone unit systems are categorized under
Multi-Zone Type Unitary Systems.
b) These systems are normally provided only for replacements.
b. Centralized Systems: Centralized systems are systems where the primary source of cooling and heating is
provided from a central source for a building or a campus. Centralized systems may consist of the
following:
1) Central chilled water plants:
a) Central chilled water plants may be air cooled or water cooled.
b) Water cooled systems are preferred over air cooled systems due to higher energy
efficiency.
c) Air cooled systems shall be used only where practical limitations exist for a cooling tower.
d) Evaporative condensers are not allowed due to the tendency to lose efficiency rapidly
from scale formation on the wetted tubes from hard water.
e) Modular chillers are not allowed.
f) A minimum of two independent chillers, working on lead lag, and associated accessories
shall be provided for a campus wide central chilled water system. When only two chillers
are provided, each chiller shall be sized to carry 75% of the load.
g) Campus wide central chilled water system shall be designed as variable flow constant
temperature systems for energy savings and dehumidification effectiveness.
h) The location of the central plant shall not be so remote that the energy savings of the
water cooled chiller system is offset by the additional energy consumption of the pumps.
i) Cooling towers shall be located away from HVAC outdoor air intakes, openings into
buildings and areas normally occupied by students.
j) The air delivery energy consumption can also offset the energy savings of the water cooled
chiller system. Air delivery energy consumption is usually the largest energy consumption
component of the building air conditioning system. Design the air delivery systems to
limit energy consumption due to excessive duct friction. Also analyze the feasibility of
using low temperature supply air systems to reduce energy consumption.
k) Do not use variable air volume systems for classrooms unless a means for ensuring that
each classroom is adequately ventilated and that indoor air quality is maintained -- for
example, by use of carbon dioxide monitors that are interfaced with the air-handling-unit
controls to modulate the outdoor air intake dampers. (VAV boxes should be located
outside the classroom area to reduce noise.).
2) Central boiler plants that provide heating hot water or steam.
a) Hot water boilers are preferred over steam boilers. Steam boilers are normally provided
only for replacements.
b) A minimum of two independent boilers and associated accessories shall be provided for a
campus wide central hot water system for redundancy. `
c. Hybrid Systems: Hybrid systems are systems where a common water loop for heating, condensing or
heat exchange is provided from a central source for a building or a campus whereas primary cold or heat
generators may be scattered throughout. Hybrid systems may consist of the following:
1) Water source heat pumps:
a) Follow guidelines regarding location of cooling towers.
b) A minimum of two independent cooling towers, two boilers and associated accessories shall
be provided for a campus wide central condenser water system for redundancy.
2) Geothermal heat pumps:
a) Obtain approval from the LAUSD’s Office of Environmental Health and Safety before
using geothermal heat pumps.
3) Large packaged roof top variable-air-volume units with heating hot water from a central boiler
plant.
a) In general, VAV units shall be limited to administrative or support areas and preferably not
used for classrooms. If needed, review application with the District.
3. Unitary vs. Central Systems Comparison
a. Although central systems frequently offer many advantages over unitary systems, when all factors have
been weighted and evaluated, unitary systems are usually chosen for schools because of their lower
initial cost.
b. Advantages of a Central System include:
1) Central system equipment often has more technical advantages and capabilities
2) The total installed cooling or heating capacity of a central plant is normally less than that of
unitary equipment.
3) The central cooling equipment offers better operating efficiency than unitary equipment.
4) Longer life.
5) Better temperature control.
6) Lower noise levels.
7) Better indoor air quality due to better air filtration flexibility.
c. Disadvantages of a Central System include:
1) High initial cost.
2) Need for more highly skilled maintenance and repair personnel.
3) Larger space requirements.
4) Entire system would be affected by the failure of one component. Larger areas would be shut
down due to the failure of one large air handling unit. The failure of one chiller or boiler could
reduce the cooling and heating capacity by half.
5) Multiple source responsibilities for installation.
6) Long lead times for obtaining equipment and replacement parts.
7) After-hour or off-schedule operation is not usually convenient or efficient. The energy

consumption and cost operating a cooling tower, a chiller and associated pumps to service a few
hours of the after hours or holiday operation of a few classrooms could offset the annual energy
and cost savings of the entire system.
8) Even though the cooling (refrigeration) energy of a central plant is more efficient, the air moving
energy is usually twice that of cooling energy in a typical school building. Some central systems
are less efficient than unitary systems because the air distribution systems are not designed to be
energy efficient.
d. For modernization or expansion of existing school plants, the addition of central systems is rarely cost
effective. And, in modernization projects, carefully chosen and designed unitary systems can be installed
with minimum disruption to the ongoing educational process.
D. CONTROLS AND ZONING
1. General
a. Provide an automatic system of temperature control for all systems.
b. Each classroom shall be a separate air-conditioned zone.
c. Small rooms such as adjacent offices on the same exposure and other small spaces of similar thermal
profile may be combined under one control zone. Zone control shall be located at the most
representative space temperature location.
d. A common air handling system shall not serve areas that are not on similar operating schedules.
e. Thermostats shall not be located in areas that are accessible to unsupervised students after schools hours
such as classroom building hallways, corridors and lobbies.
f. Thermostats in Gymnasiums shall be protected from possible damage from the impact of balls etc. or
provide remotely located thermostats with temperature sensors in the conditioned space or return air
ducts.
g. All thermostats shall be provided with lockable vandal -resistant covers.
h. Wireless controls are not allowed.
i. For existing facility projects such as modernization and equipment replacement, replace existing
pneumatic control systems with direct digital controls.
j. Kitchen MAU Sequence of Operations:
1) When kitchen is occupied, supply fan shall be turned on to low speed, return air dampers open to
100% and outside air dampers open to minimum set position.
2) Thermostats shall determine heating and cooling mode depending on indoor temperature and set
points. This will activate heating and mechanical cooling. Evaporative cooling shall be locked out
on this mode.
3) Exhaust fan shall be energized when kitchen hood venting is required. The supply fan shall be
turned on to high speed, return air damper closed to 0%, and outside air damper open to 100%.
Mechanical cooling shall be locked out on this mode.
4) Kitchen MAU shall be stand alone and not part of ECEMS.
2. Environmental Control and Energy Management System
a. Provide a fully automated, integrated and programmable Direct Digital Environmental Control and
Energy Management System (ECEMS) for HVAC systems (Central and/or Unitary) control and energy
management functions.
b. Integrate the ECEMS system with the Information Technology System when it is beneficial in cost or
security measures. The ECEMS system shall be designed to be monitored and controlled from a remote
location.
c. The specified ECEMS shall be open protocol BACNET system that is capable of interfacing with
systems by other manufacturers.
d. Control system and equipment shall be fully presented in the contract documents. The ECEMS
manufacturer shall furnish and install the complete system.
e. An override must be provided to by-pass the system in order to provide continuous service, if service on
the system is required during school hours.
f. User interface workstation shall be located in the MDF room and shall be hardwired to the network.
g. The ECEMS shall provide the following controls, diagnostic, or trending points:
1) General:
a) Indicate a system that utilizes a screen display for control operations.
b) The system shall be accessible remotely. Indicate that the system shall be provided with all
necessary software and configuration for remote users to open, read, and revise the screen
display data.
c) Digital data shall be stored and saved at 4 hour intervals and analog data at appropriate
intervals for an effective operation. Analog power inputs shall be stored at 15 minutes
intervals.
d) The system shall be able to offload historical data onto a DVDs yearly. A user alert shall
sound at this time. Reset shall be done manually.
e) Historical data stored in DVD shall be accessible via a display screen instantaneously by
date and time, and in trends and graphs.
f) Indicate that the system shall be equipped with a UPS capable of providing power to the
ECEMS for at least 30 minutes during power downtimes.
g) Coordinate with Mechanical Engineer to specify AC units or dampers with end limit
switches, or analog position feedback for connection to unitary controller.
h) Design shall provide for continuous network operation.
i) Design shall indicate but not be limited to pathways and conduit routing, equipment
location, component parts, and cables. Provide catalog numbers for all components.
j) All exterior mounted system components shall be NEMA 3R rated.
2) Air Conditioning Units (2 Tons – 25 Tons):
a) Supply air temperature.
b) Return air temperature.
c) Space temperature.
d) Outdoor air temperature. (one per site)
e) Filter status.
f) Fan status.
g) Compressor status.
h) Economizer damper current position.
i) Any other diagnostic points required by current T-24, automated fault detection and
diagnostics (FDD).
3) Fan Coil Units and Condensing Units:
d) Filter status.
e) Fan status.
f) Compressor Status
g) Any other diagnostic points required by current T-24, automated fault detection and
diagnostics (FDD).
4) Heat Pump and Fan Coil Units:
d) Filter status.
e) Fan status.
f) Compressor status.
g) Any other diagnostic points required by current T-24, automated fault detection and
diagnostics (FDD).
5) Lighting: Provide monitoring for the lighting control system. The EMS shall communicate with
the lighting control system via BACnet protocol.
6) Power System: Provide for the monitoring of power consumption as follows:
a) Monitor KWh, KW, KVA, KVAR, Power Factor, Amps at the main electrical service.
b) Monitor KWh, KW, KVA, KVAR, and Power Factor at each permanent building, and
bungalow clusters.
c) Design shall indicate a unitary controller for connection to the main electrical service
power meter.
d) The system shall be able to integrate analog signals form power meters. Power meter
outputs shall be totalized for each building, designated area(s), or power panels. Each
output shall be treated as one item
E. AIR DISTRIBUTION
1. Ventilation and Outside Air
a. Provide outside air to each room through the HVAC system in compliance with current CEC Standards.
b. Clearly indicate outside-air provisions and flow rates for each HVAC unit, and relief provisions to
balance the fresh outside air make-up and to relieve exhaust air in all operating cycles.
c. Fresh Air Intakes:
1) Locate fresh air intakes to prevent contamination from kitchen exhaust, garage exhaust, or any
process exhaust by locating the intakes on the upstream (prevailing wind) side of exhaust
openings, as distant as possible.
2) Limit intake velocity to 750 FPM through net free louver area at 100 percent fresh air quantities
to keep noise, pressure drop and rain carryover to a minimum.
3) Provide a floor drain at the fresh air intake into larger air handling unit rooms.
2. Ducts
a. Comply with current code and SMACNA Guidelines for duct construction. Thicker metal gauges for
ducts and hanger straps, as specified in the Guide Specifications, must be used for exposed ductwork
and other special considerations.
b. Size ductwork for conditioned air on equal-friction method based on 0.08" WC per 100 feet with a high
velocity limit of 1,000 FPM above occupied areas (850 FPM for unitary equipment above classrooms)
and 1,500 FPM inside shafts, or as directed otherwise by the Project Acoustical Consultant. Changes in
sizes at every branch or every interval are not warranted economically unless branch represents a
substantial percentage.
c. Size return-air and exhaust air ducts on equal-friction method based on 0.08" WC per 100 feet with a
high velocity limit of 1,000 FPM above occupied areas (850 FPM for unitary equipment above
classrooms) and 1,500 FPM inside shafts or as directed otherwise by the Project Acoustical Consultant.
d. Allowable air velocities for ducts above acoustically sensitive areas shall be determined by an Acoustical
Engineer.
e. Duct return air, Ceiling-plenum return is not allowed, in order to improve indoor air quality.
f. Ducts shall be designed to achieve required sound attenuation without the use of sound attenuators;
when this is not feasible, sound attenuators or lined ducts should be installed on inlet.
g. Fire dampers or combination smoke-fire dampers must be installed in all ductwork as required by the
State Fire Marshal. Indicate damper locations clearly on drawings. Provide disconnect switches for
automatic fire dampers.
h. If used Indicate the location of duct smoke detectors used for shut down of larger HVAC units and
combination smoke-fire dampers clearly on the floor plans. Coordinate with the project Electrical
Engineer to take advantage of total coverage smoke detection systems and save the duplicate cost of
installing smoke detectors separately for the HVAC system.
3. Air Inlets and Outlets
a. Select and layout supply-air outlets and exhaust and return-air inlets in accordance with current
ASHRAE Guidelines and acoustical requirements.
4. Fans
a. Select fans to minimize noise and to meet noise level criteria in occupied spaces.
b. Provide direct drive centrifugal roof exhaust fans, ceiling, inline or cabinet type on design below
3500CFM.
c. Special Exhaust Fans: Exhaust from kitchen hoods, fume hoods, kiln hoods, spray booths, and dust and
sawdust collection systems require special attention to construction details, explosion hazards, noise and
location.
1) Roof fans handling exhaust from kitchen hoods require a shaft seal and a special insulated plate
to separate fan from motor compartment.
2) Fans exhausting fume hoods require spark resistant construction, and special coatings to prevent
chemical action on fan and housing. The motor shall be explosion proof and located outside of
the air stream.
3) Fans exhausting paint spray booths require spark resistant construction. The motor shall be
explosion proof and located outside of the air stream.
d. Pre-fabricated duct collection systems shall be used for removal of saw dust in wood shops.
e. Exhaust from kiln hoods requires special fans with force-vented motor compartment and special
construction to withstand high temperature.
5. Economizers for Outside Air
a. General:
1) The California Energy Commission prescribes 100% outside-air economizers for equipment with
supply-air capacities over 2,500 cfm or 6.25 tons cooling capacity. That is the usual low limit for
satisfactory payback at locations where weather conditions are least conducive to 100% outdoor
air economizer operation with fan-assisted relief. For units of 7 ½ tons capacity and higher,
which are usually used for administrative areas, multi-purpose rooms and gymnasiums, the
District requires outside-air economizers and recommends power-exhaust systems.
2) Provide 100% outdoor-air economizers for classroom small rooftop unitary systems (3, 4 & 5
Ton capacities) to achieve energy savings and to comply with CHPS Energy Prerequisite 1 and
IEQ Credit 4.2 (both for the ability to more effectively flush out the building prior to occupancy
and for the increase in fresh air during the economizer cycle). Compliance with CHPS is
mandatory, but the use of economizers shall be considered only if the cost is justified by benefits
and school location. When economizers are utilized they are to be used with gravity relief of
exhaust air, not with power exhaust systems. Small split systems are not required to be provided
with 100% outdoor air economizer systems. Do not provide 100% outdoor air economizers
when the outdoor air quality is low.
b. Design Criteria for Economizers and Gravity Relief Systems:
1) For small rooftop unitary systems, provide units with downward duct discharge, and with
manufacturer-installed and warranted economizer equipment.
2) The total pressure drop through the relief system shall not exceed 0.075” water gauge.
3) Relief Louver size: The pressure loss through the louvers should not exceed 0.02” water
gauge static pressure. Catalog data indicates that the majority of the commercially available
louvers will have about 0.02” water gauge static pressure drop at about 250 feet per minute free
area velocity.
4) Ceiling Grille size: The pressure loss through the grilles should not exceed 0.02” water gauge
static pressure. Catalog data indicates that the majority of the commercially available registers will
have about 0.02” water gauge static pressure drop at about 300 feet per minute free area velocity.
5) Duct size: The relief duct should be sized for 0.01” water gauge static pressure loss per 100’ of
ductwork maximum for 100% of the unit capacity. The relief duct pressure loss should not
exceed 0.01” water gauge static pressure.
6) Backdraft dampers. Provide the counter-balanced type that opens at about 0.01” water gauge
static pressure. Check if they are opening properly and not stuck in the closed position. The total
pressure loss through the damper should not exceed 0.02” static pressure.
7) The pressure loss through each component of the system is required to be adjusted so that the
total does not exceed 0.075” water gauge static pressure.
c. Commissioning Measures
1) Air Balance: Systems must be balanced for both the regular and economizer modes.
a) Most unitary systems are specified with a safety factor in the static pressure. The
Contractor must be required by the specifications to replace the drive sheaves and slow
the fan down to achieve the required air balance and prevent energy waste and noise. If
this is not done, the air flow is left higher creating higher static pressure and noise levels,
as well as excessive pressure on doors and door closers.
b) If the system is not also balanced for the economizer mode, when the outdoor air
dampers open fully much more air is delivered than the design capacity.
2) Corridor pressure: If the corridor HVAC unit is off, or the corridor unit is not in the 100%
economizer mode when the classroom is operating on the economizer cycle, the corridor
pressure will be lower than normal operating conditions, further contributing to the door-closing
difficulty. Design system to prevent this occurrence.
3) Door closer pressure: During testing and balancing, door closer pressures must be set properly
and not too low just to more easily achieve access compliance.
4) Remedial Measures for Incorrect Design:
a) If gravity relief is not sufficient during the 100% outdoor air economizer operation after
the above commissioning is done, the maximum operation of the return and relief
dampers in the economizer system should be adjusted to reduce the amount of outdoor
air and return some air to the unit. An 80% outdoor air system is still more energy
efficient and conducive to fresher indoor air than a minimum outdoor air system with
30% outdoor air. If this is not possible, the economizer operation is required to be
deactivated.
F. COILS AND PIPING
1. Cooling Coils and Piping
a. Use maximum 550- FPM face velocity for the calculated quantity of air passing through direct-
expansion cooling coils and chilled-water cooling coils.
b. Pipe all cooling coils for counter flow of refrigerant against direction of airflow for most effective heat
transfer. Chilled water or refrigerant shall enter on the airflow downstream side of coil and work
through rows opposite the airflow. Design for water to enter at bottom and exit through top
connection of the coil to relieve possible air binding. Install air vents at top of return riser.
c. Use 2-way control valves to provide a variable-flow chilled water system. Provide variable-speed drives
at the pumps to save energy where economically feasible. Provide 3-way valves at the end of each pipe
loop for continuous water circulation. Provide a sufficient number of 3-way valves to maintain the
minimum flow requirements of chillers. Provide multiple chillers so that they may be staged.
d. Variable speed drives must be provided for the secondary pumps in primary - secondary chilled water
systems.
e. Provide all coil sections with thermometers, a 3/4" globe drain valve piped to floor drain at system low
point, a water strainer ahead of control valve, and gate valves in main chilled water supply and return for
shutoff and repair of control valves.
f. All valves, fittings, strainers and pipes (up to the coil) shall be the same size, except for control valves
which shall have reducers at valve inlets and outlets. Provide flexible connections at inlets and outlets to
coils.
g. Provide Griswold Flow Control valves or equivalent at the inlet side all cooling coils downstream of the
shut-off valves. Clearly emboss flow rating on a metal plate fixed on valve housing.
h. Provide a venturi flow measurement device, Barco-aeroquip or equivalent, on main chilled water line.
Clearly emboss flow requirement on a metal plate fixed to venturi housing. Show direction of air flow
through coils on diagrams.
i. Size chilled water coils on a basis of 12°F to 16°F water temperature rise.
j. Use direct expansion (DX) coils where close temperature control is not required; otherwise, use chilled
water coils. DX coils make control of cold plenum temperature erratic and present operational
difficulties.
1) Provide as many steps of capacity with solenoid valves as possible and use individual suction
risers with oil traps.
2) Pipe liquid lines with stop valves, strainers, solenoid valves, and external equalizing thermal
expansion valves.
3) Install sight glasses ahead of thermal expansion valve to observe a premature flashing condition.
2. Heating Coils and Piping
a. Size heating coils at 700 FPM maximum.
b. Use hot water as the preferred heating medium rather than steam because of relatively poor heat
distribution across face of a steam coil, particularly on low heat demand.
c. Use 2-way control valves to provide a variable-flow hot water system. Provide variable-speed drives at
the pumps to save energy where economically feasible. Provide 3-way valves at the end of each pipe
loop for continuous water circulation. Provide a sufficient number of 3-way valves to maintain the
minimum flow requirements of boilers. Provide multiple boilers so that they may be staged.
d. Arrange heating coils for counter flow and upward flow for best heat transfer and natural venting.
Tailor coils for each project with sufficient allowance for warm-up and fresh-air load.
e. Size water coils for 20°F minimum water temperature difference, and entering water temperature of
180° F. Piping to hot water coils shall be the same as that required for the chilled water coils.
G. COOLING SOURCES
1. Refrigeration Systems
a. Direct Expansion (DX) Systems, because it is difficult to obtain modulating control of capacity, should
be used only for single-zone units and other applications where modulation is not necessary.
b. Chilled Water Systems should be used for most multi-zone units and larger systems, where more precise
control and better modulating capacity control is needed.
c. Package-type units with compressor, chiller, condenser, and controls all provided as a unit should be
used when possible to simplify installation.
d. An absorption type machine may be considered only if steam is available from a central plant that will
be operating during summer or special gas incentives are available.
e. Machines should be piped for parallel flow.
f. Size piping at a friction loss of 5 feet of water per 100 feet of pipe maximum with maximum velocity not
to exceed 8 feet per second.
g. Select evaporators and condensers so water velocity through tubes is 9 feet per second maximum.
h. Thermal energy storage systems and co-generation systems shall be considered only when substantial
incentives are offered by the utility providers to offset the additional cost.
2. Chilled Water Pumps:
a. Size pumps for the total pressure drop through the system, including piping, chiller evaporator, coil,
three-way control valve and "Griswold" flow control valve.
b. For primary secondary system, provide two redundant secondary system pumps. Size each pump for
100% of system capacity, so one functions as 100% standby. Both pumps shall be designed with
variable speed drives and automatic alternating controls. Where primary secondary system is not used,
provide a dedicated pump for each chiller that is sized for full capacity of the chiller.
c. Use end-suction, pedestal-mounted pumps with mechanical seals and flexible couplings for all except
very large systems, where it may be necessary to use double suction pumps.
d. Install a gate valve and strainer on the suction side and a balancing cock on the discharge side of each
pump, and a chemical feeder from the supply to return line.
e. Bolt pumps directly to a concrete base unless located over or under a critical occupied space, when they
should be mounted on inertia anti-vibration bases. Install flexible connections in piping to pumps.
3. Cooling Towers
a. Size cooling towers at minimum of 2ºF above current ASHRAE design wet bulb temperature to get
120% to 150% of required capacity, to guarantee full capacity from chiller at any wet bulb conditions
and to allow for fouling of tower.
b. Provide a bleed-off system and a chemical feeder to prevent mineral build-up and to maintain water
quality.
c. Provide for make-up water to replace evaporation and bleed.
d. Locate cooling towers to avoid unsightly conditions and so that noise generated by fan will not be
objectionable in adjoining buildings. Provide louvered screens, masonry walls, or planting for
concealment.
e. Locate cooling towers so that the discharge air from the cooling towers will not contaminate air
handling unit outdoor air intakes, openings into the building and pedestrian or student occupied areas to
minimize the possibility of Legionnaires’ Disease.
4. Condenser Water Pumps
a. Use two system pumps with variable speed drives. Size each pump for 100% of system capacity so one
pump can function as 100% standby. Provide automatic alternating controls.
b. Size pumps for the actual capacity of the chiller requirements -- approximately 3 gpm per ton of
refrigeration.
c. Design condenser water piping the same as for chilled-water piping. Make sure that cooling tower
elevation or suction pipe sizes are adequate to provide a positive suction head at the pump.
H. HEATING SOURCES
1. Boilers
a. Use Low Nox hot-water boilers to avoid expense of heat exchangers.
b. Use two or more gas fired package-type boilers, cast-iron or steel water-tube with burner and controls all
mounted as a unit, for larger systems and one for smaller systems.
c. Operate at 180°F to 200°F minimum with a temperature drop of 30°F maximum to prevent
condensation of flue gases in breeching and stack.
d. Provide a combination low-water-cutoff and boiler-feed control with alarm mounted above centerline of
boiler relief valve discharge. Connect boiler feed to full domestic cold water line pressure, taking care to
see that CW pressure is greater than boiler operating pressure.
e. Pipe blowdown from low-water control and feeder to a hopper drain located adjacent to boiler.
2. Central Boiler Plant
a. Hot water from a Central Plant should be used if available.
3. Hot Water Heating System
a. Pumps:
1) Use two system pumps in parallel provide one system pump as standby. Size boiler primary
recirculating pump as recommended by boiler manufacturer.
2) If close temperature control is required, select circulating pumps first and size piping to fit
available pump head. In most cases, this will permit use of pipeline-mounted pumps for all
secondary circuits. Close temperature control is usually not required and secondary circuit
pumps are usually not necessary.
3) Use end-suction, pedestal-mounted pumps with mechanical seals and flexible couplings for all
except very large systems, where it may be necessary to use double suction pumps.
4) Bolt pumps directly to a concrete base unless located over or under a critical occupied space,
when they should be mounted on inertia anti-vibration bases. Install flexible connections in
piping to pumps.
b. Piping:
1) Design for water velocity of 8 feet per second maximum, with pressure drop 5 feet per 100 feet
of pipe maximum.
2) Arrange piping so heat source, expansion tank and cold-water make-up are on suction side of
pump as indicated in latest ASHRAE handbook, Systems Volume.
3) Install a small chemical feeder on each system.
c. Expansion Tanks:
1) Size expansion tanks in accordance ASHRAE Guidelines, for 100 psi ASME Code working
pressure. Expansion tanks shall be of the bladder or diaphragm type.
d. Relief Valves:
1) Provide ASME Code-rated relief for maximum heat input to hot water boiler.
2) Relief setting is limited to boiler working pressure or working pressure of weakest component in
system.
3) Pipe discharge to 12" maximum above floor.
e. Air-Vent Valves:
1) Provide auto air vent valves at all high points in system or wherever air might be trapped in
system. Locate valves on drawings.
4. Cold Water Make-Up
a. Cold water make-up to boilers, hot-water, chilled-water, and condenser-water systems should be made
from a common line which has a reduced pressure backflow-prevention device installed under plumbing
work.
b. Install a gate valve, strainer and check valve at make-up connections to closed systems, except that
make-up to combination boiler-water feeder and low water cut-off on boilers should be full line
pressure.
c. Provide water treatment for all closed heating and cooling systems and at all cooling towers.
I. SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL
1. Criteria
a. Because mechanical systems and equipment are a major source of disturbing noise within buildings,
sound and vibration control measures must be incorporated to the maximum extent economically
practical. In general, refer to current ASHRAE guidelines, District Guide Specifications, chapter 2.4
“Environment and Sustainability” of this Guide, and the following recommendations.
b. Since the District desires to achieve noise levels from HVAC systems better than 45 dBA, especially in
instructional spaces, plan and describe in the “Basis of Design” narrative how this improved acoustical
quality will be achieved together with the associated cost impacts.
2. Equipment Sound Levels
a. Schedule the sound level of the design base HVAC equipment on the drawings. These sound levels
must be at the design conditions and tested per applicable current standards such as ARI Standards 260,
270, 370 and AMCA 300.
3. Duct and Fan Noise
a. Ductwork:
1) Use ducts of thicker sheet metal gauge with sufficient bends to reduce fan and equipment noise.
Lined ductwork and/or attenuators may be used when recommended by the Project Acoustical
Engineer. Duct lining, acoustical panels in ductwork and sound attenuator media when used
shall be of the type that inhibits the growth of mold, mildew and fungi and shall not contain
harmful VOC’s or contain glass fiber.
2) Provide flexible connectors for ducts at fan connections
3) Do not locate sound attenuators above spaces where the self generated noise of the attenuator
will increase the space sound level above requirements.
b. Fans:
1) Fan-noise in occupied spaces is typically caused by poorly constructed roof fans, roof fans
operating at too great a tip speed, fan noise traveling through air intake louvers and then into
adjoining spaces, and fan noise traveling to occupied spaces through inadequately treated return
systems. Fan noise also comes from rooms without sound-attenuating walls or from roof-top
units with inadequate sealing of roof openings and duct chases.
2) Locate fan and equipment rooms away from classrooms and other noise-sensitive spaces.
3) Make fan and equipment room walls of dense material, poured concrete or concrete block with
all voids filled where feasible – or sound-attenuating walls of studs and gypsum board.
4) Provide details to assure adequate sealing of duct penetrations through roof or mechanical
equipment room walls.
5) At roof fans exhausting from ceiling plenums over occupied areas, provide a sound attenuator
installed at fan inlet.
4. Equipment Mounting and Isolation
a. For roof-top HVAC units, no roof penetrations are allowed except the minimum necessary for ducts
and electrical conduit. All such openings shall be acoustically sealed with acoustical sealant. In addition,
beneath the units provide a sound-isolation barrier of a close-fitting layer of ¾” waterproof plywood or
cement board, sealed with acoustical tape to the curb.
b. For fans over 24" provide inertia type concrete bases with spring isolators. For smaller fans provide
spring-type vibration isolator rails under fan and motor.
c. Floor-mounted pumps shall be bolted directly to concrete bases and shall have flexible pipe
connections, except when located over or under an occupied area where noise could be transmitted by
piping or building structure to occupied space. In this case, they shall be mounted on inertia type
concrete bases with spring-type vibration isolators and shall have flexible connections rigidly anchored
and braced to prevent elongation of the flexible connections.
d. Air compressors shall be mounted on spring-type vibration isolators, except larger sizes shall also have
concrete inertia bases and flexible pipe connections.
5. Pipe, Conduit and Duct Connections to HVAC Equipment
a. Pipe, duct and electrical conduit connections to HVAC equipment with rotating or reciprocating
components shall be provided with flexible connectors.
b. Provide spring, neoprene or rubber in shear type hangers as required for pipes and ducts near
connections to HVAC equipment that are located near or serve acoustically sensitive spaces as directed
by an acoustical engineer.
6. Classroom HVAC Sound Control:
a. To meet District standards, HVAC systems must be designed so that noise from the system does not
cause the ambient noise in a classroom to exceed the level of 45 dBA as measured in accordance with
ANSI Standard 12-60. Make design recommendations to the District to achieve a lower sound level,
within reasonable economic limits
b. ASHRAE recommended design criteria for classroom HVAC sound control is Noise Criteria (NC)
Curve NC-35. An HVAC system will probably meet the District 45 dBA criteria when no portion of
octave-band spectrum of noise lies above NC-35 curve. (This is approximately equivalent to a sound
level of 45 dBA from a standard sound level meter reading.)
c. Refer also to chapter 2.4 “Environment and Sustainability” of this Design Guide for additional
standards and reference to CHPS Best Practices.
J. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
1. HVAC and Refrigeration for Food Service:
a. Kitchen ventilation systems shall comply with the current CMC requirements.
b. The basic design concept of the Kitchen Ventilation Systems shall be in accordance with the District
Standard Design. Drawings for these standards are available from the Design Manager upon request.
c. The kitchen ventilation system shall be capable of maintaining the kitchen temperature above 68 degrees
F during heating and below 80 degrees F during cooling.
d. The kitchen ventilation system shall operate at a lower speed to deliver less air (only the amount
necessary to maintain the room temperature) in order to conserve energy when the kitchen hood
exhaust fans are off.
e. Locate control switches for HVAC equipment to prevent unauthorized use.
f. Kitchen Hoods:
1) Provide U.L. listed stainless steel hoods of the 100% exhaust type. Short circuit hoods where
make up air is introduced directly into the hood are not allowed.
2) Provide a State Fire Marshal approved fire protection system inside hood.
g. Refrigeration Equipment For Walk-In Refrigerators:
1) The District does not provide standby refrigeration equipment for walk-in boxes, so accessibility
is critical for repairs.
2) Do not locate in areas difficult to reach or service. Best location is a shaded area outside at grade
level.
2. HVAC for Science Classrooms
a. Science classrooms include chemistry, physics, biology, physiology, physical earth, and earth science
study facilities, flexible science labs, preparation/workrooms next to labs.
b. Where hazardous or toxic substances are used in the classrooms, special precautions must be taken,
including the following:
1) Direction of airflow must be controlled to prevent spread of airborne contaminants and to

protect personnel from exposure to toxic and hazardous substances.
2) Exhaust 100% of air supplied with no re-circulation.
3) Maintain constant airflow volume with exhaust operating at full capacity.
4) Air supply system must satisfy thermal requirements and provide necessary air balance.
c. Exhaust system:
1) Exhaust fans must remove a fixed air quantity from each hood. Hoods that have doors must
have individual bypasses for air volume and face velocity regulation.
2) Exhaust system may consist of an individual fan for each hood or a fan serving a group of hoods.
3) Determine if there is a need for off-hour operation of hood exhaust system, and design the
system accordingly.
4) Locate exhaust fans near the point of discharge to atmosphere so ducts will be under negative
pressure and any leakage will be into duct.
5) Locate discharge openings with respect to fresh air intakes to avoid re-circulation.
6) Exhaust ducts for fume hoods and fans must be of non-corrosive construction. Motor shall be
explosion proof. In all cases, follow the hood manufacturer's recommendations for exhaust fan
sizing and system design.
7) Provide fire rated enclosure or fire wrap around fume hood duct, as required by applicable codes,
when duct crosses other areas.
3. HVAC for Computer Rooms
a. Provide HVAC to MDF, IDF, and any other computer rooms having special requirements for
temperature and air-quality control.
b. The computer room HVAC units shall be for 24 hours operation, independent from the central system.
4. HVAC for Arts Classrooms
a. Photography Classrooms: Supply dark rooms with 100% outdoor air for control of odor. Since air
must be extremely clean to avoid spotty film, use high-efficiency filters. Duct systems into dark rooms
must be light tight.
b. Art Classrooms: Provide 100% exhaust system, minimum six air changes to remove fumes from
solvents, etc.
c. Ceramic Classrooms: For kiln, products of combustion must be removed, and a source of combustion
air provided for indoor, gas-fired models. Since they emit large quantities of heat, that load must be
considered in HVAC design. Provide 100% exhaust system, with a minimum of six air changes.
5. HVAC for Industrial Arts Classrooms
a. General:
1) Industrial Arts Classrooms are spaces provided for instruction in construction, maintenance, and
repair of industrial products. In addition to California Code of Regulations, Title 24, refer to
CCR, Title 8 - “Industrial Relations” for additional design criteria.
b. Power Energy Technology:
1) Power Energy Technology shops require large amounts of heat to replace losses through large
and frequently opened doors.
2) Since work is often done underneath the automobile or other equipment, floors should be kept
warm by radiant heaters or other devices.
3) Provide an under-floor carbon monoxide exhaust system to remove engine exhaust gases.
4) If a paint spray booth is installed, it must be exhausted in a safe manner. Makeup air to spray
booth must be tempered for best painting results.
5) If a steam cleaning area is provided, it must be exhausted.
c. Construction Technology Shops:
1) Dust produced in wood working operations is both a health and fire hazard. In smaller
installations, a packaged dust collector using a vacuum cleaner principle may be provided. Large
groups of wood working machines will require a ducted, central collection system with a
centrifugal separator. In either case, collection equipment must be located so that disposal of
collected dust is easy and economical. Dust collection system should include the following:
a) Exhaust pipe system including dust collector and skimmer are covered in Guide
Specifications for use in Senior and Junior High Schools.
b) Avoid under-floor piping, if possible.
c) Keep flexible exhaust piping to a minimum. Where flexible piping is used, a non-
collapsible type of piping should be installed.
d) Drop exhaust piping along columns or walls.
e) Note minimum height of hopper outlet for placement of 55-gallon drums.
f) Note maximum height of exhaust piping inlet to dust collector on existing building where
exhaust piping may penetrate existing building window.
g) Coordinate exhaust piping with suspended light fixtures which are free to swing a
minimum of 45 degrees from vertical in all directions.
h) Provide seismic restraints for exhaust piping per provisions of NFPA pamphlet 13.
i) Refer to standards and requirements of ACGIH Industrial Ventilation - A Manual of

Recommended Practices -- AMCA, and SCAQMD, as applicable.
2) If spray painting is to be done, a bench type or floor type spray booth should be installed.
3) Heating system must be large enough to accommodate outdoor air introduced to equal exhaust.
d. General Manufacturing Shops:
1) General manufacturing shops may contain high-heat producing equipment such as furnaces and
ovens. These must be shielded or ventilation must be provided to control local environment.
2) Welding and soldering operations produce toxic fumes which must be removed through hoods
or other local exhaust.
3) Dip tanks and plating tanks must be hooded to prevent spread of toxic vapors.
6. Underground Parking Ventilation
a. Ventilate underground parking areas continuously by forced air exhaust systems in compliance with
current codes.
b. Provide carbon monoxide monitors to control the exhaust fans and to annunciate an alarm on high CO
levels as required by code.
c. Do not provide exhaust ducts outside garage fan room, unless garage is very large and odd in shape,
thus requiring some ducts. Locate fan in fan room or enclose fan with chain link fence for vandal
protection.
d. Assure that exposed ducts or equipment are protected by bollards or other enclosure.
e. Coordinate location of ducts, piping and equipment to avoid overhead obstructions into the minimum
vertical clearance (8’-0”) along the vehicular route connecting the parking garage entrance to the
accessible spaces, and at the accessible spaces themselves. Coordinate location of ducts, piping, and
equipment to avoid obstructing the accessible route, and to avoid protrusions >4” into the protected
zones that are not cane detectable by visually impaired persons.
7. Restroom Ventilation
a. Provide a minimum of 10 air exchanges per hour in restrooms.
b. Provide conditioned air to multi-occupant restrooms utilizing relief air from large adjacent classrooms
with backdraft damper.
c. Toilet exhaust duct shall be routed to the roof. Sidewall toilet exhaust is prohibited.
d. Toilet’s exhaust fans smaller than 3500 CFM are to be direct drive.

A. Power Systems General Requirements
B. Lighting Systems Requirements
C. Electrical Power Systems
D. Emergency Power System
E. Photovoltaic (PV) Systems

Book 3: Technical Criteria 3.7 Electrical Power and Lighting
A. POWER SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Life safety and preservation of property are two critical factors in the design of the Electrical Systems. Safety
to personnel and protection of property cannot be compromised and only the safest systems must be
considered.
1. General Guidelines.
a. For existing facilities the Architect-Engineer shall procure all available electrical drawings and
underground utility plans from the District’s Vault; Other site plans or site information, and related
drawings are also available for consultants’ research.
b. The Architect-Engineer must visit the site to verify record drawings and/or existing as-builts
information against site conditions to reflect them in the proposed design and construction documents.
c. Designs for modernization projects, expansions or additions, as well as new construction in existing
campuses shall reflect existing conditions, and applicable modifications made to meet the project’s
requirements.
d. Off-site work or work within easements shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of the
agency having jurisdiction.
e. Special requirements from local municipalities shall be addressed in the design documents.
f. All power wiring shall be in conduit or raceways. Refer to applicable specification division 26
specification sections for additional requirements.
g. Low-voltage communication or signal wiring shall be continuous without splices between devices, and
shall be in conduits or raceways. Refer to section 3.8 – Electrical Communication AV systems for
additional requirements.
h. Electrical receptacles and light switches shall be located to allow easy access by users, reflect probable
area(s) usage, and equipment locations. Receptacles or switches serving equipment must be accessible,
and located in compliance with CEC and California Administrative Code -Title 24 requirements.
i. Provisions shall be made for wire management of power cords accessing the receptacles and shall be
coordinated with the work surfaces, counters, cabinetry, storage units, etc.
j. All panels and control equipment must be readily accessible.
k. Avoid running conduit on the roof unless it is absolutely necessary, the length of conduit run shall be
minimized, and the design shall clearly indicate all requirements to accommodate roof replacement if
necessary.
Prior to designing a system with roof mounted conduits the Architect-Engineer shall obtain approval from the
OAR or Design Manager.
B. LIGHTING SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
1. General Guidelines
a. Lighting design shall conform to California Energy Commission Energy Efficiency Standards for
nonresidential buildings, and shall achieve greater efficiency in accordance with the requirements
described below.
b. Lighting design shall comply with guidelines and follow recommendations and procedures of the
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) in its “Lighting Handbook” and
“Recommended Practice on Lighting for Educational Facilities, ANSI/IESNA RP-3-00,” as well as
other documents referenced herein.
c. Refer also to alternative design approaches and daylighting requirements presented in the “Environment
and Sustainability” section of the “School Design Guide.”
d. For other guidelines, refer to The Collaborative for High Performance Schools “CHPS Best Practices
Manual, Volume II,” sections on “Electric Lighting and Controls” and “Appendix” (available at
http://www.chps.net/).
e. Provide uniform light distribution in all learning and working spaces. Interior lighting systems shall
provide illumination without discomfort caused by glare. Consider reflectance of room surfaces and
coordinate with architectural finishes.
f. Avoid harsh or extremely bright lighting. Minimize veiling reflections in task details.
g. Utilize daylight harvesting to the maximum extent feasible in all spaces, integrated with electric lighting,
photo sensors, and dimmer controls to reduce electricity use.
h. Utilize high color-rendering source in which appearance of people and spaces is enhanced.
i. Consider maintainability of lighting system, including susceptibility to dirt collection, ease of cleaning
and relamping.
j. Provide in all display cases lighting to illuminate each shelf and back individually.
k. All lighting circuits shall have a power factor equal or greater than 0.95.
l. The lighting controls in Theatrical applications shall be interfaced with the Fire Alarm System to cause
house lighting to be forced on during alarm conditions, regardless of manual control settings. In
addition the lighting control system shall also interface with the central public address and autonomous
public address system.
m. Wall mounted light fixtures shall be located in compliance with ADA requirements.
2. Illumination Criteria
Design to achieve the following maintained average foot-candle levels on the task plane at levels not lower than
those indicated below, unless alternative lighting designs are submitted and approved by the District that
demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Interior Spaces: Foot Candles Light Source

General Classrooms (See special 30-50 Linear Suspended
section covering all classrooms.) Fluorescent
Science and Technology Classrooms 30-50 Linear Suspended
Fluorescent
Shops and Drafting Classrooms 50 Linear Suspended
Fluorescent
Library 30 Linear Suspended
Fluorescent
Auditorium (higher level is for 30 Halogen/
lecture/testing uses) Fluorescent
Multi-Purpose Room: 30-50 Fluorescent
Gymnasium (see special section) 50 Fluorescent
Locker, Exercise and Weight 10 Fluorescent
Rooms:
Dining Areas (on dimmers) 30 Fluorescent
Food Preparation Area 50 Fluorescent
Custodial Rooms 20 Fluorescent
Offices 30-50 Fluorescent
Corridor/Stairways (1 FC min. 10 Fluorescent
Emergency Exit Lighting)
Restrooms 10 Fluorescent
Parking Garage 5 Fluorescent
Parking Garage Entry Zone 50 Fluorescent
(Daytime Only)
Machinery and Equipment Rooms: 50 Fluorescent
Exterior Spaces
Building Exterior (Walks, General 2
Areas)
Exterior Corridors (Covered Walks) 10
Parking Lots 1 min.
Athletic Fields: Refer to IESNA
3. Specific Lighting Criteria
a. Classroom Lighting Systems
1) Follow the recommendations of the Southern California Edison’s “Classroom Lighting

Guidelines,” except as modified herein.
2) Classroom lighting shall be an integrated combination of daylighting and electric lighting

providing energy conservation through lighting controls. Refer to the “Environmental and
Sustainability” section of these guidelines for more information.
3) The typical classroom model to meet or exceed the criteria will consist of two rows of continuous
suspended indirect or indirect/direct fluorescent lighting fixtures parallel to the window wall.
(Do not use three rows.) Each row 20 feet long, plus a 12-foot white board lighting fixture.
(Preferred system in order to provide greater illuminance of the white board area)
4) Lamps in each row for general illumination shall be two high-output T8 lamps or one dimmable
T5HO lamp with matching ballasts. Ballasts will usually have a normal ballast factor and
characteristics in compliance with applicable lighting and lighting controls in specifications
sections in Division 26..
5) Align suspended rows and supporting cables with the ceiling grid. In a typical classroom rows
will be spaced 14 feet apart; however, vary the length and spacing of the two continuous rows of
lighting fixtures to suit the size and shape of the classrooms and their specific functional needs.
6) For larger science, technical and art classrooms, use a similar model, but use longer rows. Since
these rooms sometimes have perimeter work counters, and the illuminance should be greater
over the counters, adjust the spacing to adequately illuminate the counters. Use a higher ballast
factor if necessary to increase the illumination.
7) In High and Middle School Science Classrooms use the suspended dual-mode fixture with two
high-output T8 indirect lamps for general illumination and one dimmable T8 downlight for AV
presentations, switched so that both lamp sets cannot be on at the same time. Use a whiteboard
lighting fixture in these classrooms.
8) Lighting fixtures must illuminate the ceilings and walls as well as the task plane (desktop).
9) Uniformity of illuminance on the desktop is important – especially on the core desk space,
beginning four feet from walls. Generally, a max: min ratio of 2.5: 1.0 should not be exceeded.
10) Provide ceiling illuminance equal to or greater than the desktop illuminance. Uniformity of
ceiling illuminance is important, and the maximum to minimum ratio should not exceed 12:1.
Provide wall illuminance (opposite the window wall) approximately 50% or more of ceiling
illuminance.
11) Provide teaching wall and white board illuminance at 20 fc minimum. When using wall-washing
whiteboard lighting fixtures, illumination of the instructional wall (whiteboards, maps, etc.)
should be 30 fc minimum to 40 fc maximum.
12) Wall-washing whiteboard luminaries shall be provided in accordance with IESNA

recommendations, to avoid reflections in the board to the nearest viewer, to avoid a bright patch
above the board, and to evenly illuminate the board without a steep fall-off toward the bottom.
13) During the design development phase provide point to point lighting calculations to graphically
demonstrate the light levels on all room surfaces. Use the input data presented in the SCE
“Classroom Lighting Guidelines,” except for any modifications in this Guide. (Note that the
“Architecture” section of this Guide calls for the following minimum surface reflectances:
Ceilings – 83%; Walls – 60%; Floors – 30 %.)
b. Gymnasium Lighting
1) Illuminate gyms with top daylighting for daytime use (not side lighting through windows), using
skylights or tubular daylighting devices.
2) Using average lumen output of the daylight device for the brightest 2,400 hours of the year
(based on TMY2 weather data), design daylighting to provide 30 to 35 fc average on the floor
with a max./min. ratio of 2:1 (all within reasonable tolerances).
3) Provide electric lighting for nighttime use and daytime supplementary lighting using high-bay or
high-output fluorescent lighting fixtures (T5HO lamps), accompanied by daylight sensors to
selectively switch or dim the lamps in response to the daylight illuminance. Lamps shall be
switchable to four (or three minimum) different levels (including “OFF”). The
Architect/Engineer of Record may propose fixtures with alternative light sources, justification
and approval in writing from the District will be required.
c. Site Lighting
1) Campus and parking areas and building perimeters must be lighted to provide for the safety of
people and the security of property. Provide adequate light, properly distributed to reveal such
hazards as curbs and steps, and to illuminate dark and potentially dangerous areas. Preferred light
sources are Metal Halide and High Pressure Sodium.
2) Provide safety and security lighting on exterior walls of buildings, building entrances, parking lots,
covered walks, and where needed to meet specific project requirements.
3) Provide lighting for parking lots using pole-mounted full cut-off light fixtures.
4) Lighting fixtures must be installed in such a manner as to minimize glare for pedestrians and
drivers, and to avoid light spilling onto adjacent properties.
5) Exterior lighting fixtures and controls, including those located in stairwells open to the exterior,
shall be weather and vandal resistant. Locate lighting fixtures and sensors at 10 feet or more
above grade wherever feasible, or otherwise as high and out-of-reach as possible.
d. Sports Fields
1) For sports fields the luminance must satisfy the requirements of players and spectators.
Uniformity of horizontal and vertical illumination over the entire playing field is especially
important for such high-speed sports as baseball, football, and tennis.
2) Important factors include glare, luminance contrast, color contrast, flicker and spill light.
3) Lighting fixtures must provide spill and glare controls to minimize offsite illuminance and glare
and sky glare.
4) Refer to IESNA standards for specific requirements of each sport activity.
e. Stages, Auditorium, and Multi-Purpose Rooms in Middle Schools and High Schools
1) A Theatrical Lighting and Sound Consultant must be engaged for the design of these systems;
particularly for Middle Schools and High Schools.
2) Lighting and controls are required for stages and platforms, house lights, work lights, and
orchestra pit lights.
3) All stage, auditorium, and multi-purpose rooms lighting must be easily and safely accessible for
relamping and servicing. Such provisions must be clearly indicated on the drawings. For
elementary schools multi-purpose room stage lighting requirements refer to f below.
4) Proscenium stages and platforms require lighting from the front, side and back.
5) Stage lighting equipment should not be visible to the audience; however, in cases where existing
conditions makes it necessary the Architect/Engineer shall obtain approval from Design
Manager prior to proceeding with the design. If the equipment is mounted in visible locations,
consider instrument spill light, glare and nearby reflective surfaces in the design.
6) The most common stage front lighting in the auditorium and multi-purpose room ceiling is
commonly referred to as the ceiling cove or beam position. This is plotted on a 45-degree angle
from head height at approximately 5 feet of an actor standing at the proscenium line to the
auditorium or multi-purpose ceiling. Lights located in this position provide the basic illumination
for the downstage acting area. In a large auditorium or multi-purpose room, several ceiling slots
may be required to provide adequate lighting on the forestage or apron, and the area immediately
behind the front curtain.
7) Side lighting supplements the front lighting to give three-dimensional properties to the
performers and setting. This lighting equipment consists of ellipsoidal spotlights mounted on a
pipe frame secured to the wall, at each side of the auditorium or multi-purpose room. These
positions are called box booms and the lighting is intended for the apron area only or cross
lighting for deeper into the stage.
8) Side light for the remaining acting area (behind the proscenium arch) can either be from positions
on the end of electrical battens in the air or on separate movable boom poles in between each
wing (this low side light is most commonly utilized in dance).
9) On-stage lighting provides front, upstage, top, high side, back lighting, scenery and cyclorama
lighting. The lighting equipment for on stage lighting consists of rows of PARs, ellipsoidal
spotlights, fresnels, and cyclorama lighting on overhead electric battens. The number of rows
and lighting equipment depends on the size of the stage. Typically, one electric batten is supplied
for each 8 feet of acting area depth for front lighting fixtures. At a minimum one additional
electric batten is needed for the last row of acting area back and side light fixtures. If there is a
cyclorama, or background scenery, another electric batten will be needed for those light fixtures.
10) In the on-stage area, 2 and 3 circuit wall pockets need to be provided for low side lighting.
Typically, for a medium size stage, provide approximately 8 wall pockets distributed along the
side and backstage areas. In addition, floor plates or movable booms with weighted bases and
side arms should be provided.
11) Coordinate stage lighting with curtains, draperies, grid beams, counter-weight suspension, and
light battens to assure that border lights and cables are concealed and properly supported.
12) In addition to the stage lights, dimmable house lights and switchable stage work lights must be
provided for general illumination during rehearsals and other activities outside performance.
a) Auditorium and Multi-Purpose Room lighting controls shall be interfaced with the Fire
Alarm System to cause house lighting to be full on regardless of manual settings.
13) Every space with a stage should include front lighting with dimming controls. The following
elements can be included as the program and budget allows, in order of priority as follows:
a) Back light.
b) Background scenery light.
c) High side light.
d) Box boom.
e) Low side light .
14) For a larger auditorium or multi-purpose room, every effort should be taken to include as many
elements above as possible, working down the list to insure that the highest priority takes
precedent. The smaller the space gets (along with the budget), the more elements can be taken
off the list.
15) For auditoria and multi-purpose rooms to be also used for lectures and testing, provide
supplemental fluorescent lighting. (Pulse-start metal halide may be considered.) The
supplemental lighting shall be turned off automatically by dimmer bank controls during
performance.
16) Provide orchestra-pit lighting and receptacles for pit lights when pits are provided.
17) If campus does not have an emergency generator, provide normally off emergency lighting that
will automatically be forced on without human intervention during a power failure, the power
could be supplied from central battery/inverter system to provide a minimum one foot candle
throughout the area. The designer can utilize a portion of the normal lighting fixtures or
separately normally off luminaries for the emergency lighting functions. In existing facilities,
perform emergency power load analysis to make sure the existing generator or central battery
inverter system is capable of handling the emergency lighting load addition.
a) Provide overhead fixtures (some of the non-dimmed house or supplemental fixtures),

which are normally off, and only turned on automatically in case of loss of power.
b) Provide LED aisle lighting at stairs and aisles in Auditoria.
18) Each theatrical fixture should be hung by theatrical c-clamp onto a schedule 40 black pipe. This
shall allow the re-location of each fixture depending on the performance or designer’s needs.
19) Provide each hanging fixture with a theatrical safety cable.
20) Provide each fixture with a cord and theatrical plug. (NEMA L5-20 twistlock connectors)
21) Provide each fixture with gel frame for color.
22) Provide a variety of accessories such as barn doors or pattern holders.
23) Near each position pipe or attached to each pipe, provide distributed electrically housed outlets
provided by the supplier of the theatrical lighting and control system. Each theatrical raceway
should house enough circuits and receptacles to plug in each fixture located there separately, with
a minimum of 1 or 2 spares. Raceways can be provided with pigtails (if not seen by the audience)
or with flush receptacles.
24) All circuits should be clearly labeled. Circuit numbers for stage lighting should begin at the front
of the stage and increase sequentially as they progress from stage left to stage right. The next row
moving towards the rear of the stage again must be numbered from left to right, and so on to the
rear of the stage. Next should be the ante proscenium lighting fixtures from house right to house
left, then the side wall mounted lighting fixtures, start numbering them from the right side from
top to bottom, and proceed to the left side, again from top to bottom. Next should be the wall
packets which should be numbered from stage left to stage right; then the ceiling mounted
orchestra pit lighting fixtures from house right to left, and then the house lighting fixtures from
the front to the rear of the house. Circuit numbers should correlate one –to-one with the dimmer
that they are connected to.
25) Provide at least a single dimmer for each circuit. Common dimmer rack sizes are 96, 48, 24 and
12, or any combination thereof. Typically, they consist of 3-phase power and accept a 40-
200amp feed depending on size and load.
26) To control the operation of the lighting equipment, a dimming system and control system must
be provided. The dimming system typically consists of dimmer racks that include dimmer
modules and control modules; a lighting control console, and stage manager's panels.
a) Locate dimmer racks in a locked, well ventilated room with thermostatically controlled
ventilation where the ambient temperature does not exceed 30°C (86°F).
b) Locate the control console receptacles in a control room at the rear of the auditorium
seating area.
c) Locate a stage manager's panel in a lockable enclosure that can control the stage related
lighting fixtures, and independently with momentary switches mounted adjacent to the
enclosure the on/off control of the orchestra and house lighting; these controls shall be
preferably located within the stage area, hidden from view of the audience, and in the
control booth.
d) Provide a portable lighting control console with flat screen monitor to set up and control
cues and lighting scenes. Provide control receptacles located in the house and on the stage
so that the lighting console can be moved to those areas if needed.
e) In addition to the control receptacles, a 120V, 20-amp duplex receptacle must be provided
near the control receptacles.
f) Provide momentary non-proprietary key operated switches as part of the entrance stations
at auditorium main entrances for the on-off controls of the orchestra and house lighting
fixtures.
27) The dimming system must be interlocked with the fire alarm system. In the event of a fire
emergency the house lights shall be forced on at full brightness automatically.
28) If there is an attic over Multi-Purpose Rooms and Auditoria, provide top access lighting fixtures,
catwalks and attic lighting.
f. Elementary schools Auditorium or Multi-Purpose Room (MPR) stage lighting shall consist of:
1) A minimum of 12 feet two circuits power track consisting of (3) 4 feet power track segments,
with a minimum of two light fixtures with (1) 200 watts PAR lamps in each four feet power track
segment. Locate power tracks on stage ceiling area two feet away from main curtain. In addition,
provide (1) two feet single circuit power track with (1) 200 watts PAR lamps on each side of the
stage.
2) A minimum of (5) 500 watts Fresnel theatrical lights. Provide one electrical 20 amp, 120 volts
receptacle for each fixture, place receptacle directly above fixture location. Fixtures shall be
clamped on a pendant mounted pipe batten; locate pipe batten approximately 12’-15’ from
proscenium opening over MPR seating area to illuminate forestage and curtain. Each fixture
shall be dimmed individually.
3) Provide a dimmer panel and relay cabinet with a minimum of twelve 1000 watts dimmer circuits.
Panel shall be recessed mounted in new construction, and surface mounted in existing facilities
renovation projects.
4) Provide interface between theatrical lighting and fire alarm systems. In case of fire alarm, the
lighting controls must automatically force on the house lighting regardless of manual settings.
5) Refer to Elementary School Multi-Purpose Room Educational Specifications for additional

information.
4. Lighting Controls
a. Refer to Specifications Section 26 0923 for technical requirements. Provide a Central Lighting Control
System that covers all areas designated and/or rooms in the school. Provide a pathway from the “main”
lighting control panel to the site’s local area network (LAN) for remote management, and a pathway
between all lighting control panels for interconnections.
1) The lighting control system shall “sweep off” all controlled interior lights and selected exterior
lights that are not controlled with an occupancy sensor at pre-determined programmable
Intervals during unoccupied times.
2) Time-clock programs shall allow seven-day programming functions, summer and holiday
schedules and special events.
3) Lighting control equipment shall be locked, located, or otherwise made secure against vandalism.
4) Provide lock type, vandal resistant key operated switches that are part of the lighting control
system in public areas such as, but not limited to hallways, restrooms, audience spaces and entry
areas of gymnasiums, auditoriums, and similar locations.
5) Lighting control panels shall be equipped with control relays for normal and emergency circuits
as needed.
6) The centralized lighting control system shall be connected to the site’s LAN system to allow
remote access for programming and maintenance.
7) Interior photo sensors for day lighting control shall be located and wired per manufacturer
recommendations. The Designer is required to coordinate with the manufacturer to determine
the best location for the sensors and the most appropriate wiring approach, which could be open
or close loop.
a) Open loop wiring: utilize open loop photo sensor placement for large open areas, areas
where people are moving through, and in areas where precise lighting levels are not
critical; these areas include but are not limited to large open office spaces with several
occupants, lecture halls, auditorium and multipurpose rooms, and similar spaces.
b) Close Loop Wiring: Utilize close loop photo sensor placement for areas where precise
task-based lighting levels are required, and in areas where occupants remain in the space
for talking; these areas include but are not limited to classrooms, laboratories, small offices
and conference rooms, and similar spaces.
8) The lighting control system shall cause the lights to “blink” at pre-determined but programmable
intervals prior to sweeping the lights off.
b. The centralized lighting control system shall include but not be limited to the following areas:
1) Corridors and Stairs. Refer to 4.d below.
2) Locker Rooms. Provide ceiling-mounted occupancy sensor(s) as required for full coverage.
Occupancy sensors shall turn off all lights in the room via a pre-set but programmable interval
after the room is vacated.
3) Gymnasium. Provide lock type, vandal resistant key operated switches for general lighting
On/Off.
4) Auditoria and Multi-Purpose Rooms. Provide lock type, vandal resistant key operated switches
for On/Off control of general lighting. If this or any other area or room is intended for general
assembly, and utilized in a manner that requires dimming or turning off the lighting, the house
lighting shall be interfaced with the Fire Alarm System, which in case of a fire emergency will
force the lighting fully on regardless of the manual control settings. (standalone control)
5) Cafeteria/ Kitchen. Provide ceiling mounted occupancy sensor(s) with automatic on-off switch
as well as by-pass lock type, vandal resistance key operated switches. Motion sensor(s) shall turn
off all lights in the room after a pre-set but programmable interval after the room has been
vacated. Quantity and placement of occupancy sensors shall allow detection of persons located
throughout the room.
6) Laboratories and Shops with controls similar to classrooms.
7) Staff restrooms lights and exhaust fans (fans interlocked with lights). Restroom lights and fans
shall be controlled from the lighting control panel via assigned relays. Provide ceiling mounted
occupancy sensors, and by-pass toggle switches for system override adjacent to the door. The
sensor shall turn off the lights in the room via a pre-set but programmable interval after the room
has been vacated.
8) Student’s restrooms lights and exhaust fans (fans interlocked with lights). Restroom lights and
fans shall be controlled from the lighting control panel via assigned relays. Provide by-pass lock
type, vandal resistance key operated switch adjacent to the door, and ceiling mounted occupancy
sensors for on/off controls. The sensor shall turn off the lights in the room via a pre-set but
programmable interval after the room has been vacated.
9) Main Office, Attendance Office, and other offices where clerks are always present. Provide non-
locking local switching for manual operation. In addition, use light sensor(s) to reduce electric
lighting levels in areas where natural lighting contribution is significant.
10) Private Offices and conference rooms, supply and storage rooms. Provide a wall-mounted
occupancy sensor with automatic on-off capability in addition to manual switches. Provide a
daylight sensor to reduce the electric lighting levels in larger windowed offices. The lighting level
reduction shall be commensurate to the natural lighting entering the room to maintain
predetermined foot-candle levels uniformly throughout the room.
a) The motion sensor shall be programmed to turn off lights in no more than ten minutes after
the area has been vacated.
11) Custodial and Equipment Rooms, and unsupervised rooms. Provide occupancy sensor with
automatic on-off capability in addition to manual switches. The sensor shall turn off the lights in
the room via a pre-set but programmable interval after the room has been vacated.
12) Covered walks. Lighting fixtures that are part of the security lighting shall be controlled via
photo-sensor, and combination photo-sensor and time clock for lighting fixtures that are not part
of the security lighting. Provide labeled zoned key operated override switches with indicator
lights at Main Office clerical area to turn lights either on or off for non-recurring, or off schedule
events.
13) Parking lot and parking garage lights. Controls for these areas shall be equipped with labeled
zoned key operated override switches with indicator lights at the garage area and Main Office
clerical area to turn lights either on or off during off scheduled hours.
c. Classroom Lighting Controls
1) Provide low-voltage lighting controls for each classroom. Two banks of switches are required,
one at the entrance of the room and another in the vicinity of the teacher’s desk. The switch
banks shall include: white board light(s), quiet time, and AV switches, and dimming or selective-
switching controls.
a) Lighting shall be configured for on/off/dimming-day light harvesting control with

occupancy sensors to turn off the lights after the room has been vacated.
b) Classroom lighting shall come on via switch only.
c) Motion sensor shall turn off all lights after the room has been vacated for a period of 5
minutes
d) Wall-mounted dimmer switches shall provide for manual light reduction when day
lighting is adequate, or for darkening of the room for AV presentations. Locate dimmer
switches as part of the teacher’s switch bank at the teaching wall, easily accessible to the
teacher.
2) Provide dual technology occupancy sensors (infrared and passive sonic) with auto-on-off
capability. Occupancy sensor(s) shall turn off all lights in the room after a pre-set but
programmable interval after room has been vacated. Occupancy sensors shall be wired in closed
loop format.
3) Provide photo sensor(s) with necessary interconnections to the classroom lighting dimming
controls. Amperage changes in light fixtures shall be proportional to external light changes. In
addition to manual dimming the fixtures shall automatically dim at a rate that is slow enough to
not bother occupants. Locate photo sensors in an optimal place for the lights to be controlled.
Photo sensors shall not be positioned where the device will be affected by direct sun light, room
lighting fixtures or obstructions.
4) Light fixtures within 15'-0" of windows shall be separately dimmed and shall also be controlled
by a ceiling-mounted daylight photo sensor to adjust the light intensity in the classroom to a
uniform level.
5) Provide for classroom lighting controls to be connected to the Central Lighting Control System
in the future, or initially if specifically authorized by the District.
6) Provide a separate switch to control the white board light. Locate switch together with other
switches on teaching wall.
d. Corridor and Stairs lighting
1) Corridor and Stairs lighting shall be controlled by dual technology occupancy sensors and on/off
switches.
a) Corridor lights shall turn on only when end of corridor switches are activated.
b) End of corridor switches shall operate lighting control relay(s) to turn on or off a nominal
amount of light fixtures to provide 1 foot-candle for egress illumination, the remaining
light fixtures in the corridor shall be controlled via occupancy sensors after being enabled
by the end of corridor switch (es).
c) Fixtures controlled by occupancy sensor shall turn off automatically five minutes after the
area has been vacated.
d) Lighting controls shall be programmed to sweet off corridor lights at 9:15 PM, seven days
a week; additional sweep times shall be scheduled at 12:00 AM and 3:00 AM seven days a
week.
e) Emergency lighting in corridors and Stairs shall be switched together with normal lighting
via appropriate emergency lighting control.
(1). Upon failure of normal power, emergency lighting fixtures shall automatically turn
on regardless of switch or occupancy controls.
(2). Upon return of normal power all emergency fixtures shall return to their prior
state.
e. Building Exteriors and outdoor lighting
1) Building exterior lighting fixtures that are part of the security lighting shall be controlled via
photo-sensor, or combination photo-sensor and time clock for lighting fixtures that are not part
of the security lighting.
a) Non Security Exterior Lighting
SCHEDULE START TIME DATES
Time On 5:45 AM Monday through Friday Only
Time Off Sunrise via Photocell Monday through Friday Only
Time On Sunrise via Photocell Monday through Friday Only
Time Off 9:15 PM Monday through Friday Only
b) For non-scheduled dates or times provide a by-pass switch to override program
(1). Switch shall be capable of manually turning off lights and/or be swept off five
hours after turn on time.
c) Security Lighting
SCHEDULE START TIME DATES
Time On Sunrise via Photocell Seven Days a Week
Time Off Sunrise via Photocell Seven Days a Week
(1). Outdoor security lighting shall operate from dusk until dawn, seven days per week.
(2). All lights designated for security shall be labeled “SL”.
d) Night Lights
(1). All lights designated for night lighting shall be labeled “NL”.
(2). Outdoor non-security night lights shall operate from dusk until pre-determined but
programmable time to accommodate night staff and special school functions.
Provide override switches as described in 4.b.12 above.
2) Provide labeled zoned key operated switches with indicator lights at Main Office clerical area to
turn lights either on or off schedule events.
f. Emergency Lighting
1) Emergency lighting controls shall be equipped with bypass circuitry that will bypass all manually
operated switches, lighting control systems, dimmers and occupancy sensors during power failure
situations, design shall comply with applicable codes and regulations. Each area of luminaries or
groups of luminaries shall be equipped with and controlled by a UL listed emergency lighting
control unit to allow the detection of localized power failures.
a) Emergency lights that will also be used for general lighting shall be switched together with
the general lighting for the same area, but shall turn on (at full brightness for dimmable
fixtures) upon loss of general power.
2) LED exit sign luminaries shall operate continuously. All other emergency lighting luminaries shall
either be switched with its associated general lighting luminaries or be normally off and only
operate during a power failure. Continuously operating luminaries other than LED exit
luminaries is not permitted.
3) All emergency lights shall be powered by the emergency power source, and may be controlled by
the lighting control panel.
4) Areas such as Gymnasiums that utilize HID lighting and also require emergency lighting shall be
equipped with normally off emergency luminaries. These luminaries shall remain on after the
restoration of utility power for a period long enough to allow a majority of the HID luminaries to
cool down and restrike (20 to 30 minutes). The use of the quartz restrike option within the HID
luminaries shall not be specified or used.
5) All emergency system luminaries shall be labeled as being part of the emergency lighting system
with labeling similar to that required for fire alarm devices located above ceilings. The labels shall
be placed directly onto or adjacent to the luminaries and be visible from the floor. The labels
shall read “EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURE”.
6) Provide connection details for each style of control for the emergency lighting on the drawings.
Also indicate on the drawings adjacent to the luminaries or groups of luminaries the style of
control that is required for the luminary.
5. Lighting Power
a. Lighting branch circuits shall be 20 ampere, unless otherwise required by the system.
b. Branch circuit and panel loads shall be balanced on all phases for panels and distribution equipment.
c. Lighting panel boards shall be 480/277-volt, 3-phase, and 4-wire, with thermal-magnetic bolt-on type
branch circuit breakers. (Small sites or smaller buildings at large sites may use 208/120-volt, 3-phase,
and 4-wire panels.)
d. Provide approximately 30% spare capacity in all new panels installations.
e. The energy budget for all connected lighting loads in all buildings shall not exceed California Energy
Commission maximum lighting power density allowance.
6. Luminaires
a. Selection of lighting fixtures shall be made on the basis of lighting characteristics (including uniform
distribution and glare), appearance, cost, maintainability, energy efficiency, and resistance to vandalism.
b. Each lighting fixture shall be fully specified and correlated with the Fixture Schedule. Provide at least
three manufacturers’ products for each application. On the Schedule, provide full data for each lighting
fixture on lamps, ballasts, input wattage, and mounting type.
c. All installed lighting fixtures shall meet the requirements of the CBC for seismic anchorage.
d. Applications.
1) Classrooms, Science and Technology Classrooms, Libraries: Linear Suspended Indirect or

Indirect/Direct Fluorescent Lighting fixture.
2) Shops: Same as classrooms, or industrial surface-mounted, or suspended open fluorescent

lighting fixture if appropriate to the architectural design. Specify appropriate fixtures to eliminate
dust collection in high dust concentration areas; such areas may include wood and metal shops.
3) Wall-Washer (Whiteboard Light): Single-tube linear fluorescent lighting fixture, with

characteristics described above.
4) Offices: Same as classrooms, or recessed 2’x4’ recessed troffer fluorescent lighting fixture.
5) Teachers Workrooms: Same as classrooms, or recessed 2’x4’ recessed troffer fluorescent lighting
fixture.
6) Gymnasium: Suspended or ceiling-mounted fluorescent troffer with protective cage and six T8,
or T5HO lamps, switched in pairs. (Lighting fixtures with alternative light sources will be
considered.)
7) Shower Rooms, Locker Rooms, Other Damp Locations: Fluorescent lighting fixture with acrylic
lens, vandal-resistant, with IP (“Ingress Prevention”) Rating of IP 64.
8) Multi-purpose Room: Suspended indirect/direct fluorescent lighting fixture or recessed

fluorescent lighting fixture with lens, as appropriate to architectural design.
9) Auditorium House Lights: Fluorescent lighting fixture for general illumination, plus dimmable
halogen house lights for performances.
10) Corridors/Stairways: Wall or ceiling-mounted fluorescent lighting fixture with polycarbonate

lens.
11) Lobbies: Wall or ceiling-mounted fluorescent lighting fixture with polycarbonate lens.
12) Student Restrooms: Fluorescent lighting fixture with polycarbonate lens, vandal-resistant, with
IP (“Ingress Prevention”) Rating of IP 64.
13) Equipment Rooms, Custodial Closets: Fluorescent lighting fixture equipped with wireguard and
occupancy sensor.
14) Elevator Pits: Fluorescent lighting fixture with guard, and with IP (“Ingress Prevention”) Rating
of IP 64.
15) Display Cases: LED strip lighting.
16) Darkrooms: Darkroom Lights.
17) Hazardous Classified Areas (flammable liquids, others): Lighting fixture with suitable
classification.
18) Exterior Canopies, Arcades, Overhangs: Recessed or surface-mounted fluorescent lighting

fixture with polycarbonate lens, vandal-resistant, with IP (“Ingress Prevention”) Rating of IP 64.
19) Lunch Shelter: Vandal-proof recessed or surface-mounted ceiling- or wall-mounted compact

fluorescent lighting fixture with lens and two 13-watt twin-tube lamps.
20) Parking Garages: Ceiling-mounted Parking Garage fluorescent lighting fixture with wire guard.
21) Building Exterior: Surface-mounted or recessed vandal-resistant metal halide lighting fixture with
polycarbonate lens.
22) Exterior Stair and Wall Lighting: Low-mount step light fluorescent lighting fixture with clear
tempered glass lens.
23) Parking Areas: Pole-mounted full cut-off metal halide luminarie (maximum 30’ high poles).
24) Swimming Pools: Recessed Swimming Pool Lighting fixture.
25) Exit Signs: LED type. Due to the high rate of vandalism, specify only wall mount vandal
resistant exit sign luminaries. Canopy or pendant mount exit luminaries are not acceptable. When
a wall is not available and a sign is needed at a particular location, utilize a flag mount luminary
with additional support from the ceiling or wall.
26) Low-level Exit Signs: Remote vandal resistant LED low level exit sign.
27) Low-level directional markers: provide as required by code.
28) Sign Fixtures: Fluorescent sign.
C. ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS
1. Design Principles
a. Basic design concerns include life safety, protection of property, reliability, voltage regulation,
maintainability, and flexibility for future expansion (including changes in service voltage).
b. Preventive maintenance requirements must include accessibility and availability for inspection and repair
with safety. Provide clean, well-lighted, temperature-controlled space with working spaces and access
doors in front of all electrical equipment.
c. All electrical equipment and components shall be designed for exposure to the elements, or protected
from them, including flooding. Floor standing electrical distribution equipment and control panels shall
not be located in subterranean areas. Where design constraints do not allow for this equipment to be
installed outside subterranean areas, the designer shall obtain approval from design management to
locate equipment in subterranean areas; in such cases, sump pumps shall be equipped with normal and
emergency power sources (only transfer switch and generator will be acceptable as the emergency power
source). Refer to article 2.3.D.f for additional requirements.
d. All electrical equipment and components shall meet requirements for seismic anchorage and bracing.
e. Each building shall include a main power distribution panel.
f. Should concentration of electrical load in administration building office area exceed 50% of the
administration building power panel capacity, a dedicated panel for that area should be included in the
design.
g. The use of K-rated transformers shall be substantiated with a harmonic content study of the designed
system.
h. In areas where computers and similar electronic loads exceed nominal 20%, computer and non-
computer loads shall be fed from separate circuit breaker panelboards. The computer panelboard shall
be equipped with integral Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) protection and double capacity
neutral at panel and feeder if necessary.
i. In areas where computer and similar electronic loads are less than nominal 20% of the total load in the
area, TVSS protection may be provided via outlets equipped with integral transient voltage surge
suppression.
j. If computer and similar electronic loads connected to a distribution transformer exceed nominal 20% of
the load, consider the use of a K-4 rated transformer, and double capacity neutrals.
k. Computer equipment design loads shall be based on codes and industry standard practices. A 20 amp
branch circuit feeding computer loads shall be limited to a maximum of 5 computers.
2. Electrical Service
a. When designing the electrical service for existing facilities, the Architect/Engineer shall coordinate with
the District’s Design Manager for the project to determine current and future power needs requirements
for the site.
b. Removal of utility poles and their guy wire may be necessary whenever new property is acquired. If
poles serve other private properties then utilities must be re-routed. Coordinate the relocation of all
utilities on the poles (power, telephone, cable television) and provide for the relocation of power poles
from the school site as directed by the utility. (Rerouting will be designed by the utility provider.)
c. Provide electrical meters in compliance with utility company requirements.
1) Meters shall be capable of communicating with building energy management system via BACnet
protocols.
2) Meters shall be provided at each permanent building and bungalows power distribution centers,
and areas designated by LAUSD Project Design Manager.
3. Electromagnetic Fields
a. Locate equipment in dedicated spaces that are not normally occupied: equipment rooms, storage rooms
and supply rooms.
b. Locate the service transformer and main switchboard as close as possible and practical to the main
service street connection.
c. Locate transformers, switchgear, and large panels remote from occupied spaces in outdoors or in
parking structures, be sure they are separated with walls or fences and are well drained to prevent
flooding. Provide required clearances and work space according to code and utility company
requirements.
d. Transformers specified shall comply with the Department of Energy Policy Act of 2005.
e. Locate equipment and equipment rooms so not to be adjacent to, or directly above or below,
classrooms, offices, libraries, and similar spaces.
f. Designs incorporating branch circuits with double neutrals shall be provided with a harmonic content
study to substantiate the need for double neutrals.
g. Do not install underground feeders beneath occupied spaces; where underground feeder(s) has to pass
underneath the concrete slab to terminate at the distribution panel inside the building, install conduits 24
inches below finished floor.
h. Reduce current by using higher voltages where practical.
i. Utilize balanced three-phase systems.
4. Planning Criteria
a. The preferred main power distribution system is 480/277-volt, 3-phase, 4-wire grounded WYE.
1) In very large campuses two 480/277-volt, 3-phase, 4-wire grounded WYE services may be
installed if approved by the serving utility company.
2) In very large campuses with the buildings spread over 1000ft apart, and requiring a total design
load of over 2000 amps, a 5 KV medium voltage switchgear and power distribution may be used.
3) In campuses requiring no more than 600 amps, a 208/120-Volt, 3-phase, 4-wire, grounded WYE
service and power distribution may be used.
b. All loads (in KVA) must be identified during design, such shall include, but not limited to lighting,
elevators and pumps, equipment for HVAC, kitchen and food facilities, shops and industrial arts,
computers, and general receptacle load. When the loads have not been identified, the Designer may use
the following loads for estimating purposes and preliminary design preparation only:
1) Lighting:
a) Classrooms and Offices 3.0 VA/ft²
b) Cafeteria 2.0 VA/ft²
c) Auditorium/Multi-Purpose RM 6.0 VA/ft²
d) Kitchen 2.2 VA/ft²
e) Gymnasiums 2.5 VA/ft²
f) Toilets, Storage, Equipment 1.0 VA/ft²
g) Corridors 1.0 VA/ft²
h) Locker Rooms 1.0 VA/ft²
i) Laboratories 3.0 VA/ft²
j) Shops 3.0 VA/ft²
2) Air Conditioning:
a) HVAC Refrigeration Tons x 2.5= KVA
b) Ventilation Fans 1.0 W/ft²
3) Small Appliance/Computer/General Purpose Receptacle:
a) Auditorium 1.0 VA/ft²
b) Cafeteria 1.0 VA/ft²
c) Gymnasiums 1.0 VA/ft²
d) Offices 5.0 VA/ft²
e) Classrooms 6.0 VA/ft²
f) Shops 6.0 VA/ft²
4) Food Preparation:
a) Kitchen 20 VA/ft²
b) Cafeteria 10 VA/ft²
5) Shop Buildings:
a) Shop Buildings-(Machines): 20 VA/ft²
c. Distribution Concept: For most schools, a radial distribution system is adequate. Depending on critical
load requirements, other system types may be considered, such as primary selective or secondary
selective systems.
d. The maximum voltage drop in each power feeder shall be no more than 3%, and the total drop
including feeders and branch circuits shall be no more than 5% overall.
1) Length and voltage drop percentages must be indicated for all feeders on the single line diagram,
or in a feeder schedule.
e. Short circuit calculations shall be made for all system components. Indicate results on the single line
diagram, or in a feeder schedule.
f. Design distribution to minimize the generation of, and exposure to, magnetic fields. Appropriate
magnetic field management techniques shall be considered for all new and/or retrofit installations.
g. Load Calculations: Provide calculations for the main electrical service, and all distribution boards and
panelboards.
1) Load calculation shall take into consideration code permitted demand and diversity factors, and
non-coincident loads.
2) Identify KVA values for each factor taken into consideration.
h. Plan future system expansion during design. Do not design the system so that it is difficult or impossible
to expand its capacity. Be sure future capacity is clearly identified on diagrams, plans, and in the
narrative “Basis of Design.”
1) Architect shall provide electrical room layouts depicting equipment foot prints, working
clearances around equipment, and space for future expansion.
2) For new campuses allocate minimum 30% spare capacity over calculated demand and diversified
connected load to size main service equipment.
3) Provide 20% minimum spare space and spare ampacity above calculated loads for distribution
boards and panelboards.
5. Computer Network Power Requirements
a. Provide electronic grade panelboards to supply power to computer loads. In new construction
installations utilize properly sized K-4 rated transformer to feed all the 120/208V in the school or
building.
1) Provide a duplex receptacle within 12 inches of each LAN Outlet. A double duplex receptacle
shall serve two workstations where installed side by side.
2) Provide a dedicated 120-volt, 20 amp circuit and receptacle for each network or stand alone
printer, this circuit shall originate in an electronic grade panelboard if feasible.
3) For each branch circuit serving computers, use a dedicated neutral. Refer to item 3.f above for
additional requirements.
b. In MDF and IDF rooms, as well as LDF locations, the number and type of electrical outlets will depend
upon and must be designed to the specific size, type of equipment, and UPS equipment required. The
following criteria are applicable to most cases: A minimum of one dedicated, 20 ampere, 120 Volt
circuit and a rack mounted receptacle outlet of the same rating is required for in each IDF and LDF
cabinet for the rack mounted UPS system. Additionally, a dedicated 208 Volt, 1 phase, 30A circuit
terminated in a NEMA L6-30P rack mounted receptacle is required in each MDF for the rack mounted
UPS system.
c. Provide a double duplex receptacle in every classroom Limited Distribution Cabinet (LDC).
d. All receptacles for computers and electronic equipment shall be standard type, and blue in color. Except
for outlets serving computer loads that are not fed from an electronic grade panel board with integral
TVSS protection, in these cases the outlet shall be blue in color and be equipped with integral TVSS
protection.
6. Grounding
a. Cold water or other utility piping systems shall not be used as grounding electrodes; Grounding
electrodes shall be “made” electrodes, either concrete-enclosed-electrode type (UFER) or ground rod
type.
1) The UFER ground system shall be the primary grounding electrode for new campuses.
Architect/Engineer shall provide a complete grounding block diagram of the facility, including
but not limited to peripheral systems such as Public Address, Computer Network, Television, etc.
2) Ground rod(s) installed in concrete box(es) as described in the guide specification shall be the
primary grounding electrode for existing campuses that do not have a UFER system.
b. All metallic objects that enclose electrical conductors or that might be energized by electrical currents,
including all metal equipment parts such as enclosures, raceways, building metal structure, and
equipment grounding conductors, must be effectively grounded.
1) Short sections of metal enclosures or raceways used to provide support or protection of low
voltage (less than 70V) cable assemblies from physical damage shall not be required to be
grounded. Provide ground continuity when and as required by current applicable codes.
c. All earth grounding electrodes must be solidly joined together into a continuous electrically conductive
system connected to the main grounding electrode system. Individual building grounding systems must
be interconnected to the campus grounding system.
d. Provide “made” electrodes (as described in paragraph “a.” above) at each individual building. The
grounding systems of remote buildings must be interconnected to main campus grounding system thru
the equipment grounding conductor(s) of the feeders serving the remote buildings. Bond all enclosure
and metallic objects to the building ground system (as described in paragraph “b” above).
e. Bond the grounded conductor (Neutral) of the main service and the secondary of all step-down
transformers to the building ground system. The bonding of the neutral conductor to ground must
ONLY BE DONE AT ONE LOCATION at each voltage level to avoid creating grounding loops.
f. All electrical conducting surfaces must be effectively grounded.
7. Conductors
a. Select conductors based on the ampacity tables in the California Electrical Code for low and medium
voltage cables. Consider the temperature rating of the conductor, future load growth, voltage drop,
short-circuit heating, number of conductors within the raceway and ambient conditions.
b. Ambient temperature ratings for conductor selection:
1) Indoors, within air-conditioned spaces, 30° C. ambient temperature may be used without
temperature derating the conductor.
2) Indoor areas, such as equipment rooms, where the ambient temperature will exceed 30° C.,
conductors must be derated to the worst possible ambient temperature condition.
3) Outdoors, for low voltage conductors in metallic raceways in the shade, use a derating factor for
an ambient temperature of 45° C; in the sun, use a derating factor for an ambient temperature of
50° C.
4) For Medium Voltage Power Distribution underground applications, the ambient temperature
used for conductors within a raceway shall be 30° C. This means the appropriate ampacity from
the tables in the California Electrical Code must be derated to this temperature. The thermal
characteristics of the medium surrounding the conductors are important to determine the current
carrying capacity of the conductors. Factors that will affect the current carrying capacity of the
conductor include the following:
a) The type of soil in which the duct bank is buried and its thermal resistivity.
b) The moisture content of the soil. In dry sections the conductors must be derated to
compensate for the increase in thermal resistance that is due to the lack of moisture.
c) The type and number of raceways and number of conductors per raceway within an
overall concrete duct bank.
c. Derating of the conductors may be necessary under high fault currents. Thermal and mechanical
stresses can result in permanent damage to the insulation and undesirable cable movement. The
minimum conductor size requirement shall be determined based on the maximum available short-circuit
current and the type of overcurrent protective device used.
8. Conduit
a. Install conductors in metallic conduit above ground and in schedule 40 PVC underground, and comply
with the following additional requirements:
1) Use rigid steel conduit at all exterior locations and where conduit may be exposed and subjected
to damage or water intrusion, including parking garages.
2) EMT is allowed for all interior concealed applications. Exposed EMT may be used in the
following areas:
a) In mechanical, electrical and elevator machine rooms.
b) Above 8 feet in spaces other than offices, classrooms, libraries, and similar spaces with
District approval.
c) Above 8 feet in enclosed parking garages.
3) Use flexible steel conduit only indoors and where concealed.
4) Metal Clad (MC) cable system is not allowed.
5) Use liquid-tight flexible steel conduit for final connections to motors, devices that require
adjustment of locations, or equipment that require frequent interchange. Liquid-tight flexible
steel conduit may not be used in place of thermal, expansion, or expansion/deflection fittings.
6) Underground conduits must be encased in concrete 3 inch thick on all sides with multiple
conduits spaced 3 inch apart. Bury conduit banks not less than 24" below finished grade to top
of the concrete envelope.
7) The minimum underground conduit size shall be 2 inches; except for conduits feeding a single
dedicated device where future growth is not expected.
8) Conduits on arcades or roofs are not allowed without prior District approval; if approved,
Architect/Engineer shall provide structural calculations and installation details.
9. Distribution Equipment
a. In selecting distribution equipment, electrical ratings must have adequate capacity to serve the connected
load, and future expansion.
b. Equipment short-circuit ratings must be selected to withstand the maximum fault current at the
equipment terminals or busses. In existing facilities perform complete fault current level calculations to
determine amperes interrupting capacity for new equipment. The calculation shall be based on utility
company available fault current at the main service.
c. Series rated distribution switchboards and panel boards are not permitted. Specify only fully rated
equipment.
d. Locate all power equipment and panels in equipment rooms that are completely separate from signal
and communication equipment.
e. Review physical dimensions of the equipment to determine adequate space allocation requirements to
serve connected loads and future expansion. Provide working clearances around the equipment to
comply with code and working requirements.
f. Consider and plan to mitigate appropriately environmental conditions surrounding the equipment.
Adequate ventilation must be provided in all cases. Locate Central Battery/Inverter systems in a
thermostatically controlled fan ventilated room. Calculate and submit the heat load created by the
electrical equipment to the mechanical engineer to properly size ventilating equipment serving the
electrical rooms
g. Indicate infrastructure for electric utility facilities including transformer pad, underground vaults,
customer stations, pull sections and metering compartments in main switchboard, underground
conduits, pull boxes and grounding, as required by electric utility.
h. All equipment must be secured from unauthorized access and from vandalism, and must be protected
from harmful environmental conditions, including flooding.
i. Do not install equipment in hostile/corrosive environments such as pool equipment, boiler rooms, and
the like; unless it is properly listed for the application.
j. Provide floor drains within 10 feet of floor mounted equipment in subterranean locations subject to
flooding.
k. Provide 4 inches high concrete housekeeping pads for floor mounted equipment in below grade or
exterior installations, unless noted otherwise by the structural engineer; the pad is to extend 4 inches all
around equipment. Pads for electrical services and power company equipment shall conform to the
requirements of the serving utility company.
l. Electrical power service to each building shall be achieved through one feed point to a panel, or
distribution panel located in the building.
10. Capacity Criteria
a. All new main and distribution switchboards, panelboards and motor control centers shall have
minimum 30% spare capacity above connected load and physical spaces for additional protective
devices to be added in future.
11. Circuit Protection and Motor Controls
a. All switchboards, motor control centers, and power panel boards shall include a main circuit protective
device.
b. Panel boards serving each floor in a building shall be equipped with a main circuit breaker.
c. Subpanels located in the same electrical room and within sight of its power source do not need to be
provided with a main circuit breaker.
d. Provide a heavy duty fused disconnect switch at all HVAC units, including heat pumps, condensing
units, chillers, package units, etc.
e. Provide combination fused switch-starters for all pump-motors, fan-motors, cooling towers, and dust
collectors. Provide a control-circuit transformer with 120-volt secondary, hand-off-auto selector switch
and on-off indicating lights in each starter.
f. Provide control wiring and interlocking for operation of motor loads, as required by each motor circuit.
12. General Requirements & General-purpose Receptacles and Circuits
a. All receptacles shall be wall-mounted at 15 inches above floor level unless otherwise indicated for
specific purposes.
b. Do not use floor receptacles except where expressly approved in writing by the District’s authorized
representative. Where used, they shall be recessed.
c. Do not locate receptacles behind appliances or other equipment that must be served.
d. Corridors: At intervals of 50 feet maximum and switched with a lock-type switch in a custodial closet or
workroom.
e. Building exterior walls and parking garage interior: Weather-proof GFI receptacles at 50 feet intervals
on each wall; install receptacles within a lockable box or cabinet, and switched with a lock-type switch in
a custodial closet or workroom. Do not provide receptacles in Kindergarten play areas.
f. Restrooms: One GFI receptacle mounted 80 inches above finished floor near the door in each student
restroom. In faculty restrooms, provide a GFI receptacle next to the sink, locate receptacle 48 inches
above finished floor.
g. Any room with a light fixture shall be provided with at least one receptacle.
h. Science Classrooms: General-purpose duplex receptacles (computer receptacles and circuits are already
separate.) every six feet over the counter on the wall on a separate 20-amp branch circuit per counter.
Use GFI receptacle within six feet of the sink(s).
i. Auditorium/Multi-Purpose Room: On walls spaced at 20 feet on center maximum.
j. Gymnasium: Eight minimum, two in each wall minimum.
k. Music, Instrumental Practice, and Choral Rooms: On walls same as classrooms.
l. In Photographic Darkrooms, provide separate circuits for special darkroom lights and for room lights,
with room lights on a lock-type switch.
m. Cafeteria Window Service Area, Scramble Area, and Faculty Service Area: One, minimum.
n. Within 72 inches of a sink or in any similar conditions (such as custodial closets), use GFI receptacles.
o. Make provisions for two 1 inch conduits for marquee sign power and data, extend one conduit from
nearest electrical panel, and one from MDF to the designated location for the future marquee sign.
Label conduits power and data respectively. Coordinate marquee location with Architect.
13. Receptacles in Classrooms
a. Provide a separate branch circuit for general-purpose duplex receptacles in each classroom, with a
minimum of five general-purpose duplex receptacles in each classroom, one in each wall and one at the
teacher’s desk location.
b. Provide separate receptacles or connections on a separate circuit for other electrical equipment.
c. For new construction do not use floor outlets without approval in writing from the district. (Wiremold
should only be used in existing facilities, except where indicated in educational specifications)
d. Do not locate receptacles or switches in bulletin boards, tackboards, or marker boards.
e. In Kindergarten and Early Education Center Classrooms, make provisions for tamper-resistant
receptacles equipped with thermoplastic dual mechanism shutter system to prevent insertion of foreign
objects.
1) Outlets shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Social Services.
14. Special-Purpose Receptacles And Separate Circuits
a. See “Electrical Communications and AV Systems,” “Computer Networks and Power Systems,” for
power provisions for computer systems. Provide receptacles and circuits as follows:
b. Copier equipment in staff/faculty work rooms require provision of a dedicated 220-VAC circuit with
3#10 AWG and a code sized ground wire, unless advised otherwise in writing by the District Design
Manager. Locate receptacle next to copier data outlet.
c. Gymnasium scoreboards. Provide for remotely controlling scoreboards from side lines with 3/4 inch
empty conduit from scoreboards to floor boxes located 5 feet out from sidelines near midcourt. Provide
120V receptacle in floor box.
d. Domestic cooking electric ranges (for gas ranges provide 120-volt circuit for ignition).
e. Science Classrooms exhaust fume hoods.
f. Science Preparation/Storage Room refrigerator and freezer.
g. Industrial Education Classrooms and Shops: Conduit drops from overhead wireways to a receptacle at
each workbench and to each electrically driven machine.
h. First Aid Room: refrigerator, and receptacle and switch for eye chart.
i. DH Storage and Laundry Room washer and dryer.
j. Special Education Therapy Unit refrigerator and cooktop.
k. Kitchen equipment and exhaust hoods. All electrical equipment under kitchen hoods shall be
automatically disconnected upon activation of the fire suppression systems.
l. Provide a separate branch circuit for the fire suppression Ansul System installed in kitchen hoods. If
Ansul System is activated, power to all electrical appliances under kitchen hood shall be automatically
disconnected. Appliance circuits shall be wired thru shunt trip circuit breakers or contactors that are
interlocked with the Ansul System.
m. Automatic lawn sprinkler controllers, one each as shown by the Landscape Architect.
n. Electric drinking fountains: one each.
o. Rooftop: Provide exterior convenience outlet with lock-on cover on a pedestal approximately 18 inches
above roof within 25 feet of HVAC equipment, and adjacent to any other rooftop equipment that might
need servicing or repair.
p. All other appliances and special equipment where necessary.
q. Provide power and remote controls for athletic field score boards.
D. EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEMS
1. General
a. Emergency power systems must be part of the design of the electrical system for egress illumination and
signage, fire alarm, security, public address and telephone systems, and computer networking system,
and must provide continuity of operation for specifically identified systems or equipment.
b. Provide emergency exit illumination of one foot-candle minimum in the following areas:
1) Corridors, stairs, lobbies, and exterior paths of travel for exiting the building.
2) Administration Unit.
3) Classrooms larger than 1000 square feet.
4) Multi-Purpose/Auditorium Buildings.
5) Gymnasiums.
6) Cafeteria/Kitchen.
7) Any rooms with an occupant load of 50 or more.
8) Other occupancies required by code.
c. Exit signs connected to the emergency power system shall be provided in compliance with applicable
codes. Master-Slave exit signs are required. Low level exit signs for existing facilities where master-slave
is impractical shall be self-luminous type. If self luminous type is used, Architect/Engineer shall obtain
approval from the District. Exit signs shall be vandal/high impact resistant.
2. Emergency Systems Requirements
a. For emergency lighting and exit illumination, in each building provide a central inverter system
consisting of AC sensing equipment, automatic transfer switch, battery charger, batteries and DC to AC
inverter to provide a minimum of 90 minutes continuous emergency operation. Provide a pathway to
interface the inverter to the site’s LAN for remote reporting and management of inverter equipment.
b. For PA/Intercom/PABX system, provide an UPS with a minimum of 90 minutes continuous

emergency operation. A generator should be used where it is more cost effective than installing an
inverter system. Provide a pathway to interface the generator controller to the site’s LAN for remote
reporting and management of emergency generator equipment.
c. Also see “Electrical Communications and AV Systems” for UPS requirements for PA systems.
d. For Fire Alarm System, provide integral emergency power supply for 24 hours minimum continuous
operation.
e. For Security Alarm System, provide integral emergency power supply for 4 hours continuous operation.
f. For computer networking system, See “Electrical Communications and AV Systems” for requirements
of rack mounted UPS units for Computer Networking Systems.
g. In Modernization Projects at Existing School Sites; if the building(s) that are part of the project are not
currently served by an inverter or generator system, then the areas illuminated by fluorescent fixtures
shall be provided with emergency exit illumination powered via power packs installed in channel of
lighting fixtures. The power packs shall be sized to provide power per applicable current code
requirements. If there is an inverter or generator system on site, then utilize existing inverter emergency
power or generator in lieu of battery packs. Perform load analysis to make sure the existing system is
adequate to support the new emergency lighting loads. UPS capabilities for PA/Intercom/PABX, Fire
Alarm, Security and Computer Systems shall be same as for new school construction.
3. Emergency Generator System
a. An emergency diesel generator system is required in multi-story buildings higher than 75 feet in height
and in sites as described in this design guide. In such cases:
1) Eliminate central battery/inverters and use the generator for emergency lighting.
2) Provide emergency power for all elevator cab lighting and power for selected elevator(s).
3) Provide emergency power for subterranean sump pumps (garage areas).
4) Provide emergency power for all signal headend equipment.
5) Provide emergency power for fire/ life safety systems such as fire pumps and other systems as
required by codes.
6) UPS systems as described in previous paragraphs for various systems still will be required.
7) Clearly mark all equipment being served from emergency power, Identify the power source.
8) Provide calculations for emergency power; demand calculations shall include a minimum of 20%
spare capacity. Size equipment accordingly.
9) Provide diesel engine generator set(s) with battery chargers.
10) Provide a common trouble annunciator in the Plant Manager’s office. Do not provide an
annunciator that indicates what is wrong; only one that indicates that something is wrong with
the generator.
11) Provide an emergency stop button at a location close to the main service disconnect; locate stop
button in a place such as an electrical room, or similarly controlled access location. Provide a
tamper cover similar to the covers required for fire alarm pull stations.
12) Provide all components, accessories, necessary parts needed to meet system expected
performance.
E. PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) SYSTEMS
1. Design and Infrastructure requirements
a. In addition to those indicated in section 2.4-Sustainability, the PV systems design of infrastructure shall
include the following:
1) Note on the construction documents the area of PV installation; indicate the roof area to be kept
clear of vent stacks, electrical stub-outs, and other roof penetrations as much as possible.
2) Areas determined to receive photovoltaic panels shall be structurally augmented to receive an

additional dead load of 7 lbs. per sq-ft. unless noted otherwise.
3) Provide a minimum of six feet (6’) wide clear perimeter around the edges of the roof. If either
axis of the building is 250 feet or less; provide a minimum of four feet (4’) wide clear perimeter
around the edges of the roof.
4) Coordinate with the mechanical engineer to locate HVAC equipment to maximize available un-
shaded roof areas for future installation of PV arrays.
5) Determine size of PV inverters assuming PV arrays will generate 10 watts/sf-ft. of PV power.

Inverters shall be selected form approved manufacturers listed in LAUSD technical
specifications.
6) Locate inverters in building’s electrical room or District approved outdoor locations. Design shall
provide adequate space for PV inverter in electrical room layouts.
7) Provide two empty sections in main switchboard. One section is for future schools electrical
loads, the other for the PV system.
b. Provide power and data conduits for the PV system as follows:
1) Make provisions for power conduits from roof-mounted PV array(s) to locations of future PV
inverters. Size conduits based on sizes required by conductors required by PV inverters. Take
voltage drop into consideration when sizing conductors.
2) Make provisions for a minimum of one three inch (3”) power conduit from each PV inverter to
the Main Electrical Room. Do not stub up conduits within the footprint of main electrical
switchboard, or the footprint of possible future sections that could be added to the switchboard.
Provide clear space on wall above or below the conduit(s) stubs for the installation of a future
pull box and conduit that will be extended to future PV system disconnects, and from utility
accessible disconnect switches to main switchboard.
3) Make provisions for one two inch (2”) data conduit from each PV inverter to the Main Electrical
Room. Do not stub up conduits within the footprint of main electrical switchboard. Note on
plans that extensions from data conduit stub-ups to future PV meters shall be provided by the
PV system installer.
4) Make provisions for one two inch (2”) data/telephone conduit from Main Electrical Room to
MDF and Telephone MPOE. Arrange this and the above data conduit in the Main Electrical
Room along an adjacent or opposite wall from the main service switchboard in a manner that will
allow the installation of a plywood backboard for mounting of the PV data collection and control
equipment.

3.8 ELECTRICAL COMMUNICATION & AV SYSTEMS
B. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
C. CLOCK AND PROGRAM SYSTEM
D. COMPUTER AND NETWORKING SYSTEM DESIGN
E. TELEPHONE SYSTEM
F. PUBLIC ADDRESS/INTERCOM/CLASS CHANGE SIGNALING SYSTEM
G. SECURITY INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEM
H. CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION AND AUDIO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS
I. GARAGE AND MAIN DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS
J. TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
K. DIGITAL OVERHEAD PROJECTORS
L. SOUND ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
M. SCHOOL RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
N. SIGNAL SYSTEMS RACEWAYS AND TERMINAL CABINETS
O. PROXIMITY CARD ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

Book 3: Technical Criteria 3.8 Electrical Communication and AV Systems
3.8 ELECTRICAL COMMUNICATIONS & AV SYSTEMS
The District “Guide Specifications” complements the “Design Guide” and must be reviewed concurrently with
these criteria.
1. General Guidelines
a. Refer also to Section 3.7, Electrical Power and Lighting.
b. All signal wiring and related power shall be in conduit or raceways except as indicated below. Conduits
and raceways shall be metallic, except in underground applications where PVC conduits are encased in
concrete. Low-voltage communication or signal wiring shall be continuous without splices between
devices, and shall be in conduits or raceways. Refer to section B.4.F for fire alarm system raceway
requirements.
c. When adding new buildings and systems to an existing campus, the Architect must, from a site visit,
determine the types of existing systems on the campus, and then include in the construction documents
details of the appropriate interfaces necessary to integrate the operation of the new and existing systems.
d. All panels and control equipment must be accessible from floor level, without the need for ladders or
other access equipment.
B. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
1. General
a. Fire alarm system shall be an automatic local fire detection, and addressable signaling system with
central station reporting with electrically supervised signal-initiating circuits and alarm circuits, including
control panel(s), remote power supplies, remote annunciator panel, manual pull stations, bells or horns,
visual alarm units, sprinkler flow and tamper switches, smoke detectors, heat detectors, beam detectors,
terminal cabinets and wiring. Refer to fire alarm technical specifications section 28 3100 Attachment B
for a sample of the fire alarm system sequence of operations; modify or revise it according to the
particular project requirements.
b. Refer to technical specifications section 28 3100 for a complete list of pre-approved fire alarm systems
manufacturers. When multiple panels are specified in a single site, one of them shall serve as master; and
the others will serve as network nodes. Designs shall be based on the least number of panels needed to
meet all requirements.
1) Whenever more than one panel is introduced in a design, these shall be synchronized in
accordance with LAUSD standard details.
2) A site under one administration shall have one fire alarm system only; the system shall be of a
single manufacturer.
3) Additional buildings added to an existing site shall be provided with a fire alarm system, which
shall be incorporated into the existing fire alarm system.
a) For system expansions or building additions modify specifications to reflect designs that
take into consideration the existing conditions; for example, if in a school the original
system was manufactured by Notifier; then, any additional panels shall also be specified to
be Notifier. Panels manufactured by different companies are not acceptable.
c. Areas or additional District sites that are located on the same or adjacent property, but fenced off,
adequately separated, and independently administered, such as Early Education Centers or YMCA
buildings, shall be equipped with separate fire alarm systems.
d. Alarm indicating device’s UL maximum current draw must be utilize in the design.
e. Facilities and classrooms designated for Autism or severely handicapped students shall be equipped with
chimes or similar sounding appliances.
f. Provide 20% spare capacity per loop for future growth.
g. Where the capacity of the control panel will be exceeded including spare capacity, two or more panels
must be provided. These panels must be connected in a network configuration as one complete system.
h. Fire alarm systems shall comply with NFPA, DSA Fire and Life Safety requirements, and Education
Code Section, and be UL and CSFM listed, power-limited, battery backed, electrically supervised
systems.
i. Fire alarm system shall be designed with addressable initiating and electrically supervised indicating
(audio/visual) devices.
1) Buffer relays powered by the fire alarm system shall be supervised as indicated in District
standard detail.
j. The fire alarm system shall be interfaced with the clock program controller, Central PA and
Autonomous PA system(s) to deactivate program/classroom change signals during fire alarm condition.
All manual, autonomous PA and automatic program signals shall be deactivated during fire alarm
condition. In addition, provide interconnection and required control features between fire alarm system
and chemical fire extinguishing system, Theatrical Lighting Systems (for minimum egress lighting
actuation), water based fire sprinkler system, damper control or smoke management systems, ventilation
systems where required for the purpose of fan shutdown, class passing signaling system, door release
electromagnets power supply controls, elevator controllers, and any other systems required by code.
1) Shunt trip circuit breakers shall not be utilized to shut down any HVAC equipment by fire alarm
system when actuated. Shut down of HVAC shall be designed to automatically reset upon reset
of fire alarm system.
2) The use of Fail-Safe circuitry to control shut down of equipment external to the fire alarm system
shall not be allowed for elevator recall or shunt trip circuitry.
3) In existing facilities the Designer shall investigate the conditions and compatibility of the existing
elevator controller(s), and make any provisions to up-grade, or replace the controller to properly
interface with the fire alarm system.
k. Fire alarm system shall not be interfaced to any of the following:
1) Sump warning systems.
2) Carbon monoxide detection systems.
3) Methane gas detection systems.
4) Elevator car alarm bell circuit.
5) Any other unrelated system.
l. Provide a 120-volt, 20 amps dedicated circuit and terminate in each of the following cabinets: Fire alarm
control panel(s) and remote power supply (ies). Circuit breaker at panelboard shall be equipped with a
handle lock-on device. Provide surge suppressor at input of control panel.
1) Provide a permanent label in all fire alarm panel(s), transponder(s), or remote power supply(ies)
indicating the electrical panel and circuit designation as well as a description of the physical
location of the electrical panel. All labels shall be affixed to the inside of the panel door.
m. A remote annunciator panel with LCD Display shall be provided in the Administration Building main
office, and in satellite administration areas, such as Adult School Offices where they shall be accessible
by office personnel only. The annunciator(s) shall be provided with an integral keyed locking switch to
disable/enable the annunciator controls.
n. When replacing and existing fire alarm system, a new fully addressable system must be installed.
1) Indicate on drawings the extent of existing work to be demolished.
o. Provide automatic detection devices in accordance with codes and applicable regulations.
p. Provide a California State Fire Marshal approved voice evacuation system in assembly areas
(Gymnasium, Multi-Purpose Rooms, etc.) with an occupant load of 1000 or more.
q. The fire alarm system shall incorporate the controls and interface requirements between FACP and
elevator controller as required by the ASME code for elevators:
1) Show a programmable addressable relay module which will be activated by the elevator machine
room and hoistway detectors. If activated, this relay module shall cause the following actions:
a) Provide a button which will signal Fire Fighters that the operation of the elevator may be
compromised due to a possible fire.
2. Initiating Devices
a. Smoke detectors shall be the primary means of automatic alarm initiation. Smoke detectors shall be
specifically designed for the installation area expected environmental conditions. Heat detectors shall be
used in spaces where smoke detectors would not be suitable. Spaces that require fire protection where
heat detectors may be utilized include areas where any of the following conditions may exist:
1) Temperature below 32° Fahrenheit (0° Centigrade).
2) Temperature above 100° Fahrenheit (38° Centigrade).

3) Relative humidity above 90 percent.
4) Air velocity greater than 300 ft/min (1.5 m/sec).
These areas may include but are not limited to: parking garages (auto exhaust), mechanical rooms (dust),
Industrial Arts areas such as Metal Shops (smoke from welders), Wood Shops (saw dust), and Auto
Shops (auto exhaust), custodial/hopper rooms, kitchens/food preparation and serving areas, restrooms,
and shower areas.
b. Do not provide smoke detectors in areas that are exposed to the weather.
1) Smoke detectors placement shall comply with manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not install
smoke detectors within 3 feet of HVAC registers, or within 24” to any sources of electro
magnetic interference (EMI); such as fluorescent fixtures.
2) Designs shall reflect appropriate devices for the areas of application; utilize District approved
detectors to avoid nuisance tripping and false alarms when theatrical devices such as artificial
smoke, fog, etc. are used.
c. Provide heat detectors above suspended ceilings of every room and in accessible attics that contain
combustible materials; such as building structure, flexible ducts, exposed cables, etc. (Refer to currently
enforced NFPA 72 Section 2-1.4.2.1). Heat detectors are not required when sprinklers will be provided
in these areas.
1) In existing facilities non-accessible attics spaces that contain combustible materials shall be made
accessible and be protected by heat detector(s).
2) Provide identification tags for devices not in field of view or above ceilings, and for devices
containing end of line resistors. Tags shall conform to specification section 28 3100
d. Design and installation of automatic fire detectors shall conform to NFPA 72, as amended in Article 91
of the California Fire Code section 1006.2.4.2.2.1.1 and ADAAG.
e. Design a system that utilizes linear heat detectors in concealed or controlled access areas. The detection
wire shall be indicated to be installed within 20 inches of the ceiling or underside of the building roof, or
as recommended by the manufacturer. In shallow areas show the detection wire to be mounted within
the upper part of the space to be protected.
1) One circuit of linear heat detection shall be utilized for areas not exceeding 4000 square feet
above multiple rooms.
2) Areas above gymnasiums and Auditoriums exceeding 4000 square feet shall be considered one
zone.
3) Any areas divided by a fire rated walls shall be protected separately and considered independent
zones.
4) Design shall indicate all equipment necessary for a complete installation in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
f. Provide smoke detectors at each interior elevator lobby and elevator machine room. Smoke detectors
are used to recall elevator cars to pre-assigned floor levels and to initiate a general alarm. Each elevator
lobby smoke detector must report as one address to the fire alarm system. A machine room
smoke/heat detector is always required.
1) A rate-of-rise/fixed temperature heat detector shall be provided in the elevator machine room
and be installed within two feet of the sprinkler head to shut off power to elevator equipment.
Provide an addressable relay module to interface with shunt trip circuit breaker providing power
to elevator equipment. By activation of heat detector, power to elevator equipment shall be shut
down. The activation temperature of the heat detector shall be lower than that of the sprinkler
head. Activation of smoke detector(s) in the machine room shall cause elevator to recall to
specified floor if required.
2) When required provide automatic detection device(s) in elevator hoist-way. Indicate all
requirements and necessary provisions to make the detector(s) accessible without entering the
elevator hoist-way. Access shall be provided through an approved enclosure with self-locking fire
rated door. The detector(s) shall be so placed as to allow service to them without service
personnel having to reach into the hoist-way in the path of travel of the elevator.
3) When required provide a fire alarm initiating device in the elevator pit.
4) When there is a fire sprinkler installed at the top of an elevator hoistway, a heat detector is
required at the top of the elevator hoistway; in such cases an external hatch must be provided to
safely access the detector and an UL approved cage must be provided. If there is no fire sprinkler
at the top of the hoistway, then a detector is not required. Activation of the detector shall recall
elevator and cause a general alarm. If a sprinkler head exists at the top of the hoistway, a heat
detector must shut down the elevator’s power. A smoke detector is always recommended for
elevator recall whenever possible when a heat detector is present for shunt trip service.
5) In the sequence of operation chart, clearly indicate the alarm/recall/ power shut down
requirements. All Fire Alarm detectors report to the Fire Alarm System. The Fire Alarm System
shall be interfaced with the elevator controller.
g. Provide outdoor/weather rated approved heat detector at all outdoor elevator landings.
h. If combinations smoke/fire dampers or duct smoke detectors are required, this work shall be part of the
fire alarm system and all components and wiring shall be indicated on Electrical Drawings. Smoke
detectors may be used in lieu of duct detectors to shut down HVAC systems or to control combination
smoke/fire dampers if ALL areas served by the HVAC system are protected with smoke detectors. The
Fire Alarm System shall be programmed to shut down the HVAC system or close the smoke/fire
damper if one or more of the area smoke detectors are activated. All detectors must be accessible for
yearly testing. Provide addressable relay modules to interface with HVAC or smoke/fire damper
controls in order to shut down the HVAC unit or close the smoke damper. (Coordinate this work with
that of the HVAC system to avoid duplication of systems.)
i. In Existing Facilities renovation projects remove existing duct detectors; provide controls to shut down
Air Conditioning units with a CFM rating of 2000 or more. Shut down of units shall be accomplished
via smoke detector(s) in the area(s) being served by the air conditioning unit(s).
j. Provide flow and tamper switches at each sprinkler riser assembly. Flow and tamper switches shall be
addressed individually per building and per floor level. Provide a separately addressed tamper switch at
each post indicating valve (P.I.V.).
1) Provide a red outdoor 24 volt DC 10 inch bell on the street side of the building for the each
sprinkler riser flow switch or groups of flow switches within each building. The sprinkler water
flow bell shall be controlled by dry contacts within the flow switch and powered by 24 volts
directly from an FACP or a remote NAC power supply. Proper signage should be provided
adjacent to the bell indicating what action should be taken when the bell sounds.
k. Since automatic initiating devices are provided in all rooms and attics as part of Automatic Fire Alarm
System, avoid installing pull stations, except in areas classified as places of assembly in accordance with
applicable codes. Areas requiring manual pull stations include assembly areas such as gymnasia,
auditoria, kitchen/dining areas used for assembly, and multi-purpose rooms. Install one manual pull
station within five feet of each exit door.
1) Provide one manual pull station within five feet of the fire-alarm annunciator in the main office
of the Administrative Unit.
2) All manual pull stations, except the manual pull station in the office by the FA annunciator, shall
be provided with a protective cover.
l. Connect automatically/manually activated dry chemical fire extinguishing system such as is provided in
prefabricated kitchen hood to fire alarm control panel as a separate fire alarm point/zone.
m. Provide protective covers for pull stations, smoke and heat detectors, and audible and visual devices
located in areas that can be subjected to vandalism such as gyms, restrooms, locker and shower rooms,
and all hallways and corridors associated with these spaces.
n. Beam smoke detectors shall be utilized in large areas with high ceilings such as auditoriums and
gymnasiums in lieu of multiple smoke detectors. Do not use beam smoke detectors in small confined
areas such as classrooms that have large beams that will require multiple smoke detectors to provide
proper coverage.
o. When heat detectors are mounted in attics with catwalks or tall dimensions to the bottom side of the
roof structure, accessibility shall be provided for testing and servicing of the detectors.
p. Smoke or heat detectors are not required in attic spaces and parking areas protected by fire sprinklers.
Provide fire alarm detection in all garage(s) adjacent areas, such as hallways and corridors, elevator
lobbies, equipment rooms, offices, etc.
3. Alarm (Indicating) Devices
a. Provide sufficient alarm sounding device coverage for entire plant including interior and yard areas.
Avoid exterior of school site except near entrances to buildings to minimize disturbance of
neighborhood.
b. Alarm sounding devices at each facility shall be of the same type. All audible alarm signals connected to
an FACP shall be synchronized by an internal to the FACP coder and within the notification zone in
which they are located. The use of coders within a remote NAC power supply or within an individual
audible appliance shall not be acceptable. In facilities not receiving a complete new fire alarm system, the
existing type of coded sounding devices if currently bells shall be changed to horns.
c. Alarm sounding devices shall be capable of sounding alarm at a level of 15 decibels above ambient noise
or 75 decibel minimum, whichever is higher; measured 4 feet above floor and in the center of the room
or space.
d. Provide strobes and horns as required in classrooms to meet visual and audibility requirements. When
both audible and visual devices are required use combination type devices unless the audible device is a
speaker used in an EVAC system.
e. In areas requiring speakers for voice evacuation systems provide a sufficient quantity of speakers to
minimize reverberation and the distance between the speakers and the occupants. A gymnasium or
auditorium would typically have 9 to 12 ceiling mounted 8 inch speakers and other areas such as
associated lobbies, restrooms, dressing rooms etc. shall be equipped with one or more 4 inch wall mount
speakers. The speaker circuitry in the main seating area shall be configured in an alternating
checkerboard pattern to split the speakers between the two amplifier outputs.
f. A sixty-second silence inhibit shall be imposed on audible and visual alarm circuits to insure that the
building occupants perceive any alarm. There shall be an audible and visual fire and trouble indication
at annunciator panel.
1) Provide visual alarm devices in classrooms, toilets, rooms with high ambient noise, special
education rooms such as classrooms for deaf and hard of hearing, dining areas, locker rooms,
shower rooms, gymnasia, auditoria, assembly areas, corridors and hallways, public areas of main
office, band and music rooms, shops, and any room where ambient noise exceeds 105 decibels.
Visual alarm devices belonging to different circuits, but within a single plane of view or flashes
from more than two devices on different circuits shall be synchronized.
g. Install bells and horns 8'-0" above finished floor. Visual appliances shall be mounted 80” above the
finished floor to the bottom of the lens or six inches below the ceiling, whichever is lower.
h. Provide magnetic door holders and dedicated 24 volt DC power supplies with addressable relay modules
to close normally open fire doors upon detection of smoke in the area of the door. The wiring between
the door holder power supplies and the door magnets is not power limited and shall be in separate
raceway not containing the power limited fire alarm wiring. The door holder power supplies shall be
controlled directly by the associated FACP or with an addressable relay module. Connections to the
trigger circuit of the door holder power supply shall be configured in the fail safe mode.
i. Strobes shall be synchronized via main fire alarm control panel. Refer to standard technical detail SD-10
for additional requirements.
4. Zoning, Panels and Wiring
a. In addressable systems, each initiating device shall be one point. For example, smoke detector in
Building B, Classroom No. 213, shall be considered as one point.
b. Provide a note on drawings: “The fire alarm system shall pass tests required by local fire department,
including CHIEF’S REGULATION NO. 4 PROGRAM required by City of Los Angeles Department
of Fire and administered by LAUSD.”
c. Provide a digital Communicator at Main Fire Alarm Control Panel to report alarm conditions to a UL
approved 24-hour manned certified central monitoring station. Use District UTILTY ORDER
REQUEST FORM to determine Central Monitoring Station that will be used. Instruct the contractor
to coordinate with the owner to arrange for the monitoring. Provide a DACT and two dedicated
telephone lines for central station service. Terminate the telephone lines to the DACT. Indicate all
wiring and raceway routing from Main Telephone Terminal, or telephone closet data distribution point
to DACT.
d. Provide at least one terminal cabinet inside each building for termination of all fire alarm system wiring.
Buildings with a walkway or arcade that divides footings of the buildings shall have a terminal cabinet in
each of the buildings. Provide a main terminal cabinet in main building, near fire alarm controller, for
routing all fire alarm system wiring for entire school site.
e. Fire alarm system control panel and main fire alarm terminal cabinet shall be located in LAN equipment
room as first choice, other suitable locations are temperature controlled rooms, work rooms, and similar
areas. Do not locate fire alarm control panel in mechanical or electrical equipment rooms. Remote
power supplies shall not be located in restrooms, multi-purpose rooms, gymnasia, auditoria, or similar
areas. Installation of power supplies in classrooms shall be avoided.
f. All wiring shall be in conduit or approved raceways. Wiring shall be continuous between devices or
terminal cabinets. Splicing of fire alarm system wiring is not allowed.
5. Construction Documentation Requirements:
a. Construction Drawings shall include the following information at a minimum:
1) Applicable code information, DSA, and LAUSD project numbers.
2) Site plans, floor plans and complete riser diagrams indicating all components, and required
raceways and wiring. Block diagrams, in addition to the complete riser diagram are recommended
but not required.
3) Show all necessary components for PIV, flow and tamper switches monitoring. Indicate all
related work for a complete installation in construction documents.
4) On each floor plan, indicate the type of ceiling construction and all accessible and inaccessible
ceilings and attic spaces. Provide adequate information to evaluate design conformance with
applicable codes and regulations.
5) Location of required access panels and reference to construction details.
6) Complete symbol list of all components with devices’ CSFM listings numbers. LAUSD standard
fire alarm symbols shall be used.
7) Complete sequence of operations.
8) Required power connections for all control panels and remote power supplies.
9) Voltage drop calculations for each visual and audible circuit. Voltage drop cannot exceed 6.0%
for each circuit to allow addition of future devices.
10) Mounting details for control panel(s), power supplies, terminal cabinets, and peripheral devices
such as horns, strobes, detectors, and pull stations, including backing details for protective
covers.
11) Provide point to point wiring diagrams and construction details for smoke detectors, heat
detectors, pull stations, audible and visual devices, duct smoke detectors (both addressable and
non-addressable), HVAC interface details; projected beam detectors, elevator shunt trip, recall
and control, power monitoring, ansul system interface, flow and tamper switches, remote power
supplies, control and annunciator panels, PA system interface, elevator recall, and other
automatic extinguishing system monitoring.
12) HVAC system shut-down provisions when required by code.
13) Detail of through-penetration of fire stop systems.
14) At existing schools, disconnection and removal of existing fire alarm components and wiring that
is not to be part of the new system.
15) Plans shall be stamped and signed by the responsible electrical engineer.
16) Battery calculations for each control panel and remote power supply. 30% spare capacity is
required for future growth.
17) Prior to DSA approval, the Architect/Engineer shall obtain District’s designated QA/QC group
approval.
C. CLOCK AND PROGRAM SYSTEM
1. General
a. Clock and Program System shall be hourly supervised, minute impulse, 24-volt direct current, and
multiple-wire connected system with a master time controls; the system shall once each hour
automatically and individually correct each secondary clock and program time circuit.
b. Provide connections from clock system terminal cabinet to main P.A. Rack.
c. Provide a remote schedule selector switch panel (LTR_RSS) for the master clock (Lathem LTR8-512-M
only). Locate remote selector in Main Office or in front panel of PA rack. See Specification 16730.
d. Provide connection to Fire Alarm Control Panel. Provide lock out for both manual and automatic tone
when fire alarm system is in alarm.
e. Eight separate Program/Classroom Change zones shall be provided.
f. Provide a dedicated 120-volt, 20-amp circuit to clock controller.
g. Interior clocks shall be 12" diameter, round, semi-flush and mounted at 8'-0" above floor unless shown
otherwise.
h. Provide interior clocks in all Classrooms, Administrative Unit offices, Cafeteria, Kitchen, Locker
Rooms, Teacher's Lounge, Library, Auditorium and Gymnasium.
i. Exterior clocks shall be 15", round, with weatherproof housing with polycarbonate protective cover.
j. Wiring shall be in conduit, separate from network cabling. Clock circuit wiring shall consist of 3 #14
AWG typically.
k. Provide visual units, which are substantially different in appearance from a fire strobe indicating
appliance to indicate Program/Classroom Change in Classrooms for the deaf and hard of hearing, and
rooms with high ambient noise. The applicability of this requirement must be approved by the district.
If required, the engineer must develop specification for appliances and power supplies.
l. Master clock controller shall be located in LAN/ Signal Equipment Room of Administrative Unit (new
schools only).
m. Provide a terminal cabinet, complete with required terminal blocks, in each building, to be used for
incoming and distributing cable terminations.
n. See public address/intercom/telephone and class-change signaling system design guide for coordination
with clock system.
o. At existing school sites with an existing master clock system, new clocks shall be same make as existing
master time control or clocks that are compatible with existing system.
p. Clocks shall be provided with hangers designed to ensure that they remain in place during earthquakes.
q. Provide block riser diagram of clock system, indicating all components and wiring.
r. When adding new clocks to an existing system confirm with clock manufacture if new clocks will work
with existing clock system; then provide the appropriate design for a single comprehensive system.
s. Clock system at new sites shall be 2 wire reverse polarity, 12 hour and 59th minute correction impulse
controlled.
D. COMPUTER AND NETWORKING SYSTEMS DESIGN
1. General
a. Design requirements for Wireless Network Systems shall be coordinated with the District’s Information
Technology Division.
b. A complete Local Area Network and Computer System shall be provided for all new school projects,
new building additions, and modernization projects.
c. Electrical power with surge protection and filtration must be provided for all computer equipment, as
well as an owner furnished rack mounted uninterruptible power supply for data frames and servers.
d. Refer to Guide Construction Specifications, Sections 25568 and 25569 – Premise Wiring Systems, for
additional specific requirements.
e. The Commissioned Architect/Engineer shall consult with the District prior to design of system to
determine specific project-related requirements.
f. Sites with more than one school, such as a continuation high school co-located on a high school campus
shall be equipped with one (1) Main Distribution Frame to serve both schools wherever feasible.
g. The following acronyms are used in this section:
MDF = Main Distribution Frame

IDF = Intermediate Distribution Frame
LDF = Local Distribution Frame
LDC = Limited Distribution Cabinet
LAN = Local Area Network
h. Data outlets in Kindergartens and Early Education Centers shall be child proof. The outlets shall be
specified to comply with the California Department of Social Services Requirements.
2. Local Area Network
a. For existing facilities the Architect/Engineer shall visit the site, fully familiarized himself/herself with
the existing infrastructure design approach, and extend it to the new building(s) addition, area to be
modernized or building(s) expansion. Provide an infrastructure with horizontal and vertical cabling to
match existing conditions.
b. For new facilities the network-cabling infrastructure at each school will utilize a star topology design
consisting of horizontal cabling, backbone cabling, and various telecommunications cabling pathways
and spaces. The Engineer of Record shall determine the best route and method for cable conveyance
throughout the school in accordance with project requirements and applicable design and industry
standards. The Local Area Network shall consist of backbone and horizontal plant, and all equipment
and wiring as follows:
1) Backbone and horizontal cable plant with the following characteristics:
a) Backbone fiber design consists of a hybrid cable with both single mode and multimode
cable in minimum group counts of six each. For new or existing 50 uM MM sites, any
added multimode fibers shall be based on a laser optimized, 50 micron multi-mode
solution which includes 10 GbE operation (ten gigabit Ethernet) up to 500 meters.
b) Fiber Termination Units are to be indicated on drawings to cross-connect backbone fiber

at both the main equipment (MDF) and secondary cross-connect points (IDFs, LDF, and
LDC). Utilize figure A-1 of TIA 568-C.1 annex A to indicate interconnection method.
Note on plans that pull through and splice methods will not be acceptable.
c) Design shall indicate an installation of optical fiber backbones in strand counts adequate
to cross-connect all active classrooms, and instructional support locations.
d) Design shall indicate horizontal fiber with a minimum of 10% spare strands, in multiples
of 6 strands, in each backbone cable.
2) Horizontal wiring extends from the work area outlet to the wiring closet. The horizontal wiring
includes the work area outlet, the physical termination for the cables, and the patch panels
and/or data switches located in the wiring closet. The horizontal wiring is the star topology
where each work area outlet is connected to a wiring closet. The horizontal distance from the
termination in the wiring closet to the work area outlet must not be greater than 90 meters (295').
The horizontal wiring consists of Category 6, 100 ohm, 4-pair unshielded twisted pair cable; and a
4-strand multi-mode fiber cable to the Limited Distribution Cabinet (LDC).
3) LAN equipment design shall incorporate no more than 20 outlets wired to a 24-port switch. This
requirement shall be in addition to any growth factors for future wiring requirements as set forth
in the District LAN specifications.
4) LAN Equipment Room, IDF Rooms, and Wiring Closets must be centrally located. Each closet
must contain the terminations and devices for the horizontal wiring system. The closet must
have sufficient space to accommodate all the components and servicing space. A typical wiring
closet can have the following components:
a) Equipment, 19" rack for mounting patch panels, and switches.
b) Raceways for routing cables to work area outlets.
c) Raceways/cable tray for routing backbone wiring.

d) Rack-mounted UPS for active components in MDF/Server Racks in LAN Room and in
all IDF and LDF racks. All UPS devices are to be located at the bottom of the rack space.
e) Cabinets, Racks, Patch Panels and Wire Management equipment and cabling are
Contractor Furnished Contractor installed.
f) File servers, network switches, routers and UPS units are generally Owner furnished,
Contractor installed.
g) All MDF, IDF, and LDF Racks shall have 50% physical space for future expansion.
Provide rack elevation details showing all Owner and Contractor furnished components.
h) All other signal headend equipment shall be located in the LAN Equipment Room.
i) All other signal systems shall share the wiring closets with LAN IDF equipment
j) LAN Equipment Room and all IDF Rooms shall be air conditioned, 24 hours a day and
365 days a year. Coordinate with Mechanical Engineer.
k) In Secondary Schools for all grade levels, General Classrooms, Science and Shop
Classrooms shall be equipped with one (1) 4-strand fiber drop to be terminated at a
limited distribution cabinet (LDC) located in the classroom, and a minimum of six (6)
student Category 6 drops, one (1) Category 6 drop for network printer, and one (1)
Category 6 drops at the teacher’s location. The category 6 data drops shall be run from the
LDC inside the classroom. All empty openings on each of the faceplates shall be
effectively closed using factory made blank inserts. All classroom drops should terminate
on two port faceplates. Student two position outlets containing two Category 6 drops shall
be located per educational specification requirements. Printer outlet shall be located near
teacher’s desk.
l) In Elementary Schools for all grade levels, General Classrooms, Science and Shop
Classrooms shall be equipped with one (1) 4-strand fiber drop to be terminate at a limited
distribution cabinet (LDC) located in the classroom, and a minimum of five (5) student
Category 6 drops, one (1) Category 6 drop for network printers, and one (1) Category 6
drops at the teacher’s location. The Category 6 drops shall be run from the LDC inside
the classroom. All empty openings on each of the faceplates shall be effectively closed
using factory made blank inserts. All classroom drops should terminate on two port
faceplates. Student two position outlets containing two Category 6 drops shall be located
per educational specification requirements. Printer outlet shall be located near teacher’s
desk. All drops shall be located on a single wall.
m) Kindergarten classrooms shall be equipped with one (1) 4-strand fiber drop to be
terminated at a Limited Distribution Cabinet (LDC) located inside the classroom, and a
minimum of three (3) student Category 6 drops, one (1) Category 6 drop for network
printers and one (1) Category 6 drops at the teacher’s location. The Category 6 drops shall
be run from the LDC inside the classroom. All empty openings on each of the faceplates
shall be effectively closed using factory made blank inserts. All classroom drops should
terminate on two port faceplates. Student two position outlets containing two Category 6
drops shall be located per educational specification requirements. Printer outlet shall be
located near teacher’s desk. All drops shall be located on a single wall.
n) In Computer Laboratories, Technology Centers, Multi-Media Centers and Accounting

Classrooms; A minimum of one (1), 6-strand fiber drop to the LDF in the Computer
Laboratory and forty (40) Category 6 data drops distributed from the LDF. Category 6
drops shall be grouped with up to six Category 6 jacks per faceplate. Empty openings on
faceplates shall be effectively closed using factory made blank inserts. The LDF may be
installed in the closest signal room or collocated within an IDF.
o) In Administrative Units, for offices a minimum of one wall outlet with two Category 6
outlets in a single 2-position faceplate shall be provided at each workstation. One of the
two network connections will be labeled for Data. The remaining one connection will be
labeled for Voice. Empty openings on faceplates shall be effectively closed using factory
made blank inserts.
p) General workrooms shall receive a minimum of the following:
(1). Workroom/Project Rooms for Secondary Schools: Three (3) Category 6, one (1)
Category 6 drop for printer.
(2). General Workroom for Secondary Schools: One (1) Category 6.
(3). Workrooms for Elementary Schools: One (1) Category 6.
(4). Workroom for Administration: One (1) copy machine.
(5). Workroom for Performing Arts/Music Workroom: Two (2) Category 6.
(6). Workroom for Science Classrooms: One (1) Category 6.
q) Conference rooms will receive up to two (2) Category 6 drops; at two separate locations
(faceplates) in the room. Drops will terminate in a single faceplate with two Category 6
drops. One drop shall be labeled “voice” and the other “data”.
r) In Library Reading Room, Circulation Center, Library Office and Conference Room,
outlets at each workstation shall be provided. A minimum of one (1) 4-strand fiber drop
to the Library LDF and a minimum of twelve (12) Category 6 data drops distributed from
the LDF. Category 6 drops must be grouped with two Category 6 jacks (and two blank
jacks) per faceplate. Drops must be distributed within the room according to the Project
documents. Empty openings on faceplates shall be effectively closed using factory made
blank inserts.
(1). High Schools circulation desks shall receive four (4) data drops.
(2). Middle Schools circulation desks shall receive three (3) data drops.
(3). Elementary Schools and Primary Centers circulation desks shall receive two (2) data
drops.
(4). All Library offices shall receive two (2) drops.
(5). All Library Workrooms shall receive two (2) drops.
(6). All Primary Centers shall receive a minimum of six (6) student data drops in
addition to the circulation drops.
(7). All Secondary School sites shall receive a minimum of 12 and a maximum of 40
total library drops. The designer shall base the student drop counts above 12 on a
6:1 ratio as applied to the maximum occupant load capacity of the room. As an
example, if a library has an occupant capacity of eighty, the drop count will be 13
(13.3333 rounded down).
(8). Elementary School Library shall receive a minimum of one (1) 4-strand fiber drop
to the Library LDF and a minimum of eight (8) student’s Category 6 data drops
distributed from the LDF (three (3) at circulation desk and five (5) in reading area),
two (2) Category 6 data drops at librarian’s circulation desk, and two (2) Category 6
data drops at librarian’s workroom.
s) Student Nutritional Support Areas: A minimum of one (1), 4-strand fiber drop to the
LDF and up to twenty (20) Category 6 data drops distributed from the LDF (12 drops for
Elementary Schools, and 20 drops for Middle and High Schools). Category 6 drops must
be grouped with two Category 6 jacks (and two blank jacks) per faceplate. Empty
openings on faceplates shall be effectively closed using factory made blank inserts. Drops
must be distributed within the room according to the District’s standard schematic details.
t) Student Nutritional Support Areas (Exterior Locations): Each location shall receive two
(2) Category 6 drops in an environmentally sealed enclosure as described in section 1.02 B.
4 of this specification.
u) Multi-purpose rooms/Auditorium shall contain a total of: Eight (8) Category 6 data drops
distributed from the closest LDF or IDF location. Category 6 drops must be grouped
with two Category 6 jacks per faceplate. Empty openings on faceplates shall be effectively
closed using factory made blank inserts. Drops must be distributed within the room
according to the Project documents and consistent with the descriptions below.
(1) In the stage area of a multipurpose room/auditorium, there shall be two (2)
Category 6 drops located either at stage apron or the proscenium arch.
(2) On the other three walls of the multipurpose room, two (2) Category 6 data drops
shall be evenly distributed and installed.
v) Gymnasium shall receive two (2) Category 6 data drops distributed from closest available
LDF or IDF location. Category 6 drops must be grouped with two Category 6 jacks per
faceplate. Empty openings on faceplates shall be effectively closed using factory made
blank inserts.
w) Project documents shall indicate all horizontal fiber and Category 6 cabling requirements
for non-instructional and office work areas, including book rooms and students stores.
x) Provide a cable tray system divided in three sections for all signal systems, except fire
alarm, clock and building control systems.
y) Provide two (2) floor mounted outlets, one for connection to projector and one for
connection to the school’s computer network; also provide a microphone outlet in the
same location, appropriately 15 feet from projection screen.
3. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
a. The site MDF cabinet shall be provisioned with one 208 volt, 30 amps NEMA L6-30P receptacle to
connect to owner furnished contractor supplied uninterruptible power supply.
E. TELEPHONE SYSTEM
1. General
a. The Architect-Engineer shall consult and coordinate with the telephone utility provider in requesting
service, and shall include in the contract documents the drawings and specifications or other
requirements provided by the utility. Requests must be made early in design, to allow sufficient time for
obtaining the utility engineers’ input. For assistance in this area, please contact Information Technology
Divisions Telecommunications Branch.
b. System requirements are different for Elementary Schools and for Middle Schools / High Schools.
Requirements also may be different for new school construction and existing schools.
c. PABX or PBX systems, depending upon the size of the project to be served, require either floor space
or wall-mounting space. Some PBX systems are contained within a system cabinet. Others may utilize a
rack-mounted equipment configuration similar to data networking equipment. In planning a project, the
access and egress to the cabinets or racks, and especially at the front, rear and sides of the main control
cabinet, must be determined and planned to provide adequate space for operation and service. Consult
the Information Technology Divisions Telecommunications Branch for proper sizing of floor space
requirements.
d. System shall interface with the PA / Intercom system. Manual control of program tone over PA system
shall be locked out when Fire Alarm System is in “Alarm”. All manual and automatic program signals
shall be deactivated during a fire-alarm condition.
e. Provide dedicated telephone line connections needed for elevators, areas of refuge, fire alarm and
intrusion alarm systems monitoring.
1) The design shall indicate and provide all necessary elements to meet the latest applicable ASME
code for elevators.
a) Provide an autodialing telephone located within the elevator cab, which shall have a
button labeled “HELP”; this button will trigger the emergency telephone. The emergency
telephone will cause an indicator light to illuminate in the elevator car after the call is
answered at the call receiving location.
b) Provide an autodial hands free telephone, which shall first dial a red wall mounted
telephone instrument strategically located in the Administrative Area/Main Office, and in
the Adult School. If these devices are not answered in 30 seconds or less, the autodialing
telephone will redial to an alternate location, such as school police.
c) This telephone system shall be capable of being quizzed by the person answering the call,
and must be capable of informing the location of the elevator emergency. This can be
accomplished via pre-recorded messages. All elevator emergency telephone instruments at
a site shall operate using the same dialing codes and procedures.
d) The wall mounted telephone instrument shall be connected to the second Fire Alarm
DACT telephone line via an RJ-31X switch, though a jack at the administration office(s).
All elevator calls shall come to this telephone first.
e) Provide document frames with operational instructions and procedures adjacent to the
telephone instrument. Refer to technical specification 14 2423, and standard technical
electrical details for additional information.
f) Telephones in the designated areas of refuge shall be dial-less, hand free telephone
instruments capable of automatically dialing the Main Office at a PBX extension, and an
alternate location if the office does not answer in 30 seconds.
(1) Coordinate alternate location dialing destination with the Design Manager; make all
necessary provisions for a complete system in the original design.
(2) Number and location of telephone lines dedicated for security system usage shall
be coordinated with the Design Manager.
(3) Where required provide ADA compliant phones.
2. Elementary Schools
a. The following telephone lines are required for Elementary Schools (identical requirements for Early
Education Centers provided the working areas exist) shall be as follows:
1) 1 PRI (Primary Rate Interface) with 40 DIDs.
2) 1 dedicated fax line.
3) 1 intrusion alarm line per alarm panel.
4) 2 fire alarm line per FACP (minimum or as needed to meet code requirements).
5) 1 line per elevator as needed.
6) 1 line for environmental control system as needed.
7) 1 T1 for data.
8) 1 phone with direct access to the outside at teacher’s lounge.
3. Middle and High Schools - New Construction:
a. System shall consist of a PBX telephone system and telephone lines with connections to other systems
(i.e., intercom, public address and class/program change signaling system. Provide public address,
intercom, PBX telephone, and class/program change signaling system.
b. In Middle and High Schools the line requirements are as follows:
1) Secondary sites with 1 - 30 administrative phones.
a) One (1) PRI (Primary Rate Interface) with 100 DIDs
b) One (1) dedicated fax line.
c) One (1) dedicated intrusion alarm line per alarm panel.
d) Two (2) dedicated fire alarm lines per FACP (or as needed to meet code requirements).
e) One (1) dedicated line per elevator as needed.
f) One (1) dedicated line for environmental control system as needed.
g) One (1) payphone per campus under a sheltered student accessible area. A preferred
location would be near the administration buildings or near the student’s quad (possibly
adjacent to the lunch shelter/MPR).
h) Two (2) T1’s for data.
i) One (1) phone with direct access to the outside at teacher’s lounge.
2) Secondary sites with more than 30 administrative phones.
a) Two (2) PRI with 100 DIDs.
b) One (1) dedicated fax line.
c) One (1) dedicated intrusion alarm line per alarm panel.
d) Two (2) dedicated fire alarm lines per FACP (minimum or as needed to meet code
requirements).
e) One (1) dedicated line per elevator as needed.
f) One (1) payphone per campus under a sheltered student accessible area. A preferred
location would be near the administration building or near the student quad (possibly
adjacent to the lunch shelter/MPR).
g) Two (2) T1 for data.
4. Telephone Outlets
a. Telephone outlets shall be provided as follows:
1) One (1) attendant telephone console Type T1 in main office in Elementary Schools and two in
Middle and High Schools’ main office, plus one in each small learning community (SLC)
administrative office.
2) Multi-line telephones in Principal's, Vice Principal's, Assistant Principal’s, Dean's Offices, at

workstations in Attendance Office (high schools and middle schools only), SLC’s (Small Learning
Communities), in Kitchen's office, (one fax, one telephone) and at each workstation in main
office (except at workstations where attendant telephone consoles are located), Work Experience
Coordinator and College Coordinator offices in high schools, Counselors Offices in Adult School
and for each of following offices in high schools and middles schools: Custodian, Librarian,
Nurse, Doctor, Textbook Room, Girls’ P.E. Department, Boys P.E. Department, Industrial Arts
Department, Grade Counselors, Counselors, and a two line telephone with two phone lines to
library circulation desk.
3) Use wall mounted single line telephone where no desk is available such as teachers lounge rooms.
4) Single line desk PABX telephones shall be used only where specifically directed.
5) All telephone outlets, type IW and ID shall be connected to the PA/Intercommunication System.
Identify Intercommunication Telephones from PABX telephones per LAUSD standard Symbol
List and show them in appropriate location on Riser Diagrams. Descriptions above using the
“Tx” descriptors refer to the LAUSD standard symbol definitions.
6) One wire connection (jack only) for each elevator.
7) One wire connection (jack only) for each fax machine in main administration area.
8) One wire connection for kitchen’s office fax.
9) Two wire connection (jack only) for fire alarm system.
10) One wire connection (jack only) for intrusion alarm.
b. Single line Intercommunication Desk type telephones (ID) shall be used in classrooms and library
reception desks. Use single line Intercommunication wall mounted telephones (IW) in Cafeteria,
Auditorium, Gymnasium, Computer Rooms, Faculty Lounge, First Aid Room, Music/Choral Room,
Locker rooms, etc. The classroom outlets are contractor-furnished and contractor-installed items and
are specified under Guide Specification Section 25750. PBX and P.A. systems shall be interconnected to
provide paging access capability from any designated intercommunication telephone. Do not program
any classroom phones with this feature; they are only to possess this capability. . A separate
interconnection provides classroom phones (IW and ID) access to the PBX for emergency calls to the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
5. Wiring Requirements
a. Wiring requirements for T5 telephone outlets is Category 6 cable terminating in Category 6 jack as
specified in Specification Section 27 1013. The homeruns shall be routed to the closest IDF’s dedicated
voice patch panel for future Voice over IP network connections. From IDF a multi-pair telephone cable
shall be used to connect all telephones to the PBX system in the administration building.
b. Wiring requirements for jack only telephone ports is one twisted pair #22 AWG, Category 3, cable
terminating in RJ-11 jack and shall homerun to the main telephone backboard (thru telephone terminal
cabinet of the building if applicable).
c. Refer to Guide Specifications Sections 27 1013 and 27 1014 Structured Cabling for equipment
description and general requirements for existing and new sites respectively.
d. Refer to Guide Specifications section
e. The following diagram, Voice Communications Topology, shows a typical wiring selection and design
for a multiple building campus or multi-floor building.
6. PBX General Requirements
a. A dedicated UPS providing at least 1 hour of emergency power for each system shall be furnished and
installed by PBX equipment’s vendor under separate contract (Owner Furnished, Owner installed under
this contract).
b. Provide a dedicated, 30 Amp, 208 volt, 1 phase circuit with NEMA L6-30P outlet for connection to
owner furnished UPS (which supplies power to the PABX equipment).
c. Allow 4 square feet of floor space adjacent to dedicated power outlet for the PBX UPS.
d. When designing for telephone systems take into account future requirements and make provisions for
expansion in systems such as providing spare cables, sizing terminal boards with adequate spare
terminals.
e. On sites with more than one school, such as a continuation high school co-located on a high school
campus shall be equipped with a single PABX to serve all users on both sites wherever feasible.
f. The PBX system will be located either in the campus or building LAN room, or a separately designated
room. Always provide main cross connect backboard or terminal cabinet in main building in LAN
Equipment Room next to main telephone backboard (in new school campuses only). All wiring shall be
routed via Cross-connect backboard or terminal cabinet through cable tray system.
g. Allow a separate 84 inch rack for the PABX and associated equipment in the LAN room.
h. Indicate on drawings the location of equipment and components, conduit and cable runs, and cable
trays.
i. Cables shall be in raceways. Exposed cables will be allowed in cable tray system only.
j. All cable homeruns from outlets shall be routed to the closest IDF at each building. Provide separate
patch panel in IDF dedicated to VOICE.
k. Cables homeruns to IDF may be run in same conduit or cable tray, which contain data cables routed to
the same IDF. Voice and Data outlets are allowed to be installed on the same multi-position
faceplates/boxes.
l. From IDF use a multi-pair telephone cable (riser rated or better) to route the telephone lines to PBX
Cabinet (cross connect at both ends, in IDF room and LAN room). This temporary wiring shall be
removed after Voice over IP system is implemented.
F. PUBLIC ADDRESS/INTERCOM/CLASS CHANGE SIGNALING SYSTEM
1. General:
a. Provide public address, intercom, and class/program change signaling systems.
b. Systems requirements are different for Elementary Schools and for Middle Schools / High Schools.
Requirements also may be different for new school construction and existing schools. Verify specific
requirements for each project.
c. There shall be a single public address/intercommunication system for each site. The
Architect/Engineer shall select the appropriate system from one of the three specification-compliant
manufacturers. The design shall comply with the following criteria:
1) The proposed public address/intercommunication system shall not exceed manufacturer’s system
capacity.
2) It is not acceptable to increase the manufacturer’s stated capacity by tying two or more systems
together.
d. Provide an Autonomous Public Address System in Multi-Purpose Rooms, large Group Instruction
Rooms and Auditoriums. System shall include an override muting capability from main PA system
associated with the emergency all-call announcements.
e. Provide an Autonomous Public Address System in Gymnasiums and athletic fields in Middle and High
Schools. System shall include a muting capability from main PA system associated with the emergency
all-call announcements.
f. The Main Public Address System and all Autonomous PA Systems shall be interfaced with the facility
Fire Alarm System to cause audio muting of PA system speakers during general fire alarm conditions.
2. Main PA/Intercom System
a. Main PA System shall consist of public address, intercommunication and class/program change
signaling equipment with capacity for speakers and telephones.
b. Provide intercom telephone service to each classroom, wired to the main Intercom/PA rack. In some
cases, the classroom phones connect directly to the PBX; coordinate with Design Manager.
c. The system shall permit the following paging and intercom communication as follows: main office
phone to classroom phones, classroom to classroom, and classrooms to office. Outside line access from
a classroom phone through the PBX is limited to contacting emergency services only.
d. When designing PA systems, take into account future requirements and make provisions for expansion
in systems such as providing spare cables, sizing terminal boards with adequate spare terminals,
providing conduit stub-outs outside of buildings and size equipment such as P.A racks and PABX to
accommodate future circuits as planned, or 20% minimum expansion.
e. See Guide Construction Specification, Section 27 5116 through 27 5130 for equipment description and
additional requirements. These Specifications shall be included in the Contract Specifications.
f. PA/Intercom Rack(s)
1) P.A. Rack(s) shall be located in the LAN Equipment Room, lining up with TV, MDF, PBX and
Energy Management System (EMS) racks.
a) Rack(s) shall be front and rear accessible for servicing. Main P.A. rack(s) shall consist of
one or more free standing 19" rack(s) with following components:
b) AM-FM tuner. Antenna for this tuner is mounted on roof of Administrative Building with
conduit and antenna down leads installed to P.A. Rack Using a TV antenna for receiving
the FM signal is not permitted. Change connection of tuner to input of software
programmed, digital PA system so tuner output can be delivered to selected speakers or
zones.
c) CD player in Main Office with microphone. Cassette player is no longer required.
d) Intercom and program control panel. Analog intercom is disabled with the deletion of the
switchbank requirement.
e) P.A. and emergency amplifier.
f) Berhinger feedback eliminator (or equivalent) for Main Office microphone.
g) Microphones. One microphone (always on via the microphone switch) shall be installed in
Main office wired to the PA Rack.
h) CD changer. One CD changer shall be installed in Main office installed in a wall mount
enclosure (optionally with angled fold down) wired to PA Rack. The CD player may be
limited to a single CD.
i) For schools with an outside quad assembly area, a requirement may be added for a remote
microphone outlet or wireless microphone system. Existing PA horns in or near this quad
area would be zoned for the PA broadcasts from this microphone without installing
additional horns. If a wired microphone outlet is installed, provide electrical safety
measures to isolate this outdoor appliance. Coordinate with Design Manager prior to
incorporating this requirement.
2) In medium and large campuses, multiple PA racks are required to accommodate the numbers of
speakers. Show the elevation of racks with all components shown. Prove adequate space to install
multiple racks.
3) In small campuses with single racks and a single card cage, provide ample room for expansion
within this rack for a complete additional card cage.
g. An additional function of P.A. speakers is to announce program/classroom change. System shall

interface with master clock system and Fire Alarm System for class-change signaling utilizing P.A.
speakers. The P.A. Rack equipment must include a tone generator and inputs from Program/Clock
Controller. Manual activation of separate tones shall be provided by both telephone codes and manual
buttons on front of the PA rack.
h. Provide a switch on the PA rack which reroutes the master clock zone one switch closure to built-in
steady tone of the secondary analog PA system. In the event that the primary digital, software-
programmed PA has failed or is being serviced, an all-bell class change tone shall be provided via this
switch. The tone duration is still controlled by the master clock.
i. Provide a separate manual activation button in the main office for notifying the plant manager via two
beeps. This button would activate a zone of outside horns only. This zone has to be created in software
and is accomplished using a spare software zone for outside horn assignment.
j. System shall interface with Fire Alarm System to silence all speakers during a general fire alarm
condition and activation of indicating devices. (See Standard Details 5.14 and 5.15.)
k. System shall interface with the site PBX to allow access to emergency services from the classrooms.
(Refer to Standard Detail 5.8)
l. Wiring Requirements.
1) For each P.A. speaker/horn provide one shielded twisted pair, #22 -#12 AWG, depending on
the size of speaker and the length of the run.
2) For intercom telephones, one twisted unshielded pair #22.
3) For intercom telephones with co-located speaker, two twisted pair #22 one pair shielded and one
pair unshielded.
4) For each microphone outlet, one twisted pair #22 AWG with overall shield.
5) For overriding autonomous P.A. system, one twisted pair #18 AWG.
6) For underground applications or under slabs at ground level use flooded type cables.
m. Intercommunication Phone Outlets
1) Provide intercommunication telephone Outlets as follows. (See also the sub-section “Telephone
PBX Systems.”)
2) Single line intercom desk telephones (ID) in Classrooms.
3) Single line intercom wall-mounted telephones (IW) in Cafeteria, Auditorium, Locker Rooms,
Faculty Lounge, First Aid Room, Music/Choral Room, Teachers Work Rooms, etc.
4) Intercom telephone outlets, type ID (desk type where desk is available) and IW (wall-type) shall
be connected to the PA/Intercommunication System thru PA Main terminal cabinet. The wires
for speakers and intercom telephone serving a room shall be combined in a single cable with an
overall jacket containing both shielded and unshielded twisted pairs.
5) Identify intercom telephones as separate from PABX telephones per LAUSD standard Symbol
List and show them in appropriate locations on riser diagrams.
n. P.A. Speakers
1) Provide P.A. speakers in the following locations at minimum:
a) Classrooms, offices, corridors, library, teachers’ workrooms, student store, plant manager’s
office and all occupied rooms where no PBX telephone has been provided.
b) Outdoors to cover all student assembly, athletic and activity areas. Size speakers/horns
appropriate to the area covered. Do not impact adjacent residential areas.
c) Parking garages.
d) All other rooms and areas as appropriate to specific projects.
o. Paging
1) PABX and Intercom/P.A. systems shall be interfaced to provide paging capability from any
designated telephone. Do not program classroom phones with this feature; they are only to
possess this capability. PA/PBX interconnections shall be accomplished by using two separate
paths. Paging lines from the PBX are required to have direct connections to the main
Intercom/P.A. rack phone ports which operate as fxs ports. A telephone card in the PA rack
operating as fxo port provides communications to the PBX, initiated from a classroom phone.
2) Provide a general paging zone for elementary schools and separate paging zones for middle and
high schools. Zones for class change tones and or paging are as follows:
a) General paging zone. Note: Consider if this will include the gyms, shops, auditorium and
athletic field and if the override mute is to be activated for these areas. Also, consider if
this zone will be used by the class change tones and if these areas are to be included.
b) Classrooms only.
c) Gymnasium and athletic fields.
d) Shops. Note: Art shops are often left off this list. Have OAR determine if they want to be
included (requires simple software configuration).
e) Auditorium/Multi-Purpose Rooms.
p. General System Requirements
1) Provide at least 1 hour of emergency power for PA/Intercom system at full load by installing a
dedicated, rack mounted UPS unit. Provide a dedicated 120-volt circuit from UPS to each P.A.
rack. The UPS shall be located in the PA rack with one or more battery packs. The model
number and battery packs used depend on power calculations for 1 hour emergency power.
Provide a SNMP web card into this UPS and Cat 6 in conduit to overhead cable tray. Provide
conduit from cable tray to top of MDF cabinet and route the Cat 6 cable to one of the last switch
positions of the core switch. Additional requirements for the UPS include 208 Vac single phase
(phase to phase) input power. In addition, the input and output power connections with
receptacles are provided by adding a SUPDM12 module. Be aware of radius tolerance
requirements for the thick cable connecting the SUPDM12 and the AC input receptacle.
Consider using a deeper cabinet as is required for the MDF to accommodate this cable. Have the
OAR contact ITD to configure both the SNMP card and switch port.
2) In classrooms and offices, provide flush mounted baffles where new suspended ceilings are
installed. Locate speaker at center of the room. Otherwise, provide surface mounted speaker
baffles directly above the telephone handset at 8'-0".
3) In rooms without a teacher’s desk, telephone handsets shall be located in close proximity to
Teacher's work station, wall mounted at 4'-0" maximum to the highest operable part. In
classrooms telephones shall be desk mounted with telephone jack mounted at +15” measured
from the bottom of the receptacle outlet box to the level of the finished floor.
4) Provide speaker volume control in office areas only. For wall mounted speakers, volume control
shall be installed within baffle with shaft extending out of baffle. Where speakers are ceiling-
mounted, the volume controls shall be located on the wall in a convenient location.
5) Place the PA/ Intercom wall display, main PA display phone, CD player, and one emergency
“always hot” (via mic switch) PA microphone in main clerical core area. Plan location of wall
display so that it can be viewed from a maximum number of desks.
6) When designing P.A. systems, take into account future requirements and make provisions for
expansion in systems such as providing spare cables, sizing terminal boards with adequate spare
terminals. In small sites with room for only one cabinet, provide for expansion including room
for additional card cages.
7) Main PA terminal cabinet shall be located on the wall in the same room where PA racks are
located (LAN room in new campuses). All wiring shall be routed via main terminal cabinet
through cable tray system. In situations where the cabling conduit penetrates the roof to route to
another room for the MPATC, do not penetrate directly above the PA or autonomous PA rack.
Roof leaks shall be prevented from leaking directly in or around these conduits into the PA
cabinet.
8) Provide at least one terminal cabinet in each building. Locate terminal cabinet in building IDF
room(s).
9) Design loudspeaker installation using proper types and numbers of speakers to provide adequate
listening patterns in larger or special rooms and outdoor areas. Position outdoor speakers in a
manner that minimizes the impact to residential neighbors of the site. Consider problems of
feedback. Provide a feedback eliminator in PA rack for Main Office microphone. Some models
are line level and require a preamp for the microphone; however, as an alternative, one mic level
model should be available, but it should be rack mountable.
10) Note on plans: The final class change tone type may or may not be volume sensitive. For
example, a chime sounds relatively the same at different levels, but a last minute change to a
steady tone may be exceedingly loud or very low. Contractor shall test the class change tone by
setting to each available type and perform a final volume adjustment of the preamps, software
volume settings, and PA amplifier accordingly.
11) Fire Department requires self-supporting, non-guyed antenna masts. Ensure adequate structural
support.
12) Locate antenna masts in least conspicuous locations as viewed from main school entrance.
13) Indicate mounting details on drawings of antenna, speaker baffles, special speaker mounting
brackets, speaker clusters, etc.
14) Indicate on drawings a block-riser diagram of entire P.A. system, indicating components such as
speakers and intercom telephones, cable trays, conduit and cable runs and underground facilities.
15) Indicate on drawings the location of equipment and components, conduit and cable runs, and
cable trays. Also indicate on drawings the wiring details of all point to point connections inside
the PA racks.
16) Cables shall be in raceways. Exposed cables will be allowed in cable tray system only.
17) Provide grounding facilities for Public Address Systems consisting of 3/4" conduit and a #6
THWN wire, or as required by code and specification to connect the Main Public Address
terminal cabinet, and other terminal cabinets to the building grounding system. Where
connection to existing building ground system is not practical, provide a separate ground rod to
be used for grounding of the racks and antennas.
3. Gymnasium Autonomous P.A./Sound System
a. Components include:
1) Freestanding 19" rack with mixer pre-amplifiers, power amplifiers, cassette tape player, CD
player, AM-FM radio, and graphic or parametric equalizer. Locate rack in Gymnasium Office.
2) Terminal cabinet for termination of all inputs and outputs of the system.
3) AM-FM antenna mounted on roof with downlead in conduit to radio tuner and grounding. Do
not use a TV antenna for the FM signal.
4) Loudspeakers in gymnasium court consisting of a cluster of minimum 4 horn loudspeakers

mounted near ceiling in center of room in such a manner as to cover all 4 quadrants of room.
Mount cluster in a steel enclosure firmly anchored to ceiling or roof structure.
5) Two microphone outlets mounted flush with finished floor at center of side court. Use
microphone pockets that prevent a tripping hazard. Next to microphone outlets, provide two
120V, 15 amp receptacles flush with finish floor.
6) One microphone outlet in each of the Girls and Boys Coaches Offices.
7) Assistive Listening System.
b. Provide Program line to main P.A. rack in Administrative Unit to distribute local programs to main P.A.
system.
c. Provide Emergency Override line, including relays from main P.A. console, to mute the local program
during an emergency all-call.
d. Provide adequate speaker coverage from main P.A. rack to allow broadcast of main P.A. system
programs and announcements into gymnasium areas. A separate Program line to an input of the
autonomous system is not required.
e. Provide a dedicated 120-volt circuit for Autonomous PA Rack.
4. Elementary Schools Multi-Purpose Room Autonomous P.A./Sound System
1) Wall mounted amplifier in cabinet with a minimum of 8 input sources for tape, projector, and 5
microphones. Amplifier cabinet shall be flush or surface mounted and located back stage.
2) Input/output switching panel mounted adjacent to or below amplifier cabinet.
3) Three recessed floor microphone outlets flush mounted near front of stage platform, equally
spaced and wired to pre-amplifier mixer inputs.
4) Recessed microphone outlet flush mounted in front face of stage platform and wired to pre-
amplifier mixer input.
5) Recessed microphone outlet flush mounted in floor at center of audience area and wired to pre-
amplifier mixer input.
6) A minimum of two Speakers mounted on either side of the stage platform and wired to amplifier
outputs.
7) Projector outlet flush mounted in floor at center of audience area and wired to pre-amplifier
mixer input.
8) Receptacle, 120V, 15 amps, flush mounted in floor at center of audience area.
b. Provide adequate speaker coverage from the Main PA to hear emergency, class passing tones, zone
pages and all-call announcements
c. Provide Emergency Override line, including relays from the main P.A. console, to mute the local
program during emergency announcements.
d. Provide sufficient main P.A. speaker/horn coverage to allow broadcast of main P.A. system programs
and announcements in multi-purpose rooms, gymnasia, auditoria, and other specialized areas with
separate or autonomous PA systems. Include horns for area just outside the gym offices.
e. Provide dedicated 120-volt circuit for Autonomous PA wall mounted Rack.
5. Large Group Instruction Room Autonomous P.A./Sound System
a. Large Group Instruction Rooms are rooms with capacity for 100 students or more, but without a stage.
Contact the Office of Risk Assessment for any necessity of ADA required assistive listening systems in
this or similar locations.
b. Components include:
1) Wall mounted amplifier in cabinet with a minimum of 8 input sources for tape/CD, Audio from
laptop computer, projector, and 4 microphones. Amplifier cabinet shall be flush or surface
mounted in closest signal room.
2) Input/output switching panel mounted adjacent to or below amplifier cabinet.
3) Microphone outlet flush mounted on instruction wall at +48” A.F.F. and wired to pre-amplifier
mixer input.
4) Microphone outlet flush mounted in floor at center of audience area and wired to pre-amplifier
mixer input.
5) Provide two infrared wireless microphones.
6) Speakers mounted above instructional wall and wired to amplifier outputs.
7) Projector outlet flush mounted in floor at center of audience area and wired to pre-amplifier
mixer input.
8) Receptacle, 120V, 15 amps, flush mounted in floor at center of audience area.
c. Provide Emergency Override line, including relays, to mute local program from main P.A. console.
d. Provide adequate speaker coverage from the main P.A. rack to allow broadcast of main P.A. system
programs/class change tones and announcements in multi-purpose room areas.
e. Provide dedicated 120-volt circuit for Autonomous PA wall mounted Rack.
6. Middle and High Schools Multi-Purpose Room / Auditorium / Theater Autonomous
P.A./Sound System
1) A freestanding 19" rack backstage with mixer pre-amplifiers, power amplifiers, CD player,
cassette tape player, AM-FM radio, graphic or parametric equalizer, and receivers for wireless
microphones.
2) Terminal cabinet for termination of all inputs and outputs of system, except inputs of wireless
microphones.
3) AM-FM antenna mounted on roof with surge/arrester, and downlead in conduit to radio tuner.
The antenna mast shall be grounded.
4) Microphone outlets (three) mounted flush in stage platform, overhead, and in stage platform
front. Each microphone outlet shall be wired to one input of pre-amplifier mixer. Wireless
microphones and receivers shall be provided. Each wireless microphone receiver shall be wired
to one pre-amplifier mixer input. Use high quality, multichannel wireless microphone systems
designed to prevent interference from other emissions (e.g. radio/TV stations).
5) Provide two speaker outlets in the front face of the stage for monitor speaker connections.
Unmounted, stage monitor (wedge shaped) speakers lay on the front of stage to allow performers
to hear themselves, and have flexible cord connections to these outlets.
6) Projector outlet in control room wired to pre-amplifier mixer input.
7) Speakers shall be provided to produce a uniform sound level throughout auditorium. Optionally,
provide sub-woofers separately from the speaker clusters, either on or in the face of the stage
platform. Note on plans that prior to start of installation, a sound system analysis shall be
performed to properly locate sound columns.
8) A headset intercom system shall be provided between projection rooms and backstage for stage
cueing and lighting coordination. System shall include headsets, power supplies and input jacks.
9) Assistive Listening System with signage.
10) In performing arts auditoriums, as an option, provide a mixing console either located in the
sound booth room or in a sectioned area in the seating area (typically in the center back behind
the seating area). Install a conduit in or on the floor to cable the console snake cable to the sound
booth. Provide a means to secure the console from vandalism. Provide adequate AC outlets and
lighting for operation of the console.
b. Provide Emergency Override line, including relays, to mute local program from main P.A. console.
c. Provide speakers from main P.A. rack to allow broadcast of main P.A. system programs and
announcements with adequate coverage in auditorium building areas (for emergency all-call or
auditorium zone page only).
d. Provide dedicated 120-volt circuit for Autonomous PA wall mounted Rack.
e. In Performing Art Centers/Theaters (new facilities), a theater consultant hired by the architect shall
determine the scope of sound system beyond the requirements defined here.
1) The electrical engineer shall coordinate with theater consultant and architect to provide power,
cabling, racks, speaker clusters and raceways where needed. In gymnasiums focus the design to
limit reflected sound yet permit intelligible, increased volume which occurs during emergency all-
call announcements.
7. Athletic Field Autonomous P.A./Sound System
1) Rack mounted amplifier in cabinet with a minimum of 8 audio input sources for tape, projector,
and 5 microphones. Amplifier cabinet shall be flush or surface mounted, located in sound
control booth.
2) Provide a separate system of home side horns, home side stand microphones, home side
microphone outlets and amplifier for the cheerleaders (a common system that used to be
provided with older athletic field P.A. systems).
3) Provide GFCI power outlets for athletic field sound systems.
4) Input/output switching panels mounted adjacent to or below amplifier cabinet.
5) Microphone outlet mounted on an appropriate light pole or at concession room and wired to
amplifier input. Consider using a wireless microphone solution instead of conduit and cabling
that previously ran to the visitor’s bleacher side. Use high performance, multiple channel wireless
systems to prevent interference from various emission sources such as local radio and TV
broadcasts (see the Shure Pro Audio web site for updates on wireless noise solutions).
6) Outdoor horn loudspeakers to cover all P.E. fields.
b. Assisted listening system where an outdoor assembly area is designated as assembly occupancy.
c. Provide Emergency Override line, including relays, to mute local program from autonomous PA to
permit emergency broadcasts from main P.A. console through separate speakers/horns.
d. Provide adequate speaker coverage from the main P.A. rack to allow broadcast of main P.A. system
programs and announcements in auditorium building areas. Emergency announcements are hard-wired
to these speakers. Software dictates if these speakers are included in any zone pages or in a normal all-
call page.
e. Provide a dedicated 120-volt circuit for Autonomous PA Rack.
f. Do not locate any equipment in the field or areas that would create a safety hazard.
G. SECURITY INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEM
1. General
a. The District's preferred security intrusion alarm system is the DSC MAXSYS 4020 intrusion system.
1) The input element is a sensing device designed to monitor status of a protected area in a school,
using infrared/motion detectors. These intrusion detectors are connected individually to
identified terminals of the control panel or controller via cable to form a closed loop.
2) The control panel provides a small amount of current constantly flowing through loop. However,
if one of the intrusion detectors is disrupted, opened, or the cable is cut, the controller senses the
absence of current in the loop.
3) In an alarm condition, the controller can activate an optional siren and transmits alarm code to a
digital receiver located at the central station of the Los Angeles School Police Headquarters.
4) Upon answering the call, information appears on a dispatcher’s computer screen.
2. Sensing Devices
a. Motion Detectors:
1) Motion detectors shall be passive infrared detecting both motion and infrared emission at the
same time to eliminate false detection.
2) Provide motion detectors in all areas or rooms that are located along the perimeter of the first
floor of a building.
3) Provide motion detectors in rooms located above the first floor only if there is outside access or
potential for entering directly by climbing trees, etc.
4) Provide motion detectors in corridors and hallways on each floor of a building.
5) Provide motion detectors in computer rooms, LAN equipment rooms, IDF rooms, Multi-
Purpose Building, Kitchen and Dining Rooms, Gymnasium and all other major spaces.
6) Install motion detectors on an outlet box on the ceiling to obtain maximum efficiency. Use wall-
mounted detectors only where ceiling-mounted are impractical.
7) Locate the motion detector at a corner of a room, facing away from sunlight, windows, heating
elements, HVAC outlets and any turbulent air movements.
8) Provide remote control panel including a 12VDC power supply in each building for motion
detectors.
9) A siren is required. An interior siren is preferred to an outdoor installation. If the school decides
against a siren feature, bypass the connection with a 500 ohm resistor but leave the siren in place.
b. Door Switches (provide only in special cases):
1) Door switches shall be of magnetic type.
2) Provide door switches for walk-in freezers or coolers in a kitchen.
3) Provide door switches for all exterior doors not covered by motion detectors on the interior,
including restrooms with direct exterior access.
3. Alarm Zones
a. Each sensing device shall be identified with an alarm zone or alarm point, which shall be identified at
the remote annunciator and at the control center. The zone or point identification shall be descriptive
of the location of the sensing device, such as Administrative Building Room 120.
b. There shall be no more than two motion detectors per zone or no more than two points to identify the
location. Areas where two detectors per zone may be required include multi-purpose buildings,
gymnasiums, auditoriums, and two classroom relocatable buildings.
c. Zones or points shall be listed and indicated on site and building drawings, identifying each one by
building, area and room number.
4. Zone By-Pass Keypads
a. Provide a strategically located zone by-pass keypad in places such as the interior wall of the Main Office,
Kitchen/Cafeteria building, Student Store, Gymnasium Lobby, Multi-Purpose Building,
Auditorium/Theater, Adult School Office, Computer/Multi-media/Science laboratories, Music/Band
Room, offices of academies in multi-academy learning centers, and Plant Manager’s Office to de-activate
the alarm when entering a building is necessary after the alarm system is armed.
1) A separate keypad will not be required, if any of the areas listed above is only accessible through
another controlled area with a keypad.
2) Each main security panel can support a maximum of 8 keypads. If more key pads are required
obtain authorization from District representative.
b. The by-pass keypad shall be a liquid crystal display.
c. Do not locate keypads in corridors or other areas easily subject to impact damage or vandalism (MS and
HS only).
d. Consult with District representative to determine if other locations may be required.
5. Main Security Panel (MSP) and Annunciator
a. Main Security Panel and graphic annunciator are also called headend equipment. They are used to
annunciate alarm zones and to transmit alarm signals via telephone line to the central monitoring station
located at the District Police Headquarters.
b. MSP consists of maximum of 16 zones, expandable to 128 zones by the use of zone expansion modules,
each with motion and tamper inputs, single phone line monitor and power supply housed in a lockable
cabinet.
c. Controller shall be located in a LAN equipment room (new facilities) or closet in Administration Unit
(existing facilities).
d. In campuses where numbers of zones exceed 128, or in campuses where total combus wiring from the
controller to a remote security panel or to any keypad connected, exceed 1000 feet, split the campus to
be protected by two independent controllers. Both controllers shall be annunciated in the main office.
e. MSP shall be fed from a separate circuit of 120-volt power source. It will be stepped down through a
120/16-18 VAC, 40VA transformer.
f. Graphic annunciator(s) shall be located in main office of the Administration Building. The Graphic
Annunciator shall have full LED annunciation for all zones. Provide a keypad at each annunciator.
Provide a separate repower module for each graphic annunciator panel if required (based on power
calculations). Wire size of combus may have to be increased to accommodate increased power demand
between repower module and led driver boards in the graphic annunciator panels.
6. Remote Security Panels (RSP)
a. Provide a Remote Security panel at each building (except relocatable buildings where a group of
relocatables may be controlled by one RSP), connected to the main security panel by combus wiring.
b. RSP consists of maximum of 16 zones, expandable to 128 zones by the use of zone expansion modules,
each with motion inputs and power supply housed in a lockable cabinet.
c. RSP shall be fed from a separate circuit of 120-volt power source. It will be stepped down through a
120/16-18 VAC, 40VA transformer.
d. The RSPs shall be located in IDF rooms wherever possible.
7. Power Supply, Cables, Raceways and Cabinets
a. Cables used for connection between MSP and annunciator in clerk's office, all homeruns from sensing
devices to MSP/RSP and combus wiring between MSP and RSP as well as wiring to the keypads shall
be 4 conductor, #22 for up to 1000 feet. Note on plans: do not set the charging jumper for high-charge
on repower modules, and adjust the voltage potentiometer for 13.8 vdc, and apply fingernail polish to
prevent tampering of this pot setting.
b. Use flooded type cables for underground applications.
c. Cables shall be installed in raceways. Concealed raceway shall be used for new building construction
and exposed raceway shall be used for existing building installations. Exposed raceway in electrical
rooms shall be conduit and exposed raceway in classrooms; offices and corridors shall be wiremold.
d. Cable length, resistance, capacitance and power calculations must be designed by the Architect to strictly
conform to the manufacturer’s design guide. Any deviation from the manufacturer’s specifications for
these types of systems can result in system malfunctions and/or high maintenance costs to the District.
e. Existing underground raceways used for public address system or TV master antenna system may be
used to run security intrusion alarm system cables if there are spaces available in those raceways. Any
cables pulled out from an existing conduit shall be replaced with new.
f. Power supplies consisting of receptacles, transformer/ rectifier and batteries shall be installed in a
lockable NEMA 1 enclosure or a lockable terminal cabinet.
g. Terminal Cabinets and Junction Boxes:
1) At least one terminal cabinet shall be provided in each building except relocatable buildings.
2) At least one junction box (6"x 8") shall be provided in each relocatable building.
8. Existing Security Intrusion Alarm Systems
a. At some District school sites existing intrusion alarm equipment may differ from the system described
above.
b. Existing system headend equipment may consist of an annunciator/switch panel, a relay panel and a
dialer or transponders.
c. If this situation is encountered, remove existing annunciator/switch panel, relay panel, dialer or
transponder. Wire all existing zones directly to new controller. A new annunciator panel shall be
installed in main office (or LAN room if present).
9. Site Plan
a. Instruct the contractor to provide a site plan for use by the District central monitoring stations.
Site plan shall be as follows:
1) Indicate location of buildings, zone numbers, and repower battery panel locations.
2) Indicate school code number and zone chart.
3) Indicate surrounding street names and direction.
4) Site plan shall be drawn on 8 1/2" x 13" sheet.
H. CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) AND AUDIO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS
1. General
a. As part of the Los Angeles Unified School District’s commitment to provide a safe working and
learning environment, surveillance systems are to be used in approved, designated areas of schools and
school grounds where there is no expectation of privacy as an additional and further means to continue
to provide for that safe environment. Surveillance systems are defined as electronic devices for visual
image (only) monitoring, recording and visual image data storage. (Parking garages are an exception and
have audio monitoring and recording as well as video.)
b. Surveillance systems ARE STRICTLY PROHIBITED WHERE A “REASONABLE EXPECTATION

OF PRIVACY” EXISTS. This includes the following:
1) No surveillance shall be installed in such spaces as restrooms, locker rooms, classrooms, private
offices, and private workspaces.
2) Cameras must be directed so that they do not look through windows or other openings into
private areas.
3) Cameras providing outside surveillance, such as parking lots or building perimeters must not be
directed beyond school property.
c. Currently, only a coax or Cat 6 converted home run cabling CCTV design using DVRs is permitted. Use
of the local LAN, use of a newly constructed separate LAN or the WAN is not permitted. See Bulletin
1197.
d. All real-time visual monitoring equipment (except point-of-entry monitors), including monitor screens,
consoles, controllers and other appropriate equipment, and data recording devices, must be located in a
secure monitoring site, with restricted access by approved individuals only. Do not locate them in a
common LAN Equipment Room.
1) Secure monitoring sites may be located, secure from public viewing, in Principal’s Office,
Assistant Principal’s Office, or a Police Office or special Security Room. For adult education or
other after-hours use, the same provisions apply; systems must be able to be secured from
unauthorized use.
e. Provide CCTV surveillance systems as follows:
1) Parking Garage Systems: In all parking structures (Audio Surveillance are also required).
2) School Building and Site Systems: Only when directed in writing by the District’s authorized
representative. (These systems shall be video only, with NO AUDIO SURVEILLANCE OR
RECORDING.)
2. Parking Garage Surveillance System
a. Closed circuit television system shall consist of CCTV cameras, camera enclosures, monitors, coaxial
switcher/controller system, digital video controller and recorders (DVR), and pan-and-tilt drives,
cablings, power supplies and raceways. The video surveillance system shall be designed to be integrated
with a School Building and Site System, either concurrently or in the future.
b. Audio surveillance equipment shall consist of controller, microphones, speaker/microphones,

combiners, and call stations.
c. The basic system requirements are as follows:
1) One CCTV camera with pan and tilt spaced every 100 feet and within vandal-resistant enclosure
in parking structures.
2) One fixed CCTV camera within vandal-resistant enclosure installed inside the parking structure
entrance. Field of view shall include the vehicle access gate to the parking lot.
3) Surveillance microphones spaced every 60 feet, with a maximum of six microphones per zone.
4) Push to talk Emergency Speaker/microphone call stations every 50 feet in garage, one at
elevator’s lobby and one at each pedestrian point of egress.
5) Sixteen CCTV cameras maximum per DVR.
6) One monitor for each group of sixteen cameras.
d. Locate monitors, Digital Video controller and recorders (DVR) and audio surveillance base stations
system in a console/rack station either in the Police /Security Office (in secondary schools) or the Main
Administrative office. Terminal cabinets for Parking Garage Systems may be located in the LAN
Equipment Room.
3. School Building and Site Surveillance System (Required only at selected sites)
a. Provide CCTV surveillance system, cameras and other equipment to monitor any remote spaces where
safety or security risks indicate a need. These include:
1) Main Office and Reception public spaces.
2) Attendance Office public space.
3) Corridors, lobbies, and other public circulation and access spaces.
4) Cafeteria.
5) Lunch Shelter.
6) Other interior and exterior locations determined during the design phase of the project.
b. Closed circuit television system shall consist of CCTV cameras, camera enclosures, monitors, digital
video controller and recorders (DVR), and pan-and-tilt drives. Where Garage exists, the headend
equipment shall be integrated with the Parking Garage Surveillance System to provide a single campus-
wide system.
1) Provide pan-and-tilt or fixed CCTV camera to cover all corridors, stairwells, elevator lobbies, and
other interior public areas (no classrooms).
2) Provide sixteen cameras maximum for each monitor and DVR, fewer if design and monitoring
conditions warrant.
3) Cameras shall be located so that every camera is monitored by at least one other camera.
4) Cameras shall be located and secured so as to minimize vandalism, but there shall be no covert or
concealed cameras.
c. No audio surveillance shall be provided for this system.
d. Provide drawings at Design Development and Construction. Document Phases that show all camera
locations and zones of coverage. Use VideoCAD 6 or equivalent for designing and indicating camera
coverage.
e. At all schools using CCTV buildings and site surveillance systems, appropriate signage must be posted
to advise the public that the systems and camera are in operation.
1) Standard sign language and format has been adopted and is available on request.
2) Signs must be placed prominently at all points of entry to the school site, both pedestrian and
vehicle. Where surveillance is provided in parking garages, place the sign at the entrance to the
parking garage.
3) Location of signs shall be submitted at Design Development Phase for the District review.
Signage with details must be shown in project construction documents.
I. GARAGE AND MAIN DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS
1. Parking Structure Entry
a. Provide a stand-alone intercom call station to be mounted on card reader pedestal. The intercom unit
shall be connected to PA/Intercom system. A switch at main reception office next to PA administrative
telephone shall be connected to garage entry controls for communication purposes and to allow remote
operation of the gate.
b. See Guide Specification Section 11 1200 for description of Garage Entry system.
2. School Main Entrance Surveillance System (in selected sites only)
a. Provide a CCTV camera in a vandal proof enclosure connected to a monitor in the main office. It shall
be located directly inside the entrance door it protects. No recording shall be permitted for this system.
b. Provide an intercom base station in the main office near the CCTV monitor, and a two-way talk/listen
remote station outdoors near the entry door.
c. Provide a pushbutton and wiring to activate door electric strike to permit entrance.
d. See Guide Specification Section 28 2313 for description of components.
J. TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
1. TV System
a. The television distribution system shall be an over-the-air (OTA) system constructed to receive the
following Advanced Television Systems Committee (ATSC) digital television channels in the
VHF/UHF television spectrum (channel assignment subject to change – verify channels designations at
time of design development):
Call Letters Previous DTV Freq

Analog
KCBS - DT 2 43
KNBC - DT 4 36
KTLA- DT 5 31
KABC- DT 7 07
KCAL- DT 9 09
KTTV - DT 11 11
KCOP - DT 13 13
KCET - DT 28 28
KMEX - DT 34 34
KLCS - DT 58 41
b. Consult with the Design Manager and/ or OAR for projects needing locally broadcasted TV signals.
This is particularly important in schools whose design scope includes media centers; the design shall
include the necessary pathways and equipment for this operation.
2. System Descriptions
a. TV system and equipment consists of:
1) Head End Equipment:
a) Headend 19" rack with mixing networks, channel converters, processors, splitters,
combiners, modulators, directional couplers, test taps, line amplifier, and video monitor.
2) Line extender TV cabinets including amplifiers to be located in the IDF (Signal room) of remote
buildings.
3) Digital antennas mounted on roof of Administration Unit.
4) For antenna downleads use coax RG-6/U.
5) In the event of difficulties in the transmission of UHF channels across the campus, set the agile
processors for conversion to available unused VHF channels 3, 6, 8, 10, or 12. Additionally, in
schools that predominately have older analog TVs with only 2-13 channel tuners, these three
channels will have to be reassigned to unused VHF.
6) Antenna location(s) requires field-site signal measurements and line-of-site availability (use
http://www.antennaweb.org as a guide). .In the event of weak or insufficient signal availability,
provide alternative CATV services. If required, locate antenna on the highest building, condition
the signal for distance, and route conduit to TV rack. Also, using a fringe area antenna is an
alternative solution as long as the antenna is durable for a high wind area.
7) If CATV is required, the rack modules have to be analog to digital QAM (AQD) since only local
analog channels in a basic cable service package are provided “in the clear.” If digital to digital
modules are used (AQT), the school will have to subscribe to a digital channel package and
receive only one set top box. This service only provides one channel at a time for distribution.
Unless 10 of these boxes are obtained and adapted to rack mounting, 10 digital channel
distribution for the school is unobtainable without an antenna.
8) The TV front end design shall permit the use of 8VSB digital over-the-air signal or CATV digital
QAM signal processing. The output signal in either case shall be 256 QAM for ATSC compatible
TV receivers.
9) When using output combiners either to division (before the AQT modules) or combine TV
signals (after the AQT modules) from or to a single coax signal in the rack, do not connect
adjacent channels to connectors physically next to each other. Co-channel interference may
occur.
10) Digital signals are self-correcting, but produce no output below certain levels. The design shall
address necessary modifications and requirements to correct signal weakening, such requirements
may include but not be limited to gain settings reduction, and minimizing length of jumper
coaxial cables.
b. Distribution, Cabling and Power:

1) Backbone: Use two (2) single mode fibers from the data fiber optic backbone cabling to transmit
the television signals between buildings. One single mode fiber shall be used, while the second
shall be left as spare. Install fiber to coax distribution amplifiers in the first floor of remote
building at TV terminal cabinet. A coax-RG11/U cable shall be used to connect media
converter’s output to TV terminal cabinet located in the same room.
2) In small sites, or where less than ten TV outlets are served in the remote building, use coax-
RG11/U or larger cable for distribution from the closest IDF to remote TV terminal cabinets.
3) For building distribution from TV terminal cabinet to outlets, use coax-RG6/U cables.
4) Use self-terminating, dropping tap methods for building coax distribution (no splitters).
c. Provide adequate number of line extender amplifiers in system so that signal level at any outlet shall
nominally be between -1 dBmV and +4 dBmV (digital). Usually up to four TV outlets may be daisy
chained to be served by a single RG-6U cable homerun to TV terminal cabinet.
d. Provide 120 volts, 20 amps, dedicated circuit to headend rack and line extender cabinets.
e. Cable runs shall be in raceways or cable trays.
f. Terminal outlets shall be mounted 18" above finished floor at TV monitor location or directly behind
any wall mounted TV locations (existing sites with wall-mounted TVs only), and shall have a self-
tapping directional coupler design.
g. TV outlet shall be provided at VCR/ DVR location (media cabinet), Principal’s Office, Library, and at
teacher’s workstation. A single TV drop from cable tray shall serve the classroom.
h. Provide the following cable and outlets as follows:
1) Provide double gang outlet boxes for audio/video system next to ceiling mounted projector, at
TV monitor location, and at wall next to teacher’s workstation.
i. Provide 120 volt, 15-amp receptacle at TV and projector outlets.
j. Antenna mast, cabinets and raceways shall be effectively grounded.
k. Submit system calculations indicating signal levels at components including terminal outlets. All block
diagrams and construction details must be included in construction drawings.
3. Modernization Projects
a. For modernization projects, or where new buildings are added to existing school sites and an existing
television distribution system is to be extended, following procedure shall be followed:
1) Obtain project record drawings of existing system.
2) Visit job site to compare project record drawings with actual field conditions and note any
deviations from project record drawings.
3) Determine at what point existing TV system can be tapped and extended to new work location.
b. Usually line extender amplifiers need to be installed depending on attenuation values calculated. Signal
level at any outlet shall be between +7 dBmV and +10 dBmV (analog signal). The optimum digital
signal measurements are +6 to +8 dBmV lower (256 Qam) than these analog measurements. Digital
signals also have requirements for minimum carrier to noise, multiplex quality analysis, MER,
constellation, and BER (bit error rate) evaluation. Use a Sencore 1426 portable tester or equivalent. The
BER test is dependent on two different carrier to noise tests which differ only if there are adjacent
broadcast channels next to the channel under test. Refer to the CATV specifications for test procedures.
K. OVERHEAD DIGITAL PROJECTOR SYSTEM
1. System Requirements
a. In all classrooms and any instructional areas make provisions for an overhead digital projector system as
follows:
1) Provide a video projector mounting plate with a duplex receptacle. Locate mounting plate
approximately 15’ away from projector screen location.
2) Stub-up a 1 ½” conduit, 4” minimum above ceiling space from teacher’s workstation area, and at
Audio/Visual cabinet.
L. SOUND ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
1. Systems Requirements
a. In all classrooms and any instructional areas make provisions as follows for owner furnished owner
installed audio enhancement systems:
1) Stub-up a 1 ½” conduit, 4” above ceiling space from teacher’s workstation area, and audio/visual
cabinet.
M. SCHOOL RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
a. Each secondary school has a radio communication base station to support its hand-held portable radios.
It is provided by the District, and is located in the open office of the Administration Unit – usually on
top of file cabinets or on special shelving. It receives signals from a roof-mounted antenna.
b. A one-inch inside diameter conduit for the coax antenna cable from the roof to the room is required as
part of the building construction, terminating in a double gang deep device box with a single hole (one
inch grommeted) stainless steel cover plate at the base-station location and in a weatherhead on the
roof. Locate the box at 18 inches above finished floor in an accessible location. Conduit shall be
provided with pull string.
1) Conduit should extend 24 inches to 30 inches above the roof; it shall be braced at roof level and
properly flashed to support the antenna.
2) Conduit must have only sweep bends, no sharp turns.
3) Conduits shall have no more than two 90 degree bends between pull boxes.
c. Provide a 120V duplex U-ground dedicated power receptacle for the base station; locate outlet at no
more than 12 inches from antenna device box.
N. SIGNAL SYSTEMS RACEWAY AND TERMINAL CABINETS
1. Raceways and Routing
a. All signal systems' wiring and cabling, including fire alarm, clock, security intrusion alarm, telephone,
public address, television, and computer networking shall be installed in raceways.
b. Fire alarm and clock systems shall be installed in conduit. For all other signal systems, cable trays are
preferred.
c. For underground distribution to all buildings, signal systems shall be installed in conduit, sized for 40%
fill (30% fill for new campus to accommodate future growth), with the following as a minimum
standard:
1) 4” C-Fiber Optic Data Backbone System with three innerducts – two 1 ½” and one 1”.
2) 3” C-PA / Intercommunication/ Telephone systems. In large campuses, use 4” conduit or

multiples conduit as needed.
3) 3” C-Intrusion Alarm System/ CCTV system.
4) 3” C-Cat. 6 data cables/ TV distribution (coaxial cables if applicable).
5) 2” C-Fire Alarm System.
6) 2” C-Clock System.
7) 3” C-Spare.
8) 3” C-Minimum of two for telephone entrance service.
9) 3” C-EMS and Lighting Controls backbone system with one 1½”, and one 1” innerducts.
d. For end drops to buildings not containing more than two classrooms, the conduit size shall be as
follows as a minimum standard:
1) 3” C-Fiber Optic Data System.
2) 2” C-PA / Intercommunication/ Telephone systems
3) 2” C-Intrusion Alarm System/ CCTV system.
4) 2” C-Cat. 6 data cables/ TV distribution (coaxial cables if applicable).
5) 2” C-Fire Alarm System.
6) 1” C-Clock System.
7) 2” C-Spare.
8) 2” C-EMS and Lighting Controls backbone system with two ¾” innerducts.
e. For inside building distribution, the sizes of conduits or cable trays shall be selected per 40% cable fill
requirements for different systems. Provide separate conduits for fire alarm and clock systems.
2. Terminal Cabinets and backboards
a. The information indicated here are supplemental to requirements indicated elsewhere in the design
guideline.
b. Terminal cabinets shall be provided for each signal system, in each building.
1) For public address system, a main PA terminal cabinet shall be provided, located near PA Rack
and PABX equipment. If the Main PA terminal cross connects are located inside the dedicated
LAN room, an open field (rather than a cabinet) cross-connect is acceptable. If the open field
solution is selected, the backboard used must be separate and distinct from the main telephone
backboard and cross connect field. All wiring between PABX and P.A. rack and stations shall be
routed thru this terminal cabinet. Cabinet or backboard must be sized in accordance with
number of terminations required to be made plus 20% spare capacity. Other buildings shall each
be provided with at least one P.A terminal cabinet sized in same manner as PA main terminal
cabinet. All cabinets shall include required terminal blocks for cable terminations.
2) For Telephone system, locate main telephone and PBX cross connect backboard shall be
provided in LAN room, next to Main PA terminal cabinet. Provide at least one telephone
terminal cabinet in the IDF room at first floor of each remote building to cross connect all multi-
pair telephone cables originating from voice patch panels of all IDF’s in the building.
3) For security intrusion alarm system, one terminal cabinet shall be provided for the main security
panel and for each remote security panel. Cabinets shall include terminal strips, power supply,
power outlet, and backup battery.
4) For fire alarm system, a main terminal cabinet shall be provided, located near control panel. All
wiring between control panel and field devices shall be routed thru this terminal cabinet. Cabinet
shall be sized in accordance with number of terminations required to be made plus 20% spare
capacity. Each building shall be provided with at least one terminal cabinet sized in same manner
as main terminal cabinet. All cabinets shall include required terminal strips for wire or cable
terminations.
5) For clock/program system, a main terminal cabinet shall be provided, located near
Clock/Program Controller. All wiring between control panel and field devices shall be routed
thru this terminal cabinet. Each building shall be provided with at least one terminal cabinet. All
cabinets shall include required terminal strips for wire terminations.
6) For TV system, at least one terminal cabinet shall be provided in each building. Cable
terminations shall be made in cabinets, with approved components. Depending on distance and
signal drop from headend equipment to remote terminal cabinets, remote terminal cabinets may
include line extender amplifiers to compensate for signal drop (only where copper distribution is
used).
O. PROXIMITY CARD ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
a. Each school site shall be equipped with a contact less proximity card access control system to control
access to elevators and parking garages/areas.
b. The system shall be capable of operating on a new or existing IP network, and shall be accessible,
configurable, and manageable from any network connected computer.
c. The system shall be capable of continuous operation even during power downtimes or outages, and
shall be equipped with the hardware and software necessary for the orderly shut down of the controller
during a power failure.
d. The system shall be designed with a full feature, high performance data base management system.
1) The operating system shall not require client side software other than a web browser.
e. The system shall be compatible with HID Corporate 1000 LAUSD formatted card coding system.
f. Elevators with multiple access points (doors) on a single floor shall receive a card reader at each hall call
station.
g. Locate proximity card access control equipment cabinets in electrical rooms, signal terminal rooms, or
other suitable spaces approved by the Design Manager or Owner Authorized Representative.
h. The system must be capable of notifying school and/or District designated personnel via SMS or E-mail
messages (utilizing the District’s mail server) when problems or situations that require immediate
attention arise.
2. Power Requirements
a. Provide a dedicated 120 volt circuit for power and battery backup at each system cabinet.
3. Data System Requirements
a. Provide a data network outlet inside each access control system cabinet. These outlets shall be
connected via Cat 6 cables to the nearest computer network system distribution point (MDF, IDF, or
LDF).
4. Specifications and Technical Details
a. The District’s technical specifications and construction details are based on the S2 NetBox Enterprise
Security Management System. Equal or better products from other manufacturers may be acceptable
subject to Owner’s review and approval.
b. The AOR shall edit or modify the specifications and technical details to reflect the actual requirements
of the system being proposed if other than the S2 Netbox. Obtain approval on any substitutions prior
to start of design.
B. PLANTING
C. SOILS
D. IRRIGATION
E. PLANT SELECTION
Book 3: Technical Criteria 3.9 Planting and Irrigation
a. Landscapes are essential to the quality of life by providing areas for active and passive recreation and as
an enhancement to the environment by cleaning air and water, preventing erosion, offering fire
protection, and replacing ecosystem lost to development. Because schools represent important visual
elements in the community, a well-conceived landscape design is essential – one that is economically
maintainable and water efficient yet still provides a naturally beautiful campus that enhances its
neighborhood. Adequate shading of outdoor teaching, gathering and play areas with year-round shade
trees; durable plants that need little pruning or shaping; drought-tolerant landscaping providing ease of
maintenance – all are important elements of the landscape development.
B. PLANTING
1. Guidelines
a. Examine existing trees on site, identify those that should be preserved, and incorporate them into site
planning, with recommendations to the District that they be saved in place, relocated, and provide
method of protection during construction.
b. See “Site Design” section for planning and design criteria on landscaping, planting and tree locations.
c. Trees shall be spaced to provide a maximum of five-feet of overlap of full canopies.
d. Use plant materials appropriate to the site and project, selected from District’s “Approved Plant List”.
e. Refer to the District’s “Guide Specifications” for additional requirements.
f. No tree box smaller than 24 inches is to be specified.
C. SOILS
1. Guidelines
a. Examine physical properties of the existing soil at site and provide during the Design Development
Phase a preliminary assessment of possible major soil problems, such as salinity and alkali conditions,
and the need for soil amendments or imported topsoil in the early design stage. Provide a soil
management report. The 100% design shall reflect an onsite soil management plan.
b. If considered necessary, consult with the District regarding services of a soil specialist and laboratory
testing during the design stage.
c. Provide for stockpiling of good existing topsoil to be used in planting areas, free of all debris and rock
over ¾”.
d. Specify characteristics and source approval for topsoil to be imported, installation methods and blending
if appropriate.
e. Specify subsoil ploughing and subsurface drainage to alleviate problems created by poor aeration, soil
compaction or inadequate drainage.
f. Specify replacement of top 3 feet of soil where trees are planted in existing paved areas or other heavily
compacted soils.
g. Indicate method of slope stabilization on banks 2:1 or steeper.
h. Plans shall indicate the area (in square feet) of each planting area.
D. IRRIGATION
1. Design Requirements
a. The design shall be consistent with the California Code of Regulation, Title 23 Water, Division 2
Department of Water Resources, Chapter 2.7 State Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance Section
490-495.
b. The landscape design documents shall include the following elements as detailed in the State Model
Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance Section 492(b&c), provide all formulas and calculations to
support your estimates.
c. Each landscape documentation package shall include a cover sheet, referred to as the Water
Conservation Concept Statement. It serves as a check list to verify that the following elements of the
landscaping documentation package have been completed:
1) Maximum Applied Water Allowance.
2) Estimated Applied Water use.
3) Estimated Total Water Use.
4) Landscape Design.
5) Irrigation Design.
6) Planting Design Plan shall include the square footage of the landscape area for each station, zone,
controller and total square footage for all landscape area.
7) Irrigation Watering Program Schedules. For controllers based on a Y2 month cycle.
8) Maintenance Schedules.
9) Landscape Irrigation Audit Schedule.
10) Grading Design plan.

11) Soil Analysis.
d. The Architect-Engineer shall check the availability of reclaimed water at the site, or its nearby availability
from where it could be extended to the site at no cost to LAUSD. If available the Designer shall request
approval for its use in the project’s irrigation system.
2. Design Efficiencies
a. All irrigation systems shall be provided with controllers with electrically operated control valves and
seasonal irrigation schedules based on climatic conditions, incorporating water conservation design and
utilizing methods appropriate for specific terrains, soil types, wind conditions, temperatures and other
environmental factors in order to ensure a high degree of water efficiency.
b. Soil types and infiltration shall be considered when designing irrigation system.
c. All irrigation systems shall be designed to avoid runoff, low head drainage, overspray, or other similar
conditions where water flows onto adjacent property, non-irrigated areas, walks roadways, or structures.
d. Proper irrigation schedules for each station, to include sequences of cycle and soak times shall be
provided with your designs and plans.
e. Special attention shall be given to avoid runoff on slopes and to overspray in planting areas with a width
less than ten feet and in median strips.
f. Select the proper equipment components and provide irrigation schedules for each station to meet or
exceed the required irrigation efficiency of 0.625.
g. Encourage the capture and retention of storm water onsite.
h. Maximize infiltration and retention.
i. Encourage the use of recycled water.
j. Encourage the use of economic incentives to promote the efficient use of water.
k. Educate water user on the efficient use of water.
l. Address regional differences, including fire prevention needs.
m. Include provisions for landscape maintenance practices that foster long-term landscape water
conservation.
n. Promote benefits of consistent local ordinances and District guidelines, whichever is more stringent.
o. The estimated water use shall not exceed the Maximum Applied Water Allowance (MAWA).
p. Designer shall add and sign the following statement into the plans: “I have complied with the criteria of
the ordinance and applied them accordingly for the efficient use of water in the irrigation design plans.”
3. Design Plans
a. Provide CAD site plans that shall include:
1) A Master site plan shall include showing the location of all irrigation zones for each controller
with point of connections, backflow device, pressure regulators, isolation valves, mainlines, flow
sensor/master valve & conduit, remote valves stations and quills.
2) A complete plan layout for each controller shall include showing the location of the point of
connection to the main piping system, main and lateral lines, isolation valves, pressure regulator,
master valve & conduit, flow sensor & cable, remote valves, rain sensor, controller and all
sprinklers.
3) Soil management criteria and plans as needed.
4) Design Plans shall utilize and include District Design Guide Details.
5) The landscape design shall be created by a Landscape Designer, Irrigation Designer, or Licensed
Landscape Contractor.
4. Design Calculations
a. Provide design hydraulic and water budget calculations, water efficiency landscape worksheets (based on
0.7 evapotranspiration (ET) adjustment factor to support the irrigation design plans using the following
format:
1) Static Water Pressure- Hi and Low.
2) Water meter- Size, friction loss @ required GPM.
3) Backflow Device- Size, friction loss @ required GPM.
4) Master Valve- Size, friction loss @ required GPM.
5) Flow Sensor- Size, friction loss @ required GPM.
6) Isolation Valves, Size, friction loss @ required GPM.
7) Mainline piping, Size, developed length, friction loss at each sizes used @R/GPM.
8) Lateral piping, Size, developed length, friction loss at each sizes @R/GPM.
9) Remote Valves, Sizes, friction loss @ required GPM.
10) Elevation Change.
11) Total Pressure loss.
12) Pressure required @ sprinkler head.
13) Lowest Static Pressure (-10%).
14) Residual Water pressure..
15) Water Budget.
b. Provide design hydraulic calculations to support the design when incorporating a booster pump. Keep
in mind, peak demands effecting water pressures are normally not during irrigation watering hours (10
pm to 6 AM)
c. Provide design calculations information to support incorporating a pressure regulator.
d. Water pressure over 80 psi shall be regulated per Zone to meet manufacturer’s suggested pressure-
heads.
5. Design Materials and Components
a. Call out design materials as specified in the LAUSD Guideline Specifications and LAUSD Design Guide
Details to ensure quality of materials with uniformity in maintenance and procurement.
b. The following are some notable required materials that shall not be compromised:
1) All valves including remote valves, isolation and shut-off valves shall be brass or bronze. Plastic
valves are not acceptable.
2) Drip Irrigation is not acceptable.
3) Mainline and lateral PVC piping shall be a minimum schedule 40 PVC piping above ground is
not acceptable.
4) PVC male adapters are not acceptable, use schedule 80 PVC nipples when connecting to copper,
brass, bronze or steel materials.
6. Water Supply, Meter and Backflow Device
a. Provide a separate irrigation water meter and main of adequate size to satisfy maximum instantaneous
demand and projected future demands.
b. For large sites, three or more watering acres, or any multiple of that in unit size, there may be separate
points of connection on designated irrigation meters for each such unit.
c. Water piping from meter connection to backflow device shall be no smaller in diameter than backflow
device served.
d. Provide Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Prevention Devices upstream from irrigation system for
meter protection.
e. Provide pressure regulator when necessary, never exceeding 100 psi.
f. Provide enclosure for backflow device and pressure regulators where necessary to reduce potential
vandalism.
7. Piping Design
a. Piping materials shall conform to the District’s Guide Specifications.
b. Flow velocity: Five (5) feet per second maximum, based on industry-standard friction pressure loss
values and complete hydraulic calculations.
c. Pipe size shall be sufficient to support a minimum of two control valves operating at the same time.
(One opening, one closing)
d. Follow the manufacturer’s GPM demand and pressure requirements; make allowance for a 10% error
margin with all GPM demand and sprinkler-head coverage values.
e. Size all valves (including remote control valves) no smaller than the piping served downstream, except
that when piping is increased in size to reduce friction loss, remote valves may then be sized one pipe
size smaller than the piping served.
f. Install shut off valves needed to isolate loop systems or major branch lines.
g. Do not use exposed PVC piping above ground.
8. Athletic Fields
a. The placement and location of irrigation equipment such as Controllers, backflow devices, remote valve,
isolation valves, quill valves and yard boxes for maintenance accessibility and student safety is a very
important concern. The following are ideal locations for placement of the above irrigation equipment in
order of number 1 is the most preferred location. For Sports fields (Football, Baseball, Softball, Soccer
field):
1) Install all equipment including the controller off the field of play in a fenced enclosure with
valves such as remote valves, normally placed in a yard box, installed above the ground on a
manifold system.
2) Place the hose quill valves for football fields up against the perimeter cement curb to field. For
other sport fields install next to wall, fence or outer perimeter of grass field, preferably next to
pavement.
3) Install Controller and backflow device as near as possible to a wall or fence, away from the field
of play. Place the remote valves in marked yard box with-in 12 inch of fence, wall, and or outer
perimeter of grass field which is normally next to pavement. An Isolation valve in a marked yard
box prior to the group of quills is ideal.
4) Install remote valves in a minimum group of three to easily locate the yard boxes in future. An
Isolation valve in a marked yard box prior to the group of remote valves is ideal.
b. General Physical Education Field:
1) Install Controller and backflow device as near as possible to a wall or fence, away from the field
of play. Place the remote valves in marked yard box with-in 12 inch of fence, wall, and or outer
perimeter of grass field which is normally next to pavement.
2) Install remote valves in a minimum group of three to easily locate the yard boxes in future. An
Isolation valve in a marked yard box prior to the group of remote valves is ideal.
9. Sleeves
a. Pressure piping installed under driveways, heavy traffic thresholds or sidewalks shall be sleeved.
b. Sleeves shall be a minimum of 2 pipe sizes larger than the pipe it serves and include a tracer wire.
c. Sleeves for long distances are not a good thing. Mainline piping must be center loaded to prevent
movement due to expansion and contraction, which will cause the main line to break within the sleeve.
Never exceed 60 feet of continues sleeve in any area.
10. Sprinklers
a. Provide 100% head-to-head triangulated coverage or other approved 100% configuration
b. Locate sprinklers with pop-up spray 12 inches away from buildings, 4 inches away from paved areas or
parking stalls, and where trees will not interfere with spray pattern.
c. Reduce spacing in areas where winds during irrigation times may blow spray outside irrigation area.
d. Locate sprinkler lines on banks parallel to contours.
e. Sprinklers on fixed risers are not acceptable. All sprinkler heads shall be pop-up heads and installed with
double swing-joints.
f. Drip irrigation is not acceptable.
g. All sprinkler spray heads shall have a built-in check valve to prevent drain down from the lowest head,
including level irrigation systems.
11. Controllers shall be provided with the following
a. Locate controller close to a building, wall or fence and accessible for use. Install in vandal-resistant
secured enclosure that prevents unauthorized access and control changes.
1) Include self-adjusting controllers, and controls for runoff and overspray.
b. Provide Rain Sensor-Locate in area accessible to rain and not easily vandalized. Do not in stall under
roof overhang.
c. Flow Sensor and Master Valve to provide mainline and lateral line protection
1) Do not install manual control valves and quill valves on irrigation stations/zones using a flow
monitoring system. Tie in before flow sensor.
d. Provide a hand-held wireless remote control unit (one per site).
e. Each controller shall be provided with three (3) extra stations for future connections.
12. Remote Valves serving Lawn and Planter Locations
a. Remote valves serving planter areas shall be installed in marked yard box, located along the outer
perimeter of planter it is serving as close to the side walk or pavement as possible in order to easily
access and utilize during operation with getting wet by sprinklers during operation.
b. Remote valves serving turf areas shall be installed in marked yard box, located along the outer perimeter
of grass area it is serving, as close as possible to the sidewalk or pavement in order to easily access and
utilize during operation with getting wet by the sprinklers during operation.
1) When at all possible, install remote valves in a minimum group of three to easily locate the yard
boxes in future. An Isolation valve in a marked yard box prior to the group of remote valves is
ideal.
E. PLANT SELECTION
1. Section Parameters
a. Design shall reflect plants, trees, shrubs, etc that support the landscape and the environment for which
they are intended. Plants are to chosen based on plant type, height, width, texture, seasonal interest,
texture, form, use, disease and insects, soils, etc.
b. Landscape plants shall be selected based on the geographical location, indigenous plants and appropriate
grouping.
c. Pests attracting plants shall be avoided.
d. Designer shall obtain approval of any plants not in the approved list prior to proceeding.
2. Approved Plant List
a. Refer to the following link for the Approved Plant List: http://www.laschools.org/employee/design/fs-
studies-and-reports/file?file_id=226675942
Book 3: Technical Criteria 3.10 Building Acoustical Requirements
A. ALLOWABLE MAXIMUM BACKGROUND SOUND LEVEL (BSL) FROM HVAC

NOISE
B. ALLOWABLE MAXIMUM BACKGROUND SOUND LEVEL (BSL) FROM TRAFFIC

NOISE OR PLAYGROUND NOISE
C. ALLOWABLE MAXIMUM REVERBERATION TIME (RT 60)
D. ALLOWABLE MINIMUM SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS (STC) VALUES FOR

PARTITIONS SEPARATING A CLASSROOM OR LIBRARY
E. ALLOWABLE MINIMUM STC VALUES FOR FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLIES

SEPARATING CLASSROOMS OR LIBRARIES
F. ALLOWABLE MINIMUM STC VALUES FOR DEMISING PARTITIONS SEPARATING

ALIKE AND DISLIKE FUNCTIONS
G. ALLOWABLE MINIMUM STC VALUES FOR FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLIES

SEPARATING OTHER ALIKE AND DISLIKE FUNCTION
H. ALLOWABLE MAXIMUM IMPACT & ISOLATION CLASS (IIC) LEVELS FOR

FLOOR/CEILING ASSEMBLIES ABOVE CLASSROOMS
A. ALLOWABLE MAXIMUM BACKGROUND SOUND LEVEL (BSL) FROM HVAC NOISE
Function dBA Suggested Construction
Classrooms 45 Max. See HVAC Design Criteria

40 Target
Conference Rooms 45
Library
Office
Cafeteria 50
Gymnasium
Corridor
Locker Rooms
Multi-Purpose Room 40 Max. Duct routing and location or air transfer openings shall not
35 preferred significantly compromise the sound isolation of the envelope of
the space.
…B. Allowable Maximum Background Sound Level (BSL) from Traffic Noise or
Playground Noise
Function DBA Suggested Construction
Classroom 45 Max. Wall construction to provide STC based on actual exterior sound
40 Target levels.
Glazing: ¼” monolithic typical. ¼ “3/8” laminated if needed.

DO NOT use thermal insulating dual glazing.
Weather-stripped solid core or hollow metal door with drop

threshold, or provide vestibules with two doors.
Conference 45 Same as above.

Library
Office
Cafeteria 50 ¼” monolithic glazing.

Gymnasium
Corridor Weather-stripped solid core or hollow metal door with drop
Locker Rooms threshold, or provide vestibules with two doors.
Multi-Purpose Room 40 Max. Doors from the Stage and Multi-Purposes Room should lead into
35 Preferred corridors and other circulation areas, NOT directly into adjoining
classrooms or other occupied spaces.
As far as is practical, attempt to site the space away from noise

sources such as railways, freeways, industrial noise sources etc.
Reasonable measures should be incorporated to limit transient

noise intrusion into the space, e.g. acoustical seals should be
provided at all doors to the Multi-Purpose Rom and Stage,
NOTE: Background noise shall be defined and measured as specified in ANSI Standard 2.60
C. Allowable Maximum Reverberation Time (RT 60)
Function T60 Suggested Construction
Classroom (all) .60 Acoustical tile ceiling with minimum NRC of .0.70 min.
Conference
Library
Conference .70 Acoustical tile ceiling with minimum NRC of .55

Library
Office
>15,000 cu.ft.
Cafeteria Minimum 50% of ceiling area covered with acoustical tile with
Gymnasium minimum NRC of .55 or equivalent absorption.
Corridor
Locker Rooms
The target mid frequency reverberation time for the space,

Multi-Purpose Room unoccupied, is 1.2 seconds.
Since a greater quantity of acoustically absorbent

finishes are required as the volume of the space
increases. It is suggested that this volume
accommodating the audience should not exceed 240
cu. feet per person.
D. Allowable Minimum Sound Transmission Class (STC) Values for Partitions

Separating a Classroom or Library from:
Function STC Suggested Construction
Classroom 45 One layer of 5/8” thick drywall on each side of a single steel stud
Conference 24 on center or 2x4 wood staggered studs at 16” on center
Library partition with full width insulation, penetrations not desirable
Office
Corridor All joints and penetrations properly sealed.
Shower Room
Staircase
Outdoor Playground
or lunch Shelter
Speech Clinic 50 One layer of 5/8” thick drywall on one side of a single steel stud
Health Care Facility 24” on center or 2”x4” wood staggered studs at 16” on center
partition and 2-layers of 5/8” thick drywall on the other side with
full width insulation, penetrations not desirable
All joints and penetrations properly sealed.
Music Room 60 Two layers of 5/8” thick drywall on one side of a double steel
Mech. Equipment Rm stud partition 24” on center or 2”x4” wood staggered studs at 16”
Gymnasium on center and 3-layers of 5/8” thick drywall on the other side
Cafeteria with full width double insulation. Stud lines are separated by a
M/P Room one inch airspace.
E. Allowable Minimum STC Values for Floor / Ceiling Assemblies Separating

Classrooms or Libraries from:
Classroom 45 Nominal 6” thick lightweight concrete on steel fluted deck or

Conference plywood sub floor with suspended acoustical tile ceiling a
Library (unless higher minimum 30” below the deck.
Office needed or
Corridor to meet 5/8” drywall suspended ceiling;
Shower Room background
Staircase noise level All penetrations properly sealed.
Outdoor Playground criteria)
Or Lunch Shelter
Speech Clinic 50 Same as above

Health Care Facility
Music Room 60 Nominal 6” thick lightweight concrete on steel fluted deck or

Mech. Equipment Gymnasium plywood sub floor with suspended 5/8 acoustical tile ceiling a
Cafeteria minimum 30” below the deck with insulation in the cavity.
Install the cavity.
F. Allowable Minimum STC Values for Demising Partitions Separating Alike and
Dislike Functions
From Office or 35 1-layer of 5/8” thick drywall on each side of a single steel stud 24”
Conference Room
to on center or 2”x4” wood staggered stud at 16” on center partition
Office or Conference Room
Weather-stripped solid-core wood door with drop-threshold.
From Office 45 1-layer of 5/8” thick drywall on each side of a single steel stud 24”
or Conference Room on center or 2”x4” wood staggered stud at 16” on center partition
to insulate the cavity.
Corridor or
Staircase or Weather-stripped solid-core wood door.
Shower Room
From Office 50 1-layer of 5/8” thick drywall on one side of a single steel stud 24”
Conference Room on center or 2”x4” wood staggered stud at 16” on center partition
Music Room and 2-layers of 5/8” thick drywall on the other side
to
Outdoor Playground Insulate the cavity.
Steel sound-rated door STC-49.
From Corridor or No requirements.

Staircase or
Shower Room
to
Corridor
Staircase
Shower Room
From Music Room 60 2-layers of 5/8” thick drywall on one side of double steel stud 24”
to on center or 2”x4” wood staggered stud at 16” on center partition
Mech. Equipment Rm and 3-layers of 5/8” thick drywall on the other side.
Gymnasium
Cafeteria Insulate the cavity.
M/P Room
Office All joints and penetrations properly sealed.
Conference Room
Steel sound-rated door. STC-49.
From Office Conference 60 2-layers of 5/8” thick drywall on one side of double steel stud 24”
Room on center or 2”x4” wood staggered stud at 16” on center partition
to and 2-layers of 5/8” thick drywall on the other side.
Mech. Equipment Room or
Gymnasium or Cafeteria Insulate the cavity.
Steel sound-rated door. STC-49.
From Music Room 62 2-layers of 5/8” thick drywall on one side of double steel partition
To 24” on center or 2”x4” wood staggered stud at 16” on center and
Music room 3-layers of 5/8” on the other side.
Insulate the cavity.
Steel sound rated door. STC-49
G. Allowable Minimum STC Values for Floor / Ceiling Assemblies Separating Other
Alike and Dislike Function
Function STC Suggested construction
From Office or 35 Nominal 6” thick lightweight concrete on a steel fluted deck or

Conference Room plywood sub floor with a suspended acoustical tile ceiling a
to minimum 30” below the deck.
Office or
Conference Room All joints and penetrations properly sealed.

Conference Room plywood sub floor with a suspended acoustical tile ceiling a
Corridor or
Staircase or All joints and penetrations properly sealed.
Shower Room
From Office or Provide extra wall STC to meet 45 DBA background noise level;
Conference Room or (See “Traffic noise” requirement above.
Music room to
Outdoor Playground All joints and penetrations properly sealed.
From Corridor or Provided extra STC to meet 45DBA background noise level;
Staircase or See “Traffic noise” requirement above.
Shower Room
to All joints and penetrations properly sealed.
Corridor or
Staircase or
Shower Room
From Music Room 60 Nominal 6” thick lightweight concrete on a steel fluted deck or
to plywood sub floor with a suspended 5/8” thick drywall ceiling a
Mechanical Equipment minimum 30” below the deck.
Room or
Gymnasium or Cafeteria Insulate the cavity.

Conference Room plywood sub floor with a suspended 5/8” thick drywall ceiling a
Mech. Equipment Rm
Gymnasium Or Cafeteria Insulate the cavity.
From Music Room 62 Nominal 6” thick lightweight concrete on a steel fluted deck or
To plywood sub floor with a suspended 5/8” thick drywall ceiling a
Music Room minimum 30” below the deck.
All Joints and penetrations properly sealed.
H. Allowable Maximum Impact & Isolation Class (IIC) levels for Floor/Ceiling
Assemblies Above Classrooms
Function IIC Suggested Construction
Classroom 50 Vinyl tile over 6” thick lightweight concrete on a steel fluted deck
or plywood sub floor with a suspended acoustical tile a minimum
30” below the deck.
Alternative: Equivalent IIC using carpeting.
Gymnasium 50+ Vinyl tile over 6” thick lightweight concrete on a steel fluted deck
Music Room or plywood sub floor with a 5/8” thick suspended drywall ceiling a
Dance Studio minimum 30 below the deck.
GENERAL NOTES:
Provide acoustical consultant recommendations for all auditoria and for special cases such
as unusual exterior ambient noise.
Book Four
Submittal Requirements
Book 4: Submittal Requirements
4.0 Submittal Checklists

4.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS – SCHEMATIC DESIGN PHASE
4.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS – DESIGN DEVELOPMENT PHASE
4.3 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS – 50% CD CONSTRUCTION
DOCUMENTS
4.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS – 100% CD CONSTRUCTION
DOCUMENTS
4.5 CHECKLIST OF OFFSITE WORK, UTILITIES AND EASEMENTS
Book 4: Submittal Requirements
Book 4: Submittal Requirements 4.1 Schematic Design
Schematic Design
DRAWINGS:
OTHER Scale Location

% Compl (Min) Information Included
DOCUMENTS: "/ ft. Reference
General
At a preliminary Schematics review meeting, present the District with three or more design solutions,
for
selection of one to be refined. Provide site analysis diagrams showing key site influences: Solar, winds,
views, traffic, neighborhood context, topographical features. Mount illustrations (*) on 30"x40"
boards.
The deliverables include the following:
Project name & address,

project directory w/ all
Title Sheet consultants
LAUSD ID and Logo (on all
drawings)
Neighborhood land uses and
characteristics, parking,
Vicinity and Location Map * setbacks
on adjacent and frontage
properties
Streets, crossings, signals, gen'l
traffic & pedestrian densities
Surrounding properties and
Color Photos * improvements
Proposed site, including
existing buildings and
surroundings
Buildings, playground areas,
Site Plan * future buildings
Scope and Limits of Work,
Off-Site Improvements
Relevant topographical
features, grading concepts
Driveways, streets, parking,
walks, future street widening
Existing landscape features,
planting concepts
"Check List of Prelim.
Offsite Work, Utilities & Easements"
Civil Engineering
Boundary & Topography.

Note "FOR REFERENCE
Site Survey 100% ONLY."
Description of systems,
Basis of Design Prelim.
criteria, surface drainage &
retention,
water availability &
conservation, other
sustainability issues,
sub-surface investigation
recommendations, City
requirements
and post-construction storm
water treatment
Symbols List, coordinated
with LAUSD Civil Standards
Landscape
Basis of Design
Description of design
Prelim.
approach & criteria, plant
selections,
irrigation, soil preparation
requirements
Architecture
Room names, doors and
Floor Plans Schem. 1/8 windows, special finishes
Cabinets, furniture &
equipment to show function,
capacity
Stairs, ramps, elevators, major
structural elements
Equipment rooms (mech'l,
power, data), major shafts &
chases
Slopes, covered walks,
Roof Plans Schem. 1/8 material changes
Wall features and materials,
Exterior Elevations Schem. 1/8 important features
Relevant sections to show
Building Sections Schem. 1/8 important building
configurations or
structural conditions
Design approach and
philosophy, general
Basis of Design Prelim. description of
buildings & mat'ls, important
design factors,
community issues,
sustainability measures
Structural Engineering
Diagrammatic layout of main
Floor and Roof Plans Schem. structural elements
bearing conditions, load
Basis of Design Prelim. criteria,
foundation-engineering
report reference (or

geologic
investigation
recommendations)
HVAC
Basis of Design Prelim. criteria, special energy and
sustainability issues, envelope
criteria, possible phasing
Plumbing & Fire Protection

Description of systems and
criteria, fixture types, gen'l
Basis of Design Prelim. loads,
water availability, on- and off-
Electrical site drainage provisions
Description of all electric

Basis of Design Prelim.
power related systems,
including
emergency power, computer
power, equipment types, etc.
Description of all signal
systems, incl. Fire alarm,
intrusion
alarm, CCTV/Audio
Surveillance Systems,
PA/Intercom,
Autonomous PA/Sound
System ( Gym, Auditorium,
Athletic
fields, multi-purpose rooms
and large instruction rooms),
TV Distribution (copper or
Fiber Optic), clock system,
Classroom Sound
Enhancement System.
Description of lighting system
in typical areas, indicating
fixture types and lighting
controls.
Indicate measures and
strategies to achieve maximum
CHPS
scores.
Typical Classroom Plan
(Lighting, Power & Data
Outlets).
Other special conditions,if
necessary
( 8.5 x11 or 11x17 bound with
Basis of Design).
Basis of Design, criteria,
Food Service Prelim. descriptive material
of other design disciplines
Graphics & Signage Prelim. as may be needed
by the size and complexity

Theater Consultant Prelim. of the project.
Kitchen Consultant Prelim.
Other:
Show compliance with
SP2A Building Area Diagrams Building Program
and Area Calculations
O.O.M. for each alternate.
Final estimate in District
Cost Estimate format
Forecast of CHPS points
CHPS Scorecard anticipated to be achievable
supported
by project Basis of Design and
preliminary plans
Savings by Design Incentive Record of application
Program submittal
Renewable Energy Study, as applicable Feasibility study to determine
the most cost effective
renewable
energy technology or
combination of technologies
Book 4: Submittal Requirements 4.3 Construction Documents 50%
Design Development
DRAWINGS:
OTHER %
Scale Location
(Min) Information Included
DOCUMENTS: Compl
"/ ft. Reference
General
Title Sheet, Vicinity and 80% consultants
Location Map LAUSD ID and Logo (on all
drawings)
List of DSA Deferred
Approvals
List all drawings planned for
final set. Indicate those
Drawing Index 95% included.
Legend, Abbreviations,
General Notes 65% Symbols (LAUSD Approved)
Construction Type,
Occupancies, Areas,
Code Analysis 80% Separations, Exit Wdth.
ADA path of travel and
accessibility criteria
Exit signs, fire extinguishers
Applicable Codes
Buildings, w/ names,
overhangs, number of stories,
Site Plan 50% 1/20 gross area
Driveways, service roads,
parking & layouts, walks
Hardscape, planting areas, site
furniture, drinking fountains
Playground layouts, paving
types
ADA accessibility signage,
ramps, railings, HC parking
Fire Dept. access, hydrants &
F.D. Approval block
DSA Application Number. for
existing buildings
For multi-phase projects:
Construction Phasing Plan 25% Limits of Work, barriers, access
Flag pole, planters, site walls,
Site Details 20% fencing, railings, signage,
parking, playground
equipment, stairs and

ramps,
bollards, trash enclosure
Vicinity Plan and Photos (as
for Schematic Design
Architectural Presentation Drawings Submittal)
Site and Floor Plans,
Elevations, Sections (in color)
Perspective Rendering (in
color)
(Above mounted on 30" x 40"
boards)
Materials / Finishes Boards
100%
"Check List of Offsite
Work, Utilities & Easements"
Detailed Account of CHPS
Points achieved in School
CHPS Scorecards Design.
Civil Engineering
Note "FOR REFERENCE
Topographic Survey 100% ONLY"
Building locations (dimensions
Site Plan 50% 1/20 or coordinates), Work Limits
Floor Plan Elevations, Key
Dimensions, Grids
Existing and Finish Contours
(0.5' intervals typ.),
spot elevations, ADA-
compliant slopes
Property lines, streets, setbacks,
easements, walls & fences
Site walls and top-of-wall
elevations
Utilities, UG tanks, fencing,
walks, drives, planting,
other features, onsite and
adjacent (existing and new)
Construction phasing
provisions, for multi-phase
projects
Buildings, paving, utilities, old
foundations - offsite and
Demolition Plan 25% onsite.
Limits of Work, specific
demolition notes, legend,
coordinate sysmbols with
LAUSD Standards
Pavement dimensions, Fire
Street and Parking Plan 30% 1/20 Department access, references
Existing & New Design
grades,final grading, flow lines,
Grading and Drainage Plan 30% 1/20 CB's,
culverts, downspouts,
references legend & symbols
per
LAUSD Standards. Identify

paving types & landscape areas
Post construction storm water
management system including
structural and nonstructural
BMP's
Piping, manholes, valves, CB's,
Site Utilities Plan (Water & 30% 1/20 drinking fountains,
Drainage) hose bibbs, combination
SS/SD drain valves, PIV's
Off-site work (drains, walks,
Off-site Civil Work Plans 30%
drives, streets, hydrants,
utilities tie-ins, street-vacations,
street trees,
power poles, etc.) per public
agency requirements
Drainage Plans/ Profiles 30% 1/10
Curbs, gutters, drainage
Site Details 20% structures, valves, boxes,
utilities connections, . . .
Log of soil borings 100%
Storm Water Calc'ns 100%
Basis of Design 100%
Landscaping
Planting areas with plant
Site Plan 50% 1/20 references
Location of existing trees (to
(on Civil Engineering Background) remain) in area of work and
proposed relocation if
necessary
Plant Schedules 35% Names, sizes, detail references
Planting, site furniture, special
Details 35% features
Piping, sprinkler & controller
Irrigation Plans 50% locations, references
Water POC, meter & backflow
preventor locations
IrrigationDetails 35% Valves, control schedules
Architecture
Structural grid, finish floor
Floor Plans 35% 1/8 elevations, final dimensions
Room Names, Numbers,
References
Floor finishes, floor drains
Door & Window locations,
sizes
Partition locations, finishes,
types, fire-ratings
ADA compliance provisions,
references
Cabinets, furniture &

equipment layout (incl. N.I.C.
items)
Educational spaces, library,
admin. area, restrooms,
Enlarged Floor Plans 20% 1/4 kitchens,
mech'l equip.rooms, special
areas. All FFE incl. N.I.C.
items.
Structural grid, slopes, drains,
Roof Plans 35% 1/8 scuppers
Elevations of top of steel,
sheathing, parapet walls
Parapets, screens, walkways,
items visible on roof
Reflected Ceiling Plans 25% 1/8 Lights, grilles, access panels
Fire ratings of ceilings and
walls
Soffits, special items
Structural grid, floor elevations,
Exterior Elevations 35% 1/8 key dimensions
Wall features and materials, all
important features
Doors, windows, louvers
Sections sufficient to show all
Building Sections 35% 1/8 major building configurations
Structural grid, floor elevations,
dimensions, Rm.Names, Nbrs.
Major materials, structural
elements
Key wall sections w/
structl.grid, dimensions,
Exterior Envelope Sections 75% 1/2 address
acoustical requirements per
Acoustical Design Guidelines
1 Key details, incl. roofing,
Exterior Envelope Details 20% 1/2 drains, skylights, waterproofing
Major room elevations, mat'ls
Interior Elevations 10% 1/8 & features (MP, Gym, typ.CR)
Cabinets, Furniture &
Equipment (incl. N.I.C.)
Interior Finish Schedules 20% Elevation & Detail References
Ceiling and soffit heights
Preliminary materials and paint
finishes
Numbers, Locations, Detail
Door Schedules and Types 10% References
Door and Frame Materials
Numbers, Locations, Detail
Window and Louver 25% References
Schedules and Types Sash and Frame Materials
All details incl. Thresholds,
Door, Window and Louver 25% hardware references,
Details fire ratings, panic hardware,
smoke seals
Stairs, Elevators, etc. with
Vertical Circulation Plans, 35% 1/4 structural grid, dimensions
Sections, Details Major materials and equipment,
typical details
Equipment room layouts, pits,
holding tanks, etc.
Wall types and details, with
Interior and Miscellaneous 25% fire-ratings, address acoustical
requirements per Acoustical
Design Guidelines
Details Ceiling, soffit, suspended
fixtures w/ structural
anchoring
Floor/ ceiling/ wall/ roof
assemblies w/ fire ratings,
UL fire-assembly numbers
Cabinet and equipment, w/
structural anchoring
Design approach and
philosophy, general description
of
buildings & materails,
community issues,
sustainability measures
Structural grid, finish floor
elevations, dimensions,
Foundation Plans 20% 1/8 references
Bottom-of-footing elevations,
pipe trenches adjecent to
footings
Slab penetrations &
depressions, dimensioned
Framing and floor
construction, penetrations,
Floor and Roof Plans 35% openings
Shear walls and other lateral
force resisting elements
Sections 35% 1/8 Foundation and member sizes
Wall Sections & Elevations 35%
Secondary framing & 20%
supports for finishes
Retaining wall elevations,sections 20%
Details 20%
Description of systems, bearing
Basis of Design - conditions, load criteria,
foundation-engineering
report reference
Including calculations and
Preliminary Calculations 35% details for:
1) Elements of non-structural
components, equipment
anchorage and attachment to
the structure; 2) Stairs,

handrails,
and landings.
HVAC
HVAC Floor and Roof Plans 35% 1/8 Duct & diffuser/ grille layout
(On Architectural Backgrounds) (double-line) with CFM's,
smoke detectors, combination
smoke/ fire dampers
with State Fire Marshal
approval numbers
Existing mechanical systems &
components
Equipment locations and
rooms
Piping & valve layouts and
HVAC Piping Plans 35% sizes
Flow and riser diagrams for
Air-flow Diagrams 35%
each air system, incl. controls,
outside air and exhaust, CFM,
velocities, pressures
Schematic and riser diagrams
HVAC Piping System Diag'ms 35% for each piping system,
incl. pipe sizes, controls,
instrumentation, valves, etc.
Equipment layouts, piping,
Enlarged Floor Plans 25%
ducts,coordination of
major duct & pipe space, and a
typical classroom layout
All equipment - types, sizes,
Equipment Schedules 25% capacities, weights
Control System Diagrams 25%
Details 20%
Mounting details for all HVAC
Equipment Mounting Details 10% components, incl.pads,
curbs, seismic restraints,
vibration isolators
Basis of Design -
Description of systems, criteria,
controls, exhaust provisions,
impacts on building envelope
Final load estimates 100%
Critical findings affecting
glazing, lighting, other bldg
Calculations per CBC 50% elements
Energy Efficiency
St'ds
Plumbing
Mechanical Utilities (gas, steam,
Site Plan 50% heating water),
(on Civil Engineering Background) coordinate w/ site utilities
Piping, fixtures, floor drains,
Floor and Roof Plans 35% 1/8 equipment and rooms
(on Arch'l Backgrounds) Existing utilities, equipment
and P.O.C's, demolition
requirements
Major pipe space coordination,
incl. roof-drain locations
Equipment layouts, piping,
Enlarged Floor Plans 25% supply air & exhaust,
major pipe space
coordination
All equipment -- types, sizes,
Equipment Schedules 25% capacities, weights
Schematic and isometric riser
diagrams for each piping
Piping System Diagrams 25% system,
valves, etc.
Details 20%
Mounting details for all
Piping and Equpment Mounting 10%
components, incl.pads,
Details
vibration isolators
Description of systems, criteria,
Basis of Design -
restroom controls,
water conservation, utilities
connections requirements
Calculations 50%
Fire Protection
Floor Plans 35% 1/8 Mains, risers, P.O.C.'s
(on Arch'l Backgrounds) Sprinkler head layouts
(On smaller projects, may be
shown with Plumbing)
100% Hydraulic calculations
Electrical
Service equipment locations
Site Plan 10% (power, phone, TV, MPOE)
(on Civil Engineering Background) 10% Conduit duct bank routing and
underground pull boxes
for power and signal systems
35% Exterior lighting (Pole mount
and wall mount),
Indicate fixture types.
35% Exterior Signal devices (Fire
Alarm horns, PA speakers,
CCTV cameras, etc.)
Indicate all lighting fixture
locations and types. Show
Lighting Floor Plans/RCPs 35% 1/8 panels.
Show switches and lighting
control components in all
rooms.
Indicate all receptacles
locations and types. Show
Power Floor Plans 35% 1/8 panels.
Signal Floor Plans 35% 1/8 Indicate all signal system
devices. Show Cable tray

layouts
and conduit sleeves
locations. Show Terminal
cabinets, racks
and data frames.
Fire Alarm Floor Plans 35% 1/8 Indicate all initiating & alarm
devices, control panels,
annunciator and terminal
cabinets.
Equipment rooms layouts
Enlarged Floor Plans 35% 1/4 showing panels, transformers,
inverters, cable trays, LAN
racks & signal equipment,
terminal cabinets, working &
access space
Light Fixture Schedule 90% Show fixture description,
manufacturers cat.#, lamp type,
ballast type, numbers of lamps
and ballasts, input wattage
Panel Schedules 65%
and mounting type.
Show panel schedules.
Show contol diagrams and
Lighting Control Diagrams 65% energy forms
Signal Block and 35% Show headend equipment and
Riser Diagrams terminal cabinets/racks in
satellite buildings. Show
interconnections.
Show Main Fire Alarm Control
Fire Alarm Block and 35% Panel and Satellite control
Riser Diagrams panels or expanders.. Show
interconnections.
Equipment & feeder sizes (new
Single-line Diagram 35% and existing to be used)
Main switchboards, panels,
breakers, MCC's, etc.
Load calculations based on
allotments indicated in Design
Guide per square foot basis to
size main service and power
distribution panels and for
submission to Utility Company.
Indicate Grounding system.

Utility company details if
Details 35% available.
ADA-complying heights of all
racks and devices
Equipment Mounting Details 35% fixtures, shelving & equipment,
incl. seismic restrain-Not
required for this submittal.
Update and indicate changes to
Basis of Design 95% original Basis of Design
submitted in schematic
phase.
Lighting Calculations 65% Provide point-by-point calcs.

incl. graphic display for all
typical rooms and areas for
both normal and emergency
modes demonstrating
compliance with Design Guide,
IES
standards, SCE Classroom
Lighting Design manuals and
applicable codes.
Provide point-by-point calcs.
Fire Alarm System Calcs. 65% incl. graphic display for all
Title 24 Compliance 50% Critical findings affecting

glazing, lighting, HVAC,
other bldg elements and use of
day lighting.
LTG forms showing
compliance with Title 24 and
CHPS
guidelines and standards.
Coordinate with Mechanical
Engineer and Architect to
optimize
energy use and achieve higher
CHPS scores.
Plans, Elevations, Sections,
Food Service 25% Details, Descriptive Data
Graphics & Signage 25% of other design disciplines as
may be needed
by the size and complexity of
Theater Consultant 25% the project.
Specifications
List of District Guide
Specification and special
sections added by the AE that
required for the project, with
Table of Contents
Other:
Catalog cut sheets of
Product Information architectural and engineering
products,
organized in CSI format, esp.
those not in District standards
Submit for District's review any
proposed deviation from the
Request for Product/Substitution School Design Guide.
Submit for District's review any
proposed proposed product
not listed in the Guide
Review Specifications.
SP2A Building Area Diagrams Updated,
and Area Calculations showing compliance with

Building Program
Detailed CSI Cost Estimate in
Cost Estimate
compliance with Districts
estimating guide.
Site Development Cost
Estimate in compliance with
Districts
estimating guide
Detailed account of CHPS
Points achieved in School
CHPS Scorecard Design
Record of design documents
submitted to entities offering
Incentive Program incentives
All comments & dwgs., with

S.D. Review Comments responses to each comment
Construction Documents -- 50 %
DRAWINGS
OTHER Scale Information

% Location
(Min)
DOCUMENTS Compl
"/ ft. Included Reference
General
Title Sheet, Vicinity and 80% consultants
Location Map LAUSD ID and Logo
(on all drawings)
List of DSA Deferred
Approvals
List all drawings planned
for final set. Indicate
Drawing Index 95% those included.
Legend, Abbreviations,
Symbols (LAUSD
General Notes 80% Approved)
Construction Type,
Occupancies, Areas,
Code Analysis 90% Separations,Exit Wdth.
ADA path of travel and
accessibility criteria
Exit signs, fire
extinguishers
Applicable Code
Buildings, w/ names,
overhangs, number of
Site Plan 75% 1/20 stories, gross area
Driveways, service roads,
parking & layouts, walks
Hardscape, planting
areas, site furniture,
drinking fountains
Playground layouts,
paving types, detail
references
ADA accessibility
signage, ramps, railings,
HC parking
Fire Dept. access,
hydrants &
F.D.Approval block
DSA Application Nbr.
for existing buildings
For multi-phase projects:
Limits of Work, barriers,
Construction Phasing Plan 50% access
Flag pole, planters, site
Site Details 35% walls, fencing, railings,
signage,
parking, playground
equipment, stairs and
ramps,
"Check List of Offsite Work,
Utilities &
Easements"
Detailed account of
CHPS Points achieved in
CHPS Scorecard School Design
Civil Engineering
Note "FOR
Topographic Survey 100% REFERENCE ONLY"
Building locations
(dimensions or
coordinates), Work
Site Plan 75% 1/20 Limits
Floor Plan Elevations,
Key Dimensions, Grids
Existing and Finish
Contours (0.5' intervals
typ.),
spot elevations, ADA-
compliant slopes
Property lines, streets,
setbacks, easements,
walls & fences
Site walls and top-of-wall
and bottom-of-footing
elevations
Utilities, UG tanks,
fencing, walks, drives,
planting,
other features, onsite and
adjacent (existing and
new)
Construction phasing
provisions, for multi-
phase projects
Buildings, paving,
utilities, old foundations
Demolition Plan 75% - offsite and onsite.
Limits of Work, specific
demolition notes, legend,
coordinate
symbols with LAUSD
Standards
Pavement dimensions,
Fire Department access,
Street and Parking Plan 65% 1/20 references
Existing & New Design
grades,final grading, flow
Grading and Drainage Plan 65% 1/20 lines, CB's,
culverts, downspouts,
references legend &
symbols per
LAUSD Standards.
Identify paving types &
landscape areas.
Post construction storm
water management
system including
structural and
nonstructural BMP's
Piping, manholes, valves,
Site Utilities Plan (Water & 65% 1/20
CB's, drinking fountains,
Drainage)
hose bibbs, combination
SS/SD drain valves,
PIV's
Off-site work (drains,
walks, drives, streets,
Off-site Civil Work Plans 65% hydrants,
utilities tie-ins, street-
vacations, street trees,
power poles, etc.) per
public agency
requirements
Curbs, gutters, drainage
Site Details 35% structures, valves, boxes,
utilities connections, . .
Calculations 100%
Basis of Design - Updated
Landscaping
Planting areas with plant
Site Plan 75% 1/20 references
Location of existing trees
(to remain) in area of
(on Civil Engineering Background) work and
proposed relocation if
necessary
Names, sizes, detail
Plant Schedules 65% references
Planting, site furniture,
Details 35% special features
Piping, sprinkler &
controller locations,
Irrigation Plans 50% references
Water POC, meter &
backflow preventor
locations
Valves, control
IrrigationDetails 35% schedules
Architecture
Structural grid, finish
floor elevations, final
Floor Plans 75% 1/8 dimensions
Room Names, Numbers
Door & Window
Numbers, Wall
Numbers, references
Partition types, fire-
ratings, ADA
compliance, references
ADA compliance,
references
Cabinets,furniture &
equipment layout, detail
references
(incl. N.I.C. items)
Floor depressions,
penetrations,
housekeeping pads,
FD's & slopes, detail
references
Educational spaces,
Enlarged Floor Plans 50% 1/4 library, admin. area,
restrooms, kitchens,
mech'l equip.rooms,
special areas. All FFE
incl. N.I.C. items.
shown.
Structural grid, slopes,
drains, scuppers,
Roof Plans 75% 1/8 penetrations
Elevations of top of
steel, sheathing, parapet
walls
Equipment, ducts, pipes,
curbs and pads, pipes &
ducts
Parapets, screens,
walkways,all items visible
on roof
with dimensions and
detail references
Lights, grilles, access
panels, sprinklers,
Reflected Ceiling Plans 75% 1/8 penetrations
Fire ratings of ceilings
and walls
Soffits, special items,

dimensioned &
referenced
Structural grid, floor
Exterior Elevations 75% 1/8 elevations, dimensions
All wall features and
materials, w/ dimensions
& references,
incl. expansion joints,
screeds, copings and sills
Doors, windows, louvers,
w/ dimensions and
references
Sections sufficient to
show all major building
Building Sections 75% 1/8 configurations
Structural grid, floor
elevations, dimensions,
Room Names, Nbrs.
Major materials,
structural elements, detail
references
Key wall sections w/
structl.grid, dimensions,
Exterior Envelope Sections 100% 1/2 references
address acoustical
requirements per
Acoustical Design
Guidelines
50% Other wall sections
Key details, incl. roofing,
drains, skylights,
Exterior Envelope Details 50% 1 1/2 waterproofing
1 1/2 Roof-mounted
equipment curbs,
platforms, pipe and duct
supports, penetrations,
with water proofing and
flashings
All room elevations,
Interior Elevations 50% 1/8 materials
All wall features, w/
dimensions & detail
references
Cabinets, Furniture &
Equipment (incl. N.I.C.)
Elevation & Detail
Interior Finish Schedules 65% References
Completed materials and
paint finishes
Paint color selections
Numbers, Locations,
Elevations, Detail
Door Schedules and Types 50% References
Door and Frame

Materials
Finish Hardware Types
Numbers, Locations,
Window and Louver 50% Detail References
Schedules and Types Sash and Frame
Materials
All details incl.
Door, Window and Louver 50% 3 thresholds, hardware
Details references,
fire ratings, panic
hardware, smoke seals
Stairs, Elevators, etc.
with structural grid,
Vertical Circulation Plans, 50% 1/4 dimensions
Sections, Details Major materials and
equipment, typical details
Equipment room layouts,
pits, holding tanks, etc.
Wall types and details,
Interior and Miscellaneous 25% with fire-ratings
address acoustical
requirements per
Acoustical Design
Guidelines
Details Ceiling, soffit, suspended
fixtures w/ structural
anchoring
Floor/ ceiling/ wall/
roof assemblies w/ fire
ratings,
UL fire-assembly
numbers
Cabinet and equipment,
w/ structural anchoring
Structural grid, finish
floor elevations,
Foundation Plans 35% 1/8 dimensions, references
Bottom-of-footing
elevations, pipe trenches
adj. to footings
Slab penetrations &
depressions,
dimensioned
Framing and floor
construction,
Floor and Roof Plans 65% penetrations, openings
Shear walls and other
lateral force resisting
elements
Foundation and member
Sections 60% 1/8 sizes

Retaining wall elevations,sections 60%
Details 50%
Including calculations
and details for: 1)
Calculations 75% Elements of
non-structural
components, equipment
anchorage and
attachment to
the structure; 2) Stairs,
handrails, and landings.
HVAC
Floor and Roof Plans 75% 1/8 Duct & diffuser/ grille
(On Architectural Backgrounds) layout (double-line) with
CFM's,
smoke detectors,
combination smoke/ fire
dampers
with State Fire Marshal
approval numbers
Existing mechanical
systems & components
Equipment locations and
rooms
Piping & valve layouts
HVAC Piping Plans, Flr./Roof 75% and sizes
Flow and riser diagrams
for each air system, incl.
controls,
outside air and exhaust,
CFM, velocities,
pressures
Schematic and riser
HVAC Piping System Diag'ms 75% diagrams for each piping
system,
instrumentation, valves,
etc.
Equipment layouts,
Enlarged Floor Plans 50%
piping, ducts,
major duct & pipe space
coordination
All equipment -- types,
Equipment Schedules 50% sizes, capacities, weights
Details 35%
Equipment Mounting Details 35% Mounting details for all
HVAC components,
incl.pads,
vibration isolators
Title 24 Energy
Standards Compliance
Forms: Performance
Method
analysis of each building
Final calculations per 100%
CBC Energy Efficiency St'ds
Plumbing
Mechanical Utilities (gas,
Site Plan 75% steam, heating water),
(on Civil Engineering Background) coordinate w/ site
utilities
Piping, fixtures, floor
drains, equipment and
Floor and Roof Plans 75% 1/8 rooms
(on Arch'l Backgrounds) Existing utilities,
equipment and P.O.C's,
demo. requirements
Major pipe space
coordination, incl. roof-
drain locations
Equipment layouts,
Enlarged Floor Plans 50% piping, supply air &
exhaust,
major pipe space
coordination
All equipment - types,
Equipment Schedules 60% sizes, capacities, weights
Fixture Schedules 60%
Schematic and isometric
Piping System Diagrams 75%
riser diagrams for each
piping system,
valves, etc.
Details 35%
Piping and Equpment 35%
components, incl.pads,
Mounting Details
vibration isolators
Final calculations 100%
Fire Protection
(On smaller projects,
may be shown with

Plumbing)
Electrical
Service equipment
locations (power, phone,
Site Plan 75% TV)
Show vault/pad details,
primary and secondary
conduit routing
Conduit duct bank
(on Civil Engineering Background) routing and underground
pull boxes
for power and signal
systems. Show sizes.
Exterior lighting (Pole
mount and wall mount),
Indicate fixture types.
Assign panel circuit
homeruns
Exterior Signal devices
(Fire Alarm horns, PA
speakers,
CCTV cameras, etc.)
Indicate all lighting

Lighting Floor Plans/RCPs 75% 1/8 fixture locations and
types. Show panels.
Show switches and
lighting control
components in all rooms.
homeruns
Indicate all receptacles
Power Floor Plans 75% 1/8 locations and types.
Show panels.
homeruns
Indicate all signal system
Signal Floor Plans 75% 1/8 devices. Show Cable tray
layouts
and conduit sleeves
locations. Show Terminal
cabinets, racks
and data frames. Show
conduit interconnections.
Indicate all initiating &
Fire Alarm Floor Plans 75% 1/8 alarm devices, control
panels,
annunciator and terminal
cabinets. Indicate candela
ratings
Enlarged Floor Plans 75% 1/4 Provide equipment
Equipment room layouts rooms layouts showing

panels, transformers,
inverters, cable trays,
LAN racks & signal
equipment,
terminal cabinets,
working & access space.
Size equipment and
provide dimensioned
layouts and weight
information. Coordinate
with Structural Engineer
for
seismic details.
Calculate heat loads and
coordinate with
Mechanical
for sizing HVAC
equipment.
Provide cable tray layout
in LAN Room and signal
rooms.
Show fixture description,
manufacturers cat.#,
Light Fixture Schedule 100% lamp type,
ballast type, numbers of
lamps and ballasts, input
wattage
and mounting type.
Provide Panel schedules
showing load details and
Panel Schedules 80% calculations.
Provide lighting control
Lighting Control Diagrams 75% diagram showing all
components
and interconnections.
Show Headend
Signal Block and 75% equipment and terminal
Riser Diagrams cabinets/racks in
satellite buildings. Show
interconnections.
Show all components.
Show all
interconnections
indicating
conduit and cabling
information.
Show Main Fire Alarm
Fire Alarm Block and 75% Control Panel and
Riser Diagrams Satellite control
panels or expanders.
Show all components.
Show all
interconnections
indicating
conduit and cabling
information.
Equipment & feeder

sizes (new and existing to
Single-line Diagram 75% be used)
Main switchboards,
panels, breakers, MCC's,
etc.
Load calculations based
on actual connected
loads
Resize main service and
power distribution
panels based
on actual loads. Include
spare capacities required
by
Design Guide.
Indicate Grounding
system for main service
and
satellite buildings.
Indicate Voltage drops
and length for all feeders.
Short-circuit ratings of all
panelboards calculated
based on
available fault current
from utility company
Provide Utility company
contact information.
Utility company standard
Details 85% details
Typical ADA-complying
heights of all racks and
devices
Applicable LAUSD
standard details.
Equipment Mounting Details 50% fixtures, shelving &
equipment,
incl. seismic restrain.
Coordinate with
structural
Update and indicate
Basis of Design 95% changes to original Basis
of Design
submitted in schematic
phase.
Update Point-by-point
Lighting Calculations 95% calcs. incl. graphic display
typical rooms and areas
for both normal and
emergency
modes demonstrating
compliance with Design
Guide, IES
standards, SCE
Classroom Lighting
Design manuals and
applicable codes.
Battery and voltage-drop
Fire Alarm System Calcs. 50% calculations.
Update-Critical findings
Title 24 Compliance 100% affecting glazing, lighting,
HVAC,
other bldg elements and
use of day lighting.
Update-LTG forms
showing compliance with
Title 24 and CHPS
Update-Coordinate with
Mechanical Engineer and
Architect to
optimize energy use and
achieve higher CHPS
scores.
Incorporate comments
received from "Saving by
Design" Review
Plans, Elevations,
Food Service 50% Sections, Details,
Graphics & Signage 50% Descriptive Data
of other design
disciplines as may be
needed
by the size and
complexity of the
Theater Consultant 50% project.
Specifications
Set of District Guide
Specifications with Table
of Contents and
Technical Sections
required for the project,
edited in MS Word
whith track changes on
to reflect the specific
work of the project, plus
additional sections to
recognize unique
materials or assemblies.
Specify two or more
manufacturers for each
product.
Verify most current
version of the Guide
Specifications is used.
Verify LAUSD issue date
is not changed.
OTHER:
SP2A Building Area Diagrams Updated

Catalog cut sheets not
Product Information submitted with DD package
Submit any proposed
Request for Product/Substitution deviation from the
School Design Guide
Review for District review.
Submit any proposed
proposed product not
listed in the Guide
Specifications for
District review.
All utility company,
public agency and fire
Record Reports dep't contacts
Detailed CSI Cost
Estimate in compliance
Cost Estimate with Districts
Estimating Guide
Site Developlent Cost
Estimate in compliance
with Districts
Estimating Guide
Detailed account of
CHPS Points achieved in
Savings by Design
Energy Analysis
Recommendation Letter
Savings By Design &
Incentive Program Architect's Response
All comments & dwgs.,
with responses to each
D.D. Review Comments comment
Book 4: Submittal Requirements 4.4 Construction Documents 100% CD, DSA Submittal
Construction Documents -- 100 % C.D. - DSA Submittal

DRAWINGS:
OTHER % Scale
(Min) Information Included
Location
DOCUMENTS: Compl "/ ft. Reference
General
Project name & address, project directory w/
Title Sheet, Vicinity and 100% all consultants
Location Map LAUSD ID and Logo (on all drawings)
List of DSA Deferred Approvals
Drawing Index 100% List all drawings for final set.
Legend, Abbreviations, Symbols (LAUSD
General Notes 100% Approved)
Construction Type, Occupancies, Areas,
Code Analysis 100% Separations, Exit Wdth.
ADA path of travel and accessibility criteria
Exit signs, fire extinguishers
Applicable Codes
Buildings, w/ names, overhangs, number of

Site Plan 100% 1/20 stories, gross area
Driveways, service roads, parking & layouts,
walks
Hardscape, planting areas, site furniture,
drinking fountains
Playground layouts, paving types, detail
references
ADA accessibility signage, ramps, railings, HC
parking
Fire Dept. access, hydrants & F.D.Approval
block
DSA Application Nbr. for existing buildings
For multi-phase projects: Limits of Work,
Construction Phasing Plan 100% barriers, access
Flag pole, planters, site walls, fencing, railings,
Site Details 100% signage,
parking, playground equipment, stairs and
ramps,
"Check List of Offsite Work,
Utilities & Easements"
Civil Engineering
Topographic Survey Note "FOR REFERENCE ONLY"
Building locations (dimensions or coordinates),

Site Plan 100% 1/20 Work Limits
Floor Plan Elevations, Key Dimensions, Grids
Existing and Finish Contours (0.5' intervals
typ.),
spot elevations, ADA-compliant slopes
Property lines, streets, setbacks, easements,
walls & fences
Site walls and top-of-wall and bottom-of-
footing elevations
Utilities, UG tanks, fencing, walks, drives,
planting,
other features, onsite and adjacent (existing
and new)
Construction phasing provisions, for multi-
phase projects
Buildings, paving, utilities, old foundations -
Demolition Plan 100% offsite and onsite
Limits of Work, specific demolition notes
Pavement dimensions, Fire Department access,
Street and Parking Plan 100% 1/20 references
Final grading, flow lines, CB's, culverts,
downspouts, references, post-construction
storm water management system including
Grading and Drainage Plan 100% 1/20 structural and non-structural BMP's
Piping, manholes, valves, CB's, drinking
Site Utilities Plan (Water & 100% 1/20 fountains,
Drainage) hose bibbs, combination SS/SD drain valves,
PIV's
Off-site work (drains, walks, drives, streets,
Off-site Civil Work Plans 100%
hydrants,
utilities tie-ins, street-vacations, street trees,
power poles, etc.) per public agency
requirements
Curbs, gutters, drainage structures, valves,
Site Details 100% boxes, utilities connections, . . .

Calculations 100%
Basis of Design - Final update
Landscaping
Site Plan (on Civil 100% 1/20 Planting areas with plant references
Engineering Background)
Plant Schedules 100% Names, sizes, detail references

Details 100% Planting, site furniture, special features
Piping, sprinkler & controller locations,
Irrigation Plans 100% references
Plans shall contain information required by the
California State Water Efficient Landscape
Ordinance Section 492 b & c.
IrrigationDetails 100% Valves, control schedules
Basis of Design - Final update
Architecture
Structural grid, finish floor elevations, final
Floor Plans 100% 1/8 dimensions
Room Names, Numbers
Door & Window Numbers, Wall Numbers,
references
Partition types, fire-ratings, ADA compliance,
references
ADA compliance, references
Cabinets,furniture & equipment layout, detail
references (incl. N.I.C. items)
Floor depressions, penetrations, housekeeping

pads,
FD's & slopes, detail references
Educational spaces, library, admin. area,
Enlarged Floor Plans 100% 1/4 restrooms, kitchens,
mech'l equip.rooms, special areas. All FFE incl.
N.I.C. items.
Structural grid, slopes, drains, scuppers,
Roof Plans 100% 1/8 penetrations
Elevations of top of steel, sheathing, parapet
walls
Equipment, ducts, pipes, curbs and pads, pipes
& ducts
Parapets, screens, walkways,all items visible on
roof
with dimensions and detail references
Lights, grilles, access panels, sprinklers,
Reflected Ceiling Plans 100% 1/8 penetrations
Fire ratings of ceilings and walls
Soffits, special items, dimensioned &
referenced
Exterior Elevations 100% 1/8 Structural grid, floor elevations, dimensions
All wall features and materials, w/ dimensions
& references,
incl. expansion joints, screeds, copings and sills
Doors, windows, louvers, w/ dimensions and
references
Sections sufficient to show all major building
Building Sections 100% 1/8 configurations
Structural grid, floor elevations, dimensions,
Room Names, Numbers.
Major materials, structural elements, detail
references
All wall sections w/ structural grid, dimenions,
Exterior Envelope Sections 100% 1/2 references
1 Key details, incl. roofing, drains, skylights,
Exterior Envelope Details 100% 1/2 waterproofing
1
1/2 Roof-mounted equipment curbs, platforms,
pipe and duct

supports, penetrations, with water proofing
and flashings
Interior Elevations 100% 1/8 All room elevations, materials
All wall features, w/ dimensions & detail
references
Cabinets, Furniture & Equipment (incl. N.I.C.)
Room Names, Numbers, Elevation & Detail
Interior Finish Schedules 100% References
Completed materials and paint finishes
Paint color selections
Door Schedules and Types 100% Numbers, Locations, Detail References
Door and Frame Materials
Window and Louver 100% Numbers, Locations, Detail References
Schedules and Types Sash and Frame Materials
All details incl. Thresholds, hardware
Door, Window and Louver 100% references,
Details fire ratings, panic hardware, smoke seals
Stairs, Elevators, etc. with structl.grid,
Vertical Circulation Plans, 100% 1/4 dimensions
Sections, Details Major materials and equipment, typical details
Equipment room layouts, pits, holding tanks,
etc.
Interior and Miscellaneous 100% Wall types and details, with fire-ratings
Details Ceiling, soffit, suspended fixtures w/
structural anchoring
Floor/ ceiling/ wall/ roof assemblies w/ fire
ratings, .
UL fire-assembly numbers
Cabinet and equipment, w/ structural
anchoring
Basis of Design Final update
Structural grid, finish floor elevations,
Foundation Plans 100% 1/8 dimensions, references
Bottom-of-footing elevations, pipe trenches
adjecent to footings
Slab penetrations & depressions, dimensioned
Framing and floor construction, penetrations,
Floor and Roof Plans openings
Shear walls and other lateral force resisting
elements
Sections 100% 1/8 Foundation and member sizes
Retaining wall elev'ns,sections 100%
Details 100%
Description of systems, bearing conditions,
Basis of Design -
load criteria,
foundation-engineering report reference
Final Calculations 100%
Including calculations and details for: 1)
Elements of non-structural
components, equipment anchorage and
attachment of the
structure; 2) Stairs, handrails, and landings.
HVAC
Floor and Roof Plans Duct & diffuser/ grille layout (double-line)
100% 1/8
(On Architectural Backgrounds) with CFM's,
smoke detectors, combination smoke/ fire
dampers
with State Fire Marshal approval numbers
Existing mechanical systems & components
Equipment locations and rooms
HVAC Piping Plans, Flr./Roof 100% Piping & valve layouts and sizes
Flow and riser diagrams for each air system,
incl. controls,
outside air and exhaust, CFM, velocities,
pressures
Schematic and riser diagrams for each piping
HVAC Piping System Diag'ms 100% system,
incl. pipe sizes, controls, instrumentation,
valves, etc.
Enlarged Floor Plans 100% Equipment layouts, piping, ducts,
major duct & pipe space coordination
All equipment -- types, sizes, capacities,
Equipment Schedules 100% weights
Details 100%
Mounting details for all HVAC components,
Equipment Mounting Details 100% incl.pads,
curbs, seismic restraints, vibration isolators
Basis of Design -
Title 24 Energy Standards Compliance Forms:
Final calculations 100% Performance
Method with analysis of each building.
CBC Energy Efficiency St'ds
Plumbing
Site Plan 100% Mechanical Utilities (gas, steam, heating water),
(on Civil Engineering Background) coordinate w/ site utilities
Piping, fixtures, floor drains, equipment and
Floor and Roof Plans 100% 1/8 rooms
(on Arch'l Backgrounds) Existing utilities, equipment and P.O.C's,
demolition requirements
Major pipe space coordination, incl. roof-drain

locations
Equipment layouts, piping, supply air &
Enlarged Floor Plans 100% exhaust,
major pipe space coordination
All equipment -- types, sizes, capacities,
Equipment Schedules 100% weights
Schematic and isometric riser diagrams for
Piping System Diagrams 100%
each piping system,
incl. pipe sizes, controls, valves, etc.
Details 100%
Mounting details for all components,
Piping and Equipment 100%
incl.pads,
Mounting Details
curbs, seismic restraints, vibration isolators
Final calculations 100%
Fire Protection
(On smaller projects, may be shown with
Plumbing)
Electrical
Service equipment locations (power, phone,
Site Plan 100% TV)
Show vault/pad details, primary and secondary
conduit routing
Show utility companies point of connections
Conduit duct bank routing and underground
(on Civil Engineering Background) pull boxes
for power and signal systems. Show sizes.
Show underground conduits fill ratios.
Coordinate with Civil to avoid conflict with
Sewer, Gas
and water lines and access manholes.
Exterior lighting (Pole mount and wall mount),

Indicate fixture types. Indicate homeruns and
conduit
routing to panelboard. Show circuit numbers
and wiring.
Exterior Signal devices (Fire Alarm horns, PA
speakers,
CCTV cameras, etc.)
Indicate Device types. Indicate homeruns and
conduit
routing to signal terminal cabinet. Show wiring
infor.
Indicate all lighting fixture locations and types.
Lighting Floor Plans/RCPs 100% 1/8 Show panels.
Show circuit numbers, J.
boxes, switching and
wiring for
all areas. Indicate rooms

ID's. Show all wiring and
Provide exit signs (high
and low
mount) and all exit door.
Provide directional exit
signs.
Indicate all receptacles locations and types.
Power Floor Plans 100% 1/8 Show panels.
Show circuit numbers, J.
boxes and wiring for
all areas. Indicate rooms
ID's. Show all wiring and
Indicate all signal system devices. Show Cable
Signal Floor Plans 100% 1/8 tray layouts
Show terminal cabinets, J. boxes, equipment
and wiring for
all areas. Indicate rooms ID's. Show all wiring
and
Indicate all initiating & alarm devices, control
Fire Alarm Floor Plans 100% 1/8 panels,
annunciator and terminal cabinets. Indicate
candela ratings
Show J. boxes, devices ID's, circuit ID's and
wiring for
all areas. Indicate rooms ID's. Show all wiring
and
Enlarged Floor Plans 100% 1/4 Provide equipment rooms layouts showing
Equipment room layouts panels, transformers,
inverters, LAN racks & signal equipment,
terminal cabinets, working & access space.
Update equipment sizes and provide
dimensioned layouts and
weight information. Coordinate with Structural
Engineer for
seismic details.
Update calculate heat loads and coordinate
with Mechanical
for sizing HVAC equipment.
Update cable tray layout in LAN Room and
signal rooms.
Indicate Outside plant conduits terminations in
LAN Room.
Indicate Telephone and Cable TV utilities
point of
connections in LAN Room.
Update fixture description, manufactures cat.#,
Light Fixture Schedule 100% lamp type,
ballast type, numbers of lamps and ballasts,
input wattage
and mounting type. Coordinate with
specifications.
Update Panel schedules showing load details
Panel Schedules 100% and calculations.
Update lighting control diagram showing all
Lighting Control Diagrams 100% components
and interconnections. Show Room ID's where
components are located.
Signal Block and 100%

Show Headend equipment and terminal
Riser Diagrams cabinets/racks in
satellite buildings. Show interconnections.
Show all components. Show all
interconnections indicating
conduit and cabling information. Show Room
ID's where
Provide separate Riser Diagram for each signal
system. Data
and telephone (PBX) shall be combined.
Show Main Fire Alarm Control Panel and
Fire Alarm Block and 100% Satellite control
Riser Diagrams panels or expanders.
Show all components. Show all
interconnections indicating
conduit and cabling information. Show Room
ID's where
Update equipment & feeder sizes (new and
Single-line Diagram 100% existing to be used)
Update information for Main switchboards,
panels, breakers,
MCC's, etc. Provide physical spaces for future
expansion.
Update load calculations based on actual
connected loads
Resize main service and power distribution
panels based
on actual loads. Include spare capacities
required by
Design Guide.
Update information for grounding system for
main service and satellite buildings.
Update Voltage drops and length for all

feeders.
Update short-circuit ratings of all panelboards
calculated based
on available fault current from utility company
Update Utility company contact information.
Provide complete Utility company standard
Details 100% details
Provide ADA-complying heights of all typical
racks and devices
Provide complete relevant LAUSD standard

details.
Provide mounting details for all fixtures, racks,
Equipment Mounting Details 100% panels &
equipment, incl. seismic restrain. Coordinate
with structural
Update and indicate changes to original Basis
of Design
submitted in previous submittal phase.
Update Point-by-point calcs. incl. graphic
Lighting Calculations 100% display-Update
typical rooms and areas for both normal and
emergency
modes demonstrating compliance with Design
Guide, IES
standards, SCE Classroom Lighting Design
manuals and
applicable codes.
Fire Alarm Sys. calc. 100% Update Battery and voltage-drop calculations-
Title 24 Compliance 100%
Update-Critical findings affecting glazing,
lighting, HVAC,
other bldg elements and use of day lighting.
Update-LTG forms showing compliance with
Title 24 and CHPS
Update-Coordinate with Mechanical Engineer
and Architect to
optimize energy use and achieve higher CHPS
scores.
Incorporate comments received from "Saving
by Design" Review
Complete CHPS score board.
Plans, Elevations, Sections, Details of other
Food Service 100% design
Graphics & Signage 100% disciplines as may be needed by the size and
Theater Consultant 100% complexity of the project.
Kitchen Consultant 100%
Cover indicating District, project name &
Specifications 100%
address, architect's
name & address, license number, professional
seal and signature
Clearly described scope of work in Division 1,
Section 01 1100
Set of District Guide Specifications with Table
of Contents and
Technical Sections required for the project,
edited in MS Word
whith track changes on to reflect the specific
work of the project, plus
additional sections to recognize unique
materials or assemblies.
Specify two or more manufacturers for each
product.
Verify most current version of the Guide
Specifications is used. Do not

change the LAUSD issue date.
6 sets including General Conditions (7 if
project has a kitchen)
Other Documents:
DSA Aplication 3 Sets. Completed and signed by the Architect
Form of Record
Scope of work clearly described, identifying all
new buildings and uses
Coordinate required fees with DSA and
LAUSD Project Managers
SP3A Building Area Diagrams 2 Sets.
Check Lists for DSA Submittal: 2 Sets each.

DSA Structural Requirements All documents checked to address
"Checklists"
DSA Fire and Life Safety referenced & attached.
DSA Local Fire Authority Approval
1 set of Construction Documents and Title 24
DSA Energy Review electronic
data input
Calculations: 2 Sets each.
Final Calculations (see "Structural
Structural Engineering Requirements Checklist")
"Testing and Inspection" List
Final Energy Calculations & Compliance
HVAC Engineering Forms (Title 24)
Electrical Engineering Final Energy Calculations & Compliance
Forms (Title 24)
(Coordinate and bind with Mechanical
Engineering Calcs)
Reports and Approvals: 1 Set each.
Soils Report
Local Fire Authority Approval block signed by Fire Dept.
Approval representative, and showing
fire mains, valves, hydrants, connections,
access drives
Product
Information: 2 Sets each.
Equipment catalog data indicating dimensions,
Mechanical
weights,
corner weight distribution and center of gravity
locations
Catalog Data on vibration isolators and seismic
restraints
Struct'l calculations on vibration isolators,
seismic restraints
and equipment anchorage
(Submit all above with plans in a binder with
proper reference to the plans.)
Cut sheets of all Plumbing Fixtures for
Plumbing Accessibility Review
Electrical Fire Alarm System Manual containing:

Cut sheets and CSFM Listing sheets of all fire-
alarm devices, with index
F.A. System Devices Symbol List
Cut sheets for Assistive-Listening System of
Autonomous PA/ Sound
Systems for Auditorium, Gymnasium, and
Multi-Purpose Room
Cost Estimate 6 Sets.
Detailed account of CHPS Points achieved in
Savings by Design Savings by Design Contract
Incentive Program
50% C.D.Review All comments and drawings with responses to
Comments each comment
Book 4: Submittal Requirements 4.5 Checklist of Offs-Site Work, Utilities and Easements
4.5 CHECKLIST OF OFF-SITE WORK, UTILITIES &

EASEMENTS
(Provide details on a separate sheet)
PROJECT TITLE PROJECT NO.
Telephone No.
ARCHITET
CONSULTANS
CIVIL
MECHANICL
ELECTRICAL
Needed Coordinated
Agency Consulted Date
Y/N Y N N/A
Street Dedications & Alley City-Dept. of
Vacations Transportation
Widening “
Cul-de-sac “
Corner Cuts “
Bus Turn-outs “
Transit shelter est. “
City – Dept. of
Street Improvements
Transportation
Widening (Check all
“
streets abutting school)
Cul-de-sac “
Bus Turn Out “
Bus Pad “
City – Dept. of
Sidewalk
Transportation
Repair
Replacement
Pave Parkway
City
Street Trees Planning/Zoning
Street Tree Div.
City
Street Lighting Planning/Zoning
Street Lighting Div
Handicapped Ramps (4 City
sides of each corner) Planning/Zoning
Building Setbacks
Front
Side
Rear
Building to Building
Fencing Requirement
Book 4: Submittal Requirements 4.5 Checklist of Offs-Site Work, Utilities and Easements
Fire Truck Access Fire Dept

Fire Hydrants Fire Dept
Coordinated
Utilities Agency Consulted Needed Y/N Date
Y N N/A
Electrical
Overhead Power Pole
Underground Manhole
Transformer
Guy Wires & Poles
Telephone
Overhead Poles
Underground Manhole
Cable TV
Overhead Power
Poles
Water
Gas
Storm Drain
Sanitary Drain
Fuel Line
Sidewalks: Provide repairs and improvements as needed for safe access, including improvements for
new driveway, etc.
Street Trees: Minimum of 1 tree per 25 linear feet of frontage recommended. Verify requirement
and types of trees acceptable by the City Street tree Division
Street Lighting: No Mandatory requirement except as may be required for street dedications and
alley vacations. Contract City Street Lighting Division
Driveway location: Transportation Department would prefer access driveway to a site garage at a minimum of
150 feet from curb. Verify requirements.
Building Setbacks: Identify zoning requirement for building setbacks in addition to Fire Department and code
requirements.
Fire Truck Access: Verify with the Fire Department where access should be located. Ensure proper paving
thickness is identified on the drawings.
Fire Hydrant: Contact the Fire Department and determine if new fire hydrants are required and coordinate
locations if new hydrants are required.
“A” Permit Identify if “A” permit is required. Identify scope of work if the “A” permit is required.
“B” Permit Identify if “B” permit is required. Identify scope of work if the “B” permit is required.
Book 4: Submittal Requirements 4.6 Civil Design Check list
100% Submittal
School: ____________________________________________
Architect: ____________________________________________
Project Name: ___________________________________________
Engineer: ________________________________________________
*This form shall be completed and submitted with the submittal package. The submittal will be deemed
incomplete without the completed form.
Check Items
Complete.
Items required for submittal:
A. Demolition Plan:
1. Show removal of all concrete or masonry walls, fences, curbs, gutters, trees,
asphaltic concrete pavement, planting, debris, pipes and all structures
required to be removed.
2. Coordinate plumbing, electrical, architectural and mechanical drawings and
specifications with the civil engineering drawings to ensure that there are no
conflicts or interferences.
3. Cover removals in the specifications.
4. Show all pertinent information which will aid contractor in making removals.
B. Paving Plan:
1. Thickness and types of all paving and base course. Use thickness directed by
the district.
2. Paving limits.
3. Concrete landings at all exterior doorways of buildings, not opening onto
concrete areas, for installation of door stops.
4. Contraction and expansion joints and pattern for score lines in concrete
areas and dimension for same. In walks on adobe soils omit expansion
joints. Use continuous mild steel reinforcement instead. (No wire mesh)
C. Grading Plan:
1. New and existing contours in and adjacent to work area.

2. Benchmark. (Location and elevation)
3. Paving and grading limits.
4. Exterior door locations.
5. Finish elevations in paved areas to 0.01’.
6. Ridges, flow lines, grade changes and top and bottom of banks, indicate spot
elevations at changes in directions of above items.

7. Existing and finish contours at 0.5’ intervals except on high banks, where 5’-
0”, contours may be used.
8. Finish contours as straight lines. Free hand or curved lines are not
acceptable.
9. Wall elevations at top, ends, at slope changes and at abrupt changes in
elevations.
10. Downspouts and drinking fountain locations and label.
11. Date of topographical survey.
12. Spot elevations and arrows indicating direction of slope are not acceptable
on working drawings.
13. Existing manholes, yard boxes, vaults, and other surface structures which
may require adjustments to fit new finish grade.
14. Depth and location of existing underground utility lines if information is
available.
15. Floor drains in lunch area and indicate top of grate elevation.
16. Submit final quantity estimates of earthwork volumes.
D. Storm Drain Plan:
1. Complete storm drain system with type of pipes, sizes slopes, invert
elevations, catch basin top and invert elevations and downspout lines.
2. Locations, details, and construction detail for manholes, junction chambers,
transition structures, collars, easements, connections to existing storm drain
lines, outlet structures, and other storm drain structures.
3. Storm drain system on grading plan, provided plan is not unduly cluttered.
4. Profiles of storm drain pipes, and for drain pipes 12” or larger, when
conflicts with other utilities are possible.
E. Miscellaneous
1. Miscellaneous details on separate sheet or on any civil engineering drawings

where space is available.
2. Details of catch basin, curbs, walls, cleanouts, headers, storm drain
structures, headwalls, encasements, mow strips, gutters, and other pertinent
details.
3. Plan and profile of retaining walls, concrete block fences and respective
footings. Coordinate retaining wall and footing elevations with structural
engineer. Structural details of such structures to be indicated on structural
drawings. Plan and profile may be indicated on architectural or structural
drawings provided that dimensions and elevations required for staking are
indicated.
F. Special Earthwork Plan:
1. Limits of areas where special earthwork is required such as removal of loose

fills trash or dump areas, or loose earth in basements, swimming pools tanks,
etc.
2. This information is usually determined from soil reports and information
supplied by the District.
3. Limits of special earthwork described above are denoted by term “bottom of
excavated plane” and is abbreviated to “B.E.P.” B.E.P. elevations, locations

and dimensions should be indicated on grading plan if it can be clearly
indicated. Data shall originate from the structural engineer in coordination
with the soil engineer. The B.E.P. and specifications for special earthwork
will be reviewed by the District structural engineer.
4. A special paragraph shall be included for specifications for over excavation.
G. Staking Plan:
1. Building ties, overall property dimensions and building corner dimensions

required for staking. Coordinates system for staking required for secondary
schools.
2. Controls for major improvements such as wall, banks, athletic fields, etc.,
shall be adequately tied downed by dimensions and coordinates.
3. If above data is indicated on other that civil engineering drawings, it shall be
checked by the civil; engineer.
H. Logs Of Soil Boring:
1. Show logs of soil borings and indicate locations on plan. Datum of boring
samples must be coordinated with datum of grading plan.
2. Logs of soil borings may be reproduced from the soils reports onto standard
size vellum as part of set of drawings. Location of soil borings may likewise
be reproduced on same sheet.
I. Off-Site Drawings:
1. Prepare drawing in accordance with the requirements of the agencies having

jurisdiction.
2. See attachment to this chapter, “checklist of offsite work, utilities &
easements”. This checklist must be completed and submitted to the design
and construction branch with the 100% construction documents.
Book 4: Submittal Requirements 4.7 Plumbing and Mechanical Design Checklist
100% SUBMITTAL
ITEMS REQUIRED FOR SUBMITTAL CHECK ITEMS COMPLETE
FOR ALL DRAWINGS
1. Drawing Title
2. Scale
3. Sheet Title
4. Project Title
5. Sheet Number
6. Company Sticker
7. Registration Seal
PLANS
A. General
1. North Arrow.
2. Key Plan. (where applicable)
3. Match Line. (where applicable)
4. Column line numbers.
5. Room names and numbers.
6. Floor elevations indicated at least on first floor and basement floor
plans.
7. General notes and reference to them on each drawing.
8. Legend of symbols and abbreviations.
9. Detail references.
10. Equipment anchorage details and / or reference to the structural
drawings. Structural drawings shall address anchorage of all equipment.
11. Coordinated with structural drawings. Mechanical drawings shall address
space coordination with structural members.
12. Coordinated with Electrical Drawings. All mechanical and plumbing
equipment that requires power must be addressed on the electrical
drawings. All transformers and other heat dissipating equipment must
be addressed on the mechanical drawings.
13. Coordinated with Architectural elevations, furniture plans etc. so that
thermostats and registers are not behind doors or on chalkboards etc.
14. Spell check all drawings with room for proper service.
15. Indicate service clearances on drawings.
B. Floor Plans
1. All air inlets and outlets must be identified for service, type, throw
pattern and capacity by both symbols and notes.
2. All ducts must have sizes indicated.
3. No ducts will straddle walls.
4. No ducts will cross a wall at a slant unless absolutely unavoidable.
5. No ducts will cross a fire-rated wall at a slant.
6. Manual volume dampers at all branches.
7. All equipment must be identified as follows:
a. Equipment that is specified in a schedule must be identified by the

symbol indicated in the schedule.
b. Equipment described in the legend must be identified by the

symbol indicated in the legend.
c. Equipment that is neither in the schedules or the legend must be

fully identified and described in detail.
8. Preferably no equipment except plain ducts are to be located above non-
lift up type ceilings.
9. No unrelated ductwork across electrical rooms or computer rooms if
possible.
10. No thermostats on exterior walls.
11. Abbreviations indicated in legend.
12. Indicate access panels and doors.
13. No air inlet / outlet openings close to fans, air handlers or air
conditioning units. Provide some ductwork in between for sound
attenuation.
14. Whether sufficient space is available to accommodate ductwork and
equipment with room for proper service.
15. Indicate service clearances on the drawings.
C. Floor Plans (Piping)

1. No pipes across electrical rooms and computer rooms.
2. No valves above non-lift up ceilings if possible.
3. No straddling of walls with pipes.
4. No crossing walls at a slant.
5. No unnecessary penetration of demising walls.
6. Zone valves provided for each floor or logical zone.
7. Expansion loops and anchors for straight runs longer than 50’-0”.
8. Seismic joints and anchors at seismic separations.
9. Leak containment troughs for pipes that have to pass through electrical
rooms.
10. All pipes and equipment identified.
11. All pipe sizes indicated.
12. Indicate access panels / doors.
13. Reference notes between plans and risers
14. Reference notes between plans and plot (site) plan.
15. Invert elevations of house sewers leaving the building.
16. In general, piping should be run to clear steel and concrete beams.
Where absolutely necessary, piping may be run through beams. Where it
is necessary to clip beam flanges or run piping through the web of steel
beams or through concrete beams, permission from the structural
engineer must be obtained and confirmed; and all such special
conditions should be clearly noted on the drawings.
17. Note piping rising within a story as "rise." Note that rising to the story
above as "UP." Piping dropping within a story should be noted as
"drop." That dropping to the story below should be noted as "Dn."
Piping at the ceiling should be noted as "at ceiling" when exposed and
as "in ceiling" when concealed. Piping under the floor, other than
obvious fixture drain lines, should be noted as "under floor," "at ceiling
below," or "in ceiling below," as required.
18. Verify wall thickness where 3” or larger pipes risers are located inside
walls.
19. Verify column structural construction before locating risers inside
column sheathing.
20. Verify all utilities including domestic water, fire service, sewer, storm
drain and gas are addressed on the plumbing and civil site plans as
applicable.
PLUMBING (DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER SYSTEMS)

P1. Indicate the job address on each page of the plan.
P2. Plans shall not be smaller than 1/8 inch per foot scale.
P3. Provide ¼” scale blow-ups of toilets, kitchens and laboratories except for
single closet toilets.
P4. Show all pipe sizes on the plan.
P5. Provide riser diagrams for hot & cold water systems, waste & vent systems,
storm drainage systems and fuel gas systems.
P6. Provide site water piping plans. If provided on civil drawings co-ordinate and
indicate proper reference.
P7. Indicate size and location of water meter. If provided on civil drawings co-
ordinate and indicate proper reference.
P8. Install a shut-off valve in the domestic water supply to each building in a vault
outside the building as specified.
P9. The riser diagram shall indicate all the fixtures served, the pipe size and the
fixture unit count on each leg of pipe, pressure regulators, back flow
prevention devices, and water meter if applicable.
P10. Show all new and all existing devices located between the city water service
and the building plumbing system that cause pressure losses or gains in the
system. Devices shall include but not be limited to pumps, water softeners,
and sub meters. If site water distribution is indicated on civil drawings, make
proper references but water pressure loss calculations must be provided on
plans.
P11. State make(s), model(s), and size(s), of the above items and indicate if they are
new or existing.
P12. Provide manufacturer's specification sheets for such devices indicating the
pressure loss through the device(s) from 0 flow to the rated flow.
P13. Indicate on the plans, all fixture unit loads in addition to the loads of the new
fixtures including but not limited to, existing fixtures, irrigation load, make up
water for cooling towers and boilers, demand for future use, and any other
uses.
P14. Show the future water demand where applicable.
P15. Indicate maximum and minimum water supply pressure on the plans.
P16. Provide hydraulic calculations for sizing the cold and hot water systems on
plans. Also refer to P-10.
P17. The minimum water pressure supplied to the most remote fixture shall be not
less than the requirements of that fixture and not less then 15 PSI, whichever
is higher.
P18. Indicate pressure-regulating valves on the plans where maximum water
pressure is more than 80 psi.
P19. Verify whether a reduced pressure backflow device at the meter by the local
water purveyor and provide if required comply with LADWP Rule 16-D.
P20. Show size of water meter on the riser diagram.
P21. Provide a temperature & pressure relief valve on the water heater. The valve
shall discharge to an approved location. Pressure relief valves for water heaters
installed inside a building shall discharge to a floor sink or service sink.
P22. Provide an approved thermal expansion tank at the water heater.
P23. Indicate make, model and size of the thermal expansion tank.
WASTE AND VENT SYSTEMS

W1. Show the slope of the horizontal drainage piping.
W2. Show size and location of the sewer main in the street. If provided on civil
drawings co-ordinate and indicate proper reference.
W3. Provide suds relief for laundry washers where applicable.
W4. The aggregate cross sectional area of the vents shall not be less than that of
the largest required building sewer.
W5. Obtain a Bureau of Sanitation permit or clearance for Industrial Waste. (Fat,
oils, grease & corrosive laboratory waste)
W6. Show details for the island venting.

W7. Install a clean out every 100 feet or a manhole every 300 feet in the building
sewer (site sewer) in straight runs and for each aggregate horizontal change in
direction exceeding 135°.
W8. Provide yoke vents where required.
W9. Provide lot subdivision. The building sewer shall not cross lot lines.
W10. All wet vented fixtures shall be within the same story.
W11. Combination waste and vent system is only allowed where structural
conditions preclude the installation of a conventional system.
W12. Provide a separate vent for each waste branch line exceeding 15' in length.
W13. The minimum area of any vent installed in a combination waste and vent
system shall be at least 1/2 the cross sectional area of the drainpipe served.
W14. Each drainpipe and each trap, in a combination waste and vent system, shall
be 2 pipe sizes larger than the sizes required by UPC.
W15. No vertical waste pipes, toilets or urinals are allowed a combination waste and
vent system.
W16. Relief vents shall be provided every 100' along the main.
W17. Show on plans type & use of each fixture served by the combination waste
and vent system.
W18. Provide a vent downstream of the furthest fixture served by the combination
waste and vent system.
W19. The discharge line from the ejector shall be provided with an accessible check
valve and gate valve. The gate valve shall be located on the discharge side of
the check valve. Gate valve and check valve shall be located outside the pit.
W20. Provide detail of sewage ejector on plans with valves, fittings and sump
complete with elevations of inlet pipe; pump on/off and high water alarm
levels.
W21. Provide dual pumps each capable of handling the load independently.
W22. Provide airtight cover for the sump.
W23. Sump(s) shall be provided with a vent pipe that extends through the roof.
W24. Show load discharging into the sump on plans.
W25. Indicate pump schedule complete with make, model, flow rate, head,
horsepower and electrical characteristics of pump on plan.
W26. State length of pipe & elevation difference between the bottom of the sump
and the gravity line.
W27. Sumps receiving waste from water closets shall have minimum 3-inch
discharge.
W28. Allow two fixtures units for each gallon per minus discharging from the
sewage ejector.
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS

G1. Indicate on the plans the total developed length of the system from the meter
or regulator to the most remote gas outlet.
G2. Provide a separate gas shutoff valve for each logical part of the system to
allow independent service of connected equipment and devices.
G3. Indicate on the plans the hourly volume (CFH) of gas required at each outlet.
G4. Provide an approved type seismic gas shutoff valve.
G5. Show on plan size, make and model of seismic gas shut off valve.
G6. The seismic shut off shall be installed rigidly to the exterior of the building or
structure containing the fuel gas piping.
G7. No gas pipes shall be installed under a new building.
G8. Provide a letter from the gas company stating that they will deliver the desired
pressure and volume of gas at 100% submittal.
G9. Show on plans size, make, model, orifice size, spring number, pressure at the
inlet of the pressure regulator, and setting of pressure regulator.
G10. An approved gas valve shall be installed immediately preceding each regulator.
G11. Pressure regulator shall be vented to the outside of the building.
G12. Provide engineering calculations used in sizing the piping system on plans.
RAIN WATER SYSTEMS

R1. Indicate on riser diagram the area (ft2) covered by each drain.
R2. Indicate on the plan the slope of horizontal piping.
R3. Indicate overflow drain. Otherwise, note the reasons for not having them such
as scuppers on plans.
R4. Roof drain and over flow drains shall be piped independently to the outside of
the building.
R5. The discharge line from the sump shall be provided with an accessible
backwater valve.
R6. Backwater valve shall be located outside the pit.
R7. Sump(s) shall be made of concrete, metal or other approved materials.
Fiberglass sumps shall be approved by the Los Angeles city Mechanical
Testing Laboratory.
R8. Provide dual sump pumps.
R9. Minimum size of pump shall be 15 gpm.
R10. Provide an airtight cover. (94.1101.5.3)
R11. The sump pit shall be at least 15 inches in diameter and 18 inches in depth.
R12. The discharge line from the sump shall be at least 1 1/2 inch diameter.
R13. Where the pump discharge line connects to a horizontal drain line, such
connection shall be made from the top through a wye branch fitting.
R14. The lowest inlet to the sump shall have a minimum clearance of 2 inches
above the high water level.
R15. Sump(s) shall be provided with a vent pipe, which shall extend a minimum of
six feet above the solid sump cover.
R16. Show load discharging into the sump.
R17. Indicate pump schedule complete with make, model, flow rate, head,
horsepower and electrical characteristics of pump on plan.
R18. Provide detail of sump pump on plans with valves, fittings and sump complete
with elevations of inlet pipe; pump on/off and high water alarm levels.
R19. State length of pipe & elevation difference between the bottom of the sump
and the gravity line.
SUBSURFACE DRAINS
S1. Show subsurface drainage on the floor plans.
S2. State piping material.
S3. Non-perforated piping shall be made of metal as in sanitary drainage systems.
S4. Provide a statement from a civil engineer showing the required flow.
S5. Either terminate the subsurface drains to the city storm drain, or provide a soil
report showing that there is no continuously flowing springs or ground water.
AIR CONDITIONING
A1. Show job address on plans.
A2. Plans shall be clearly legible, and at a scale no smaller than 1/8 inch per foot.
A3. Show equipment schedule on the plans.
A4. Show the room names and room numbers of each area.
A5. Show all fire rated walls and ceilings on plans.
A6. Indicate if rated corridors are tunnel type or full height.
A7. Provide a primary and a secondary condensate drains and secondary drains
pans for cooling coils installed above the ceiling or in furred spaces. The drain
from the secondary drain pan shall terminate in a visible location.
A8. Duct shall be constructed in accordance with chapter 6 of the Uniform
Mechanical Code.
A9. Provide duct type smoke detectors in the supply air duct: in every air
conditioning system in excess of 2,000 cfm. Multiple units serving the same
room, or having common return air plenum or a common outside air duct are
considered to be one system for the determination of the cfm. If the area
smoke detection system is of the complete area coverage type, the area
detectors may be used for shutdown.
A10. Show all fire rated walls and ceilings on planes.
A11. Listed fire dampers and smoke dampers are required to be installed at all duct
penetrations through area separation and occupancy separation walls. Indicate
smoke detectors that will operate these dampers on plans.
A12. Listed fire dampers and smoke dampers are required to be installed at all duct
penetrations through fire rated shafts.
A13. Listed fire dampers are required to be installed at all due penetrations through
fire rated ceilings.
A14. Provide a copy of the manufacturer catalogs for the mechanical equipment
used.
A15. Provide combination smoke/fire dampers to isolate ducts serving rated

corridors.
A16. Provide combination smoke/fire dampers in ducts penetrating elevator
lobbies.
A17. Provide a permanent roof access.
TITLE 24
A18. Provide outside air per current Title 24 requirements.
A19. Make-up air shall be electrically interlocked with their associated exhaust
systems.
A20. Back draft dampers shall be provided in outdoors air supply and exhaust
systems.
A21. Provide economizer in every cooling unit exceeding 2,500 cfm.
(3 Tons capacity for roof top units.)
A22. Show thermostats for each unit or zone control device.
A23. Provide complete Title 24 Compliance Documentation with the Performance
Compliance Approach.
VENTILATION SYSTEMS
GENERAL
V1. Exhaust ducts under positive pressure and venting systems shall not extend
into or pass through ducts or plenums.
V2. Show location & sizes of all ventilation ducts & openings.
V3. Environmental exhausts duct shall terminate outside the building and shall
be equipped with a back draft damper.
V4. Exhaust outlets shall be 10 feet from property line: 3 feet from exterior
roof/wall; 10 feet from opening into the building: 10 feet above grade.
V5. Make-up air shall be provided for all rooms with exhaust.
TOILET ROOMS
V6. Toilet rooms shall have 10 air changes per hour.
V7. Provide a duct type smoke detector in the toilet exhaust system exceeding
2,000 cubic feet per minute.
V8. Provide combination fire smoke dampers where the toilet exhaust ducts
penetrate a fire rated shaft. (If the area smoke detection system is of the
complete area coverage type, the area detectors may be used for shutdown.)
V9. Provide combination fire smoke dampers at every penetration of area
separation and occupancy separation wall.
CORRIDOR VENTILATION
V10. Rooms adjacent to the corridor shall not draw air from the corridor or transfer
air to the corridor except for small quantities as exfiltration into a negative
pressure toilet with make up air supply.
GARAGE VENTILATION
V11. Provide calculations on plans showing that the exhaust system is capable of
uniformly exhausting 1.5 cfm per square foot of gross floor area.
V12. Provide make up air.
V13. Show the termination of the garage exhaust. Exhaust outlet shall terminate not
less than 10 feet from property line, 3 feet from exterior wall or roof, 10 feet
from openings into the building, 10 feet above adjoining grade.
V14. Do not connect any other ventilation system to the garage ventilation system.
KITCHEN HOODS
H1. Provide kitchen lay out plans showing location of hoods ducts, shafts, make-
up air, operable windows and their area, and the volume of the kitchen.
H2. Provide roof plans showing the location of the kitchen exhaust blower,
property line and any openings into the building.
H3. Provide make-up air.
H4. Provide elevations showing finished floor, cooking equipment, grease exhaust
hood, distance between cooking equipment and grease filters, overhang,
finished ceiling, flushing, fire rated shaft, clearance between duel and shaft,
cleanouts, slope of horizontal ducts, roof, blower, diverter, distance of outlet
termination above roof.
H5. Each exhaust outlet within a hood shall serve not more than a 12-foot section
of hood unless the hood is U.L. listed to exceed.
H6. Duct system shall have a slope not less than 1/4 inch per linear foot toward
the hood or toward an approved grease reservoir. When horizontal ducts
exceed 75 feet in length, the slope shall not be less than 1 inch per linear foot.
The bottom of duct elevations shall be indicated on plans to verify clearance
from structural members, etc.
H7. Duct enclosures from the point of ceiling, wall or floor penetration shall be at
least one hour, except it shall be two-hour fire resistive construction in Type I
& II buildings.
H8. The duct enclosure shall be sealed around the duct at the point of penetration.
H9. A clearance of at least 3 inches and not more man 12 inches shall be
maintained between duct and enclosure.
H10. Air velocity within the duct system shall be not less than 1,500 feet per minute
and shall not exceed 2,500 ft/min.
H11. Exposed grease duct/hood systems serving a Type I hood shall have a
clearance from unprotected combustible construction of at least 18 inches.
Clearance may be reduced to not less than 3 inches when the combustible
construction is protected with material required for one-hour fire-resistive
construction.
H12. Hoods less than 12 inches from the ceiling or wall shall be flashed solidly with
materials as specified in CMC Sec.508.2.
H13. Exhaust outlets serving grease duct systems shall terminate above the roof
surface, 10 feet from property line, 10 feet from air intake openings and 10
feet above adjoining grade. Base of fan shall be 2 feet above roof surface.
H14. A grease gutter shall drain to a receptacle accessible for cleaning.
H15. Type I Hoods for use over solid-fuel cooking equipment shall be provided
with separate exhaust systems.
H16. Indicate on plans what provisions have been made for fire protection in the
hood and in the duct.
H17. The fire-extinguishing system shall be interconnected to the fuel or current
supply so that the fuel or current is automatically shut off to all equipment
under the hood when the system is actuated. Show controls on plans.
H18. The exhaust and make-up air systems shall be connected by electrical interlock
switch. Show controls on plans.
H19. Provide grease duct cleanouts per code.
FUME HOOD EXHAUST

H20. Motors for fans used to convey flammable vapors or dusts shall be located
outside the duct or shall be protected with approved shields and dust-
proofing.
H21. Motors and fans shall be accessible for servicing and maintenance.
H22. Parts of fans in contact with explosive or flammable vapors, fumes or dusts
shall be of nonferrous or non-sparking materials or their casing shall be lined
or constructed of such material.
H23. Both the fan and the casing shall be of non-sparking materials. When fans are
required to be spark resistant, their bearings shall not be within the air stream,
and all parts of the fan shall be grounded.
H24. The termination point for fume hood exhaust shall not be less than the
following:
1. 30 feet from property line
2. 10 feet from openings into the building
3. 6 feet from exterior walls or roofs
4. 30 feet from combustible walls or openings into a building which
are in the direction of the exhaust discharge
5. 10 feet above adjoining grade.
REFRIGERATION MACHINERY ROOM (Chiller Rooms)

M1. A 3 feet wide & 6 feet 8 inches high clearance shall be provided around at least
two sides of all moving machinery.
M2. Door(s) shall swing in the direction of exit.
M3. Provide 2 separate exits.
M4. Provide calculation showing that the capacity of the exhaust system complies
with section.
M5. A switch of the break-glass type, controlling the emergency purge ventilation
system, shall be provided adjacent to and outside of the exit door.
M6. Switch controlling fans providing ventilation shall be in glass-covered
enclosures and shall be located adjacent to and outside of the exit door.
M7. Show make-up air inlets and exhaust outlets on plan.
M8. Make-up air shall be from outside of the building and shall be equipped with a
back draft damper.
M9. Exhaust shall be discharged at least 20 feet from property line. Show that on
plans.
M10. Only equipment essential to the operation of refrigeration system shall be
allowed in the machinery room.
M11. State type of refrigerant.
M12. Show location of refrigerant-vapors detectors.
FIRE PUMP & GENERATOR ROOM

M13. Show engine exhaust pipe.
M14. Show clearances for the engine exhaust pipe. It shall be a minimum of 18
inches from combustible construction and 2 inches from non-combustible
construction.
M15. Show termination of engine exhaust pipe.
M16. The engine exhaust pipe shall extend above the roof surface, and shall be
legated not less than 12 inches from any openings into the building, 2 feet
from an adjoin building and 7 feet above grade when located adjacent a public
walkway.
M17. Enclose the engine exhaust pipe in a fire rated shaft.
M18. Show combustion air.
M19. Dampers are not allowed in combustion-air ducts.
M20. Show room ventilation.
M21. The room ventilation shall be added to the combust air.
M22. Show room ventilation exhaust.
M23. Show point of termination outside of the building of the room ventilation.
M24. Combustion air shall not be drawn from the garage.
Book 4: Submittal Requirements 4.8 Electrical Design Checklist
100% Submittal
School: ____________________________________________
Architect: ____________________________________________
Project name: ____________________________________________
Engineer: ____________________________________________
*This form shall be completed and submitted with the submittal package. The submittal will be deemed
incomplete without the completed form.
Check
Items
Items required for submittal: Complete
J. Single Line Diagram:
5. Voltage, amperage, phase and wires shown.

6. Available fault current shown at each equipment bus.
7. Circuit breaker frame and trip size.
8. Switch rating, fuse size and type of fuse.
9. Conduit, wire size, length and voltage drop of each feeder.
10. Load summary of main distribution switchboard showing 30% future growth spare
capacity above connected load. Provide the space in main switchboard for future
growth.
11. Obtain written approval from the electric utility company for new electrical services
planned for the facility.
12. Ground fault protection on main for 480/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 1000 amps or
higher main switchboards.
13. Ground fault protection on each feeder of 480/277 volts 3 phase, 4 wire rated at
800 amps or more.
14. Location of existing utility facilities such as power poles to be removed where
applicable.
15. Identify electronic grade panel boards intended for computer system power. If
these panels are serviced via a step down transformer, then transformer must be K-
Rated.
16. Step down transformer are k-rated.
K. Site Plan:
1. Location of electric utility equipment, concrete pad, vault, power pole, underground
conduits, and main switchboard, in compliance with serving utility company
requirements, industry standards, and applicable codes.

2. Telephone facilities, as per approved requirements.
3. Cable TV facilities, as per approved requirements.
4. Location of existing underground utilities (if applicable), where trenching is
required.
5. Underground feeders and branch circuits.
6. Terminal cabinets and underground conduit runs for P.A., fire alarm, TV, CCTV,
clock, intrusion detection, and computer systems.
7. Location of other outdoor equipment such as transformers, motor control centers,
light standards, etc.
8. Building names or numbers, scale, north arrow and streets.
9. Minimum underground conduit size shall be two inch for power system, two inch
for clock system, four inch for fiber optic backbone interduct system, and three
inch for all other signal systems, except for end runs to buildings containing
maximum two classrooms which are not used as a distribution point to other small
buildings.
10. Provide spare underground conduits for power, and signal systems, minimum one
3 inch for power and three inch for signal system, except for end runs to buildings
described in item 9.
11. Provide properly sized pull boxes, or manholes and show their locations.
12. Names and telephone numbers of utility service planners.
L. Power Requirements
17. Front elevation of main distribution switchboard.

18. Distribution panel schedules including load calculations for each building.
19. Grounding schematic diagram and details.
20. Feeders and branch circuits clearly shown on plans.
21. Provide conduits, starters and relays shown on mechanical control diagrams as
items by Division 16. Coordinate with the mechanical engineer.
22. Equipment ratings are the same as those shown on mechanical and plumbing
drawings.
23. Fused disconnects at motorized equipment.
24. Ground fault circuit protection for receptacles located in toilets and outdoor.
25. Provide outdoor receptacles (W.P., GFCI) on new buildings. A switch shall be
provided in janitor room to switch all exterior outlets.
26. Separate branch circuits for the supply of lights, fans, and other outlets in or on
each elevator car.
27. Feeders and branch circuits sized for the intended load and not less than 125% of
continuous loads.
28. Provide main circuit breaker in the distribution panelboard or main panelboard of
each building to satisfy code requirements for main service disconnect at each
building. Provide main circuit breaker for the main panelboard serving each floor
of the building. Subpanels located in the same electrical rooms need not to have
main circuit breaker.
29. Properly sized grounding electrode conductors.
30. Properly sized equipment grounding conductors for equipment and raceway
systems.
31. Outdoor and underground raceways shall carry a properly sized equipment
grounding conductor.
32. Provide adequate ventilations in electrical equipment rooms. Coordinate with
mechanical engineer for the heat dissipation data of equipment such as

transformers.
33. Locate data equipment, computer networking racks and all electronic equipment in
air conditioned rooms. The air conditioning shall be available 24 hours. Coordinate
with mechanical engineer.
34. Indicate circuit designations near outlets and identify all homeruns.
35. Provide required working space, adequate illumination and access to work space for
electrical and signal equipment.
36. A single receptacle installed on an individual branch circuit shall have an ampere
rating of not less than that of the branch circuit.
37. A building or other structure shall be supplied by only one set of service drop or
service lateral conductors; except where electronic grade panel is installed, a second
feeder may provide power for computers.
38. Provide weatherproof, GFCI receptacles within 25 feet of all roof mounted
equipment.
39. Provide primary and secondary protection for each transformer.
40. Panelboards supplying power to motor loads shall be fully rated for available fault
current at the panelboard’s bus; series rating is not acceptable per U.L. standards.
41. Provide panel schedules for power showing bus size, feeder size, main circuit
breaker/lug size, top/bottom fed, bus bracing, and short circuit rating of circuit
breakers.
42. For electronic grade panels provide double sized neutrals, filter and surge
suppression modules per specification.
M. Lighting Requirements:
5. Lighting fixture mounting details.

6. Provide emergency lighting in corridor, multi-purpose rooms, auditoriums,
gymnasiums, cafeteria, classrooms of larger than 1000 square feet and all other
areas required by code. A separate central battery/inverter system shall be sized for
each building to provide emergency power for lighting.
7. Provide illuminated exit signs at each exit. Exit signs shall be powered from normal
and emergency sources.
8. Show lighting fixture schedule.
9. Use lighting fixtures that are specified in District’s standard specification.
10. Lights in classrooms, offices and work rooms shall be controlled by motion sensors
with separate light level controller (or built in light sensors) and switches as
required by title 24. Separate switches shall be provided for daylight areas. Rooms
of more than 100 square feet shall have double switching.
11. Lighting branch circuits shall be sized for 125% of continuous load.
12. Show number of conductors, conductor size, and conduit size for each lighting
branch circuit.
13. Show lighting panelboard schedules showing bus size, feeder size, main circuit
breaker/lug size, top/bottom fed, bus bracing, and short circuit rating of circuit
breakers.
14. Submit lighting calculations and energy compliance forms as required by the
California Energy Commission, Title 24.
N. Signal Requirements For Public Address, Telephone Fire Alarm, Television,

CCTV, Security Intrusion Alarm, Clock And Computer Systems:
4. Install all signal system headend equipment in LAN room. Do not locate electrical
equipment and panels in LAN room with the exception of the electronic grade
panel feeding equipment in the LAN room.
5. All components, equipment, terminal cabinets, instruments, conduit, wiring and
cables must be shown in plans.
6. District standard specifications must be edited to comply with the specific job
requirements.
7. Do not combine fire alarm wiring with any other signal wiring.
8. Show riser diagrams of each signal system.
9. Provide main terminal cabinet in administration building and at least one terminal
cabinet at each building for each signal system, except for computer networking
system, where IDF are installed at each building.
10. Provide two hour uninterruptible power supply for PABX, and PA/Intercom
systems.
11. Security intrusion alarm and fire alarm systems shall contain integral emergency
power supplies per specification.
12. Computer networking system shall have rack mounted UPS system.
13. Clearly identify all cables (or wires) used for each signal system.
14. Clearly identify all signal system components.
15. Provide zone schedules for security systems on drawings and specifications.
16. Use ¾” conduit as the minimum size for each signal system.
17. Fire alarm system components include:
a. Control panel.
b. Annunciator panel.
c. Bells (part of sprinkler system)
d. Horns, strobes, combination horns/strobes.
e. Pull stations.
f. Smoke detectors.
g. Duct smoke detectors.
h. Heat detectors.
i. Flow switches.
j. Tamper switches.
k. Conduit, wiring and terminal cabinets.
l. Interconnection to Public Address system for interlocking the manual and
automatic bell or tone.
m. Ventilation systems where required for the purpose of fan shutdown.
n. Damper control or smoke management system.
o. Water based fire sprinkler system.
p. Chemical fire extinguisher systems.
q. Autonomous PA System(s).
r. List of all interactive components
s. Connections to PA system, program controller for class change signal.
t. Fire alarm shall report water flow to central station only.
18. Fire alarm system and all initiating devices shall be addressable.
19. Fire alarm system shall not be interconnected to any of the following systems:
a. Sump warning systems
b. Carbon monoxide detection systems.
c. Methane gas detection systems.
d. Elevator car alarm bell circuit.
e. Any other unrelated system.
20. Fire alarm drawings shall include complete submittal information required for DSA
approval including battery calculation for all control and transponder/expander

panels and voltage drop calculation for branch circuits as required by specification.
21. The design of the fire alarm system shall be based on a radial system with a main
control panel in the administration buildings, and network nodes or slave panels in
other buildings, as specified in section 28 3100.
22. Security alarm systems components include:
a. Control panel.
b. Annunciator panel.
c. Motion sensors.
d. Door switches.
e. Terminal cabinets.
f. Cable tray, conduit and cables.
23. Public address intercommunication and telephone systems components include:
a. P.A. console.
b. PABX.
c. Emergency power supply.
d. Telephone instruments.
e. Speakers.
f. Terminal cabinets.
g. Cable tray, conduit and cables.
24. Television system components include:
a. Head and equipment installed in rack.
b. Terminal outlets.
c. Terminal cabinets.
d. Line extension amplifiers.
e. Cable tray, conduit and cables.
25. Clock system components include:
a. Clock controller.
b. Boosters.
c. Clocks.
d. Terminal cabinets.
e. Conduit and wires.
f. Program controller for class change signals.
g. Interactive components with fire alarm and P.A. systems.
26. Computer system components include:
a. Server rack, MDF, IDF, and LDF, and CLDF racks with related switching
equipment and patch panels.
b. Cable tray, conduit and cables.
c. Wall and floor boxes.
d. Fiber optic backbone system shall be used to connect IDF’s, LDF’s, and
CLDF’s to MDF located in LAN room.
e. Cat 5e cables shall be used for horizontal wiring not to exceed 90 meters.
27. Conductors and cables for fire alarm, and clock systems shall be enclosed in
separate conduit systems.
28. Conductors and cables for security intrusion alarm, television, public address,
telephone, and computer systems shall be placed in a three section wire mesh cable
tray system with dividers where possible, placed in separate conduit sleeves in
accessible areas, and in separate underground conduits in duct banks.
O. General Requirements:
1. Symbol list.
2. General notes.
3. Each project must include a site plan.
4. Provide the following details:
a. Lighting fixture mounting.
b. Floodlight standard and footing.
c. Roof receptacle.
d. Transformer pad and manhole.
e. Precast concrete pull boxes for power and signal systems.
f. Ground rod and precast concrete box.
g. Underground conduit stub-up.
h. Conduit roof penetration.
i. Disconnect switch mounting.
j. Electrical equipment room.
k. Switchboard pad.
l. P.A. handset and speaker mounting.
m. P.A. rack elevation and mounting details.
n. TV elevation and mounting rack details.
o. MDF, IDF, LDF, and CLDF rack details.
p. Motion sensor mounting.
q. Fire alarm system devices point to point connection details, fire alarm control
panels, annunciator panel, and remote power supply mounting details.
r. Security alarm system control panel, and devices mounting details.
s. Television system equipment mounting details.
t. CCTV equipment system mounting details.
u. Front elevation of P.A. system console.
5. Switchboards, transformers, and motor control Centers shall be installed on 4 inch
concrete pads. Main switchboard’s concrete pad shall extend 40 inches in front of
switchboard.
6. Provide wiring or schematic diagrams for:
a. All motor controls and motor control centers, or refer to applicable
mechanical drawings in coordination with mechanical engineer.
b. Lighting controls.
7. All plans shall indicate the drawing scale, north arrow, the name of the project,
school or location name, and address.
8. The signature and registration number of a State of California registered electrical
engineer is required on all the electrical plans. The engineer signing the plans shall
be a principal or a project manager/director in charge of the electrical design.

School Design Guide March 2012

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

School Design Guide March 2012

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

School Design Guide March 2012

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

School Design Guide

Los Angeles Unified School District

Book Two General Criteria

Book Three Technical Criteria

Book Four Submittal Checklists

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | v Design Standards Department

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 2 Design Standards Department

1.0 PURPOSE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 PURPOSE AND PRINCIPLES

1.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 3 Design Standards Department

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 4 Design Standards Department

B. ORGANIZATION OF DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 6 Design Standards Department

1.1 PURPOSE AND PRINCIPLES

B. ORGANIZATION OF DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 7 Design Standards Department

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 8 Design Standards Department

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 9 Design Standards Department

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 10 Design Standards Department

B. SCHEMATIC DESIGN PHASE SUBMITTAL

C. DESIGN DEVELOPMENT SUBMITTAL

D. CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS: 50% SUBMITTAL

E. CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS: 100% SUBMITTAL

F. DISTRICT REVIEW AND PLAN CHECK

G. FINAL BID DOCUMENTS

I. “AS-BUILT” RECORD DRAWINGS

J. GENERAL DRAWING & SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 12 Design Standards Department

1.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Coordination and Review of the Design

2. Other Contractual Terms

3. Jurisdictional Agency Regulatory Code Compliance

B. SCHEMATIC DESIGN PHASE SUBMITTAL

1. Project Start Meeting:

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 13 Design Standards Department

3. Conceptual / Preliminary Schematic Design

2) Proposed utilization study of each particular project site;

3) Schematic plans of each floor;

4) Simplified elevations indicating the fundamentals of the architectural concept;

5) Comparative cost estimates for each of the three designs.

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 14 Design Standards Department

4. Final Schematic Design Submittal

C. DESIGN DEVELOPMENT SUBMITTAL

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 15 Design Standards Department

3. Architectural Presentation Drawings and Renderings

c. Site plan, floor plans, building elevations and sections, on boards.

D. CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS -- 50 % SUBMITTAL

1. Procedure and Submittals

E. CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS -- 100 % SUBMITTAL

1. Procedure and Submittals

1) Checklist of Offsite Work, Utilities & Easements (1 copy).

2) Final CHPS Scorecard signed by the design principal.

4) Structural Calculations, signed by the Structural Engineer (2 sets).

5) Energy Calculations (2 sets).

Los Angeles Unified School District Page | 16 Design Standards Department

6) Construction Cost Estimate on State forms 506B or 706B (3 sets).

7) Form SP3A, Area Diagrams and Tabulations (3 sets).

F. DISTRICT REVIEW AND PLAN CHECK

1. DSA Plan Check